Loading...
HomeMy WebLinkAboutRev 3 Standard Technical Spec's CombinedCORNELL UNIVERSITY NETWORK CONNECTIVITY PROGRAM (NCP) STANDARD TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS MEP ENGINEERING AND ARCHITECT BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES 64 SOUTH STREET AUBURN, NY 13021 TEL: (315) 2537301 FAX: (315) 2537306 Rev 3 TECHNOLOGY CONSULTANTS ARCHIT ECHNOLOGY 115 Metro Park Rochester, NY 14623 Tel: (585) 424&1952 Fax: (585) 424&4239 ARCHITECHNOLOGY STANDARD TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS TABLE OF CONTENTS November 2, 2012 TABLE OF CONTENTS DIVISION 02 EXISTING CONDITIONS 02 41 19 SELECTIVE STRUCTURE DEMO DIVISION 04 MASONRY 04 22 00 CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY DIVISION 06 WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES 06 10 00 ROUGH CARPENTRY DIVISION 07 THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 07 81 00 APPLIED FIREPROOFING 07 84 13 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING DIVISION 08 OPENINGS 08 11 13 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 08 14 16 FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08 31 13 ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES DIVISION 09 FINISHES 09 22 16 NONSTRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 09 29 00 GYPSUM BOARD 09 65 36 RESILIENT TILE FLOORING 09 65 37 ANTISTATIC RESILIENT TILE FLOORING 09 91 23 INTERIOR PAINTING DIVISION 10 SPECIALTIES 10 22 13 WIRE MESH PARTITIONS DIVISION 21 FIRE SUPPRESION 21 13 13 WET PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS 21 13 16 DRY PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS DIVISION 23 HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 01 00 MECHANICAL BASIC MATERIALS & METHODS 23 01 01 HVAC GENERAL PROVISIONS 23 05 93 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING 23 07 13 DUCT INSULATION ARCHITECHNOLOGY STANDARD TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS TABLE OF CONTENTS November 2, 2012 23 07 19 HVAC PIPING INSULATION 23 21 13 HYDRONIC PIPING 23 21 23 HYDRONIC PIPING 23 23 00 REFRIGERANT PUMPS 23 31 13 METAL DUCTS 23 33 16 FIRE DAMPERS 23 34 16 CENTRIFUGAL HVAC FANS 23 37 13 DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES 23 81 26 SPLITSYSTEM AIR CONDITIONERS 23 82 19 FAN COIL UNITS DIVISION 26 ELECTRICAL 26 01 00 ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS 26 01 01 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 26 05 26 GROUNDING 26 05 53 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION 26 29 10 MOTOR STARTERS & DISCONNECTS 26 51 00 LIGHTING 26 60 00 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM IMPROVEMENTS DIVISION 27 COMMUNICATIONS 27 05 00 BASIC COMMUNICATIONS REQUIERMENTS 27 05 28 COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM PATHWAYS 27 05 53 TESTING, IDENTIFICATION AND ADMINISTRATION 27 11 00 TELECOMMUNCATIONS ROOMS AND SPACES 27 13 00 BACKBONE CABLING 27 15 00 HORIZONTAL CABLING DIVISION 28 SAFTEY AND SECURITY 28 07 10 SECURITY MANAGMENT SYSTEM 28 13 00 ACCESS CONTROL Summary of Changes since Rev2 1.) Added Spec sections 07 81 00 and 21 13 16 2.) Revised Communications Cabinet requirements in Section 27 1111 3.) Added option for MIC DX fiber optic cable in section 27 13 00 BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES CORNELL NCP SELECTIVE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 02 41 19 PAGE 1 OF 6 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 SECTION 024119 SELECTIVE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division01 Gene ral Requirements Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Demolition and removal of selected portions of building or structure. 2. Salvage of existing items to be reused or recycled. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Remove: Detach items from existing construction and legally dispose of them offsite, unless indicated to be removed and salvag ed or removed and reinstalled. B. Remove and Salvage: Detach items from existing construction and deliver them to Owner ready for reuse. C. Remove and Reinstall: Detach items from existing construction, prepare them for reuse, and reinstall them where indicated. D. Existing to Remain: Existing items of construction that are not to be removed and that are not otherwise indicated to be removed, removed and salvaged, or removed and reinstalled. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Schedule of Selective Demolition Activities: Indicate the following: 1. Detailed sequence of selective demolition and removal work, with starting and ending dates for each activity. Ensure Owner's building manager's onsite operations are uninterrupted. 2. Interruption of utility services. Indicate how long utility services will be interrupted. 3. Coordination for shutoff, capping, and continuation of utility services. 4. Use of elevator and stairs. 5. Locations of proposed dust and noisecontrol te mporary partitions and means of egress. BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES CORNELL NCP SELECTIVE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 02 41 19 PAGE 2 OF 6 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 6. Coordination of Owner's continuing occupancy of portions of existing building and of Owner's partial occupancy of completed Work. 7. Means of protection for items to remain and items in path of waste removal from building. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before beginning selective demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. B. Standards: Comply with ANSI A10.6 and NFPA 241. C. Predemolition Conference: Conduct conference at Project site, Review methods and procedures related to selective demolition including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Inspect and discuss condition of construction to be selectively demolished. 2. Review requirements of work performed by other trades that rely on substrates exposed by selective demolition operations. 3. Review areas where existing construction is to remain and requires protection. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Owner will occupy portions of building immediately adjacent to selective demolition area. Conduct selective demolition so Owner's operations will not be disrupted. 1. Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Summary." B. Notify Architect of discrepancies between existing conditions and Drawings before proceeding with selective demolition. C. Hazardous Materials: It is not expected that hazardous materials will be encountered in the Work. 1. Hazardous materials will be removed by Owner before start of the Work. 2. If materials suspected of containing hazardous materials are encountered, do not disturb; immediately notify Architect and Owner. Owner will remove hazardous materials under a separate contract. D. Hazardous Materials: It is unknown whether hazardous materials will be encountered in the Work. 1. If materials suspected of containing hazardous materials are encountered, do not disturb; immediately notify Architect and Owner. Owner will remove hazardous materials under a separate contract. BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES CORNELL NCP SELECTIVE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 02 41 19 PAGE 3 OF 6 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 E. Hazardous Materials: Hazardous materials are present in construction to be selectively demolished. A report on the presence of hazardous materials is on file for review and use. Examine report to become aware of locations where hazardous materials are present. 1. Hazardous material remediation is specified elsewhere in the Contract Documents. 2. Do not disturb hazardous materials or items suspected of containing hazardous materials except under procedures specified elsewhere in the Contract Documents. F. Storage or sale of removed items or materials onsite is not permitted. G. Utility Service: Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect them against damage during selective demolition operations. 1. Maintain fireprotection facilities in service d uring selective demolition operations. PART 2 PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped. B. Survey existing conditions and correlate with requirements indicated to determine extent of selective demolition required. C. When unanticipated mechanical, electrical, or structural elements that conflict with intended function or design are encountered, investigate and measure the nature and extent of conflict. Promptly submit a written report to Architect. 3.2 UTILITY SERVICES AND MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS A. Existing Services/Systems: Maintain services/systems indicated to remain and protect them against damage during selective demolition operations. 1. Comply with requirements for existing services/systems interruptions specified in Division 01 Section "Summary." B. Service/System Requirements: Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap off indicated utility services and mechanical/electrical systems serving areas to be selectively demolished. 1. Arrange to shut off indicated utilities with utility companies. 2. If services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, before proceeding with selective demolition provide temporary BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES CORNELL NCP SELECTIVE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 02 41 19 PAGE 4 OF 6 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 services/systems that bypass area of selective demolition and that maintain continuity of services/systems to other parts of building. 3. Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit after bypassing. a. Where entire wall is to be removed, existing services/systems may be removed with removal of the wall. 3.3 PREPARATION A. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct selective demolition and debrisremoval operations to ensure minimum interfe rence with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities. B. Temporary Facilities: Provide temporary barricades and other protection products and measures to prevent injury to people and damage to adjacent buildings, adjacent finishes and utilities/facilities to remain. 1. Provide protection to ensure safe passage of people around selective demolition area and to and from occupied portions of building. 2. Provide temporary weather protection, during interval between selective demolition of existing construction on exterior surfaces and new construction, to prevent water leakage and damage to structure and interior areas. 3. Protect walls, ceilings, floors, and other existing finish work that are to remain or that are exposed during selective demolition operations. 4. Provide clean room type walkoff sticky protecti ve floor mats at entrances/exit to Telecommunications Rooms during demolition, reconstruction and finishing operations. Mats shall have at least 40 tear off adhesive sheets and be a minimum of 40” long – to help remove dirt, dust, grit, and contaminants from soles and wheels on contact. 5. Cover and protect furniture, furnishings, and equipment that have not been removed. 6. Comply with requirements for temporary enclosures, dust control, heating, and cooling specified in Division 01, Section 015000 "Temporary Facilities and Controls." C. Temporary Shoring: Provide and maintain shoring, bracing, and structural supports as required to preserve stability and prevent movement, settlement, or collapse of construction and finishes to remain, and to prevent unexpected or uncontrolled movement or collapse of construction being demolished. 1. Strengthen or add new supports when required during progress of selective demolition. 3.4 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION, GENERAL A. General: Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by new construction and as indicated. Use methods required to complete the Work within limitations of governing regulations and as follows: BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES CORNELL NCP SELECTIVE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 02 41 19 PAGE 5 OF 6 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 1. Proceed with selective demolition systematically, from higher to lower level. Complete selective demolition operations above each floor or tier before disturbing supporting members on the next lower level. 2. Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true to dimensions required. Use cutting methods least likely to damage construction to remain or adjoining construction. Use hand tools or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and chopping, to minimize disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings to remain. 3. Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to avoid marring existing finished surfaces. 4. Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of flammable materials. At concealed spaces, such as duct and pipe interiors, verify condition and contents of hidden space before starting flamecutting operations. Maintain fire watch and portable fire suppression devices during flamecutting operations. 5. Maintain adequate ventilation when using cutting torches. 6. Remove decayed, vermininfested, or otherwise da ngerous or unsuitable materials and promptly dispose of offsite. 7. Remove structural framing members and lower to ground by method suitable to avoid free fall and to prevent ground impact or dust generation. 8. Locate selective demolition equipment and remove debris and materials so as not to impose excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing. 9. Dispose of demolished items and materials promptly. B. Removed and Salvaged Items: 1. Clean salvaged items. 2. Pack or crate items after cleaning. Identify contents of containers. 3. Store items in a secure area until delivery to Owner. 4. Transport items to Owner's storage area onsite. 5. Protect items from damage during transport and storage. C. Removed and Reinstalled Items: 1. Clean and repair items to functional condition adequate for intended reuse. Paint equipment to match new equipment. 2. Pack or crate items after cleaning and repairing. Identify contents of containers. 3. Protect items from damage during transport and storage. 4. Reinstall items in locations indicated. Comply with installation requirements for new materials and equipment. Provide connections, supports, and miscellaneous materials necessary to make item functional for use indicated. D. Existing Items to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and soiling during selective demolition. When permitted by Architect, items may be removed to a suitable, protected storage location during selective demolition and cleaned and reinstalled in their original locations after selective demolition operations are complete. BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES CORNELL NCP SELECTIVE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 02 41 19 PAGE 6 OF 6 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 3.5 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION PROCEDURES FOR SPECIFIC MATERIALS A. Concrete: Demolish in sections. Cut concrete full depth at junctures with construction to remain and at regular intervals, using powerdriven saw, then remove concrete between saw cuts. B. Masonry: Demolish in small sections. Cut masonry at junctures with construction to remain, using powerdriven saw, the n remove masonry between saw cuts. C. Concrete SlabsonGrade: Sawcut perimeter of a rea to be demolished, then break up and remove. D. Resilient Floor Coverings: Remove floor coverings and adhesive according to recommendations in RFCIWP and its Addendum. 1. Remove residual adhesive and prepare substrate for new floor coverings by one of the methods recommended by RFCI. E. AirConditioning Equipment: Remove equipment wi thout releasing refrigerants. 3.6 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS A. General: Except for items or materials indicated to be reused, salvaged, reinstalled, or otherwise indicated to remain Owner's property, remove demolished materials from Project site and legally dispose of them in an EPA approved landfill. 1. Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate onsite. 2. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces and areas. 3. Remove debris from elevated portions of building by chute, hoist, or other device that will convey debris to grade level in a controlled descent. B. Burning: Do not burn demolished materials. 3.7 CLEANING Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by selective demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before selective demolition operations began. END OF SECTION 024119 BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES CORNELL NCP CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 04 22 00 – PAGE 1 of 8 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 SECTION 042200 CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 DEFINITIONS A. CMU(s): Concrete masonry unit(s). B. Reinforced Masonry: Masonry containing reinforcing steel in grouted cells. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MASONRY UNITS, GENERAL A. Defective Units: Referenced masonry unit standards may allow a certain percentage of units to contain chips, cracks, or other defects exceeding limits stated in the standard. Do not use units where such defects will be exposed in the completed Work. B. FireResistance Ratings: Where indicated, provi de units that comply with requirements for fireresistance ratings indicated as determined by testing according to ASTM E 119, by equivalent masonry thickness, or by other means, as acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 2.2 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS A. CMUs: ASTM C 90. 1. Unit Compressive Strength: Provide units with minimum average netarea compressive strength of 2150 psi (14.8 MPa). 2. Density Classification: Normal weight. 3. Size (Width): Manufactured to dimensions 3/8 inch less than nominal dimensions. 2.3 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or II, except Type III may be used for coldweather construction. Provide natural color o r white cement as required to produce mortar color indicated. B. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S. C. Portland CementLime Mix: Packaged blend of por tland cement and hydrated lime containing no other ingredients. D. Aggregate for Mortar: ASTM C 144. 1. For mortar that is exposed to view, use washed aggregate consisting of natural sand or crushed stone. BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES CORNELL NCP CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 04 22 00 – PAGE 2 of 8 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 2. For joints less than 1/4 inch (6 mm) thick, use aggregate graded with 100 percent passing the No. 16 (1.18mm) sieve. 3. WhiteMortar Aggregates: Natural white sand o r crushed white stone. 4. ColoredMortar Aggregates: Natural sand or cr ushed stone of color necessary to produce required mortar color. E. Aggregate for Grout: ASTM C 404. F. Water: Potable. 2.4 REINFORCEMENT A. Uncoated Steel Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M or ASTM A 996/A 996M, Grade 60 (Grade 420). B. Masonry Joint Reinforcement, General: ASTM A 951/A 951M. 1. Interior Walls: Hotdip galvanized, carbon ste el. 2. Exterior Walls: Hotdip galvanized steel. 3. Wire Size for Side Rods: 0.148inch (3.77mm) d iameter. 4. Wire Size for Cross Rods: 0.148inch (3.77mm) diameter. 5. Spacing of Cross Rods, Tabs, and Cross Ties: Not more than 16 inches (407 mm) o.c. 6. Provide in lengths of not less than 10 feet (3 m). C. Masonry Joint Reinforcement for SingleWythe Mas onry: Either ladder or truss type with single pair of side rods. 2.5 TIES AND ANCHORS A. Materials: Provide ties and anchors specified in this article that are made from materials that comply with the following unless otherwise indicated. 1. HotDip Galvanized, CarbonSteel Wire: ASTM A 8 2/A 82M; with ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B2 coating. 2. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel, G60 (Z180) zinc coating. 3. Steel Sheet, Galvanized after Fabrication: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel, with ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B coating. 4. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. B. Partition Top anchors: 0.105inch (2.66mm) t hick metal plate with 3/8inch (9.5mm) diameter metal rod 6 inches (152 mm) long welded to plate and with closedend plastic tube fitted over rod that a llows rod to move in and out of tube. Fabricate from steel, hotdip galvanized after fabrication]. 1. Corrosion Protection: Hotdip galvanized to com ply with ASTM A 153/A 153M. 2.6 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES A. General: Do not use admixtures, including pigments, airentraining agents, accelerators, retarders, waterrepellent agents, an tifreeze compounds, or other admixtures unless otherwise indicated. BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES CORNELL NCP CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 04 22 00 – PAGE 3 of 8 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 1. Do not use calcium chloride in mortar or grout. 2. Use portland cementlime mortar unless otherwise indicated. 3. For exterior masonry, use portland cementlime m ortar. 4. For reinforced masonry, use portland cementlime mortar. B. Preblended, Dry Mortar Mix: Furnish dry mortar ingredients in form of a preblended mix. Measure quantities by weight to ensure accurate proportions, and thoroughly blend ingredients before delivering to Project site. C. Mortar for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 270, Property Specification. Provide the following types of mortar for applications stated unless another type is indicated. 1. For reinforced masonry, use Type S . 2. For interior nonloadbearing partitions, Type O may be used instead of Type N. D. Grout for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 476. 1. Use grout of type indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, of type (fine or coarse) that will comply with Table 1.15.1 in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 for dimensions of grout spaces and pour height. 2. Proportion grout in accordance with ASTM C 476, Table 1. 3. Provide grout with a slump of 8 to 11 inches (203 to 279 mm) as measured according to ASTM C 143/C 143M. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. 1. For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of work. 2. Verify that foundations are within tolerances specified. 3. Verify that reinforcing dowels are properly placed. B. Before installation, examine roughin and built in construction for piping systems to verify actual locations of piping connections. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Build chases and recesses to accommodate items specified in this and other Sections. B. Leave openings for equipment to be installed before completing masonry. After installing equipment, complete masonry to match the construction immediately adjacent to opening. BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES CORNELL NCP CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 04 22 00 – PAGE 4 of 8 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 C. Use fullsize units without cutting if possible. If cutting is required to provide a continuous pattern or to fit adjoining construction, cut units with motordriven saws; provide clean, sharp, unchipped edges. Allow units to dry before laying unless wetting of units is specified. Install cut units with cut surfaces and, where possible, cut edges concealed. 3.3 TOLERANCES A. Dimensions and Locations of Elements: 1. For dimensions in cross section or elevation do not vary by more than plus 1/2 inch (12 mm) or minus 1/4 inch (6 mm). 2. For location of elements in plan do not vary from that indicated by more than plus or minus 1/2 inch (12 mm). 3. For location of elements in elevation do not vary from that indicated by more than plus or minus 1/4 inch (6 mm) in a story height or 1/2 inch (12 mm) total. B. Lines and Levels: 1. For bed joints and top surfaces of bearing walls do not vary from level by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet (6 mm in 3 m), or 1/2 inch (12 mm) maximum. 2. For conspicuous horizontal lines, such as lintels, sills, parapets, and reveals, do not vary from level by more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet (3 mm in 3 m), 1/4 inch in 20 feet (6 mm in 6 m), or 1/2 inch (12 mm) maximum. 3. For vertical lines and surfaces do not vary from plumb by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet (6 mm in 3 m), 3/8 inch in 20 feet (9 mm in 6 m), or 1/2 inch (12 mm) maximum. 4. For conspicuous vertical lines, such as external corners, door jambs, reveals, and expansion and control joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet (3 mm in 3 m), 1/4 inch in 20 feet (6 mm in 6 m), or 1/2 inch (12 mm) maximum. 5. For lines and surfaces do not vary from straight by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet (6 mm in 3 m), 3/8 inch in 20 feet (9 mm in 6 m), or 1/2 inch (12 mm) maximum. 6. For vertical alignment of exposed head joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet (6 mm in 3 m), or 1/2 inch (12 mm) maximum. C. Joints: 1. For bed joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1/8 inch (3 mm), with a maximum thickness limited to 1/2 inch (12 mm). 2. For exposed bed joints, do not vary from bedjoi nt thickness of adjacent courses by more than 1/8 inch (3 mm). 3. For head and collar joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus 3/8 inch (9 mm) or minus 1/4 inch (6 mm). 4. For exposed head joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1/8 inch (3 mm). BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES CORNELL NCP CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 04 22 00 – PAGE 5 of 8 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 3.4 LAYING MASONRY WALLS A. Lay out walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns with uniform joint thicknesses and for accurate location of openings, movement type joints, returns, and offsets. Avoid using lessthanhalfsize units, particularly at corners, jambs, and, where possible, at other locations. B. Bond Pattern for Exposed Masonry: Unless otherwise indicated, lay exposed masonry in running bond ; do not use units with less than nominal 4inch (100mm) horizontal face dimensions at corners or j ambs. C. Lay concealed masonry with all units in a wythe in running bond . Bond and interlock each course of each wythe at corners. Do not use units with less than nominal 4inch (100mm) horizontal face dimens ions at corners or jambs. D. Stopping and Resuming Work: Stop work by racking back units in each course from those in course below; do not tooth. When resuming work, clean masonry surfaces that are to receive mortar before laying fresh masonry. E. Builtin Work: As construction progresses, buil d in items specified in this and other Sections. Fill in solidly with masonry around builtin items. F. Fill space between steel frames and masonry solidly with mortar unless otherwise indicated. G. Where builtin items are to be embedded in cores of hollow masonry units, place a layer of metal lath, wire mesh, or plastic mesh in the joint below and rod mortar or grout into core. H. Fill cores in hollow CMUs with grout 24 inches (600 mm) under bearing plates, beams, lintels, posts, and similar items unless otherwise indicated. I. Build nonloadbearing interior partitions full height of story to underside of solid floor or roof structure above unless otherwise indicated. 1. Install compressible filler in joint between top of partition and underside of structure above. 2. Fasten partition top anchors to structure above and build into top of partition. Grout cells of CMUs solidly around plastic tubes of anchors and push tubes down into grout to provide 1/2inch (13 mm) clearance between end of anchor rod and end of tube. Space anchors 48 inches o.c. unless otherwise indicated. 3. Wedge nonloadbearing partitions against struct ure above with small pieces of tile, slate, or metal. Fill joint with mortar after deadload deflection of structure above approaches final position. 4. At firerated partitions, treat joint between to p of partition and underside of structure above to comply with Division 07 Section "FireResistive Joint Systems." BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES CORNELL NCP CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 04 22 00 – PAGE 6 of 8 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 3.5 MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTING A. Lay hollow CMUs as follows: 1. With face shells fully bedded in mortar and with head joints of depth equal to bed joints. 2. With webs fully bedded in mortar in all courses of piers, columns, and pilasters. 3. With webs fully bedded in mortar in grouted masonry, including starting course on footings. 4. With entire units, including areas under cells, fully bedded in mortar at starting course on footings where cells are not grouted. B. Lay solid masonry units with completely filled bed and head joints; butter ends with sufficient mortar to fill head joints and shove into place. Do not deeply furrow bed joints or slush head joints. C. Tool exposed joints slightly concave when thumbprint hard, using a jointer larger than joint thickness unless otherwise indicated. D. Cut joints flush for masonry walls to receive plaster or other directapplied finishes (other than paint) unless otherwise indicated. 3.6 MASONRY JOINT REINFORCEMENT A. General: Install entire length of longitudinal side rods in mortar with a minimum cover of 5/8 inch (16 mm) on exterior side of walls, 1/2 inch (13 mm) elsewhere. Lap reinforcement a minimum of 6 inches (150 mm). 1. Space reinforcement not more than 16 inches (406 mm) o.c. 2. Space reinforcement not more than 8 inches (203 mm) o.c. in foundation walls and parapet walls. 3. Provide reinforcement not more than 8 inches (203 mm) above and below wall openings and extending 12 inches (305 mm) beyond openings[ in addition to continuous reinforcement]. B. Interrupt joint reinforcement at control and expansion joints unless otherwise indicated. C. Provide continuity at wall intersections by using prefabricated Tshaped units. D. Provide continuity at corners by using prefabricated Lshaped units. E. Cut and bend reinforcing units as directed by manufacturer for continuity at corners, returns, offsets, column fireproofing, pipe enclosures, and other special conditions. 3.7 LINTELS A. Provide concrete lintels where shown and where openings of more than 12 inches (305 mm) for bricksize units and 24 inches (610 mm) for blocksize units are shown without structural steel or other supporting lintels. BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES CORNELL NCP CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 04 22 00 – PAGE 7 of 8 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 B. Provide minimum bearing of 8 inches (200 mm) at each jamb unless otherwise indicated. 3.8 REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY INSTALLATION A. Temporary Formwork and Shores: Construct formwork and shores as needed to support reinforced masonry elements during construction. 1. Construct formwork to provide shape, line, and dimensions of completed masonry as indicated. Make forms sufficiently tight to prevent leakage of mortar and grout. Brace, tie, and support forms to maintain position and shape during construction and curing of reinforced masonry. 2. Do not remove forms and shores until reinforced masonry members have hardened sufficiently to carry their own weight and other loads that may be placed on them during construction. B. Placing Reinforcement: Comply with requirements in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602. C. Grouting: Do not place grout until entire height of masonry to be grouted has attained enough strength to resist grout pressure. 1. Comply with requirements in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 for cleanouts and for grout placement, including minimum grout space and maximum pour height. 2. Limit height of vertical grout pours to not more than 60 inches (1520 mm). 3.9 REPAIRING, POINTING, AND CLEANING A. Remove and replace masonry units that are loose, chipped, broken, stained, or otherwise damaged or that do not match adjoining units. Install new units to match adjoining units; install in fresh mortar, pointed to eliminate evidence of replacement. B. Pointing: During the tooling of joints, enlarge voids and holes, except weep holes, and completely fill with mortar. Point up joints, including corners, openings, and adjacent construction, to provide a neat, uniform appearance. Prepare joints for sealant application, where indicated. C. InProgress Cleaning: Clean unit masonry as wor k progresses by dry brushing to remove mortar fins and smears before tooling joints. D. Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean exposed masonry as follows: 1. Remove large mortar particles by hand with wooden paddles and nonmetallic scrape hoes or chisels. 2. Test cleaning methods on sample wall panel; leave onehalf of panel uncleaned for comparison purposes. Obtain Architect's approval of sample cleaning before proceeding with cleaning of masonry. 3. Protect adjacent stone and nonmasonry surfaces from contact with cleaner by covering them with liquid strippable masking agent or polyethylene film and waterproof masking tape. BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES CORNELL NCP CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 04 22 00 – PAGE 8 of 8 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 4. Wet wall surfaces with water before applying cleaners; remove cleaners promptly by rinsing surfaces thoroughly with clear water. 5. Clean concrete masonry by cleaning method indicated in NCMA TEK 8 2A applicable to type of stain on exposed surfaces. END OF SECTION 422200 BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES CORNELL – NCP ROUGH CARPENTRY STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 06 10 00 PAGE 1 OF 6 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 SECTION 061000 ROUGH CARPENTRY PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division01 General Re quirements Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Wood blocking and nailers. 2. Wood furring and grounds. 3. Plywood backboards and backing panels. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Exposed Framing: Framing not concealed by other construction. B. Dimension Lumber: Lumber of 2 inches nominal or greater but less than 5 inches nominal in least dimension. C. Lumber grading agencies, and the abbreviations used to reference them, include the following: 1. NELMA: Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers' Association. 2. NLGA: National Lumber Grades Authority. 3. RIS: Redwood Inspection Service. 4. SPIB: The Southern Pine Inspection Bureau. 5. WCLIB: West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau. 6. WWPA: Western Wood Products Association. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of process and factoryfabricated product. Indicate component materials and dimensions and include construction and application details. 1. Provide submittal product data and for woodpres ervative treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Indicate type of preservative used and net amount of preservative retained. BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES CORNELL – NCP ROUGH CARPENTRY STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 06 10 00 PAGE 2 OF 6 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 B. Material Certificates: For dimension lumber specified to comply with minimum allowable unit stresses. Indicate species and grade selected for each use and design values approved by the ALSC Board of Review.. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations for Engineered Wood Products: Obtain each type of engineered wood product through one source from a single manufacturer. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Stack lumber flat with spacers between each bundle to provide air circulation. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERAL A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of grading agencies indicated. If no grading agency is indicated, provide lumber that complies with the applicable rules of any ruleswriting agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review. Provide lumber graded by an agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review to inspect and grade lumber under the rules indicated. 1. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency. 2. Where nominal sizes are indicated, provide actual sizes required by DOC PS 20 for moisture content specified. Where actual sizes are indicated, they are minimum dressed sizes for dry lumber. 3. Provide dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated. B. Engineered Wood Products: Provide engineered wood products acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and for which current model code research or evaluation reports exist that show compliance with building code in effect for Project. 1. Allowable Design Stresses: Provide engineered wood products with allowable design stresses, as published by manufacturer, that meet or exceed those indicated. Manufacturer's published values shall be determined from empirical data or by rational engineering analysis and demonstrated by comprehensive testing performed by a qualified independent testing agency. 2.2 WOODPRESERVATIVETREATED LUMBER A. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA C2, except that lumber that is not in contact with the ground and is continuously protected from liquid water may be treated according to AWPA C31 with inorganic boron (SBX). BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES CORNELL – NCP ROUGH CARPENTRY STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 06 10 00 PAGE 3 OF 6 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 1. Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and containing no arsenic or chromium. B. Kilndry lumber after treatment to a maximum moi sture content of 19 percent. Do not use material that is warped or does not comply with requirements for untreated material. C. Mark lumber with treatment quality mark of an inspection agency approved by the ALSC Board of Review. D. Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings, and the following: 1. Wood cants, nailers, curbs, equipment support bases, blocking, stripping, and similar members in connection with roofing, flashing, vapor barriers, and waterproofing. 2. Wood sills, sleepers, blocking, furring, stripping, and similar concealed members in contact with masonry or concrete. 2.3 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER A. General: Provide miscellaneous lumber indicated and lumber for support or attachment of other construction, including the following: 1. Blocking. 2. Nailers. 3. Cants. 4. Furring. 5. Grounds. B. For items of dimension lumber size, provide Construction or No. 2 grade lumber with 15 percent maximum moisture content of any species. C. For exposed boards, provide lumber with 15 percent maximum moisture content and[ any of] the following species and grades: 1. Eastern white pine, Idaho white, lodgepole, ponderosa, or sugar pine; Standard or No. 3 Common grade; NELMA, NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA. 2. Mixed southern pine, No. 2 grade; SPIB. D. For blocking not used for attachment of other construction, Utility, Stud, or No. 3 grade lumber of any species may be used provided that it is cut and selected to eliminate defects that will interfere with its attachment and purpose. E. For blocking and nailers used for attachment of other construction, select and cut lumber to eliminate knots and other defects that will interfere with attachment of other work. F. For furring strips for installing plywood or hardboard paneling, select boards with no knots capable of producing bentover nails and d amage to paneling. BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES CORNELL – NCP ROUGH CARPENTRY STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 06 10 00 PAGE 4 OF 6 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 2.4 PLYWOOD BACKING PANELS A. Telephone and Electrical Equipment Backing Panels: DOC PS 1, Exterior, ACX grade, in thickness indicated or, if not indicated, not less than 3/4inch nominal thickness. Paint all surfaces and edges of plywood with 2 coats fire retardant paint, Benjamin Moore, super spec, HP latex flat, fire retardant paint or approved equal. Color light gray. 2.5 FASTENERS A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in this Article for material and manufacture. 1. Where rough carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, pressure preservative treated, or in area of high relative humidity, provide fasteners with hotdip zinc coating complying with ASTM A 153/A 15 3M. 2. For Plywood Backboards Panels for Telecommunications Equipment Rooms, counter sink wood to provide recessed anchor heads. Also refer to Architectural Partition Detail Drawing, typical. B. Nails, Brads, and Staples: ASTM F 1667. C. PowerDriven Fasteners: NES NER272. D. Wood Screws: ASME B18.6.1. E. Lag Bolts: ASME B18.2.1 F. Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A; with ASTM A 563 hex nuts and, where indicated, flat washers. G. Expansion Anchors: Anchor bolt and sleeve assembly of material indicated below with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 6 times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry assemblies and equal to 4 times the load imposed when installed in concrete as determined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency. 1. Material: Carbonsteel components, zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Set rough carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and fitted. Fit rough carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as needed for accurate fit. Locate furring, nailers, blocking, grounds, and similar supports to comply with requirements for attaching other construction. BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES CORNELL – NCP ROUGH CARPENTRY STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 06 10 00 PAGE 5 OF 6 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 B. Framing Standard: Comply with AF&PA's "Details for Conventional Wood Frame Construction," unless otherwise indicated. C. Provide blocking and framing as indicated and as required to support facing materials, fixtures, specialty items, and trim. 1. Provide metal clips for fastening gypsum board or lath at corners and intersections where framing or blocking does not provide a surface for fastening edges of panels. Space clips not more than 16 inches o.c. D. Provide fire blocking in furred spaces, stud spaces, and other concealed cavities. E. Sort and select lumber so that natural characteristics will not interfere with installation or with fastening other materials to lumber. Do not use materials with defects that interfere with function of member or pieces that are too small to use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement. F. Comply with AWPA M4 for applying field treatment to cut surfaces of preservativetreated lumber. 1. Use inorganic boron for items that are continuously protected from liquid water. 2. Use copper naphthenate for items not continuously protected from liquid water. G. Securely attach rough carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated, complying with the following: 1. NES NER272 for powerdriven fasteners (NOTE: Do not use powder activated fastening systems on campus in occupied buildings) 2. Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in ICC's International Building Code. H. Use common wire nails, unless otherwise indicated. Select fasteners of size that will not fully penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Make tight connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting wood; do not countersink nail heads, unless otherwise indicated. I. For exposed work, arrange fasteners in straight rows parallel with edges of members, with fasteners evenly spaced, and with adjacent rows staggered. 3.2 WOOD GROUND, SLEEPER, BLOCKING, AND NAILER INSTALLATION A. Install where indicated and where required for attaching other work. Form to shapes indicated and cut as required for true line and level of attached work. Coordinate locations with other work involved. B. Attach items to substrates to support applied loading. Recess bolts and nuts flush with surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES CORNELL – NCP ROUGH CARPENTRY STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 06 10 00 PAGE 6 OF 6 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 C. Where woodpreservativetreated lumber is instal led adjacent to metal decking, install continuous flexible flashing separator between wood and metal decking. D. Provide permanent grounds of dressed, pressurep reservativetreated, key beveled lumber not less than 11/2 inches wide and of thickness required to bring face of ground to exact thickness of finish material. Remove temporary grounds when no longer required. END OF SECTION 061000 BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES CORNELL – NCP APPLIED FIREPROOFING STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 07 81 00 – PAGE 1 of 8 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 SECTION 078100 APPLIED FIREPROOFING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 DEFINITIONS A. SFRM: Sprayed fire&resistive material. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Product Certificates: For each type of SFRM, signed by product manufacturer. C. Qualification Data: For Installer, manufacturer and testing agency. D. Compatibility and Adhesion Test Reports: From SFRM manufacturer indicating the following: 1. Materials have been tested for bond with substrates. 2. Materials have been verified by SFRM manufacturer to be compatible with existing SFRM, substrate primers and coatings. 3. Interpretation of test results and written recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed for adhesion. E. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, for proposed SFRM. F. Research/Evaluation Reports: For SFRM. G. Field quality&control test reports. H. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual certified, licensed, or otherwise qualified by SFRM manufacturer as experienced and with sufficient trained staff to install manufacturer's products according to specified requirements. A manufacturer's willingness to sell its SFRM to Contractor or to an installer engaged by Contractor does not in itself confer qualification on the buyer. B. Source Limitations: Obtain SFRM through one source from a single manufacturer. C. SFRM Testing: By a qualified testing and inspecting agency engaged by Contractor or manufacturer to test for compliance with specified requirements for performance and test methods. 1. SFRMs are randomly selected for testing from bags bearing the applicable classification marking of UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES CORNELL – NCP APPLIED FIREPROOFING STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 07 81 00 – PAGE 2 of 8 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 2. Testing is performed on specimens of SFRMs that comply with laboratory testing requirements specified in Part 2 and are otherwise identical to installed fire&resistive materials, including application of accelerant, sealers, topcoats, tamping, troweling, rolling, and water overspray, if any of these are used in final application. 3. Testing is performed on specimens whose application the independent testing and inspecting agency witnessed during preparation and conditioning. Include in test reports a full description of preparation and conditioning of laboratory test specimens. D. Compatibility and Adhesion Testing: Engage a qualified testing and inspecting agency to test for compliance with requirements for specified performance and test methods. 1. Test for bond per ASTM E 736 and requirements in UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" for coating materials. Provide bond strength indicated in referenced fire&resistance design, but not less than minimum specified in Part 2. 2. Verify that manufacturer, through its own laboratory testing or field experience, has not found primers or coatings to be incompatible with SFRM. E. Fire&Test&Response Characteristics: Provide SFRM with the fire&test& response characteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated below by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify bags containing SFRM with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency. 1. Fire&Resistance Ratings: Indicated by design designations from UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" or from the listings of another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for SFRM serving as direct&applied protection tested per ASTM E 119. 2. Surface&Burning Characteristics: ASTM E 84. F. Provide products containing no detectable asbestos as determined according to the method specified in 40 CFR 763, Subpart E, Appendix E, Section 1, "Polarized Light Microscopy." 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver products to Project site in original, unopened packages with intact and legible manufacturers' labels identifying product and manufacturer, date of manufacture, shelf life if applicable, and fire&resistance ratings applicable to Project. B. Use materials with limited shelf life within period indicated. Remove from Project site and discard materials whose shelf life has expired. C. Store materials inside, under cover, and aboveground; keep dry until ready for use. Remove from Project site and discard wet or deteriorated materials. BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES CORNELL – NCP APPLIED FIREPROOFING STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 07 81 00 – PAGE 3 of 8 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 1.5 COORDINATION A. Sequence and coordinate application of SFRM with other related work specified in other Sections to comply with the following requirements: 1. Provide temporary enclosure as required to confine spraying operations and protect the environment. 2. Avoid unnecessary exposure of fire&resistive material to abrasion and other damage likely to occur during construction operations subsequent to its application. 3. Do not begin applying fire&resistive material until clips, hangers, supports, sleeves, and other items penetrating fire protection are in place. 1.6 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form, signed by Contractor and by Installer, in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace SFRMs that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Cracking, flaking, spalling, or eroding in excess of specified requirements; peeling; or delaminating of SFRM from substrates. b. Not covered under the warranty are failures due to damage by occupants and Owner's maintenance personnel, exposure to environmental conditions other than those investigated and approved during fire&response testing, and other causes not reasonably foreseeable under conditions of normal use. 2. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 CONCEALED SFRM A. Material Composition: Manufacturer's standard product, or either of the following: 1. Concealed Cementitious SFRM: Factory&mixed, dry formulation of gypsum or portland cement binders, additives, and lightweight mineral or synthetic aggregates mixed with water at Project site to form a slurry or mortar for conveyance and application. 2. Concealed Sprayed&Fiber Fire&Resistive Material: Factory&mixed, dry formulation of inorganic binders, mineral fibers, fillers, and additives conveyed in a dry state by pneumatic equipment and mixed with water at spray nozzle to form a damp, as&applied product. B. Physical Properties: Minimum values, unless otherwise indicated, or higher values required to attain designated fire&resistance ratings, measured per standard test methods referenced with each property as follows: 1. Dry Density: 15 lb/cu. ft. (240 kg/cu. m) for average and individual densities, or greater if required to attain fire&resistance ratings indicated, per ASTM E 605 or AWCI Technical Manual 12&A, Section 5.4.5, "Displacement Method." BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES CORNELL – NCP APPLIED FIREPROOFING STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 07 81 00 – PAGE 4 of 8 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 2. Thickness: Minimum average thickness required for fire&resistance design indicated according to the following criteria, but not less than 0.375 inch (9 mm), per ASTM E 605: a. Where the referenced fire&resistance design lists a thickness of 1 inch (25 mm) or more, the minimum allowable individual thickness of SFRM is the design thickness minus 0.25 inch (6 mm). b. Where the referenced fire&resistance design lists a thickness of less than 1 inch (25 mm) but more than 0.375 inch (9 mm), the minimum allowable individual thickness of SFRM is the greater of 0.375 inch (9 mm) or 75 percent of the design thickness. c. No reduction in average thickness is permitted for those fire& resistance designs whose fire&resistance ratings were established at densities of less than 15 lb/cu. ft. (240 kg/cu. m). 3. Bond Strength: 150 lbf/sq. ft. (7.2 kPa) minimum per ASTM E 736 based on laboratory testing of 0.75&inch (19&mm) minimum thickness of SFRM. 4. Compressive Strength: 5.21 lbf/sq. in. (35.9 kPa) minimum per ASTM E 761. Minimum thickness of SFRM tested shall be 0.75 inch (19 mm) and minimum dry density shall be as specified but not less than 15 lb/cu. ft. (240 kg/cu. m). 5. Corrosion Resistance: No evidence of corrosion per ASTM E 937. 6. Deflection: No cracking, spalling, or delamination per ASTM E 759. 7. Effect of Impact on Bonding: No cracking, spalling, or delamination per ASTM E 760. 8. Air Erosion: Maximum weight loss of 0.025 g/sq. ft. (0.270 g/sq. m) in 24 hours per ASTM E 859. For laboratory tests, minimum thickness of SFRM is 0.75 inch (19 mm), maximum dry density is 15 lb/cu. ft. (240 kg/cu. m), test specimens are not prepurged by mechanically induced air velocities, and tests are terminated after 24 hours. 9. Fire&Test&Response Characteristics: Provide SFRM with the following surface&burning characteristics as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84 by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction: a. Flame&Spread Index: 10 or less. b. Smoke&Developed Index: 0. 10. Fungal Resistance: No observed growth on specimens per ASTM G 21. C. Compatability: Provide a product tested by manufacturer for compatability with exsting SFRM. 2.2 AUXILIARY FIRE&RESISTIVE MATERIALS A. General: Provide auxiliary fire&resistive materials that are compatible with SFRM and substrates and are approved by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for use in fire&resistance designs indicated. BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES CORNELL – NCP APPLIED FIREPROOFING STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 07 81 00 – PAGE 5 of 8 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 B. Substrate Primers: For use on each substrate and with each sprayed fire& resistive product, provide primer that complies with one or more of the following requirements: 1. Primer's bond strength complies with requirements specified in UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" for coating materials based on a series of bond tests per ASTM E 736. 2. Primer is identical to those used in assemblies tested for fire&test& response characteristics of SFRM per ASTM E 119 by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. C. Adhesive for Bonding Fire&Resistive Material: Product approved by manufacturer of SFRM. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for substrates and other conditions affecting performance of work. A substrate is in satisfactory condition if it complies with the following: 1. Substrates comply with requirements in the Section where the substrate and related materials and construction are specified. 2. Substrates are free of dirt, oil, grease, release agents, rolling compounds, mill scale, loose scale, incompatible primers, incompatible paints, incompatible encapsulants, or other foreign substances capable of impairing bond of fire&resistive materials with substrates under conditions of normal use or fire exposure. 3. Objects penetrating fire&resistive material, including clips, hangers, support sleeves, and similar items, are securely attached to substrates. 4. Substrates are not obstructed by ducts, piping, equipment, and other suspended construction that will interfere with applying fire&resistive material. B. Verify that roof construction, installation of roof&top HVAC equipment, and other related work are completed. C. Conduct tests according to fire&resistive material manufacturer's written recommendations to verify that substrates are free of substances capable of interfering with bond. D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Cover other work subject to damage from fallout or overspray of fire& resistive materials during application. BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES CORNELL – NCP APPLIED FIREPROOFING STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 07 81 00 – PAGE 6 of 8 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 B. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of fire&resistive material, including dirt, oil, grease, release agents, rolling compounds, mill scale, loose scale, and incompatible primers, paints, and encapsulants. C. Prime substrates where recommended in writing by SFRM manufacturer unless compatible shop primer has been applied and is in satisfactory condition to receive SFRM. D. For exposed applications, repair substrates to remove surface imperfections that could affect uniformity of texture and thickness in finished surface of SFRM. Remove minor projections and fill voids that would telegraph through fire&resistive products after application. 3.3 APPLICATION, GENERAL A. Comply with fire&resistive material manufacturer's written instructions for mixing materials, application procedures, and types of equipment used to mix, convey, and spray on fire&resistive material, as applicable to particular conditions of installation and as required to achieve fire&resistance ratings indicated. B. Apply SFRM that is identical to products tested as specified in Part 1 "Quality Assurance" Article and substantiated by test reports, with respect to rate of application, accelerator use, sealers, topcoats, tamping, troweling, water overspray, or other materials and procedures affecting test results. C. Coat substrates with bonding adhesive before applying fire&resistive material where required to achieve fire&resistance rating or as recommended in writing by SFRM manufacturer for material and application indicated. D. Extend fire&resistive material in full thickness over entire area of each substrate to be protected. Unless otherwise recommended in writing by SFRM manufacturer, install body of fire&resistive covering in a single course. E. Spray apply fire&resistive materials to maximum extent possible. Following the spraying operation in each area, complete the coverage by trowel application or other placement method recommended in writing by SFRM manufacturer. 3.4 APPLICATION, CONCEALED SFRM A. Apply concealed SFRM in thicknesses and densities not less than those required to achieve fire&resistance ratings designated for each condition, but apply in greater thicknesses and densities if specified in Part 2 "Concealed SFRM" Article. B. Apply water overspray to concealed sprayed&fiber fire&resistive material as required to obtain designated fire&resistance rating[ and where indicated]. BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES CORNELL – NCP APPLIED FIREPROOFING STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 07 81 00 – PAGE 7 of 8 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 C. Cure concealed SFRM according to product manufacturer's written recommendations. D. Apply sealer to concealed SFRM[ where indicated]. E. Apply topcoat to concealed SFRM[ where indicated]. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports. 1. Testing and inspecting agency will interpret tests and state in each report whether tested work complies with or deviates from requirements. B. Tests and Inspections: Testing and inspecting of completed applications of SFRM shall take place in successive stages, in areas of extent and using methods as follows. Do not proceed with application of SFRM for the next area until test results for previously completed applications of SFRM show compliance with requirements. Tested values must equal or exceed values indicated and required for approved fire&resistance design. 1. Thickness for Floor, Roof, and Wall Assemblies: For each 1000&sq. ft. (93&sq. m) area, or partial area, on each floor, from the average of 4 measurements from a 144&sq. in. (0.093&sq. m) sample area, with sample width of not less than 6 inches (152 mm) per ASTM E 605. 2. Thickness for Structural Frame Members: From a sample of 25 percent of structural members per floor, taking 9 measurements at a single cross section for structural frame beams or girders, 7 measurements of a single cross section for joists and trusses, and 12 measurements of a single cross section for columns per ASTM E 605. 3. Density for Floors, Roofs, Walls, and Structural Frame Members: At frequency and from sample size indicated for determining thickness of each type of construction and structural framing member, per ASTM E 605 or AWCI Technical Manual 12&A, Section 5.4.5, "Displacement Method." 4. Bond Strength for Floors, Roofs, Walls, and Structural Framing Members: For each 10,000&sq. ft. (929 sq. m) area, or partial area, on each floor, cohesion and adhesion from one sample of size indicated for determining thickness of each type of construction and structural framing member, per ASTM E 736. a. Field test SFRM that is applied to flanges of wide&flange, structural&steel members on surfaces matching those that will exist for remainder of steel receiving fire&resistive material. b. If surfaces of structural steel receiving SFRM are primed or otherwise painted for coating materials, perform series of bond tests specified in UL's "Fire Resistance Directory." Provide bond strength indicated in referenced UL fire&resistance criteria, but not less than 150 lbf/sq. ft. (7.2 kPa) minimum per ASTM E 736. BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES CORNELL – NCP APPLIED FIREPROOFING STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 07 81 00 – PAGE 8 of 8 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 5. If testing finds applications of SFRM are not in compliance with requirements, testing and inspecting agency will perform additional random testing to determine extent of noncompliance. C. Remove and replace applications of SFRM that do not pass tests and inspections for cohesion and adhesion, for density, or for both and retest as specified above. D. Apply additional SFRM, per manufacturer's written instructions, where test results indicate that thickness does not comply with specified requirements, and retest as specified above. 3.6 CLEANING, PROTECTING, AND REPAIR A. Cleaning: Immediately after completing spraying operations in each containable area of Project, remove material overspray and fallout from surfaces of other construction and clean exposed surfaces to remove evidence of soiling. B. Protect SFRM, according to advice of product manufacturer and Installer, from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so fire protection will be without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. C. Coordinate application of SFRM with other construction to minimize need to cut or remove fire protection. As installation of other construction proceeds, inspect SFRM and patch any damaged or removed areas. D. Repair or replace work that has not successfully protected steel. END OF SECTION 078100 BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES CORNELL NCP PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 07 84 13 PAGE 1 OF 6 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 SECTION 078413 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division01 General Re quirements Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Penetrations in fireresistancerated walls and floors. 2. Penetrations in horizontal assemblies. 3. Penetrations in smoke barriers. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each specific product proposed for use. B. Division 27 Prime Contractor shall also refer to Section 270500 Basic Electrical/Communication Requirements, for additional requirements as they relate to Telecommunications specific means, methods and acceptable design make products. C. Product Schedule: For each penetration firestopping system. Include location and design designation of qualified testing and inspecting agency. 1. Where Project conditions require modification to a qualified testing and inspecting agency's illustration for a particular penetration firestopping condition, submit illustration, with modifications marked, approved by penetration firestopping manufacturer's fireprotection engineer as an engineering judgment or equivalent fireresistance rated assembly. D. Installer Certificates: From Installer indicating penetration firestopping has been installed in compliance with requirements and manufacturer's written recommendations. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: A firm that has been approved by FM Global according to FM Global 4991, "Approval of Firestop Contractors," or been evaluated by UL and found to comply with its "Qualified Firestop Contractor Program Requirements." BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES CORNELL NCP PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 07 84 13 PAGE 2 OF 6 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 B. Installer Qualifications: A firm experienced in installing penetration firestopping similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful performance. Qualifications include having the necessary experience, staff, and training to install manufacturer's products per specified requirements. Manufacturer's willingness to sell its penetration firestopping products to Contractor or to Installer engaged by Contractor does not in itself confer qualification on buyer. 1) UL in its "Fire Resistance Directory." 2) Intertek ETL SEMKO in its "Directory of Listed Building Products." 3) FM Global in its "Building Materials Approval Guide." 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install penetration firestopping when ambient or substrate temperatures are outside limits permitted by penetration firestopping manufacturers or when substrates are wet because of rain, frost, condensation, or other causes. B. Install and cure penetration firestopping per manufacturer's written instructions using natural means of ventilations or, where this is inadequate, forcedair circulation. 1.6 COORDINATION A. Coordinate construction of openings and penetrating items to ensure that penetration firestopping is installed according to specified requirements. B. Coordinate sizing of sleeves, openings, coredri lled holes, or cut openings to accommodate penetration firestopping. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Hilti Corporation. 2. RectorSeal Corporation (BioFireshield) 3. Specified Technologies Inc. 4. 3M Fire Protection Products. 5. USG Corporation. B. Provide the products of only one manufacturer throughout the project. BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES CORNELL NCP PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 07 84 13 PAGE 3 OF 6 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 1. At a minimum these need to conform to Div 27 05 00 acceptable manufacturers. 2.2 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING A. Provide penetration firestopping that is produced and installed to resist spread of fire according to requirements indicated, resist passage of smoke and other gases, and maintain original fireresista nce rating of construction penetrated. Penetration firestopping systems shall be compatible with one another, with the substrates forming openings, and with penetrating items if any. B. Penetrations in FireResistanceRated Walls: Pr ovide penetration firestopping with ratings determined per ASTM E 814 or UL 1479, based on testing at a positive pressure differential of 0.01inch wg (2.49 Pa). 1. Fireresistancerated walls include firebarrier walls, smokebarrier walls and fire partitions. 2. FRating: Not less than the fireresistance rat ing of constructions penetrated. C. Penetrations in Horizontal Assemblies: Provide penetration firestopping with ratings determined per ASTM E 814 or UL 1479, based on testing at a positive pressure differential of 0.01inch wg (2.49 Pa). 1. Horizontal assemblies include floors floor/ceiling assemblies and ceiling membranes of roof/ceiling assemblies. 2. FRating: At least 1 hour, but not less than th e fireresistance rating of constructions penetrated. 3. TRating: At least 1 hour, but not less than th e fireresistance rating of constructions penetrated except for floor penetrations within the cavity of a wall. D. Penetrations in Smoke Barriers: Provide penetration firestopping with ratings determined per UL 1479. 1. LRating: Not exceeding 5.0 cfm/sq. ft. (0.025 cu. m/s per sq. m) of penetration opening at 0.30inch wg (74.7 Pa) at bo th ambient and elevated temperatures. E. Exposed Penetration Firestopping: Provide products with flamespread and smokedeveloped indexes of less than 25 and 450, re spectively, as determined per ASTM E 84. F. Accessories: Provide components for each penetration firestopping system that are needed to install fill materials and to maintain ratings required. Use only those components specified by penetration firestopping manufacturer and approved by qualified testing and inspecting agency for firestopping indicated. 1. Permanent forming/damming/backing materials, including the following: BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES CORNELL NCP PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 07 84 13 PAGE 4 OF 6 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 a. Slagwoolfiber or rockwoolfiber insulation. b. Sealants used in combination with other forming/damming/backing materials to prevent leakage of fill materials in liquid state. c. Firerated form board. d. Fillers for sealants. 2. Temporary forming materials. 3. Substrate primers. 4. Collars. 5. Steel sleeves. 2.3 FILL MATERIALS A. CastinPlace Firestop Devices: Factoryassembl ed devices for use in cast inplace concrete floors and consisting of an outer metallic sleeve lined with an intumescent strip, a radial extended flange attached to one end of the sleeve for fastening to concrete formwork, and a neoprene gasket. B. Latex Sealants: Singlecomponent latex formulat ions that do not reemulsify after cure during exposure to moisture. Generally suitable for Division 27 conduit.pathways work C. Firestop Devices: Factoryassembled collars for med from galvanized steel and lined with intumescent material sized to fit specific diameter of penetrant. D. Intumescent Composite Sheets: Rigid panels consisting of aluminumfoil faced elastomeric sheet bonded to galvanizedsteel sheet. E. Intumescent Putties: Nonhardening dielectric, waterresistant putties containing no solvents, inorganic fibers, or silicone compounds. Generally suitable for Division 27 cabling related work F. Intumescent Wrap Strips: Singlecomponent intum escent elastomeric sheets with aluminum foil on one side. G. Mortars: Prepackaged dry mixes consisting of a blend of inorganic binders, hydraulic cement, fillers, and lightweight aggregate formulated for mixing with water at Project site to form a nonshrinking, homogeneous mortar. H. Pillows/Bags: Reusable heatexpanding pillows/b ags consisting of glassfiber cloth cases filled with a combination of mineralfi ber, waterinsoluble expansion agents, and fireretardant additives. Wh ere exposed, cover openings with steelreinforcing wire mesh to protec t pillows/bags from being easily removed. Generally suitable for Division 27 cabling work I. Silicone Foams: Multicomponent, siliconebased liquid elastomers that, when mixed, expand and cure in place to produce a flexible, nonshrinking foam. BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES CORNELL NCP PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 07 84 13 PAGE 5 OF 6 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 J. Silicone Sealants: Singlecomponent, siliconeb ased, neutralcuring elastomeric sealants of grade indicated below: 1. Grade: Pourable (selfleveling) formulation for openings in floors and other horizontal surfaces, and nonsag formulation for openings in vertical and sloped surfaces, unless indicated firestopping limits use of nonsag grade for both opening conditions. 2.4 MIXING A. For those products requiring mixing before application, comply with penetration firestopping manufacturer's written instructions for accurate proportioning of materials, water (if required), type of mixing equipment, selection of mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time, and other items or procedures needed to produce products of uniform quality with optimum performance characteristics for application indicated. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for opening configurations, penetrating items, substrates, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Surface Cleaning: Clean out openings immediately before installing penetration firestopping to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and with the following requirements: 1. Remove from surfaces of opening substrates and from penetrating items foreign materials that could interfere with adhesion of penetration firestopping. 2. Clean opening substrates and penetrating items to produce clean, sound surfaces capable of developing optimum bond with penetration firestopping. Remove loose particles remaining from cleaning operation. 3. Remove laitance and formrelease agents from con crete. B. Priming: Prime substrates where recommended in writing by manufacturer using that manufacturer's recommended products and methods. Confine primers to areas of bond; do not allow spillage and migration onto exposed surfaces. C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape to prevent penetration firestopping from contacting adjoining surfaces that will remain exposed on completion of the Work and that would otherwise be permanently stained or damaged by such BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES CORNELL NCP PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 07 84 13 PAGE 6 OF 6 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 contact or by cleaning methods used to remove stains. Remove tape as soon as possible without disturbing firestopping's seal with substrates. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Install penetration firestopping to comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions and published drawings for products and applications indicated. B. Install forming materials and other accessories of types required to support fill materials during their application and in the position needed to produce crosssectional shapes and depths required to achie ve fire ratings indicated. 1. After installing fill materials and allowing them to fully cure, remove combustible forming materials and other accessories not indicated as permanent components of firestopping. C. Install fill materials for firestopping by proven techniques to produce the following results: 1. Fill voids and cavities formed by openings, forming materials, accessories, and penetrating items as required to achieve fireresistance ratings indicated. 2. Apply materials so they contact and adhere to substrates formed by openings and penetrating items. 3. For fill materials that will remain exposed after completing the Work, finish to produce smooth, uniform surfaces that are flush with adjoining finishes. 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean off excess fill materials adjacent to openings as the Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials that are approved in writing by penetration firestopping manufacturers and that do not damage materials in which openings occur. B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions during and after installation that ensure that penetration firestopping is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, immediately cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated penetration firestopping and install new materials to produce systems complying with specified requirements. END OF SECTION 078413 BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES CORNELL – NCP HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 08 11 13 – PAGE 1 OF 10 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 SECTION 08 11 13 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 DEFINITIONS A. Minimum Thickness: Minimum thickness of base metal without coatings. B. Standard Hollow Metal Work: Hollow metal work fabricated according to ANSI/SDI A250.8. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, core descriptions, fire6resistance rating, and finishes. B. Shop Drawings: Include the following: 1. Elevations of each door design. 2. Details of doors, including vertical and horizontal edge details and metal thicknesses. 3. Frame details for each frame type, including dimensioned profiles and metal thicknesses. 4. Locations of reinforcement and preparations for hardware. 5. Details of each different wall opening condition. 6. Details of anchorages, joints, field splices, and connections. 7. Details of accessories. 8. Details of moldings, removable stops, and glazing. 9. Details of conduit and preparations for power, signal, and control systems. C. Other Action Submittals: 1. Schedule: Provide a schedule of hollow metal work prepared by or under the supervision of supplier, using same reference numbers for details and openings as those on Drawings. Coordinate with door hardware schedule. D. Oversize Construction Certification: For assemblies required to be fire rated and exceeding limitations of labeled assemblies. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain hollow metal work from single source from single manufacturer. B. Fire6Rated Door Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a qualified testing agency, for fire6protection ratings indicated, based on testing at positive pressure according to NFPA 252 or UL 10C. C. Smoke6Control Door Assemblies: Comply with NFPA 105 or UL 1784. BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES CORNELL – NCP HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 08 11 13 – PAGE 2 OF 10 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver hollow metal work palletized, wrapped, or crated to provide protection during transit and Project6site storage. Do not use nonvented plastic. 1. Provide additional protection to prevent damage to finish of factory6finished units. B. Deliver welded frames with two removable spreader bars across bottom of frames, tack welded to jambs and mullions. C. Store hollow metal work under cover at Project site. Place in stacks of five units maximum in a vertical position with heads up, spaced by blocking, on minimum 46inch6 (1026mm6) high wood blocking. Do not store in a manner that traps excess humidity. 1. Provide minimum 1/46inch (66mm) space between each stacked door to permit air circulation. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify actual dimensions of openings by field measurements before fabrication. 1.6 COORDINATION A. Coordinate installation of anchorages for hollow metal frames. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Cold6Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; suitable for exposed applications. B. Hot6Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; free of scale, pitting, or surface defects; pickled and oiled. C. Metallic6Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; with minimum A60 (ZF180) metallic coating. D. Frame Anchors: ASTM A 591/A 591M, Commercial Steel (CS), 40Z (12G) coating designation; mill phosphatized. 1. For anchors built into exterior walls, steel sheet complying with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M or ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, hot6dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B. BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES CORNELL – NCP HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 08 11 13 – PAGE 3 OF 10 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 E. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Hot6dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M. F. Grout: ASTM C 476, except with a maximum slump of 4 inches (102 mm), as measured according to ASTM C 143/C 143M. G. Mineral6Fiber Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing); consisting of fibers manufactured from slag or rock wool with 66 to 126 lb/cu. ft. (966 to 1926kg/cu. m) density; with maximum flame6spread and smoke6 development indexes of 25 and 50, respectively; passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics. H. Glazing: Comply with requirements in Division 08 Section "Glazing." I. Bituminous Coating: Cold6applied asphalt mastic, SSPC6Paint 12, compounded for 156mil (0.46mm) dry film thickness per coat. Provide inert6type noncorrosive compound free of asbestos fibers, sulfur components, and other deleterious impurities. 2.2 STANDARD HOLLOW METAL DOORS A. General: Provide doors of design indicated, not less than thickness indicated; fabricated with smooth surfaces, without visible joints or seams on exposed faces unless otherwise indicated. Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.8. 1. Design: Flush panel . 2. Core Construction: Manufacturer's standard kraft6paper honeycomb, mineral6 board, or vertical steel6stiffener core. a. Fire Door Core: As required to provide fire6protection and temperature6rise ratings indicated. 3. Vertical Edges for Single6Acting Doors: Manufacturer's standard. 4. Top and Bottom Edges: Closed with flush or inverted 0.0426inch6 (1.06mm6) thick, end closures or channels of same material as face sheets. 5. Tolerances: Comply with SDI 117, "Manufacturing Tolerances for Standard Steel Doors and Frames." B. Interior Doors: Face sheets fabricated from cold6rolled steel sheet unless metallic6coated sheet is indicated. Provide doors complying with requirements indicated below by referencing ANSI/SDI A250.8 for level and model and ANSI/SDI A250.4 for physical performance level: 1. Level 2 and Physical Performance Level B (Heavy Duty 18 GA.), Model 2 (Seamless). C. Hardware Reinforcement: Fabricate according to ANSI/SDI A250.6 with reinforcing plates from same material as door face sheets. D. Fabricate concealed stiffeners and hardware reinforcement from either cold6 or hot6rolled steel sheet. BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES CORNELL – NCP HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 08 11 13 – PAGE 4 OF 10 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 2.3 STANDARD HOLLOW METAL FRAMES A. General: Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.8 and with details indicated for type and profile. B. Interior Frames: Fabricated from cold6rolled steel sheet. 1. Fabricate frames with mitered or coped corners. 2. Fabricate frames as face welded unless otherwise indicated. 3. Frames for Level 2 Steel Doors: 0.0536inch6 (1.36mm6) thick steel sheet 16 GA.. 4. Frames for Wood Doors: 0.0536inch6 (1.36mm616 GA) thick steel sheet. 5. Frames for Borrowed Lights: 0.0536inch6 (1.36mm6) thick steel sheet. Same as adjacent door frame. C. Hardware Reinforcement: Fabricate according to ANSI/SDI A250.6 with reinforcement plates from same material as frames. 2.4 FRAME ANCHORS A. Jamb Anchors: 1. Masonry Type: Adjustable strap6and6stirrup or T6shaped anchors to suit frame size, not less than 0.042 inch (1.0 mm) thick, with corrugated or perforated straps not less than 2 inches (50 mm) wide by 10 inches (250 mm) long; or wire anchors not less than 0.177 inch (4.5 mm) thick. 2. Stud6Wall Type: Designed to engage stud, welded to back of frames; not less than 0.042 inch (1.0 mm) thick. 3. Postinstalled Expansion Type for In6Place Concrete or Masonry: Minimum 3/86inch6 (9.56mm6) diameter bolts with expansion shields or inserts. Provide pipe spacer from frame to wall, with throat reinforcement plate, welded to frame at each anchor location. B. Floor Anchors: Formed from same material as frames, not less than 0.042 inch (1.0 mm) thick, and as follows: 1. Monolithic Concrete Slabs: Clip6type anchors, with two holes to receive fasteners. 2. Separate Topping Concrete Slabs: Adjustable6type anchors with extension clips, allowing not less than 26inch (506mm) height adjustment. Terminate bottom of frames at finish floor surface. 2.5 HOLLOW METAL PANELS A. Provide hollow metal panels of same materials, construction, and finish as specified for adjoining hollow metal work. 2.6 STOPS AND MOLDINGS A. Moldings for Glazed Lites in Doors: Minimum 0.032 inch (0.8 mm) thick, fabricated from same material as door face sheet in which they are installed. BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES CORNELL – NCP HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 08 11 13 – PAGE 5 OF 10 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 B. Fixed Frame Moldings: Formed integral with hollow metal frames, a minimum of 5/8 inch (16 mm) high unless otherwise indicated. C. Loose Stops for Glazed Lites in Frames: Minimum 0.032 inch (0.8 mm) thick, fabricated from same material as frames in which they are installed. 2.7 LOUVERS A. Provide louvers for interior doors, where indicated, that comply with SDI 111C, with blades or baffles formed of 0.0206inch6 ((0.56mm6) thick, cold6rolled steel sheet set into 0.0326inch6 (0.86mm6) thick steel frame. 1. Sightproof Louver: Stationary louvers constructed with inverted V6shaped or Y6shaped blades. 2. Fire6Rated Automatic Louvers: Louvers constructed with movable blades closed by actuating fusible link, and listed and labeled for use in fire6rated door assemblies of type and fire6resistance rating indicated by same testing and inspecting agency that established fire6resistance rating of door assembly. 2.8 ACCESSORIES A. Mullions and Transom Bars: Join to adjacent members by welding or rigid mechanical anchors. B. Grout Guards: Formed from same material as frames, not less than 0.016 inch (0.4 mm) thick. 2.9 FABRICATION A. Fabricate hollow metal work to be rigid and free of defects, warp, or buckle. Accurately form metal to required sizes and profiles, with minimum radius for thickness of metal. Where practical, fit and assemble units in manufacturer's plant. To ensure proper assembly at Project site, clearly identify work that cannot be permanently factory assembled before shipment. B. Tolerances: Fabricate hollow metal work to tolerances indicated in SDI 117 . C. Hollow Metal Doors: 1. Exterior Doors: Provide weep6hole openings in bottom of exterior doors to permit moisture to escape. Seal joints in top edges of doors against water penetration. 2. Glazed Lites: Factory cut openings in doors. D. Hollow Metal Frames: Where frames are fabricated in sections due to shipping or handling limitations, provide alignment plates or angles at each joint, fabricated of same thickness metal as frames. 1. Welded Frames: Weld flush face joints continuously; grind, fill, dress, and make smooth, flush, and invisible. BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES CORNELL – NCP HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 08 11 13 – PAGE 6 OF 10 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 2. Sidelight and Transom Bar Frames: Provide closed tubular members with no visible face seams or joints, fabricated from same material as door frame. Fasten members at crossings and to jambs by butt welding. 3. Provide countersunk, flat6 or oval6head exposed screws and bolts for exposed fasteners unless otherwise indicated. 4. Grout Guards: Weld guards to frame at back of hardware mortises in frames to be grouted. 5. Floor Anchors: Weld anchors to bottom of jambs and mullions with at least four spot welds per anchor. 6. Jamb Anchors: Provide number and spacing of anchors as follows: a. Masonry Type: Locate anchors not more than 18 inches (457 mm) from top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches (813 mm) o.c. and as follows: 1) Two anchors per jamb up to 60 inches (1524 mm) high. 2) Three anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches (1524 to 2286 mm) high. 3) Four anchors per jamb from 90 to 120 inches (2286 to 3048 mm) high. 4) Four anchors per jamb plus 1 additional anchor per jamb for each 24 inches (610 mm) or fraction thereof above 120 inches (3048 mm) high. b. Stud6Wall Type: Locate anchors not more than 18 inches (457 mm) from top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches (813 mm) o.c. and as follows: 1) Three anchors per jamb up to 60 inches (1524 mm) high. 2) Four anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches (1524 to 2286 mm) high. 3) Five anchors per jamb from 90 to 96 inches (2286 to 2438 mm) high. 4) Five anchors per jamb plus 1 additional anchor per jamb for each 24 inches (610 mm) or fraction thereof above 96 inches (2438 mm) high. 5) Two anchors per head for frames above 42 inches (1066 mm) wide and mounted in metal6stud partitions. c. Postinstalled Expansion Type: Locate anchors not more than 6 inches (152 mm) from top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 26 inches (660 mm) o.c. 7. Door Silencers: Except on weather6stripped doors, drill stops to receive door silencers as follows. Keep holes clear during construction. a. Single6Door Frames: Drill stop in strike jamb to receive three door silencers. b. Double6Door Frames: Drill stop in head jamb to receive two door silencers. E. Fabricate concealed stiffeners, edge channels, and hardware reinforcement from either cold6 or hot6rolled steel sheet. BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES CORNELL – NCP HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 08 11 13 – PAGE 7 OF 10 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 F. Hardware Preparation: Factory prepare hollow metal work to receive templated mortised hardware; include cutouts, reinforcement, mortising, drilling, and tapping according to the Door Hardware Schedule and templates furnished as specified in Division 08 Section "Door Hardware." 1. Locate hardware as indicated, or if not indicated, according to ANSI/SDI A250.8 . 2. Reinforce doors and frames to receive nontemplated, mortised and surface6 mounted door hardware. 3. Comply with applicable requirements in ANSI/SDI A250.6 and ANSI/DHI A115 Series specifications for preparation of hollow metal work for hardware. 4. Coordinate locations of conduit and wiring boxes for electrical connections with Division 26 Sections. G. Stops and Moldings: Provide stops and moldings around glazed lites where indicated. Form corners of stops and moldings with butted or mitered hairline joints. 1. Single Glazed Lites: Provide fixed stops and moldings welded on secure side of hollow metal work. 2. Multiple Glazed Lites: Provide fixed and removable stops and moldings so that each glazed lite is capable of being removed independently. 3. Provide fixed frame moldings on outside of exterior and on secure side of interior doors and frames. 4. Provide loose stops and moldings on inside of hollow metal work. 5. Coordinate rabbet width between fixed and removable stops with type of glazing and type of installation indicated. 2.10 STEEL FINISHES A. Prime Finish: Apply manufacturer's standard primer immediately after cleaning and pretreating. 1. Shop Primer: Manufacturer's standard, fast6curing, lead6 and chromate6free primer complying with ANSI/SDI A250.10 acceptance criteria; recommended by primer manufacturer for substrate; compatible with substrate and field6 applied coatings despite prolonged exposure. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Examine roughing6in for embedded and built6in anchors to verify actual locations before frame installation. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES CORNELL – NCP HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 08 11 13 – PAGE 8 OF 10 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 3.2 PREPARATION A. Remove welded6in shipping spreaders installed at factory. Restore exposed finish by grinding, filling, and dressing, as required to make repaired area smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces. B. Prior to installation, adjust and securely brace welded hollow metal frames for squareness, alignment, twist, and plumbness to the following tolerances: 1. Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at door rabbet on a line 90 degrees from jamb perpendicular to frame head. 2. Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at jambs on a horizontal line parallel to plane of wall. 3. Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at opposite face corners of jambs on parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall. 4. Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at jambs on a perpendicular line from head to floor. C. Drill and tap doors and frames to receive nontemplated, mortised, and surface6 mounted door hardware. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Install hollow metal work plumb, rigid, properly aligned, and securely fastened in place; comply with Drawings and manufacturer's written instructions. B. Hollow Metal Frames: Install hollow metal frames of size and profile indicated. Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.11 . 1. Set frames accurately in position, plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is complete, remove temporary braces, leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged. a. At fire6protection6rated openings, install frames according to NFPA 80. b. Where frames are fabricated in sections because of shipping or handling limitations, field splice at approved locations by welding face joint continuously; grind, fill, dress, and make splice smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces. c. Install frames with removable glazing stops located on secure side of opening. d. Install door silencers in frames before grouting. e. Remove temporary braces necessary for installation only after frames have been properly set and secured. f. Check plumbness, squareness, and twist of frames as walls are constructed. Shim as necessary to comply with installation tolerances. g. Field apply bituminous coating to backs of frames that are filled with grout containing antifreezing agents. 2. Floor Anchors: Provide floor anchors for each jamb and mullion that extends to floor, and secure with postinstalled expansion anchors. BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES CORNELL – NCP HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 08 11 13 – PAGE 9 OF 10 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 a. Floor anchors may be set with powder6actuated fasteners instead of postinstalled expansion anchors if so indicated and approved on Shop Drawings. 3. Metal6Stud Partitions: Solidly pack mineral6fiber insulation behind frames. 4. Masonry Walls: Coordinate installation of frames to allow for solidly filling space between frames and masonry with grout. 5. Concrete Walls: Solidly fill space between frames and concrete with grout. Take precautions, including bracing frames, to ensure that frames are not deformed or damaged by grout forces. 6. In6Place Concrete or Masonry Construction: Secure frames in place with postinstalled expansion anchors. Countersink anchors, and fill and make smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces. 7. In6Place Gypsum Board Partitions: Secure frames in place with postinstalled expansion anchors through floor anchors at each jamb. Countersink anchors, and fill and make smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces. 8. Installation Tolerances: Adjust hollow metal door frames for squareness, alignment, twist, and plumb to the following tolerances: a. Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at door rabbet on a line 90 degrees from jamb perpendicular to frame head. b. Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at jambs on a horizontal line parallel to plane of wall. c. Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at opposite face corners of jambs on parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall. d. Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at jambs at floor. C. Hollow Metal Doors: Fit hollow metal doors accurately in frames, within clearances specified below. Shim as necessary. 1. Non6Fire6Rated Standard Steel Doors: a. Jambs and Head: 1/8 inch (3 mm) plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm). b. Between Edges of Pairs of Doors: 1/8 inch (3 mm) plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm). c. Between Bottom of Door and Top of Threshold: Maximum 3/8 inch (9.5 mm). d. Between Bottom of Door and Top of Finish Floor (No Threshold): Maximum 3/4 inch (19 mm). 2. Fire6Rated Doors: Install doors with clearances according to NFPA 80. 3. Smoke6Control Doors: Install doors according to NFPA 105 . D. Glazing: Comply with installation requirements in Division 08 Section "Glazing" and with hollow metal manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Secure stops with countersunk flat6 or oval6head machine screws spaced uniformly not more than 9 inches (230 mm) o.c. and not more than 2 inches (50 mm) o.c. from each corner. BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES CORNELL – NCP HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 08 11 13 – PAGE 10 OF 10 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Final Adjustments: Check and readjust operating hardware items immediately before final inspection. Leave work in complete and proper operating condition. Remove and replace defective work, including hollow metal work that is warped, bowed, or otherwise unacceptable. B. Remove grout and other bonding material from hollow metal work immediately after installation. C. Prime6Coat Touchup: Immediately after erection, sand smooth rusted or damaged areas of prime coat and apply touchup of compatible air6drying, rust6 inhibitive primer. D. Metallic6Coated Surfaces: Clean abraded areas and repair with galvanizing repair paint according to manufacturer's written instructions. END OF SECTION 081113 BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES CORNELL – NCP FLUSH WOOD DOORS STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 08 14 16 PAGE 1 OF 6 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 SECTION 081416 FLUSH WOOD DOORS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Solidcore doors with woodveneer faces. 2. Factory finished flush wood doors. 3. Factory fitting flush wood doors to frames and factory machining for hardware. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of door indicated. Include details of core and edge construction and trim for openings. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate location, size, and hand of each door; elevation of each kind of door; construction details not covered in Product Data; location and extent of hardware blocking; and other pertinent data. 1. Indicate dimensions and locations of mortises and holes for hardware. 2. Indicate dimensions and locations of cutouts. 3. Indicate requirements for veneer matching. 4. Indicate doors to be factory finished and finish requirements. 5. Indicate fireprotection ratings for firerated doors. C. Samples for Verification: 1. Factory finishes applied to actual door face materials, approximately 8 by 10 inches (200 by 250 mm), for each material and finish. 2. Corner sections of doors, approximately 8 by 10 inches (200 by 250 mm), with door faces and edges representing actual materials to be used. a. Provide samples for each species of veneer and solid lumber required. b. Provide samples for each color, texture, and pattern of plastic laminate required. c. Finish veneerfaced door samples with same mater ials proposed for factoryfinished doors. BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES CORNELL – NCP FLUSH WOOD DOORS STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 08 14 16 PAGE 2 OF 6 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 D. Warranty: Sample of special warranty. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Quality Standard: In addition to requirements specified, comply with WDMA I.S.1A, "Architectural Wood Flush Doors." 1. Provide WICertified Compliance Certificate indi cating that doors comply with requirements of grades specified. 2. Provide WICertified Compliance Certificate for installation. B. FireRated Wood Doors: Doors complying with NFP A 80 that are listed and labeled by a qualified testing agency, for firepro tection ratings indicated, based on testing at positive pressure according to UL 10C. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Comply with requirements of referenced standard and manufacturer's written instructions. B. Package doors individually in plastic bags or cardboard cartons. 1.6 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace doors that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Warping (bow, cup, or twist) more than 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) in a 42by 84inch (1067by2134mm) section. b. Telegraphing of core construction in face veneers exceeding 0.01 inch in a 3inch (0.25 mm in a 76.2mm) span. 2. Warranty shall also include installation and finishing that may be required due to repair or replacement of defective doors. 3. Warranty Period for SolidCore Interior Doors: Life of installation. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES CORNELL – NCP FLUSH WOOD DOORS STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 08 14 16 PAGE 3 OF 6 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 1. Algoma Hardwoods, Inc. 2. Marshfield Door Systems, Inc. 2.2 DOOR CONSTRUCTION, GENERAL A. WDMA I.S.1A Performance Grade: Heavy Duty. B. FireProtectionRated Doors: Provide core speci fied or mineral core as needed to provide fireprotection rating indicated on drawings. 1. Edge Construction: Provide edge construction with intumescent seals concealed by outer stile. Comply with specified requirements for exposed edges. 2.3 VENEEREDFACED DOORS FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH A. Interior SolidCore Doors: 1. Grade: Custom (Grade A faces). 2. Species: White oak. 3. Cut: Rotary cut. 4. Core: Particleboard. 5. Construction: Five plies. Stiles and rails are bonded to core, then entire unit abrasive planed before veneering. 6. WDMA I.S.1A Performance Grade: Heavy Duty. 2.4 FABRICATION A. Factory fit doors to suit frameopening sizes in dicated. Comply with clearance requirements of referenced quality standard for fitting unless otherwise indicated. 1. Comply with requirements in NFPA 80 for firerat ed doors. B. Factory machine doors for hardware that is not surface applied. Locate hardware to comply with DHIWDHS3. Comply with fi nal hardware schedules, door frame Shop Drawings, DHI A115W ser ies standards, and hardware templates. 1. Coordinate with hardware mortises in metal frames to verify dimensions and alignment before factory machining. 2.5 SHOP PRIMING A. Doors for Transparent Finish: Shop prime doors with stain (if required), other required pretreatments, and first coat of finish as specified. Seal all four edges, edges of cutouts, and mortises with first coat of finish. BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES CORNELL – NCP FLUSH WOOD DOORS STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 08 14 16 PAGE 4 OF 6 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 2.6 FACTORY FINISHING A. General: Comply with referenced quality standard for factory finishing. Complete fabrication, including fitting doors for openings and machining for hardware that is not surface applied, before finishing. 1. Finish faces, all four edges, edges of cutouts, and mortises. Stains and fillers may be omitted on bottom edges, edges of cutouts, and mortises. B. Finish doors at factory that are indicated to receive transparent finish. C. Transparent Finish: 1. Grade: Premium. 2. Finish: WI System 5 catalyzed polyurethane. 3. Staining: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 4. Effect: Semifilled finish, produced by applyin g an additional finish coat to partially fill the wood pores. 5. Sheen: Satin. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine doors and installed door frames before hanging doors. 1. Verify that frames comply with indicated requirements for type, size, location, and swing characteristics and have been installed with level heads and plumb jambs. 2. Reject doors with defects. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Hardware: For installation, see Division 08 Section "Door Hardware." B. Installation Instructions: Install doors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and the referenced quality standard, and as indicated. 1. Install firerated doors in corresponding firer ated frames according to NFPA 80. C. FactoryFitted Doors: Align in frames for unifo rm clearance at each edge. D. FactoryFinished Doors: Restore finish before i nstallation if fitting or machining is required at Project site. BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES CORNELL – NCP FLUSH WOOD DOORS STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 08 14 16 PAGE 5 OF 6 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 3.3 ADJUSTING A. Operation: Rehang or replace doors that do not swing or operate freely. B. Finished Doors: Replace doors that are damaged or that do not comply with requirements. Doors may be repaired or refinished if work complies with requirements and shows no evidence of repair or refinishing. END OF SECTION 081416 BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES CORNELL – NCP FLUSH WOOD DOORS STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 08 14 16 PAGE 6 OF 6 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 [ PAGE LEFT INTENTIONALLY BLANK ] BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES CORNELL – NCP ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 08 31 13 PAGE 1 OF 4 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 SECTION 08 31 13 ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Access doors and frames for walls and ceilings. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Provide for each type of access door and frame indicated. Include construction details, fire ratings, materials, individual components and profiles, and finishes. B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details of access doors and frames for each type of substrate. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of access door(s) and frame(s) through one source from a single manufacturer. B. FireRated Access Doors and Frames: Units compl ying with NFPA 80 that are identical to access door and frame assemblies tested for firetest response characteristics per the following test method and that are listed and labeled by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction: 1. NFPA 252 or UL 10B for vertical access doors and frames. 2. ASTM E 119 or UL 263 for horizontal access doors and frames. C. Size Variations: Obtain Architect's acceptance of manufacturer's standard size units, which may vary slightly from sizes indicated. BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES CORNELL – NCP ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 08 31 13 PAGE 2 OF 4 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 STEEL MATERIALS A. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. 1. ASTM A 123/A 123M, for galvanizing steel and iron products. 2. ASTM A 153/A 153M, for galvanizing steel and iron hardware. B. RolledSteel Floor Plate: ASTM A 786/A 786M, ro lled from plate complying with ASTM A 36/A 36M or ASTM A 283/A 283M, Grade C or D. 1. ASTM A 123/A 123M, for galvanizing steel and iron products 2. ASTM A 153/A 153M, for galvanizing steel and iron hardware. C. Steel Sheet: electrolytic zinccoated, ASTM A 5 91/A 591M with coldrolled steel sheet substrate complying with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), exposed. D. Steel Finishes: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. 1. Surface Preparation for Steel Sheet: Clean surfaces to comply with SSPCSP 1, "Solvent Cleaning," to remove dirt, oil, grease, or other contaminants that could impair paint bond. Remove mill scale and rust, if present, from uncoated steel, complying with SSPCS P 5/NACE No. 1, "White Metal Blast Cleaning," or SSPCSP 8, "Pickli ng." 2. BakedEnamel Finish: Immediately after cleaning and pretreating, apply manufacturer's standard twocoat, bakedenamel fini sh consisting of prime coat and thermosetting topcoat. Comply with paint manufacturer's written instructions for applying and baking to achieve a minimum dry film thickness of 2 mils (0.05 mm). E. Drywall Beads: Edge trim formed from 0.0299inc h (0.76mm) zinccoated steel sheet formed to receive joint compound and in size to suit thickness of gypsum board. F. Plaster Beads: Casing bead formed from 0.0299i nch (0.76mm) zinccoated steel sheet with flange formed out of expanded metal lath and in size to suit thickness of plaster. 2.2 ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES FOR WALLS AND CEILINGS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering firerated products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES CORNELL – NCP ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 08 31 13 PAGE 3 OF 4 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide firerated products by one of the following: 1. Design Make: The William Bros. Corporation of America WB FR 800 Series, with automatic closure, smoke seal and mortised lock, or equal. 2. Karp Associates, Inc. 3. Milcor Inc. C. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide nonrated products by one of the following: 1. Design Make: The Nystrom Corporation WB FR 800 Series, with automatic closure, smoke seal and mortised lock, or equal. 2. Karp Associates, Inc. 3. Milcor Inc. D. Flush Access Doors and Frames with Exposed Trim: Fabricated from steel sheet. 1. Locations: Ceiling surfaces. 2. Door: Minimum 0.060inch (1.5mm) thick sheet metal, set flush with exposed face flange of frame. 3. Frame: Minimum 0.060inch (1.5mm) Insert dim ension thick sheet metal with 11/4inch (32mm) wide, surfacemount ed trim. 4. Hinges: Continuous piano. 5. Latch: Slam latch operated by flush key with interior release. 6. Lock: Cylinder. 2.3 FABRICATION A. General: Provide access door and frame assemblies manufactured as integral units ready for installation. B. Metal Surfaces: For metal surfaces exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces without blemishes. Do not use materials with exposed pitting, seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or roughness. C. Doors and Frames: Grind exposed welds smooth and flush with adjacent surfaces. Furnish attachment devices and fasteners of type required to secure access panels to types of supports indicated. 1. Exposed Flanges: Nominal 1 to 11/2 inches (25 to 38 mm) wide around perimeter of frame. D. Latching Mechanisms: Furnish number required to hold doors in flush, smooth plane when closed. 1. For cylinder lock, furnish two keys per lock and key all locks alike. BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES CORNELL – NCP ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 08 31 13 PAGE 4 OF 4 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing access doors and frames. B. Install doors flush with adjacent finish surfaces or recessed to receive finish material. C. Install swingdown hinged doors with hinge close st to an adjacent wall, so that an open door in a ceiling less than 8’6” AFF, will not interfere with public egress path and will minimize the likelihood for pedestrian injury. If this is not possible, coordinate the review with Owner’s Representative, in advance of rough opening. 3.2 ADJUSTING, CLEANING AND PAINTING A. Adjust doors and hardware after installation for proper operation. B. Remove and replace doors and frames that are warped, bowed, or otherwise damaged. C. Clean dirt and finger prints from exposed finished. D. Prepare assembly for painting. Prime and paint two finish coats to match existing conditions. Finish Paint color and type to be determined by Owners Facilities Department. END OF SECTION 083113 BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES CORNELL NCP NON STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 09 22 16 PAGE 1 OF 4 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 SECTION 092216 NONSTRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes nonloadbearing steel fra ming members for the following applications: 1. Interior framing systems (e.g., supports for partition walls, framed soffits, furring, etc.). 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Furnish for each type of product used, include MSDS as applicable. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. FireTestResponse Characteristics: For firere sistancerated assemblies that incorporate nonloadbearing steel framing, pr ovide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing agency. B. STCRated Assemblies: For STCrated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413 by an independent testing agency. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 NONLOADBEARING STEEL FRAMING, GENERAL A. Framing Members, General: Comply with ASTM C 754 for conditions indicated. 1. Steel Sheet Components: Comply with ASTM C 645 requirements for metal, unless otherwise indicated. BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES CORNELL NCP NON STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 09 22 16 PAGE 2 OF 4 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 2. Protective Coating: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G40 (Z120), hotdip galvanized, unless otherwise indicated. 2.2 AUXILIARY MATERIALS A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards. 1. Fasteners for Metal Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power, and other properties required to fasten steel members to substrates. B. Isolation Strip at Exterior Walls: Provide one of the following: 1. AsphaltSaturated Organic Felt: ASTM D 226, Typ e I (No. 15 asphalt felt), nonperforated. 2. Foam Gasket: Adhesivebacked, closedcell vinyl foam strips that allow fastener penetration without foam displacement, 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) thick, in width to suit steel stud size. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas and substrates, with Installer present, and including welded hollowmetal frames, castin anchors, and structura l framing, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance. 1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Installation Standard: ASTM C 754, except comply with framing sizes and spacing indicated. 1. Gypsum Board Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 840 that apply to framing installation. B. Install supplementary framing, and blocking to support fixtures, equipment services, heavy trim, grab bars, toilet accessories, furnishings, or similar construction. C. Install bracing at terminations in assemblies. D. Do not bridge building control and expansion joints with nonloadbearing steel framing members. Frame both sides of joints independently. BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES CORNELL NCP NON STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 09 22 16 PAGE 3 OF 4 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 3.3 INSTALLING FRAMED ASSEMBLIES A. Where studs are installed directly against exterior masonry walls or dissimilar metals at exterior walls, install isolation strip between studs and exterior wall. B. Install studs so flanges within framing system point in same direction. 1. Space studs as follows: a. SingleLayer Application: 16 inches (406 mm) o.c., unless otherwise indicated. b. Multilayer Application: 16 inches (406 mm) o.c., unless otherwise indicated. C. Install tracks (runners) at floors and overhead supports. Extend framing full height to structural supports or substrates above suspended ceilings, except where partitions are indicated to terminate at suspended ceilings. Continue framing around ducts penetrating partitions above ceiling. 1. SlipType Head Joints: Where framing extends to overhead structural supports, install to produce joints at tops of framing systems that prevent axial loading of finished assemblies. 2. Door Openings: Screw vertical studs at jambs to jamb anchor clips on door frames; install runner track section (for cripple studs) at head and secure to jamb studs. a. Install two studs at each jamb, unless otherwise indicated. b. Install cripple studs at head adjacent to each jamb stud, with a minimum 1/2inch (12.7mm ) clearance from jamb stud to allow for installation of control joint in finished assembly. c. Extend jamb studs through suspended ceilings and attach to underside of overhead structure. 3. Other Framed Openings: Frame openings other than door openings the same as required for door openings, unless otherwise indicated. Install framing below sills of openings to match framing required above door heads. 4. FireResistanceRated Partitions: Install frami ng to comply with fire resistancerated assembly indicated and support clo sures and to make partitions continuous from floor to underside of solid structure. 5. SoundRated Partitions: Install framing to comp ly with soundrated assembly indicated. D. Installation Tolerance: Install each framing member so fastening surfaces vary not more than 1/8 inch (3 mm) from the plane formed by faces of adjacent framing. BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES CORNELL NCP NON STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 09 22 16 PAGE 4 OF 4 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 END OF SECTION 092216 BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES CORNELL – NCP GYPSUM BOARD STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 09 29 00 PAGE 1 OF 7 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 SECTION 092900 GYPSUM BOARD PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Interior gypsum board. 2. Exterior gypsum board for ceilings and soffits. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. FireResistanceRated Assemblies: For fireresi stancerated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing agency. B. STCRated Assemblies: For STCrated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413 by an independent testing agency. 1.5 STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction traffic, and other causes. Stack panels flat to prevent sagging. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with ASTM C 840 requirements or gypsum board manufacturer's written recommendations, whichever are more stringent. BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES CORNELL – NCP GYPSUM BOARD STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 09 29 00 PAGE 2 OF 7 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 PANELS, GENERAL A. Size: Provide in maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each area and that correspond with support system indicated. 2.2 INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD A. General: Complying with ASTM C 36/C 36M or ASTM C 1396/C 1396M, as applicable to type of gypsum board indicated and whichever is more stringent. 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. USG Corporation. B. Type X: 1. Thickness: 5/8 inch (15.9 mm). 2. Long Edges: Tapered. 2.3 TRIM ACCESSORIES A. Interior Trim: ASTM C 1047. 1. Material: Galvanized or aluminumcoated steel s heet or rolled zinc. 2. Shapes: a. Cornerbead. b. Bullnose bead. c. LCBead: Jshaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound. d. LBead: Lshaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound. e. UBead: Jshaped; exposed short flange does not receive joint compound. f. Expansion (control) joint. g. CurvedEdge Cornerbead: With notched or flexibl e flanges. 2.4 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS A. General: Comply with ASTM C 475/C 475M. B. Joint Tape: 1. Interior Gypsum Wallboard: Paper. BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES CORNELL – NCP GYPSUM BOARD STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 09 29 00 PAGE 3 OF 7 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 C. Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Wallboard: For each coat use formulation that is compatible with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats. 1. Prefilling: At open joints, rounded or beveled panel edges, and damaged surface areas, use settingtype taping compound. 2. Embedding and First Coat: For embedding tape and first coat on joints, fasteners, and trim flanges, use dryingtype, allp urpose compound. a. Use settingtype compound for installing paperf aced metal trim accessories. 3. Fill Coat: For second coat, use dryingtype, al lpurpose compound. 4. Finish Coat: For third coat, use dryingtype, a llpurpose compound. 5. Skim Coat: For final coat of Level 5 finish, use dryingtype, allpurpose compound. 2.5 AUXILIARY MATERIALS A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards and manufacturer's written recommendations. B. Laminating Adhesive: Adhesive or joint compound recommended for directly adhering gypsum panels to continuous substrate. C. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002, unless otherwise indicated. D. Sound Attenuation Blankets: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing) produced by combining thermosetting resins with mineral fibers manufactured from glass, slag wool, or rock wool. 1. FireResistanceRated Assemblies: Comply with m ineralfiber requirements of assembly. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas and substrates, with Installer present, and including welded hollowmetal frames and framing, for compliance wit h requirements and other conditions affecting performance. B. Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES CORNELL – NCP GYPSUM BOARD STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 09 29 00 PAGE 4 OF 7 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 3.2 APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS, GENERAL A. Comply with ASTM C 840. B. Install ceiling panels across framing to minimize the number of abutting end joints and to avoid abutting end joints in central area of each ceiling. Stagger abutting end joints of adjacent panels not less than one framing member. C. Install panels with face side out. Butt panels together for a light contact at edges and ends with not more than 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) of open space between panels. Do not force into place. D. Locate edge and end joints over supports, except in ceiling applications where intermediate supports or gypsum board backbl ocking is provided behind end joints. Do not place tapered edges against cut edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints on opposite sides of partitions. Do not make joints other than control joints at corners of framed openings. E. Form control and expansion joints with space between edges of adjoining gypsum panels. F. Cover both faces of support framing with gypsum panels in concealed spaces (above ceilings, etc.), except in chases braced internally. 1. Unless concealed application is indicated or required for sound, fire, air, or smoke ratings, coverage may be accomplished with scraps of not less than 8 sq. ft. (0.7 sq. m) in area. 2. Fit gypsum panels around ducts, pipes, and conduits. 3. Where partitions intersect structural members projecting below underside of floor/roof slabs and decks, cut gypsum panels to fit profile formed by structural members; allow 1/4 to 3/8inch (6.4 t o 9.5mm) wide joints to install sealant. G. Isolate perimeter of gypsum board applied to nonloadbearing partitions at structural abutments, except floors. Provide 1/4 to 1/2inch (6.4 to 12.7 mm) wide spaces at these locations, and trim edges with edge trim where edges of panels are exposed. Seal joints between edges and abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant. H. Attachment to Steel Framing: Attach panels so leading edge or end of each panel is attached to open (unsupported) edges of stud flanges first. I. STCRated Assemblies: Seal construction at peri meters, behind control joints, and at openings and penetrations with a continuous bead of acoustical sealant. Install acoustical sealant at both faces of partitions at perimeters and through penetrations. Comply with ASTM C 919 and with manufacturer's written recommendations for locating edge trim and closing off soundflanking paths around or through assemblies, including sealing partitions above acoustical ceilings. BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES CORNELL – NCP GYPSUM BOARD STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 09 29 00 PAGE 5 OF 7 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 J. Install sound attenuation blankets before installing gypsum panels, unless blankets are readily installed after panels have been installed on one side. 3.3 APPLYING INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD A. Install interior gypsum board in the following locations: 1. Type X: All. B. SingleLayer Application: 1. On ceilings, apply gypsum panels before wall/partition board application to greatest extent possible and at right angles to framing, unless otherwise indicated. 2. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum panels vertically (parallel to framing), unless otherwise indicated or required by fireresi stancerated assembly, and minimize end joints. a. Stagger abutting end joints not less than one framing member in alternate courses of panels. b. At stairwells and other high walls, install panels horizontally, unless otherwise indicated or required by fireresistance rated assembly. 3. On Zfurring members, apply gypsum panels vertic ally (parallel to framing) with no end joints. Locate edge joints over furring members. 4. Fastening Methods: Apply gypsum panels to supports with steel drill screws. C. Multilayer Application: 1. On ceilings, apply gypsum board indicated for base layers before applying base layers on walls/partitions; apply face layers in same sequence. Apply base layers at right angles to framing members and offset facelayer joints 1 framing member, 16 inche s (400 mm) minimum, from parallel baselayer joints, unless otherwise i ndicated or required by fireresistancerated assembly. 2. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum board indicated for base layers and face layers vertically (parallel to framing) with joints of base layers located over stud or furring member and facelayer joints o ffset at least one stud or furring member with baselayer joints, unless ot herwise indicated or required by fireresistancerated assembly. Stagge r joints on opposite sides of partitions. 3. Fastening Methods: Fasten base layers and face layers separately to supports with screws. BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES CORNELL – NCP GYPSUM BOARD STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 09 29 00 PAGE 6 OF 7 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 3.4 INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES A. General: For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same fasteners used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written instructions. B. Control Joints: Install control joints according to ASTM C 840 and in specific locations approved by Architect for visual effect. C. Interior Trim: Install in the following locations: 1. Cornerbead: Use at outside corners. 2. Bullnose Bead: Use at outside corners. 3. LCBead: Use at exposed panel edges. 4. LBead: Use where indicated. 5. UBead: Use at exposed panel edges. 6. CurvedEdge Cornerbead: Use at curved openings. 3.5 FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD A. General: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, edge trim, control joints, penetrations, fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board surfaces for decoration. Promptly remove residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces. B. Prefill open joints, rounded or beveled edges, and damaged surface areas. C. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except those with trim having flanges not intended for tape. D. Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below and according to ASTM C 840: 1. Level 1: Ceiling plenum areas, concealed areas, and where indicated. 2. Level 4: At panel surfaces that will be exposed to view, unless otherwise indicated. a. Primer and its application to surfaces are specified in other Division 09 Sections. 3. Level 5: Walls and ceilings scheduled to receive semigloss or gloss paint finish. a. Primer and its application to surfaces are specified in other Division 09 Sections. 3.6 PROTECTION A. Protect installed products from damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction, and other causes during remainder of the construction period. BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES CORNELL – NCP GYPSUM BOARD STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 09 29 00 PAGE 7 OF 7 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 B. Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged. 1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape. 2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration. END OF SECTION 092900 BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES CORNELL – NCP RESILIENT TILE FLOORING STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 09 65 36 PAGE 1 OF 6 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 SECTION 096536 – RESILIENT TILE FLOORING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Conductive vinyl composition floor tile. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: For each type of floor tile. Include floor tile layouts, edges, columns, doorways, and seaming plan for sheet flooring. C. Samples for Verification: Fullsize units of each color and pattern of floor tile required. D. Maintenance Data: For each type of floor tile to include in maintenance manuals. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. FireTestResponse Characteristics: As determin ed by testing identical products according to ASTM E 648 or NFPA 253 by a qualified testing agency. 1. Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Class I, not less than 0.45 W/sq. cm. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store floor tile and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather, with ambient temperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 50 deg F or more than 90 deg F Store floor tiles on flat surfaces. BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES CORNELL – NCP RESILIENT TILE FLOORING STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 09 65 36 PAGE 2 OF 6 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 70 deg F or more than 95 deg F in spaces to receive floor tile during the following time periods: 1. 48 hours before installation. 2. During installation. 3. 48 hours after installation. B. Close spaces to traffic during floor tile installation. C. Close spaces to traffic for 48 hours after floor tile installation. D. Install floor tile after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed. 1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Floor Tile: Furnish 1 box for every building, of each type, color, and pattern of floor tile installed. Deliver to Owner’s field office. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 VINYL COMPOSITION FLOOR TILE A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.; Excelon 51903 Blue Gray. B. Tile Standard: ASTM F 1066, Class 2, throughpattern tile. C. Wearing Surface: Smooth. D. Thickness: 0.125 inch E. Size: 12 by 12 inches F. Colors and Patterns: As indicated by manufacturer’s designations. BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES CORNELL – NCP RESILIENT TILE FLOORING STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 09 65 36 PAGE 3 OF 6 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 2.2 BASE MATERIALS A. Base: ASTM F 1861, Type TS rubber, vulcanized thermoset: top set Style B, Cove and as follows: 1. Height: 6 inch. 2. Thickness: 1/8 inch. 3. Finish: Satin. 4. Length: Roll. 5. Color: As selected by Architect from mfg. full range of colors. 6. Accessories: Premolded external corners and end stops. 7. Manufacturers: Johnsonite, Inc. or equal. 2.3 INSTALLATION MATERIALS A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latexmodified, portland cement based or blended hydrauliccementbased form ulation provided or approved by manufacturer for applications indicated. .B. Adhesives: Waterresistant type recommended b y manufacturer to suit floor tile and substrate conditions indicated. 1. Use adhesives that comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24): a. VCT and Asphalt Tile Adhesives: Not more than 50 g/L. b. Rubber Floor Adhesives: Not more than 60 g/L. C. Floor Polish: Provide protective liquid floor polish products as recommended by manufacturer. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements specified in other Sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits that might interfere with adhesion of floor tile. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES CORNELL – NCP RESILIENT TILE FLOORING STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 09 65 36 PAGE 4 OF 6 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 3.2 PREPARATION A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of resilient products. B. Concrete Substrates: Prepare according to ASTM F 710. 1. Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and hardeners. 2. Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by manufacturer. Do not use solvents. 3. Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing. C. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching compound and remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate. D. Do not install floor tiles until they are same temperature as space where they are to be installed. 1. Move resilient products and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed at least 48 hours in advance of installation. E. Sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient products immediately before installation. 3.3 FLOOR TILE INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing floor tile. B. Lay out floor tiles from center marks established with principal walls, discounting minor offsets, so tiles at opposite edges of room are of equal width. Adjust as necessary to avoid using cut widths that equal less than onehalf tile at perimeter. 1. Lay tiles square with room axis. C. Match floor tiles for color and pattern by selecting tiles from cartons in the same sequence as manufactured and packaged, if so numbered. Discard broken, cracked, chipped, or deformed tiles. D. Scribe, cut, and fit floor tiles to butt neatly and tightly to vertical surfaces and permanent fixtures including builtin furniture, ca binets, pipes, outlets, and door frames. BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES CORNELL – NCP RESILIENT TILE FLOORING STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 09 65 36 PAGE 5 OF 6 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 E. Extend floor tiles into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, and similar openings. Extend floor tiles to center of door openings. F. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by repeating on floor tiles as marked on substrates. Use chalk or other nonpermanent, nonstaining marking device. G. Adhere floor tiles to flooring substrates using a full spread of adhesive applied to substrate to produce a completed installation without open cracks, voids, raising and puckering at joints, telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks, and other surface imperfections. 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protection of floor tile. B. Perform the following operations immediately after completing floor tile installation: 1. Remove adhesive and other blemishes from exposed surfaces. 2. Sweep and vacuum surfaces thoroughly. 3. Dampmop surfaces to remove marks and soil. C. Protect floor tile products from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period. D. Cover floor tile with Ram Board Protective Card Board secured by painters tape and one layer of hard board or equal until substantial completion by Div 23 and Division 27 Contractors. E. After substantial completion by Division 27 Contractor, but prior to final project closeout, strip factory wax and burn in two coats of wax. Refer to Section 01 77 10 Final Cleaning, as applicable. F. Provide final cleaning – at final acceptance, as directed by Owner. END OF SECTION 096536 BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES CORNELL – NCP RESILIENT TILE FLOORING STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 09 65 36 PAGE 6 OF 6 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 [ PAGE LEFT INTENTIONALLY BLANK ] BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES CORNELL – NCP ANTISTATIC RESILIENT TILE FLOORING STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 09 65 37 PAGE 1 OF 7 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 SECTION 096537 – ANTISTATIC RESILIENT TILE FLOORIN G PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Conductive vinyl composition floor tile. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: For each type of floor tile. Include floor tile layouts, edges, columns, doorways, and seaming plan for sheet flooring. C. Samples for Verification: Fullsize units of each color and pattern of floor tile required. D. Maintenance Data: For each type of floor tile to include in maintenance manuals. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. FireTestResponse Characteristics: As determin ed by testing identical products according to ASTM E 648 or NFPA 253 by a qualified testing agency. 1. Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Class I, not less than 0.45 W/sq. cm. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store floor tile and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather, with ambient temperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 50 deg F or more than 90 deg F Store floor tiles on flat surfaces. BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES CORNELL – NCP ANTISTATIC RESILIENT TILE FLOORING STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 09 65 37 PAGE 2 OF 7 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 70 deg F or more than 95 deg F in spaces to receive floor tile during the following time periods: 1. 48 hours before installation. 2. During installation. 3. 48 hours after installation. B. Close spaces to traffic during floor tile installation. C. Close spaces to traffic for 48 hours after floor tile installation. D. Install floor tile after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed. 1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Floor Tile: Furnish 1 box for every building, of each type, color, and pattern of floor tile installed. Deliver to Owner’s field office. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 VINYL COMPOSITION FLOOR TILE A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: . 1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.; Static Dissipative SDT. B. Provide direct cement application over cured concrete. C. Electrical Resistance ASTM F 150 25,0001,00 0,000 ohms,. D. Wearing Surface: Smooth. E. Thickness: 0.125 inch F. Size: 12 by 12 inches G. Manufacturer: Armstrong H. Color: Blue/Gray 51903 BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES CORNELL – NCP ANTISTATIC RESILIENT TILE FLOORING STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 09 65 37 PAGE 3 OF 7 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 I. Style: Standard Excelon 2.2 BASE MATERIALS A. Base: ASTM F 1861, Type TS rubber, vulcanized thermoset: top set Style B, Cove and as follows: 1. Height: 6 inch. 2. Thickness: 1/8 inch. 3. Finish: Satin. 4. Length: Roll. 5. Color: As selected by Architect from mfg. full range of colors. 6. Accessories: Premolded external corners and end stops. 7. Manufacturers: Johnsonite, Inc. or equal. 2.3 INSTALLATION MATERIALS A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latexmodified, portland cement based or blended hydrauliccementbased form ulation provided or approved by manufacturer for applications indicated. B. StaticControl Adhesive: Provided or approved b y manufacturer; type that maintains electrical continuity of floorcovering s ystem to ground connection. 1. Adhesives shall comply with the following limits for VOC content: a. VCT Adhesives: Not more than 50 g/L. 2. Adhesives shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Public Health’s (formerly, the California Department of Health Services) “Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation of Volatile Organic Chemical Emissions from Indoor Sources Using Environmental Chambers”. C. Grounding Strips: Provided or approved by manufacturer; type and size that maintains electrical continuity of floorcovering s ystem to ground connection. D. Floor Polish: Provide protective, staticcontr ol liquid floor polish products as recommended by floorcovering manufacturerer. BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES CORNELL – NCP ANTISTATIC RESILIENT TILE FLOORING STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 09 65 37 PAGE 4 OF 7 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements specified in other Sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits that might interfere with adhesion of floor tile. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of resilient products. B. Concrete Substrates: Prepare according to ASTM F 710. 1. Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and hardeners. 2. Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by manufacturer. Do not use solvents. 3. Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing. C. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching compound and remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate. D. Do not install floor tiles until they are same temperature as space where they are to be installed. 1. Move resilient products and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed at least 48 hours in advance of installation. E. Sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient products immediately before installation. BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES CORNELL – NCP ANTISTATIC RESILIENT TILE FLOORING STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 09 65 37 PAGE 5 OF 7 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 3.3 FLOOR TILE INSTALLATION A. Install staticcontrol resilient flooring accord ing to manufacturer’s written instructions B. Embed grounding strips in staticcontr ol adhesive. Extend grounding strips beyond perimeter of staticcontrol resilient floorcovering surfaces to ground connections. C. Scribe, cut, and fit staticcontrol resilient fl ooring to butt neatly and tightly to vertical surfaces and permanent fixtures including builtin furniture, cabinets, pipes, outlets, and door frames. D. Install staticcontrol resilient flooring on cov ers for telephone and electrical ducts, and similar items in installation areas. Maintain overall continuity of color and pattern with pieces of staticcontrol resilient flooring installed on covers. Tightly adhere staticcontrol resilient flooring edges to substrates that abut covers and to cover perimeters. E. Adhere staticcontrol resilient flooring to subs trates using a full spread of staticcontrol adhesive applied to substrate to pro duce a completed installation without open cracks, voids, raising and puckering at joints, telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks, and other surface imperfections. 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protection of floor tile. B. Perform the following operations immediately after completing floor tile installation: 1. Remove adhesive and other blemishes from exposed surfaces. 2. Sweep and vacuum surfaces thoroughly. 3. Dampmop surfaces to remove marks and soil. C. Protect floor tile products from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period. D. Cover floor tile with Ram Board Protective Card Board secured by painters tape and one layer of hard board or equal until substantial completion by Div 23 and Division 27 Contractors. E. After substantial completion by Division 27 Contractor, but prior to final project closeout. If recommended in writing by manufacturer, apply protective staticcontrol floor polish formulated t o maintain or enhance floor covering's electrical properties; ensure staticcontrol resilient flooring BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES CORNELL – NCP ANTISTATIC RESILIENT TILE FLOORING STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 09 65 37 PAGE 6 OF 7 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 surfaces are free from soil, staticcontrol adhesiv e, and surface blemishes. Do not apply standard wax. a. Verify that both floor polish and its application method are approved by manufacturer and that floor polish will not leave an insulating film that reduces staticcontrol resilient flooring's ef fectiveness for static control. F. Provide final cleaning – at final acceptance, as directed by Owner. END OF SECTION 096536 BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES CORNELL – NCP ANTISTATIC RESILIENT TILE FLOORING STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 09 65 37 PAGE 7 OF 7 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 [ PAGE LEFT INTENTIONALLY BLANK ] BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES CORNELL – NCP INTERIOR PAINTING STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 09 91 23 PAGE 1 OF 10 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 SECTION 099123 INTERIOR PAINTING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division01 General Re quirements Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on the following interior substrates: 1. Concrete. 2. Clay masonry. 3. Concrete masonry units (CMU). 4. Steel. 5. Wood. 6. Gypsum board. 7. Plaster. 8. Aluminum (not anodized or otherwise coated). 9. Cotton or canvas insulation covering. 10. Galvanized metal. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Furnish for each type of product used, include MSDS as applicable. B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of topcoat product indicated. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. MPI Standards: 1. Products: Complying with MPI standards indicated and listed in "MPI Approved Products List." 2. Preparation and Workmanship: Comply with requirements in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual" for products and paint systems indicated. BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES CORNELL – NCP INTERIOR PAINTING STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 09 91 23 PAGE 2 OF 10 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in wellventilated areas with ambient temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 deg F (7 deg C). 1. Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 2. Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Apply paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and ambient air temperatures are between 50 and 95 deg F (10 and 35 deg C). B. Do not apply paints when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at temperatures less than 5 deg F (3 deg C) above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Benjamin Moore & Co. 2. SherwinWilliams Company (The). 3. Tamms Industries, Inc. 4. ChemRex. 5. AntiStatic Industries 2.2 PAINT, GENERAL A. Material Compatibility: 1. Provide materials for use within each paint system that are compatible with one another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience. 2. For each coat in a paint system, provide products recommended in writing by manufacturers of topcoat for use in paint system and on substrate indicated. B. Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 2.3 BLOCK FILLERS A. Interior/Exterior Latex Block Filler: MPI #4. BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES CORNELL – NCP INTERIOR PAINTING STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 09 91 23 PAGE 3 OF 10 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 1. VOC Content: E Range of E3. 2.4 PRIMERS/SEALERS A. Interior Latex Primer/Sealer: MPI #50. 1. VOC Content: E Range of E3. 2.5 LATEX PAINTS A. Institutional LowOdor/VOC Latex (Eggshell): MP I #145 (Gloss Level 3). 1. VOC Content: E Range of E3. 2. Environmental Performance Rating: EPR 4.5. B. Institutional LowOdor/VOC Latex (Semigloss): M PI #147 (Gloss Level 5). 1. VOC Content: E Range of E3. 2. Environmental Performance Rating: EPR 3. 2.6 FLOOR COATINGS A. Interior/Exterior Clear Concrete Floor Sealer (Water Based): MPI #99. 1. VOC Content: E Range of E1. 2.7 INTERIOR ALKYD DRY FOG/FALL: MPI #55. 1. VOC Content: E Range of E3. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of work. B. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture meter as follows: 1. Concrete: 12 percent. 2. Masonry (Clay and CMU): 12 percent. 3. Wood: 15 percent. 4. Gypsum Board: 12 percent. 5. Plaster: 12 percent. C. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existing finishes and primers. BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES CORNELL – NCP INTERIOR PAINTING STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 09 91 23 PAGE 4 OF 10 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 D. Begin coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and surfaces are dry. 1. Beginning coating application constitutes Contractor's acceptance of substrates and conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual" applicable to substrates indicated. B. Remove plates, machined surfaces, and similar items already in place that are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide surfaceapplied protecti on before surface preparation and painting. 1. After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to reinstall items that were removed. Remove surfaceapplied protection if any. 2. Do not paint over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates. C. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dirt, oil, grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulants. 1. Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers as required to produce paint systems indicated. D. Concrete Substrates: Remove release agents, curing compounds, efflorescence, and chalk. Do not paint surfaces if moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces to be painted exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions. E. Clay Masonry Substrates: Remove efflorescence and chalk. Do not paint surfaces if moisture content of surfaces or alkalinities of mortar joints to be painted exceed that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions. F. Concrete Masonry Substrates: Remove efflorescence and chalk. Do not paint surfaces if moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces to be painted exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions. G. Steel Substrates: Remove rust and loose mill scale. Clean using methods recommended in writing by paint manufacturer. H. GalvanizedMetal Substrates: Remove grease and oil residue from galvanized sheet metal fabricated from coil stock by mechanical methods to produce clean, lightly etched surfaces that promote adhesion of subsequently applied paints. BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES CORNELL – NCP INTERIOR PAINTING STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 09 91 23 PAGE 5 OF 10 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 I. Wood Substrates: 1. Scrape and clean knots, and apply coat of knot sealer before applying primer. 2. Sand surfaces that will be exposed to view, and dust off. 3. Prime edges, ends, faces, undersides, and backsides of wood. 4. After priming, fill holes and imperfections in the finish surfaces with putty or plastic wood filler. Sand smooth when dried. J. Gypsum Board Substrates: Do not begin paint application until finishing compound is dry and sanded smooth. K. Plaster Substrates: Do not begin paint application until plaster is fully cured and dry. L. Aluminum Substrates: Remove surface oxidation. M. Cotton or Canvas Insulation Covering Substrates: Remove dust, dirt, and other foreign material that might impair bond of paints to substrates. 3.3 APPLICATION A. Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Paint front and backsides of access panels, removable or hinged covers, and similar hinged items to match exposed surfaces. B. If undercoats or other conditions show through topcoat, apply additional coats until cured film has a uniform paint finish, color, and appearance. C. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color breaks. 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from Project site. B. After completing paint application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paints by washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces. C. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition. D. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces. BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES CORNELL – NCP INTERIOR PAINTING STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 09 91 23 PAGE 6 OF 10 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 3.5 PAINTING MECHANICAL, ELECTRICAL and COMMUNICATION WORK: A. Paint items exposed in equipment rooms, new Telecommunication Rooms and other occupied spaces including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Architectural Work: a. Newly exposed, existing wall and existing deck surfaces in each new Telecommunication Rooms. Clean, patch, prime and paint, EVEN if not called for on the drawings. b. All existing and new wall surfaces in each new Telecommunication Rooms. Clean, patch, prime and paint, EVEN if not called for on the drawings. c. All existing and new suspended ceiling surfaces in each new Telecommunication Rooms. Clean, patch, prime and paint, EVEN if not called for on the drawings. 2. Mechanical Work: a. Uninsulated metal piping. b. Uninsulated plastic piping. c. Pipe hangers and supports. d. Duct, equipment, and pipe insulation having cotton or canvas insulation covering or other paintable jacket material. e. Mechanical equipment that is indicated to have a factoryprimed finish for field painting. f. Paint new and existing exposed duct occurring in new Telecommunication Rooms, even if not indicated on the AMEP plans. Clean and prime existing as called for. 3. Electrical and Communication Work: a. Electrical equipment that is indicated to have a factoryprimed finish for field painting. b. Paint exposed conduit and electrical equipment occurring in finished areas. c. Paint new and existing: exposed electrical, exposed communication conduit exposed plywood and exposed electrical equipment occurring in new Telecommunication Rooms, even if not indicated on the AMEP plans. Clean and prime existing as called for. B. Paint shopprimed equipment. C. Remove unfinished louvers, grilles, covers, and access panels on mechanical and electrical components and paint separately. D. Prime and paint interior and exterior insulated and exposed pipes, conduit, boxes, insulated and exposed ducts, hangers, brackets, collars and supports, except where items are prefinished. BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES CORNELL – NCP INTERIOR PAINTING STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 09 91 23 PAGE 7 OF 10 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 E. Exposed Conduit, Surface Mounted Boxes, Exposed Pullboxes, Exposed Cable Tray and raceways: As called for on the Drawings. F. Refer to Telecommunications drawings for additional specifics of painting of conduits, cable trays and telecom equipment. 3.6 INTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE A. Concrete Substrates, Traffic Surfaces: 1. WaterBased Clear Sealer System: MPI INT 3.2G. a. First Coat: Interior/exterior clear concrete floor sealer (water based). b. Topcoat: Interior/exterior clear concrete floor sealer (water based). B. Concrete Substrates, Nontraffic Surfaces: 1. Institutional LowOdor/VOC Latex System: MPI IN T 3.1M. a. Prime Coat: Institutional lowodor/VOC interior latex matching topcoat. b. Intermediate Coat: Institutional lowodor/VOC i nterior latex matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Institutional lowodor/VOC interior late x (eggshell). C. ClayMasonry Substrates: 1. Institutional LowOdor/VOC Latex System: MPI IN T 4.1M. a. Prime Coat: Institutional lowodor/VOC interior latex matching topcoat. b. Intermediate Coat: Institutional lowodor/VOC i nterior latex matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Institutional lowodor/VOC interior la tex (eggshell). D. CMU Substrates: 1. Institutional LowOdor/VOC Latex System: MPI IN T 4.2E. a. Prime Coat: Interior/exterior latex block filler. b. Intermediate Coat: Institutional lowodor/VOC i nterior latex matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Institutional lowodor/VOC interior la tex (eggshell). E. Steel Substrates: 1. Institutional LowOdor/VOC Latex System: MPI IN T 5.1S. a. Prime Coat: Rustinhibitive primer (water based ). BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES CORNELL – NCP INTERIOR PAINTING STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 09 91 23 PAGE 8 OF 10 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 b. Intermediate Coat: Institutional lowodor/VOC i nterior latex matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Institutional lowodor/VOC interior la tex (semigloss). F. Wood Panel Substrates: Including painted plywood. 1. Institutional LowOdor/VOC Latex System: MPI IN T 6.4T. a. Prime Coat: Interior latexbased wood primer. b. Intermediate Coat: Institutional lowodor/VOC i nterior latex matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Institutional lowodor/VOC interior la tex (eggshell). G. Gypsum Board Substrates: 1. Institutional LowOdor/VOC Latex System: MPI IN T 9.2M. a. Prime Coat: Interior latex primer/sealer. b. Intermediate Coat: Institutional lowodor/VOC i nterior latex matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Institutional lowodor/VOC interior la tex (eggshell). H. Plaster Substrates: 1. Institutional LowOdor/VOC Latex System: MPI IN T 9.2M. a. Prime Coat: Interior latex primer/sealer. b. Intermediate Coat: Institutional lowodor/VOC i nterior latex matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Institutional lowodor/VOC interior la tex (eggshell). I. Aluminum (Not Anodized or Otherwise Coated) Substrates: 1. Latex System: MPI INT 5.4H. a. Prime Coat: Quickdrying primer for aluminum. b. Intermediate Coat: Interior latex matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Interior latex (semigloss). J. Cotton or Canvas InsulationCovering Substrates: Including pipe and duct coverings. 1. Latex System: MPI INT 10.1A. a. Prime Coat: Interior latex primer/sealer. b. Intermediate Coat: Interior latex matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Interior latex (eggshell). K. Exposed Structural Ceilings Ferrous and Galvanized Metal: BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES CORNELL – NCP INTERIOR PAINTING STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 09 91 23 PAGE 9 OF 10 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 1. Waterborne Acrylic Coating, Flat Finish with flash rust resistance and low odor (White or Black only). a. Primer: SW Kem Bond HS on Steel if not factory pr imed. b. First Coat: SW Waterborne Acrylic Dryfall (B42). c. Second Coat: SW Waterborne Acrylic Dryfall (B42). L. Ferrous Metal: 1. SemiGloss Acrylic Enamel Finish: Two coats ove r primer with total dry film thickness not less than 2.5 mils/coat. a. Primer Coat: SW Kem Kromik Universal Primer (B 50Z). b. First Coat: SW DTM Acrylic Enamel (B66100). c. Second Coat: SW DTM Acrylic Enamel (B66100). END OF SECTION 099123 BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES CORNELL – NCP INTERIOR PAINTING STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 09 91 23 PAGE 10 OF 10 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 [ THIS PAGE LEFT INTENTIONALLY BLANK ] BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES CORNELL NCP WIRE MESH PARTITIONS STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS NOVEMBER 2, 2012 SECTION 102213 WIRE MESH PARTITIONS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 DEFINITIONS A. As defined in ASTM E 2016: 1. Intermediate Crimp: Wires pass over one and under the next adjacent wire in both directions, with wires crimped before weaving and with extra crimps between the intersections. 2. Lock Crimp: Deep crimps at points of the intersection that lock wires securely in place. 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Delegated Design: Design wire mesh units, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for wire mesh items. B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 1. Include clearances required for operation of doors. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain wire mesh items from single source from single manufacturer. B. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following: 1. AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code Steel ." 2. AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding Code Sheet Steel ." 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver wire mesh items with cardboard protectors on perimeters of panels and doors and with posts wrapped to provide protection during transit and Projectsite storage. Use vented plastic. B. Inventory wire mesh partition door hardware on receipt and provide secure lockup for wire mesh partition door hardware delivered to Project site. BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES CORNELL NCP WIRE MESH PARTITIONS STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS NOVEMBER 2, 2012 1. Tag each item or package separately with identification and include basic installation instructions with each item or package. C. Deliver keys to Owner by registered mail or overnight package service. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify actual dimensions of construction contiguous with wire mesh units by field measurements before fabrication. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Acorn Wire & Iron Works, Inc. 2. American Woven Wire Corporation. 3. California Wire Products Corporation. 4. Central Wire and Iron. 5. Donaldson, R. J., Inc. 6. Folding Guard Corporation. 7. GS Company (The). 8. Indiana Wire Products, Inc. 9. Jesco Industries, Inc. 10. Kenco Wire and Iron Products Inc. 11. Kentucky Metal Products Co. 12. King Wire Partitions, Inc. 13. Lakeside Wire and Iron Company. 14. Miller Wire Works, Inc. 15. Newark Wire Works Inc. 16. Standard Wire & Steel Works. 17. Wire Crafters, LLC. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Steel Wire: ASTM A 510 (ASTM A 510M). B. Steel Plates, Channels, Angles, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. C. ColdRolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, C ommercial Steel (CS), Type B. D. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Schedule 40 unless another weight is indicated or required by structural loads. E. Square Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500, coldformed str ucturalsteel tubing. BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES CORNELL NCP WIRE MESH PARTITIONS STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS NOVEMBER 2, 2012 F. MetallicCoated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; with G60 (Z180) zinc (galvanized) or A60 (ZF180) zincironalloy (galvannealed) coating designation. G. PaneltoPanel Fasteners: Manufacturer's standa rd steel bolts, nuts, and washers. H. Postinstalled Expansion Anchors: With capability to sustain, without failure, load imposed within factors of safety indicated, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency. 1. Carbon Steel: Zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5 (0.005 mm) for Class SC 1 service condition (mild). 2. Stainless Steel: ASTM F 593 and ASTM F 594, Alloy Group 1 or 2 (ASTM F 738M and ASTM F 836M, Alloy Group 1 or 4), for bolts and nuts; ASTM A 276 or ASTM A 666, Type 304 or 316, for anchors. 3. For Postinstalled Anchors in Concrete: Capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to four times the loads imposed. 4. For Postinstalled Anchors in Grouted Masonry Units: Capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to six times the loads imposed. I. PowerActuated Fasteners in Concrete: Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated and fabricated from corrosionresistant materials; with clips or other accessory devices for attaching hangers of type indicated, and with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 10 times that imposed by wire mesh construction, as determined by testing per ASTM E 1190, conducted by a qualified testing and inspecting agency. J. Universal Shop Primer: Fastcuring, lead and c hromatefree, universal modifiedalkyd primer, complying with MPI#79. 1. Use primer containing pigments that make it easily distinguishable from zincrich primer. 2.3 STANDARDDUTY WIRE MESH PARTITIONS A. Mesh: 0.135inch (3.5mm) diameter, intermedi atecrimp steel wire woven into 11/2inch (38mm) diamond mesh. B. Vertical Panel Framing: 11/4by5/8by0.097i nch (32by16by2.5mm) coldrolled, Cshaped steel channels with 1/4inch (6mm) diameter bolt holes spaced not more than 18 inches (450 mm) o.c. along center of framing. C. Horizontal Panel Framing: 1by1/2by1/8inch (25by13by3mm) cold rolled steel channels. D. Horizontal Panel Stiffeners: 2 coldrolled stee l channels, not less than 1 by 3/8 by 1/8 inch (25 by 9.5 by 3 mm), bolted or riveted toe to toe through mesh or 1by1/2by1/8inch (25by13by3mm) coldrol led steel channels with wire woven through. BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES CORNELL NCP WIRE MESH PARTITIONS STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS NOVEMBER 2, 2012 E. Top Capping Bars: 21/4by1inch (57by25mm) coldrolled steel channels. F. Line Posts: 3inchby4.1lb (76mmby1.9kg) or 31/2by11/4by0.127 inch (89by32by3.2mm) steel channels; with 5by 18by1/4inch (125by 450by6mm) steel base plates punched for attachme nt to floor. G. Floor Shoes: Steel, cast iron, or cast aluminum, not less than 2 inches (50 mm) high; sized to suit vertical framing, drilled for attachment to floor, and with set screws for leveling adjustment. H. Swinging Doors: Fabricated from same mesh as partitions, with framing fabricated from 11/4by1/2by1/8inch (32by13 by3mm) steel channels or Cchannels, banded with 11/4by1/8inch (32by 3mm) flat steel bar cover plates on [3] [4] sides, and with 1/8inch (3mm) thick angle str ike bar and cover on strike jamb. 1. Hinges: Fullsurface type, 3by3inch (76by 76mm) steel, 11/2 pairs per door; bolted, riveted, or welded to door and jamb framing. 2. Padlock Lug: Mortised into door framing and enclosed with steel cover. 3. Cylinder Lock: Mortise type with manufacturer's standard cylinder; operated by key outside and recessed turn knob inside. I. Accessories: 1. Sheet Metal Base: Not less than 0.060inch (1.5mm) thick, coldrolled steel sheet. 2. Adjustable Filler Panels: Not less than 0.060i nch (1.5mm) thick, cold rolled steel sheet; capable of filling openings from 2 to 12 inches (50 to 300 mm). 3. Wall Clips: Manufacturer's standard, coldrolle d steel sheet; allowing up to 1 inch (25 mm) of adjustment. J. Finish for Uncoated Ferrous Steel: Bakedenamel finish unless otherwise indicated. 1. Color: As selected from manufacturer's full range. 2.4 FABRICATION A. General: Fabricate wire mesh items from components of sizes not less than those indicated. Use largersized components as re commended by wire mesh item manufacturer. As required for complete installation, provide bolts, hardware, and accessories with manufacturer's standard finishes. 1. Fabricate wire mesh items to be readily disassembled. 2. Welding: Weld corner joints of framing and grind smooth, leaving no evidence of joint. B. StandardDuty Wire Mesh Partitions: Fabricate w ire mesh partitions with cutouts for pipes, ducts, beams, and other items indicated. Finish edges of cutouts to provide a neat, protective edge. BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES CORNELL NCP WIRE MESH PARTITIONS STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS NOVEMBER 2, 2012 1. Mesh: Securely clinch mesh to framing. 2. Framing: Fabricate framing with mortise and tenon corner construction. a. Provide horizontal stiffeners as indicated or, if not indicated, as required by panel height and as recommended by wire mesh partition manufacturer. Weld horizontal stiffeners to vertical framing. b. Fabricate partition and door framing with slotted holes for connecting adjacent panels. 3. Fabricate wire mesh partitions with 3 inches (76 mm) of clear space between finished floor and bottom horizontal framing. 4. Fabricate wire mesh partitions with bottom horizontal framing flush with finished floor. 5. Doors: Align bottom of door with bottom of adjacent panels. a. For doors that do not extend full height of partition, provide transom over door, fabricated from same mesh and framing as partition panels. 6. Hardware Preparation: Mortise, reinforce, drill, and tap doors and framing as required to install hardware. 2.5 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping. 2.6 STEEL AND IRON FINISHES A. Galvanizing: Hotdip galvanize items as indicat ed to comply with applicable standard listed below: 1. ASTM A 123/A 123M, for galvanizing steel and iron components. 2. ASTM A 153/A 153M, for galvanizing steel and iron hardware. 3. Preparation for Shop Priming: After galvanizing, thoroughly clean wire mesh components of grease, dirt, oil, flux, and other foreign matter, and treat with metallicphosphate process. B. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated ferrousmetal surfaces to comply with minimum requirements indicated below for SSPC surface preparation specifications and environmental exposure conditions of installed metal fabrications: 1. Ineriors (SSPC Zone 1A): SSPC_SP 3, “Power Tool Cleaning.” C. Shop Priming: Apply shop primer to uncoated surfaces of metal fabrications, except those with galvanized finishes and those to be embedded in concrete or masonry, unless otherwise indicated. Comply with SSPCPA 1, "Paint BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES CORNELL NCP WIRE MESH PARTITIONS STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS NOVEMBER 2, 2012 Application Specification No. 1: Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting. 1. Stripe paint corners, crevices, bolts, welds, and sharp edges. D. BakedEnamel or PowderCoat Finish: Immediately after cleaning and pretreating, apply manufacturer's standard 2coat, bakedon finish, suitable for use indicated, consisting of prime coat and thermosetting topcoat, with a minimum dry film thickness of 1 mil (0.025 mm) for topcoat. 1. Color and Gloss: As selected from manufacturer's full range. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Examine floors for suitable conditions where wire mesh items will be installed. C. Examine walls to which wire mesh items will be attached for properly located blocking, grounds, and other solid backing for attachment of support fasteners. D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 WIRE MESH PARTITIONS ERECTION A. Anchor wire mesh partitions to floor with 3/8in ch (9.5mm) diameter, postinstalled expansion anchors at 12 inches (305 mm) o.c. through anchor clips located at each post and corner. Shim anchor clips as required to achieve level and plumb installation. 1. Anchors may be set with poweractuated fasteners instead of postinstalled expansion anchors if indicated on Shop Drawings. B. Anchor wire mesh partitions to floor with 3/8in ch (9.5mm) diameter, postinstalled expansion anchors at 12 inches (305 mm) o.c. through floor shoes located at each post and corner. Adjust wire mesh partition posts in floor shoes to achieve level and plumb installation. 1. Anchors may be set with poweractuated fasteners instead of postinstalled expansion anchors if indicated on Shop Drawings. C. Anchor wire mesh partitions to walls at 12 inches (305 mm) o.c. through back corner panel framing and as follows: 1. For concrete and solid masonry anchorage, use drilledin expansion shields and hanger or lag bolts. BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES CORNELL NCP WIRE MESH PARTITIONS STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS NOVEMBER 2, 2012 2. For hollow masonry anchorage, use toggle bolts. 3. For wood stud partitions, use hanger or lag bolts set into wood backing between studs. Coordinate with carpentry work to locate backing members. 4. For steelframed gypsum board assemblies, use ha nger or lag bolts set into wood backing between studs. Coordinate with stud installation to locate backing members. 5. For steelframed gypsum board assemblies, fasten brackets directly to steel framing or concealed reinforcements using selftapping screws of size and type required to support structural loads. D. Secure top capping bars to top framing channels with 1/4inch (6mm) diameter "U" bolts spaced not more than 28 inches (700 mm) o.c. E. Provide line posts at locations indicated or, if not indicated, as follows: 1. On each side of sliding door openings. 2. For partitions that are 7 to 9 feet (2.1 to 2.7 m) high, spaced at 15 to 20 feet (4.6 to 6.1 m) o.c. 3. For partitions that are 10 to 12 feet (3.0 to 3.7 m) high, located between every other panel. 4. For partitions that are more than 12 feet (3.7 m) high, located between each panel. F. Where standardwidth wire mesh partition panels do not fill entire length of run, provide adjustable filler panels to fill openings. G. Install doors complete with door hardware. H. Bolt accessories to wire mesh partition framing. 3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Adjust doors to operate smoothly and easily, without binding or warping. Adjust hardware to function smoothly. Confirm that latches and locks engage accurately and securely without forcing or binding. B. Remove and replace defective work including doors and framing that are warped, bowed, or otherwise unacceptable. C. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas. Paint uncoated and abraded areas with the same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPCPA 1 for touching up shoppainted surfaces. D. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780. END OF SECTION 102213 BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES CORNELLNCP WET PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 21 13 13 – PAGE 1 OF 9 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 SECTION 211313 WETPIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 DEFINITIONS A. StandardPressure Sprinkler Piping: Wetpipe sp rinkler system piping designed to operate at working pressure of 175 psig (1200 kPa) maximum. 1.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTIONS A. WetPipe Sprinkler System: Automatic sprinklers are attached to piping containing water and that is connected to water supply through alarm valve. Water discharges immediately from sprinklers when they are opened. Sprinklers open when heat melts fusible link or destroys frangible device. 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. StandardPressure Piping System Component: List ed for 175psig (1200 kPa) minimum working pressure. B. Delegated Design: Design sprinkler system(s), modifications including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified licensed Fire Sprinkler Contractor, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated. C. Sprinkler system design shall be approved by authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Sprinkler Occupancy Hazard Classifications: a. Telecom Equipment Rooms: Ordinary Hazard, Group 1. b. Corridor, Lobbies, General Offices: Light Hazard. 2. Minimum Density for AutomaticSprinkler Piping D esign: a. OrdinaryHazard, Group 1 Occupancy: 0.15 gpm ov er 1500sq. ft. or entire area if less than 1500 sq. ft. b. Light Hazard: 0.10 gpm over 1500 sq. ft, or entire area if less than 1500 sq. ft. 3. Maximum Protection Area per Sprinkler: Per UL listing. 4. Maximum Protection Area per Sprinkler: a. Telecon Equipment Rooms: 130 sq. ft. (12.1 sq. m). b. Other Areas: According to NFPA 13 recommendations unless otherwise indicated. BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES CORNELLNCP WETPIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 21 13 13 – PAGE 2 OF 9 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 5. Total Combined HoseStream Demand Requirement: According to NFPA 13 unless otherwise indicated: a. LightHazard Occupancies: 100 gpm (6.3 L/s) for 30 minutes. b. OrdinaryHazard Occupancies: 250 gpm (15.75 L/s ) for 60 to 90 minutes. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. 1. Equipment a. Provide manufacturer’s catalog data for each separate piece of equipment which indicates the name of the manufacturer of each item of equipment, with data highlighted to indicate model, size, options, etc. proposed for installation. B. Shop Drawings: For wetpipe sprinkler systems. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. Provide layout drawing of the complete automatic sprinkler system modifications indicating relationship of all other items including HVAC equipment, lighting fixtures, structural members and all other significant items of all piping. Complete details and sections as required to clearly define and clarify the design including details of each type of riser assembly and pipe hangers. C. DelegatedDesign Submittal: For sprinkler syste ms indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. D. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer. E. Approved Sprinkler Piping Drawings: Working plans, prepared according to NFPA 13, that have been approved by authorities having jurisdiction, including hydraulic calculations if applicable. F. Field Test Reports and Certificates: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance requirements and as described in NFPA 13. Include "Contractor's Material and Test Certificate for Aboveground Piping." G. Field qualitycontrol reports. H. Operation and Maintenance Data: For sprinkler specialties to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES CORNELLNCP WETPIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 21 13 13 – PAGE 3 OF 9 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 1. Installer's responsibilities include designing, fabricating, and installing sprinkler system modifications and providing services needed to assume engineering responsibility. a. Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of working plans, calculations, and field test reports by a qualified licensed Fire Sprinkler Contractor. B. NFPA Standards: Sprinkler system equipment, specialties, accessories, installation, and testing shall comply with the following: 1. NFPA 13, "Installation of Sprinkler Systems." 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Interruption of Existing Sprinkler Service: Do not interrupt sprinkler service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary sprinkler service according to requirements indicated: 1. Notify Construction Manager and/or Owner no fewer than two days in advance of proposed interruption of sprinkler service. 2. Do not proceed with interruption of sprinkler service without Construction Manager's written permission. 1.7 COORDINATION A. Coordinate layout and installation of sprinklers with other construction that penetrates ceilings, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, and partition assemblies. 1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Spare Sprinklers: Provide to Owner the number of sprinklers required by NFPA 13 and sprinkler wrench. Include spares of each type of sprinkler used on Project. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS A. Schedule 40, BlackSteel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B. Pipe ends may be factory, shop fabrication or field formed to match joining method. BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES CORNELLNCP WETPIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 21 13 13 – PAGE 4 OF 9 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 B. BlackSteel Pipe Nipples: ASTM A 733, made of A STM A 53/A 53M, standardweight, seamless steel pipe with threaded ends. C. Uncoated, Steel Couplings: ASTM A 865, threaded. D. Uncoated, GrayIron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16 .4, Class 125, standard pattern. E. Malleable or DuctileIron Unions: UL 860. F. CastIron Flanges: ASME 16.1, Class 125. G. Steel Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.5, Class 150. H. Steel Welding Fittings: ASTM A 234/A 234M and ASME B16.9. I. GroovedJoint, SteelPipe Appurtenances: 1. Pressure Rating: 175 psig (1200 kPa) minimum. 2. Uncoated, GroovedEnd Fittings for Steel Piping: ASTM A 47/A 47M, malleableiron casting or ASTM A 536, ductileiron casting; with dimensions matching steel pipe. 3. GroovedEndPipe Couplings for Steel Piping: AW WA C606 and UL 213, rigid pattern, unless otherwise indicated, for steelpipe dimensions. Include ferrous housing sections, EPDMrubber gaske t, and bolts and nuts. J. For buildings with existing sprinkler systems, which use galvanized steel piping, new piping shall be galvanized 2.2 PIPING JOINING MATERIALS A. PipeFlange Gasket Materials: AWWA C110, rubber , flat face, 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) thick or ASME B16.21, nonmetallic and asbestos free. 1. Class 125, CastIron Flanges and Class 150, Bron ze FlatFace Flanges: Fullface gaskets. B. Metal, PipeFlange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1 , carbon steel unless otherwise indicated. 2.3 TRIM AND DRAIN VALVES A. General Requirements: 1. Standard: UL's "Fire Protection Equipment Directory" listing or "Approval Guide," published by FM Global, listing. BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES CORNELLNCP WETPIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 21 13 13 – PAGE 5 OF 9 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 2. Pressure Rating: 175 psig (1200 kPa) minimum. 3. Types: Angle, ball, and globe 2.4 SPRINKLER SPECIALTY PIPE FITTINGS A. Branch Outlet Fittings: 1. Standard: UL 213. 2. Pressure Rating: 175 psig (1200 kPa) minimum. 3. Body Material: Ductileiron housing with EPDM s eals and bolts and nuts. 4. Type: MechanicalT and cross fittings. 5. Configurations: Snapon and strapless, ductile iron housing with branch outlets. 6. Size: Of dimension to fit onto sprinkler main and with outlet connections as required to match connected branch piping. 7. Branch Outlets: Grooved, plainend pipe, or thr eaded. B. Adjustable Drop Nipples: 1. Standard: UL 1474. 2. Pressure Rating: 250 psig (1725 kPa) minimum. 3. Body Material: Steel pipe with EPDMrubber Ori ng seals. 4. Size: Same as connected piping. 5. Length: Adjustable. 6. Inlet and Outlet: Threaded. 2.5 SPRINKLERS A. General Requirements: 1. Standard: UL's "Fire Protection Equipment Directory" listing or "Approval Guide," published by FM Global, listing. 2. Pressure Rating for Automatic Sprinklers: 175 psig (1200 kPa) minimum. B. Automatic Sprinklers with HeatResponsive Elemen t: BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES CORNELLNCP WETPIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 21 13 13 – PAGE 6 OF 9 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 1. Nonresidential Applications: UL 199. 2. Characteristics: Nominal 1/2inch (12.7mm) ori fice with Discharge Coefficient K of 5.6, and for "Ordinary" temperature classification rating unless otherwise indicated or required by application. 3. For buildings with existing sprinkler systems, provide the same make and model sprinkler heads that are used in the building. C. Sprinkler Finishes: 1. Chrome plated. 2. Bronze. 3. Factory painted finish where required to match existing. D. Sprinkler Escutcheons: Materials, types, and finishes for the following sprinkler mounting applications. Escutcheons for concealed, flush, and semi recessedtype sprinklers are specified with sprinkl ers. 1. Ceiling Mounting: Chromeplated steel, one piec e, flat or Chromeplated steel, two piece, with 1inch (25mm) vertical adju stment or Plastic, white finish, one piece, flat. 2. Sidewall Mounting: Chromeplated steel or Plast ic, white finish, either one or two piece. E. Sprinkler Guards: 1. Standard: UL 199. 2. Type: Wire cage with fastening device for attaching to sprinkler. 2.6 DRY SPRINKLER ASSEMBLY A. Dry sprinkler assembly shall be of the sidewall type as indicated. Assembly shall include an integral escutcheon. Maximum length shall not exceed maximum indicated in UL Fire Prot Dir. Sprinklers shall have a polished chrome finish. 2.7 SLEEVES A. CastIron Wall Pipe Sleeves: Cast of fabricated of cast iron and equivalent to ductileiron pressure pipe, with plain ends and int egral waterstop unless otherwise indicated. B. Galvanized –SteelSheet Sleeves: 0.0239inch (0 .6 mm) minimum thickness, round tube closed with welded longitudinal joint. BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES CORNELLNCP WETPIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 21 13 13 – PAGE 7 OF 9 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 2.8 GROUT A. Standard: ASTM C 1107, Grade B, posthardening and volume adjusting, dry, hydrauliccement grout. B. Characteristics: Nonshrink, and recommended for interior and exterior applications. C. Design Mix: 5000 psi (34MPa), 28day compressi ve strength. D. Packaging: Premixed and factor packaged. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 PIPING INSTALLATION A. Locations and Arrangements: Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping. Install piping as indicated, as far as practical. 1. Deviations from approved working plans for piping require written approval from authorities having jurisdiction. File written approval with Architect before deviating from approved working plans. B. Piping Standard: Comply with requirements for installation of sprinkler piping in NFPA 13. C. Use listed fittings to make changes in direction, branch takeoffs from mains, and reductions in pipe sizes. D. Install unions adjacent to each valve in pipes NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller. E. Install hangers and supports for sprinkler system piping according to NFPA 13. Comply with requirements for hanger materials in NFPA 13. F. Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls and ceilings. G. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls and ceilings. 3.2 JOINT CONSTRUCTION A. Install couplings, unions, nipples, and transition and special fittings that have finish and pressure ratings same as or higher than system's pressure rating for aboveground applications unless otherwise indicated. B. Ream ends of pipes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe. C. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipes and fittings before assembly. BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES CORNELLNCP WETPIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 21 13 13 – PAGE 8 OF 9 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 D. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows: 1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads. 2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or damaged. E. SteelPiping, CutGrooved Joints: Cut squareed ge groove in end of pipe according to AWWA C606. Assemble coupling with housing, gasket, lubricant, and bolts. Join steel pipe and grooved end fittings according to AWWA C606 for steelpipe joints. F. SteelPiping, RollGrooved Joints: Roll rounded edge groove in end of pipe according to AWWA C606. Assemble coupling with housing, gasket, lubricant, and bolts. Join steel pipe and grooved end fittings according to AWWA C606 for steelpipe grooved joints. 3.3 VALVE AND SPECIALTIES INSTALLATION A. Install drain valves according to NFPA 13 and authorities having jurisdiction. 3.4 SPRINKLER INSTALLATION A. Install sprinklers in suspended ceilings in center of narrow dimension of acoustical ceiling panels. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform tests and inspections. B. Tests and Inspections: 1. Leak Test: After installation, charge systems and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist. 2. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. C. Sprinkler piping system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. D. Prepare test and inspection reports. 3.6 CLEANING A. Clean dirt and debris from sprinklers. BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES CORNELLNCP WETPIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 21 13 13 – PAGE 9 OF 9 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 B. Remove and replace sprinklers with paint other than factory finish. END OF SECTION 211313 BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES CORNELL – NCP DRY PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 21 13 16 – PAGE 1 of 7 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 SECTION 211316 DRYPIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS Part 1 GENERAL 1.1 DEFINITIONS A. StandardPressure Sprinkler Piping: Drypipe sp rinkler system piping designed to operate at working pressure 175 psig (1200 kPa) maximum. 1.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTIONS A. DryPipe Sprinkler System: Automatic sprinklers are attached to piping containing compressed air. Opening of sprinklers releases compressed air and permits water pressure to open drypipe valve. Water then flows into piping and discharges from sprinklers that are open. 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. StandardPressure Piping System Component: List ed for 175psig (1200 kPa) minimum working pressure. B. Delegated Design: Design sprinkler system(s) modifications, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified licensed Fire Sprinkler Contractor, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated. C. Sprinkler system design shall be approved by authorities having jurisdiction. 1. AutomaticSprinkler Piping Design: a. Modify existing Pipe Schedule System in compliance with pipe sizes for Ordinary Hazard Pipe Schedule for ITR, electric, and storage rooms. Use light hazard pipe schedule for offices and corridors. 2. Maximum Protection Area per Sprinkler: Per UL listing. 3. Total Combined HoseStream Demand Requirement: According to NFPA 13. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Provide manufacturer’s catalog data for each separate piece of equipment which indicates the name of the manufacturer of each item of equipment, with data highlighted to indicate model, size, options etc., proposed for installation. B. Shop Drawings: For drypipe sprinkler systems. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. Provide layout drawing of the complete automatic sprinkler system modifications indicating relationship of all other items including HVAC equipment, lighting fixtures, structural members, and all other significant items. Clearly indicate elevations and pitch of all piping. Complete details and sections as required to clearly define and clarify the design including details of each type of pipe hanger. BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES CORNELL – NCP DRYPIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 21 13 16 – PAGE 2 of 7 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 C. DelegatedDesign Submittal: For sprinkler syste ms indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data by the qualified licensed Fire Sprinkler Contractor responsible for their preparation. 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For sprinkler specialties to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. Furnish NFPA 13 test reports. 1.6 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Spare Sprinklers: Include number of sprinklers required by NFPA 13 and sprinkler wrench. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: 1. Installer's responsibilities include designing, fabricating, and installing sprinkler systems and providing design services needed to assume engineering responsibility. a. Design Responsibility: Preparation of working plans, calculations, and field test reports by a qualified licensed Fire Sprinkler Contractor. B. NFPA Standards: Sprinkler system equipment, specialties, accessories, installation, and testing shall comply with the following: 1. NFPA 13, "Installation of Sprinkler Systems." 1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Interruption of Existing Sprinkler Service: Do not interrupt sprinkler service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary sprinkler service according to requirements indicated: 1. Notify Construction Manager and/or Owner no fewer than two days in advance of proposed interruption of sprinkler service. 2. Do not proceed with interruption of sprinkler service without Construction Manager's and/or Owner's written permission. 1.9 COORDINATION A. Coordinate layout and installation of sprinklers with other construction that penetrates ceilings, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, and partition assemblies. BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES CORNELL – NCP DRYPIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 21 13 16 – PAGE 3 of 7 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 1.10 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Spare Sprinkler: Provide to Owner the number of sprinklers required by NFPA 13 and sprinkler wrench. Include spares of each type of sprinkler used on Project. Part 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS A. Standard Weight, GalvanizedSteel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B. Pipe ends may be factory, fabrication shop, or field formed to match joining method. B. GalvanizedSteel Pipe Nipples: ASTM A 733, made of ASTM A 53/A 53M, standardweight, seamless steel pipe with threaded ends. C. Galvanized, Steel Couplings: ASTM A 865, threaded. D. Galvanized, GrayIron Threaded Fittings: ASME B 16.4, Class 125, standard pattern. E. Malleable or DuctileIron Unions: UL 860. F. CastIron Flanges: ASME B16.1, Class 125. G. GroovedJoint, SteelPipe Appurtenances: 1. Pressure Rating: 175 psig (1200 kPa) minimum. 2. Galvanized, GroovedEnd Fittings for Steel Pipin g: ASTM A 47/A 47M, malleableiron casting or ASTM A 536, ductileiron casting; with dimensions matching steel pipe. 3. GroovedEndPipe Couplings for Steel Piping: AW WA C606 and UL 213, rigid pattern, unless otherwise indicated, for steelpipe dimensions. Include ferrous housing sections, EPDMrubber gaske t, and bolts and nuts. 2.2 PIPING JOINING MATERIALS A. PipeFlange Gasket Materials: AWWA C110, rubber , flat face, 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) thick or ASME B16.21, nonmetallic and asbestos free. 1. Class 125, CastIron FlatFace Flanges: Fullfa ce gaskets. B. Metal, PipeFlange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1 , carbon steel unless otherwise indicated. 2.3 TRIM AND DRAIN VALVES A. General Requirements: BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES CORNELL – NCP DRYPIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 21 13 16 – PAGE 4 of 7 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 1. Standard: UL's "Fire Protection Equipment Directory" listing or "Approval Guide," published by FM Global, listing. 2. Pressure Rating: 175 psig (1200 kPa) minimum. 3. Types: Angle, Ball, and Globe. 2.4 SPRINKLER SPECIALTY PIPE FITTINGS A. General Requirements for DryPipeSystem Fitting s: UL listed for drypipe service. B. Branch Outlet Fittings: 1. Standard: UL 213. 2. Pressure Rating: 175 psig (1200 kPa) minimum. 3. Body Material: Ductileiron housing with EPDM s eals and bolts and nuts. 4. Type: MechanicalT and cross fittings. 5. Configurations: Snapon and strapless, ductile iron housing with branch outlets. 6. Size: Of dimension to fit onto sprinkler main and with outlet connections as required to match connected branch piping. 7. Branch Outlets: Grooved, plainend pipe, or thr eaded. C. Branch Line Testers: 1. Standard: UL 199. 2. Pressure Rating: 175 psig (1200 kPa) minimum. 3. Body Material: Brass. 4. Size: Same as connected piping. 5. Inlet: Threaded. 6. Drain Outlet: Threaded and capped. 7. Branch Outlet: Threaded, for sprinkler. 2.5 SPRINKLERS A. General Requirements: 1. Standard: UL's "Fire Protection Equipment Directory" listing or "Approval Guide," published by FM Global, listing. 2. Pressure Rating for Automatic Sprinklers: 175 psig (1200 kPa) minimum. B. Automatic Sprinklers with HeatResponsive Elemen t: 1. Nonresidential Applications: UL 199. 2. Characteristics: Nominal 1/2inch (12.7mm) ori fice with discharge coefficient K of 5.6, and for "Ordinary" temperature classification rating unless otherwise indicated or required by application. C. Sprinkler Finishes: Match existing finishes 1. Chrome plated. 2. Bronze. D. Sprinkler Escutcheons: Materials, types, and finishes for the following sprinkler mounting applications. Escutcheons for flush, and recessedtype sprinklers are specified with sprinklers. BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES CORNELL – NCP DRYPIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 21 13 16 – PAGE 5 of 7 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 1. Ceiling Mounting: Chromeplated steel, one piec e, flat or Chromeplated steel, two piece, with 1inch (25mm) vertical adju stment. 2. Sidewall Mounting: Chromeplated steel or one p iece. E. Sprinkler Guards: 1. Standard: UL 199. 2. Type: Wire cage with fastening device for attaching to sprinkler. Part 3 EXECUTION 3.1 PIPING INSTALLATION A. Locations and Arrangements: Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping. Install piping as indicated, as far as practical. 1. Deviations from approved working plans for piping require written approval from authorities having jurisdiction. B. Piping Standard: Comply with requirements in NFPA 13 for installation of sprinkler piping. C. Use listed fittings to make changes in direction, branch takeoffs from mains, and reductions in pipe sizes. D. Install flanges, flange adapters, or couplings for groovedend piping on valves, apparatus, and equipment having NPS 21/2 (DN 65) and larger end connections. E. Install sprinkler piping with drains for complete system drainage. F. Install hangers and supports for sprinkler system piping according to NFPA 13. Comply with requirements in NFPA 13 for hanger materials. G. Drain drypipe sprinkler piping. H. Pressurize and check drypipe sprinkler system p iping and airpressure maintenance devices and air compressors. I. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls and ceilings. 3.2 JOINT CONSTRUCTION A. Install couplings, flanges, flanged fittings, unions, nipples, and transition and special fittings that have finish and pressure ratings same as or higher than system's pressure rating for aboveground applications unless otherwise indicated. B. Install flanges, flange adapters, or couplings for groovedend piping on valves, apparatus, and equipment having NPS 21/2 (DN 65) and larger end connections. C. Ream ends of pipes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe. BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES CORNELL – NCP DRYPIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 21 13 16 – PAGE 6 of 7 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 D. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipes, and fittings before assembly. E. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material in size, type, and thickness suitable for water service. Join flanges with gasket and bolts according to ASME B31.9. F. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows: 1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads. 2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or damaged. G. SteelPiping, CutGrooved Joints: Cut squareed ge groove in end of pipe according to AWWA C606. Assemble coupling with housing, gasket, lubricant, and bolts. Join steel pipe and grooved end fittings according to AWWA C606 for steelpipe joints. 3.3 VALVE AND SPECIALTIES INSTALLATION A. Install trim and drain valves according to NFPA 13 and authorities having jurisdiction. 3.4 SPRINKLER INSTALLATION A. Install sprinklers in suspended ceilings in center of acoustical ceiling panels. 3.5 IDENTIFICATION A. Install labeling and pipe markers on equipment and piping according to requirements in NFPA 13. 3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform tests and inspections. B. Tests and Inspections: 1. Leak Test: After installation, charge systems and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist. 2. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. 3. Test, and inspect sprinkler systems according to NFPA 13, "Systems Acceptance" Chapter. C. Sprinkler piping system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. D. Prepare test and inspection reports. BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES CORNELL – NCP DRYPIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 21 13 16 – PAGE 7 of 7 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 3.7 CLEANING A. Clean dirt and debris from sprinklers. B. Remove and replace sprinklers with paint other than factory finish. END OF SECTION 21 13 16 BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES CORNELL – NCP MECHANICAL BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 23 01 00 – PAGE 1 OF 9 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 SECTION 230100 MECHANICAL BASIC MATERIALS & METH ODS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 DIVISION 23 DESCRIPTION: The Technical Specifications of this Contract are arranged for the convenience of the Owner and Contractor into divisions of work. The Work of Division 23, Mechanical, is further described in Specification Sections of the 23 00 00 Series and Contractor Contract Drawings of the "M" and “AMEP” series. The organization of this Work into Divisions shall not relieve the Prime Contractor from providing all of the work shown on the complete set of drawings or specified in the complete set of Specifications, whether or not the individual subcontractors correctly identify their respective responsibilities. 1.2 OTHER DIVISION SPECIFICATIONS APPLICABLE TO THIS WORK: To the extent that the Work of this Division or Contract includes the work of other trades, the Contractor for this division shall adhere to the requirements of other Specification Sections. All General Construction work shall be performed in accordance with the provisions of the appropriate Division 02 through Division 26 Sections. 1.3 WORK INCLUDED: A. Provide Mechanical Basic Materials and Methods B. Provide Access Doors or Access Panels C. Provide Fire Wall Sealant D. Provide Hangers, Riser Clamps, Attachments and Rods E. Provide Identification Systems F. Provide Sleeves G. Provide Miscellaneous Painting H. Provide Equipment Installation I. Provide Firestop to Restore Penetrations and Smoke/Fire Barrier Assemblies J. Provide Noise and Vibration Free Installation K. Provide Adjustment and Initial Lubrication L. Provide Maintenance of systems in good condition until final acceptance. M. Provide Permits and Inspections. N. Provide Testing, Adjusting and Balancing (pre and post construction) BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES CORNELL – NCP MECHANICAL BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 23 01 00 – PAGE 2 OF 9 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 1.4 PERMITS AND INSPECTIONS: Division 23 shall be responsible to apply for, obtain and meet the requirements of all permits and inspections required by authorities having jurisdiction for the work of Division 23. Division 23 shall pay all fees associated with these permits and inspections. 1.5 LAWS AND REGULATIONS: Division 23 shall conform with all Federal, State, County, and Municipal Laws, Ordinances and Regulations. Comply with the Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA). 1.6 CONTRACTOR EXAMINATION OF THE SITE: It shall be the responsibility of each prospective Contractor to visit the project site and to examine existing conditions. The Contractor shall be responsible to include under this Division all effort, materials, supplies, temporary installations and other work to relocate, remove or modify existing work as required to complete the work of this Division. 1.7 PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS: A. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to examine the complete project documents including Plans and Specifications thoroughly prior to bid and to notify the Architect/Engineer of any uncertainties or apparent omission, conflicts, or discrepancies between the Plans and Specifications. In any case of a conflict between the Plans and Specifications or between two Specification sections it shall be assumed that the larger capacity or quantity, or higher quality, shall govern until a determination can be made by the Architect/Engineer. B. Plans and Specifications are of abbreviated form. Omitted words or phrases shall be inferred. C. Plans and Specifications are complementary. Provide all work which is either shown or specified or both. D. Where provided on the drawings, typical details shall be assumed to be applied to each installation of the equipment whether or not specifically identified at each point in the Plans. E. The Division 23 Contractor shall assume that all work on the Mechanical Drawings is included in his work unless specifically noted otherwise. 1.8 DEFINITIONS: Where used in the Plans and Specifications the following words and BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES CORNELL – NCP MECHANICAL BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 23 01 00 – PAGE 3 OF 9 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 corresponding definitions shall apply: MSS: Manufacturer’s Standardization Society of the Valve and Fitting Industry Inc. Provide Contractor shall supply, install, startu p, and maintain until final acceptance. Furnish Same definition as Provide. New Work occurring as part of this Project, usuall y employed on a drawing to distinguish from existing work. All work shown on the drawings shall be assumed to be new unless specifically identified as existing. Exist Existing work. Shown Shown on the Plans. Specified Specified on the Technical Specificati ons. HV The Contractor performing the Division 23 He ating and Ventilation work. In the Plans and Specifications, the works "By Div 23" and "By HV" or "By H&V" shall be considered synonymous. Elect or EC the Contractor performing the Divisio n 23 work. In the Plans and Specifications, the work "By Div 26", "By EC" and "By Elect" shall be considered synonymous. Plumb or Plumbing or Plg The Contractor perform ing the Division 23 Plumbing work. In the Plans and Specifications, the words "By Plumb" or "By Plumbing" or "By Plg" shall be considered synonymous. FP The Contractor performing the Division 23 Fi re Protection. In the Plans and Specifications, the words "By Div 23 FP" or "By FP" shall be considered synonymous. 1.9 RELATED WORK NOT INCLUDED: A. Cost of water and electricity for construction by Cornell University. B. Electrical connections by Electrical Contractor specifically shown in their Contract. The Division 26 Contractor is responsible only for the electrical connections included under Division 26 and the electrical drawings. Division 23 Contractor shall provide all other electrical work necessary for satisfactory operation of equipment furnished under Division 23. 1.10 REGULATIONS GOVERNING ASBESTOS: A. The Owner has reported that he has investigated the project site for asbestos containing materials and has scheduled remediation activities if BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES CORNELL – NCP MECHANICAL BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 23 01 00 – PAGE 4 OF 9 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 required. This does not guarantee that the site is 100% asbestos free. B. If any material which appears to possibly contain asbestos is encountered, the Contractor shall: C. Conform to the procedures identified in Section 01 35 23 – Owner Safety Requirements’ (especially, but not limited too, Paragraph 1.3). D. Refer to Section 011000 – Summary of Work, item 1.5 Work By Owner. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCESS DOORS: A. Size 24” x 24” unless otherwise noted. It is to be noted that various type frame are required for specific wall and ceiling finish. Any door having an area exceeding 324 square inches shall have two (2) camlocks. Milcor or approved equal. B. Rating 1. Access doors for shafts shall be 3 hour fire rated. 2. Access doors for dropped ceilings do not require rating. 3. Access doors in corridor wall shall be 11/2 hou r rated. 2.2 FIRE WALL SEALANT: A. Refer to Section 078413 – Penetration Firestop B. Provide product data submittal. 2.3 HANGERS, RISER CLAMPS, ATTACHMENTS AND RODS: A. Hangers 1. Regular: Adjustable clevis type, black steel construction, MSS Type 1. 2. With Insulation Shield: Adjustable clevis type, black steel construction, galvanized steel saddle welded to lower strap, MSS Type 40, of length recommended by manufacturer to prevent crushing insulation. B. Riser clamps 1. Riser clamps shall be of steel construction, twopiece type, MSS Type 42. BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES CORNELL – NCP MECHANICAL BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 23 01 00 – PAGE 5 OF 9 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 C. Attachments 1. CClamps: Clamps shall be of steel construction with locking nut, MSS Type 23. 2. Beam Clamps: Beam clamp shall be of malleable iron construction, MSS Type 21. D. Hanger Rod 1. Hanger rod shall be steel, full threaded type. 2. Rods: Pipe Sizes Rod Diameter Up to 2” 3/8” 2½ to 3” ½” 4” and 5” 5/8” E. Floor Supports 1. Floor support hanger devices shall not be used. F. Wall Hangers 1. Angle iron or unistrut type wall brackets shall not be used. 2.4 IDENTIFICATION SYSTEMS: A. Equipment Labels: 1. Small: Labels shall be adhesive backed plastic tape with embossed letters in contrasting color. Tape shall be 3/8” wide. 2. Large: Labels shall be adhesive backed plastic tape with embossed letters in contrasting color. Tape shall be ¾” wide. 3. Make: Seton Name Plate Company. 2.5 SLEEVES: A. Sheet Metal Sleeves: 10 gauge, galvanized sheet metal, round tube closed with welded longitudinal joint. . B. Steel Sleeves: Schedule 40 galvanized, welded steel pipe, ASTM A53, Grade A. PART 3 EXECUTION BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES CORNELL – NCP MECHANICAL BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 23 01 00 – PAGE 6 OF 9 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 3.1 LAYING OUT WORK: A. The Plans are in part diagrammatic. Contractor shall verify roughin dimensions with fixture Shop Drawings and with the Architectural Plans. Conform to dimensions shown on the Plans in preference to scaling from the mechanical drawings. Provide all fittings and appurtenances required for proper system operation. B. Contractor shall allow for thickness of finishes when roughing in his work. He shall not rough without obtaining accepted Shop Drawings for the actual equipment to be installed. C. Due to the scale of drawings, it is not possible to indicate all offsets, fittings, changes in elevation, etc. which may be required. Make all such changes in piping, ductwork, conduit system, location of equipment, etc., to accommodate work to obstacles encountered, at no increase in compensation. If requested, submit at least five (5) copies of drawings detailing all major deviations or changes. All changes must be approved before installing. D. Plans show general arrangement of piping and connections. Install work substantially as indicated. Verify exact locations and elevations on job. Before installing work, consult other Plans, details and Contractors to determine headroom and work interferences. Examine Architectural Plans for exact location of equipment, fixtures and outlets. Where not definitely located, obtain information from Architect. E. Thoroughly coordinate work with that of other Contractors. Raise piping and drip where necessary. Vent all air pockets in water piping, even though not so indicated. Determine exact route and/or location of each pipe before fabrication and installation. Furnish in writing to Architect, any information necessary to permit work of other trades to be installed properly and without delay. Maintain maximum head room. If plumbing work cannot be installed at least 7’0” above the f loor (in mechanical spaces or basement and higher in finished spaces dependent on ceiling height), consult with the Engineers and obtain approval before proceeding. If directed by Architect or Engineers, prepare composite drawings and sections (scale not less than ¼” = 1’), clearly showing installation of work in relation to work of other trades. F. Should Architect's details, field conditions, change in equipment or Shop Drawing information necessitate an important rearrangement, report same to Engineers and obtain approval before proceeding. G. Install piping, etc. to avoid interferences with removal of coils, filters, belt guards or any operating part of all systems, or operation of overhead or swinging doors. Maintain easy and safe access to valves, controllers, motor starters, and other equipment requiring frequent operation. Maintain opening of access doors, switch boxes, motor starters, panel BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES CORNELL – NCP MECHANICAL BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 23 01 00 – PAGE 7 OF 9 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 boards, etc. Maintain a clear walking space. H. No compensation awarded for extra work because above precautions have not been followed. In event of conflicts, Engineer's decision is final. Contractor fully responsible for unauthorized changes. 3.2 MISCELLANEOUS PAINTING: A. Paint all hangers and exposed or unpainted or ungalvanized iron work in the Plumbing Systems with two brush coats of black rust preventative paint. Touch up any damaged surfaces of factory painted equipment. 3.3 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION: A. It is required of each equipment manufacturer, through the Contractor, to carefully check Plans and Specifications as same affect their particular equipment. Report to Engineers, any discrepancies or contradictions as applied to their particular equipment which prevents proper functioning, servicing, etc. before or at the time when Shop Drawings are submitted. Furnish manufacturer's printed installation instructions for each piece of equipment. Thoroughly instruct contractors' personnel on job, exactly how their equipment shall be installed, connected, lubricated, started up, operated, etc., so that all factory instructions are rigidly followed. B. Install, test, start and operate all equipment only as instructed by manufacturer and in presence of manufacturer's representative, as directed. Follow instructions of manufacturer as noted above. Provide mockup installation of certain typical equipment, if required, such as fixtures, chair carriers, countersinks, etc. as directed, and obtain Architect's and Engineer's approval before proceeding with actual installation of same. C. Contractor shall provide as recommended by manufacturer all necessary incidental valves, fittings, piping, wiring, etc., not supplied by manufacturer or other Contractors, for proper apparatus operation Contractor shall provide accurate information to other Contractors for required services to equipment, such as water supply and waste connections, masonry openings, wiring requirements, etc. Such information shall be complete and correct for particular job. D. If required by Engineers, contractor shall submit satisfactory evidence that equipment, systems, etc. have been installed strictly in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations, have been properly aligned, are properly adjusted, have been properly tested, lubricated, balanced, etc. E. As soon as installed, lubricate and leave in good working order, all motors, bearings, etc., in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. F. Lubrication Chart Provide 81/2” x 11” lubrica tion chart, typed in capital BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES CORNELL – NCP MECHANICAL BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 23 01 00 – PAGE 8 OF 9 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 letters, mounted in wood frame under clear plastic. Hang were directed. Heating Contractor shall provide chart listing all motors. Other Contractors supply information on motors furnished by them. G. List following information: 1. Name and location of equipment. 2. Type of lubrication recommended by manufacturer. 3. Lubrication period recommended by manufacturer. 3.4 EQUIPMENT CHECKOUT AND TESTING: A. Notify Engineers when installation(s) is/are ready for testing, as specified with ample time in advance. Provide all metered and unmetered services, tools, equipment and manpower necessary to perform tests. B. Perform all equipment testing as specified as recommended by manufacturer and directed by Engineers. Demonstrate that all operating and safety devices are in proper working order. C. Perform necessary operating and pressure testing for all piping and equipment which shall be: buried underground, before backfilling; installed in or under slabs, before pouring; buried in building walls, before being buried and installed above furred ceilings before ceiling installation. 3.5 ACCESS DOORS: A. Provide where indicated and where required for access to all equipment. 3.6 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS: A. All components shall be selected for a minimum safety factor of 5. B. All rigid hanger assemblies shall provide for vertical movement after installation by means of threaded adjustment. C. Hanger rods shall be subjected to tensile loads only. Where axial or lateral movement is anticipated, suitable linkages shall be provided. D. Support units from the building structural system, NOT from metal roof decks. E. All units, including pipe attachments, structural attachments, hanger rods, bracing, all necessary accessories and their installation shall be in accordance with NFPA 13 Installation of Sprinkler Systems, latest issue. 3.7 IDENTIFICATION SYSTEMS (General Installation Requirements): A. Coordination: Where identification is to be applied to surfaces which BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES CORNELL – NCP MECHANICAL BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 23 01 00 – PAGE 9 OF 9 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 require insulation, painting or other covering or finish, including valve tags in finished mechanical spaces, install identification after completion of covering and painting. B. Equipment: 1. General: Install engraved plastic laminate sign or plastic equipment marker on or near each major item of mechanical equipment and each operational device, as specified herein if not otherwise specified for each item or device. Provide signs for the following general categories of equipment and operational devices. a. Pumps, fans, and similar motordriven units. 2. Lettering Size: Minimum ¼” high lettering for name of unit where viewing distance is less than 2’ 0”, ½” high for d istances up to 6’ 0”, and proportionately larger lettering for greater distances. Provide secondary lettering ½ to ¾ of size of principal lettering. 3. Test of Signs: In addition to name of identified unit, provide lettering to distinguish between multiple units, inform operator of operational requirements, indicate safety and emergency precautions, and warn of hazards and improper operations. END OF SECTION 23 01 00 BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES CORNELL – NCP HVAC GENERAL PROVISIONS STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 23 01 01 – PAGE 1 OF 4 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 SECTION 230101 HVAC GENERAL PROVISIONS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY: This Section includes general administrative and procedural requirements for Division 23, Heating and Ventilation work. 1.2 DIVISION 23 4 DESCRIPTION: The technical specifications of this Contract are arranged for the convenience of the Owner and Contractor into Divisions of work. The work of Division 23, HVAC, is further described in Specification Sections of the 23 01 00 Series and on contract drawings of the "M series. The organization of this work into Divisions shall not relieve the prime Contractor from providing all of the work shown on the complete set of drawings or specified in the complete set of Specifications, whether or not the individual subcontractors correctly identify their respective responsibilities. 1.3 OTHER DIVISION SPECIFICATIONS APPLICABLE TO THIS WORK: To the extent that the work of this Division or Contract includes the work of other trades, the Contractor for this Division shall adhere to the requirements of other specification sections. All General Construction work shall be performed in accordance with the provisions of the appropriate Division 02 through Division 09 Sections. All electrical work shall be performed in accordance with appropriate Division 26 Sections. 1.4 WORK INCLUDED: The work of this Division shall include providing all materials, labor, services, permits and related work to furnish a complete, operating, tested, functioning, documented HVAC System including all work shown, specified or required for proper system operation including but not limited to the following: A. Provide Basic Materials and Methods. B. Provide Mechanical Coordination Drawings. C. Provide Exhaust Fans where shown. D. Provide Ductwork where shown. E. Provide Fire Dampers and Fire/Smoke Dampers where shown. F. Provide demolition and removal of existing equipment, ductwork and piping where shown, removal of all debris from site and proper disposal of same. BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES CORNELL – NCP HVAC GENERAL PROVISIONS STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 23 01 01 – PAGE 2 OF 4 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 G, Provide revision of ductwork piping and provide new ductwork and piping as shown on mechanical drawings. Provide liner and flexible ductwork as shown. H. Provide and install duct access panels in duct as shown. I. Provide and install new diffusers, registers and grilles. J. Provide insulation. K. Provide air balance at completion of project, provide final report. L. Provide maintenance of system in good condition until final acceptance. M. Provide openings in existing and new construction as required for the work of this division. N. Provide fan coil units where shown. O. Provide split4system air conditioning units where shown. P. Provide piping where shown. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Provide Shop Drawings for the following: 1. Ductwork, supply, return and flexible 2. Registers, diffusers and grilles (air devices) 3. Volume, Fire dampers, fire/smoke dampers 4. Motorized dampers 5. Access Panels 6. Insulation 7. Ductwork Coordination drawings, 8. Mechanical Coordination drawings 9. Exhaust Fans. 10. Controls, as required 11. Piping 12. Fan coil units 13. Split4system air conditioning units 14. Pre4construction & final construction testing and balancing report. B. Provide Owner's Operation Instruction C. Provide Operation and Maintenance Manuals 4 four (4) copies D. Provide Warranty Documents 1.6 RELATED WORK NOT INCLUDED: A. Asbestos removal is not included in the work of this contract. See Section 013529. BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES CORNELL – NCP HVAC GENERAL PROVISIONS STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 23 01 01 – PAGE 3 OF 4 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL: A. Provide products as specified in Division 23. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL: A. Conform to Division 23 Specifications for installation and execution of work. END OF SECTION 230101 BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES CORNELL – NCP HVAC GENERAL PROVISIONS STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 23 01 01 – PAGE 4 OF 4 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 [ PAGE LEFT INTENTIONALLY BLANK ] BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES CORNELL – NCP TESTING ADJUSTING AND BALANCING STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 23 05 93 – PAGE 1 OF 11 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 SECTION 230593 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS: The general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 General Requirements, apply to the work specified in this Section. 1.2 SCOPE: A. This section includes all labor and materials necessary to test, adjust, and balance in accordance with design criteria the equipment and components of systems included in Division 23 as follows: 1. Air Distribution 2. Equipment Performance 1.3 SUBMITTALS: Provide the Following: A. Preconstruction testing & balancing report. B. Final testing & balancing report. 1.4 QUALIFICATIONS: B. Work included in this section must be performed by an AABC or NEBB certified independent testing and balancing contractor or an Owner approved TAB contractor who shall test, adjust and balance the air and water systems for this project. C. Owner approved acceptable testing and balancing agencies (no others): 1. Air Systems Balancing and Testing Service, Inc., West Henrietta, NY 585@334@7710. 2. Balance Technologies, LaFayette, NY, 315@677@7769. 3. AD&M Testing and Balancing, 3 E. Bihrwood Dr., West Seneca, NY 14224, 716@677@0980) 4. Mechanical Testing, Inc., Schenectady, NY 518@374@9440. 1.5 TEST REPORT: A. The balancing agency shall prepare a written report which shall include diagrams and descriptions of procedures together with all recorded test data. Report shall be submitted in bound volumes for a permanent record. Submit four copies of report. A set of contract drawings shall BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES CORNELL – NCP TESTING ADJUSTING AND BALANCING STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 23 05 93 – PAGE 2 OF 11 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 also be submitted with the report. Drawings shall have each air device, flow fitting, fan, and traverse location identified in red ink by a number which shall match identification numbers utilized in the balancing report. B. Submit two (2) copies of preliminary report within 15 working days after completion of tests of individual systems. Submit four (4) copies of final report within 15 working days after completion of all final adjustments. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 TEST INSTRUMENTS: A. Use instruments of equal or better quality than those described in the technical portions of Associated Air Balance Council National Standards for Field Measurements and Instrumentation Vol. 2, No. 12173 “Total System Balance”. B. Instruments used for balancing air and water systems must have been calibrated within a period of 6 months prior to balancing. Submit with balancing report, model number and calibration date of all instruments utilized. C. List in the report types, serial numbers, and dates of calibration of all instruments used in the final air and water balance tests. D. Instruments shall include, as a minimum, the following items of equipment: 1. Pressure gauges and fittings. 2. Dry bulb and wet bulb thermometers. 3. Contact pyrometer. 4. Portable flow meter and, if required, orifice plates. 5. Pitot tube and manometers. 6. Alnor Velometer with attachments. 7. Amprobe. 8. Tachometer. 9. Special wrenches and tools. 10. Anemometer. E. Provide suitable ladders and safety equipment. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine the Contract Documents to become familiar with Project requirements and to discover conditions in systems' designs that may preclude proper TAB of systems and equipment. BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES CORNELL – NCP TESTING ADJUSTING AND BALANCING STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 23 05 93 – PAGE 3 OF 11 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 B. Examine systems for installed balancing devices, such as test ports, gage cocks, thermometer wells, flow@control devices, balancing valves and fittings, and manual volume dampers. Verify that locations of these balancing devices are accessible. C. Examine the approved submittals for HVAC systems and equipment. D. Examine design data including HVAC system descriptions, statements of design assumptions for environmental conditions and systems' output, and statements of philosophies and assumptions about HVAC system and equipment controls. E. Examine equipment performance data including fan and pump curves. 1) Relate performance data to Project conditions and requirements, including system effects that can create undesired or unpredicted conditions that cause reduced capacities in all or part of a system. 2) Calculate system@effect factors to reduce performance ratings of HVAC equipment when installed under conditions different from the conditions used to rate equipment performance. To calculate system effects for air systems, use tables and charts found in AMCA 201, "Fans and Systems," or in SMACNA's "HVAC Systems @ Duct Design." Compare results with the design data and installed conditions. F. Examine system and equipment installations and verify that field quality@ control testing, cleaning, and adjusting specified in individual Sections have been performed. G. Examine test reports specified in individual system and equipment Sections. H. Examine HVAC equipment and filters and verify that bearings are greased, belts are aligned and tight, and equipment with functioning controls is ready for operation. I. Examine terminal units, such as variable@air@volume boxes, and verify that they are accessible and their controls are connected and functioning. J. Examine strainers. Verify that startup screens are replaced by permanent screens with indicated perforations. K. Examine three@way valves for proper installation for their intended function of diverting or mixing fluid flows. L. Examine system pumps to ensure absence of entrained air in the suction piping. M. Examine operating safety interlocks and controls on HVAC equipment. BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES CORNELL – NCP TESTING ADJUSTING AND BALANCING STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 23 05 93 – PAGE 4 OF 11 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 N. Report deficiencies discovered before and during performance of TAB procedures. Observe and record system reactions to changes in conditions. Record default set points if different from indicated values. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Prepare a TAB plan that includes strategies and step@by@step procedures. B. Complete system@readiness checks and prepare reports. Verify the following: 1) Permanent electrical@power wiring is complete. 2) Hydronic systems are filled, clean, and free of air. 3) Automatic temperature@control systems are operational. 4) Equipment and duct access doors are securely closed. 5) Balance, smoke, and fire dampers are open. 6) Isolating and balancing valves are open and control valves are operational. 7) Ceilings are installed in critical areas where air@pattern adjustments are required and access to balancing devices is provided. 8) Windows and doors can be closed so indicated conditions for system operations can be met. 3.3 TEST PROCEDURE: A. System may be tested in increments when approved by the Architect/Engineer. B. When testing and balancing involve the building temperature control systems, cooperate with the University to achieve the desired results. C. At the time of the final inspection, recheck in the presence and at the request of the Architect/Engineer not to exceed 10 percent of the previously recorded readings from the certified report selected at the discretion of the Architect/Engineer. D. Permanently mark the settings of valves, dampers, and other adjustment devices so that adjustment can be restored if disturbed at any time. E. Perform all tests in accordance with Associated Air Balance Council (AABC) or NEBB standard procedures. Any deviations from same must be submitted and approved. F. Should the basic system or any of its component fail to meet requirements, and thereby make the testing and balancing work invalid, notify the Architect/Engineer and stop the tests until such time that the failure is corrected. BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES CORNELL – NCP TESTING ADJUSTING AND BALANCING STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 23 05 93 – PAGE 5 OF 11 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 3.4 PROCEDURES FOR TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING EXISTING SYSTEMS A. Perform a preconstruction inspection of existing equipment that is to remain and be reused. 1) Measure and record the operating speed, airflow, and static pressure of each fan. 2) Measure motor voltage and amperage. Compare the values to motor nameplate information. 3) Measure and record the water flow, impeller size, pump head, hp, break hp and location on manufacturer’s pump curve for each pump. 4) Check the refrigerant charge. 5) Check the condition of filters. 6) Check the condition of coils. 7) Check the operation of the drain pan and condensate@drain trap. 8) Check bearings and other lubricated parts for proper lubrication. 9) Report on the operating condition of the equipment and the results of the measurements taken. Report deficiencies. B. Before performing testing and balancing of existing systems, inspect existing equipment that is to remain and be reused to verify that existing equipment has been cleaned and refurbished. Verify the following: 1) New filters are installed. 2) Coils are clean and fins combed. 3) Drain pans are clean. 4) Fans are clean. 5) Bearings and other parts are properly lubricated. 6) Deficiencies noted in the preconstruction report are corrected. C. Perform testing and balancing of existing systems to the extent that existing systems are affected by the renovation work. 1) Compare the indicated airflow of the renovated work to the measured fan airflows, and determine the new fan speed and the face velocity of filters and coils. 2) Compare the additional water flow required for the renovated work to the measured pump flows, and determine the new pump flow, amperage, voltage, rpm, and pump head. 3) Verify that the indicated airflows of the renovated work result in filter and coil face velocities and fan speeds that are within the acceptable limits defined by equipment manufacturer. 4) Verify that the additional water flow for the renovated work results in pump operation that is within the acceptable limits defined by equipment manufacturer. 5) If calculations increase or decrease the air flow rates and water flow rates by more than 5 percent, make equipment adjustments to achieve the calculated rates. If increase or decrease is 5 percent or less, equipment adjustments are not required. BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES CORNELL – NCP TESTING ADJUSTING AND BALANCING STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 23 05 93 – PAGE 6 OF 11 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 6) Balance each air outlet. 3.5 GENERAL: A. Review plans and specifications of systems to be tested and balanced to confirm that the arrangement, instrumentation and balancing devices will permit the system to be balanced and tested in the manner described in this section. Report to the Architect/Engineer in writing, prior to start of any system construction, any devices which need to be added or any phases of the design which need to be modified to permit the fulfillment of this work. Assume responsibility for all devices required for proper balancing beyond those defined by the contract documents, and not reported by the contractor prior to physical start of construction. B. Conduct balancing and testing in accordance with technical portions of the Associated Air Balancing Council “National Standards for Field Measurements and Instrumentation” Vol. 2, No. 12173 “Total System Balance” latest edition, or NEBB Procedural Standards for Testing and Balancing latest edition. C. Provide all labor, testing equipment, and materials required to conduct tests and balance systems (pre and post construction). Include all costs in base bid and form of proposal. D. The Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Contractor shall be responsible for providing all duct test holes as may be required for testing and balancing of systems. E. Systems shall be operated at least 4 hours after stabilized operating conditions have been established before conducting capacity tests. All filters and strainers shall be in place. Start up strainers shall be removed. Capacity and performance tests of equipment and systems shall be performed only after balancing is complete. F. Submit for approval, a test procedure plan for variable air volume systems and other variable flow systems. Indicate diversity conditions and test modes for systems operating with diversities. G. Permanently mark the balanced position of all balancing valves and dampers. 3.6 SYSTEM CHECKOUT: A. Prior to the start of balancing, perform a system functional test. B. Lubricate and check all dampers. C. Verify that all fire dampers and fire/smoke dampers are open and links are in place. D. Check that backdraft and automatic dampers operate correctly. BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES CORNELL – NCP TESTING ADJUSTING AND BALANCING STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 23 05 93 – PAGE 7 OF 11 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 E. Check that all access doors are closed. F. Check that all valves are open. G. Check for proper belt tension and alignment on fan drivers. H. Check for proper fan rotation. I. Check that all motors and fan bearings have been lubricated. J. Confirm that motors, damper motors and valves are wired and that proper overload heaters and fuses are installed. K. Label in 1" black block letters on fan and pump housings fan name/numbers or pump name/numbers. Designation shall correspond to those on the drawings. L. Mark proper rotation on a permanent portion of the fan. 3.7 AIR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS: A. All air distribution systems including supply, return, outdoor, relief and exhaust ductwork shall be tested and balanced. B. Where an existing system cannot be properly balanced or equipment tested due to adverse conditions such as inability to properly adjust fan speeds, improperly sized motors, excessively noisy equipment, malfunctioning controls, dirty filters, inaccessibility, and similar items, furnish to the Architect/Engineer in writing, within seven (7) days of discovery, a list of the conditions which preclude proper execution of the work. C. Make openings in ducts required for pitot tube insertion and seal those openings with snap@in plugs or specially approved seals for grease ducts and lab ducts. Neatly remove duct insulation as required for test. D. Specific testing and balancing procedures shall include: 1. Test and adjust speed of all air apparatus. 2. Test and record motor make, horsepower, rpm, volts, phase, hertz and amperage. 3. Make Pitot tube traverse of main ducts and obtain design air quantity at fans. 4. Test and record system static pressures, suction, and discharge as well as pressure drops across each system element; i.e., fans, filters, coils, louvers, air blenders, dampers, etc. 5. Test and adjust systems for design supply, outside, relief, exhaust, and return air quantities. Test CFM at fans and adjust all fan systems to +10% to @5% of design flow. 6. Adjust all main and branch ducts for supply, return and exhaust BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES CORNELL – NCP TESTING ADJUSTING AND BALANCING STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 23 05 93 – PAGE 8 OF 11 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 air. Set and “mark” all volume dampers. Identify, test, and adjust each air device (grille, register, diffuser, etc.) to within 10% of design quantities. 7. Test, adjust and verify operation of unit heaters, cabinet heaters, exhaust fans, etc., in accordance with AABC or NEBB Standard procedures. Record results. 8. For each static pressure controller, establish and record setpoint; record controller offset. 9. For each air flow measuring device, verify and record flow; record measuring device offset. 10. Verify that all smoke and fire dampers are open during normal operating mode and operate properly at shutdown. 11. Set automatic operated dampers to operate as required to achieve balance conditions. 12. Lubricate all dampers and linkages. 13. Record all fan, motor, drive, sheave and belt nameplate information. E. Provide duct leakage tests. Submit test results to Architect/Engineer immediately (within 10 days) upon completion of each test and include copies of all results with balancing report test conditions and results for each section of duct tested. Include diagrams if required to define tested sections. 3.8 REPORTING: A. Initial Construction@Phase Report: Based on examination of the Contract Documents as specified in "Examination" Article, prepare a report on the adequacy of design for systems' balancing devices. Recommend changes and additions to systems' balancing devices to facilitate proper performance measuring and balancing. Recommend changes and additions to HVAC systems and general construction to allow access for performance measuring and balancing devices. B. Status Reports: Prepare biweekly progress reports to describe completed procedures, procedures in progress, and scheduled procedures. Include a list of deficiencies and problems found in systems being tested and balanced. Prepare a separate report for each system and each building floor for systems serving multiple floors. 3.9 REPORT A. General: Prepare a certified written report; tabulate and divide the report into separate sections for tested systems and balanced systems. 1) Include a certification sheet at the front of the report's binder, signed and sealed by the certified testing and balancing engineer. 2) Include a list of instruments used for procedures, along with proof of calibration. BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES CORNELL – NCP TESTING ADJUSTING AND BALANCING STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 23 05 93 – PAGE 9 OF 11 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 B. Final Report Contents: In addition to certified field@report data, include the following: 1) Pump curves. 2) Fan curves. 3) Manufacturers' test data. 4) Location, size and airflow of each grille, register or diffuser. 5) Field test reports prepared by system and equipment installers. 6) Other information relative to equipment performance; do not include Shop Drawings and product data. C. General Report Data: In addition to form titles and entries, include the following data: 1) Title page. 2) Name and address of the TAB contractor. 3) Project name. 4) Project location. 5) Architect's name and address. 6) Engineer's name and address. 7) Contractor's name and address. 8) Report date. 9) Signature of TAB supervisor who certifies the report. 10) Table of Contents with the total number of pages defined for each section of the report. Number each page in the report. 11) Summary of contents including the following: a) Indicated versus final performance. b) Notable characteristics of systems. c) Description of system operation sequence if it varies from the Contract Documents. 12) Nomenclature sheets for each item of equipment. 13) Data for terminal units, including manufacturer's name, type, size, and fittings. 14) Notes to explain why certain final data in the body of reports vary from indicated values. D. Fan Test Reports: For supply, return, and exhaust fans, include the following: 1) Fan Data: a) System identification. b) Location. c) Make and type. d) Model number and size. e) Manufacturer's serial number. f) Arrangement and class. BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES CORNELL – NCP TESTING ADJUSTING AND BALANCING STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 23 05 93 – PAGE 10 OF 11 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 g) Sheave make, size in inches (mm), and bore. h) Center@to@center dimensions of sheave, and amount of adjustments in inches (mm). 2) Motor Data: a) Motor make, and frame type and size. b) Horsepower and rpm. c) Volts, phase, and hertz. d) Full@load amperage and service factor. e) Sheave make, size in inches (mm), and bore. f) Center@to@center dimensions of sheave, and amount of adjustments in inches (mm). g) Number, make, and size of belts. 3) Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values): a) Total airflow rate in cfm (L/s). b) Total system static pressure in inches wg (Pa). c) Fan rpm. d) Discharge static pressure in inches wg (Pa). e) Suction static pressure in inches wg (Pa). E. Round, Flat@Oval, and Rectangular Duct Traverse Reports: Include a diagram with a grid representing the duct cross@section and record the following: 1) Report Data: a) System and air@handling@unit number. b) Location and zone. c) Traverse air temperature in deg F (deg C). d) Duct static pressure in inches wg (Pa). e) Duct size in inches (mm). f) Duct area in sq. ft. (sq. m). g) Indicated air flow rate in cfm (L/s). h) Indicated velocity in fpm (m/s). i) Actual air flow rate in cfm (L/s). j) Actual average velocity in fpm (m/s). k) Barometric pressure in psig (Pa). F. Pump Test Reports: Calculate impeller size by plotting the shutoff head on pump curves and include the following: 1) Unit Data: a) Unit identification. b) Location. c) Service. BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES CORNELL – NCP TESTING ADJUSTING AND BALANCING STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 23 05 93 – PAGE 11 OF 11 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 d) Make and size. e) Model number and serial number. f) Water flow rate in gpm (L/s). g) Water pressure differential in feet of head or psig (kPa). h) Required net positive suction head in feet of head or psig (kPa). i) Pump rpm. j) Impeller diameter in inches (mm). k) Motor make and frame size. l) Motor horsepower and rpm. m) Voltage at each connection. n) Amperage for each phase. o) Full@load amperage and service factor. p) Seal type. 2) Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values): a) Static head in feet of head or psig (kPa). b) Pump shutoff pressure in feet of head or psig (kPa). c) Actual impeller size in inches (mm). d) Full@open flow rate in gpm (L/s). e) Full@open pressure in feet of head or psig (kPa). f) Final discharge pressure in feet of head or psig (kPa). g) Final suction pressure in feet of head or psig (kPa). h) Final total pressure in feet of head or psig (kPa). i) Final water flow rate in gpm (L/s). j) Voltage at each connection. k) Amperage for each phase. G. Instrument Calibration Reports: 1) Report Data: a) Instrument type and make. b) Serial number. c) Application. d) Dates of use. e) Dates of calibration. 3.10 INSPECTIONS A. Initial Inspection: 1. After testing and balancing are complete, operate each system and randomly check measurements to verify that the system is operating according to the final test and balance readings documented in the final report. END OF SECTION 23 05 93 BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES CORNELL – NCP DUCT INSULATION STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 23 07 13 –PAGE 1 OF 7 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 SECTION 230713 DUCT INSULATION PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Provide for each type of product indicated. Include thermal conductivity, water0vapor permeance thickness, and jackets (both factory0 and field0applied if any). 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Skilled mechanics who have successfully completed an apprenticeship program or another craft training program certified by the Department of Labor, Bureau of Apprenticeship and Training. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 INSULATION THICKNESS AND TYPES A. All supply and return ductwork in non0conditioned spaces shall be insulated as follows: 1. Exposed Ductwork: 1.50inches rigid fiberglass board, 3.0 pounds per cubic foot density, to a minimum R0value of 5, complete with a factory applied reinforced aluminum foil vapor barrier, suitably anchored and sealed at all points. 2. Concealed Ductwork: 1.50inches fiberglass blanket, 0.75 pounds per cubic foot density, to a minimum R0value of 5, complete with a factory applied vapor barrier, suitably anchored and sealed at all points B. The use of flexible elastomeric insulation on ductwork is permitted as an acceptable alternative to fiberglass. Insulation shall be adhered to 100% of the duct surface area. C. Preferred Manuafacturers 1. Johns Manville 2. Knauf 3. Owens Corning 4. Armacell, LLC 2.2 ADHESIVES A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates and for bonding insulation to itself and to surfaces to be insulated unless otherwise indicated. B. Flexible Elastomeric Adhesive: Comply with MIL0A024179A, Type II, Class I. BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES CORNELL – NCP DUCT INSULATION STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 23 07 13 –PAGE 2 OF 7 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 1. For indoor applications, use adhesive that has a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). 2. Use adhesive that complies with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small0 Scale Environmental Chambers," including 2004 Addenda. C. Mineral0Fiber Adhesive: Comply with MIL0A03316C, Class 2, Grade A. 1. For indoor applications, use adhesive that has a VOC content of 80 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). 2. Use adhesive that complies with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small0 Scale Environmental Chambers," including 2004 Addenda. D. ASJ Adhesive, and FSK Jacket Adhesive: Comply with MIL0A03316C, Class 2, Grade A for bonding insulation jacket lap seams and joints. 1. For indoor applications, use adhesive that has a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). 2. Use adhesive that complies with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small0 Scale Environmental Chambers," including 2004 Addenda. 2.3 MASTICS A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates; comply with MIL0PRF019565C, Type II. 1. For indoor applications, use mastics that have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). B. Vapor0Barrier Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor use on below ambient services. 1. Water0Vapor Permeance: ASTM E 96/E 96M, Procedure B, 0.013 perm (0.009 metric perm) at 430mil (1.090mm) dry film thickness. 2. Service Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 180 deg F (Minus 29 to plus 82 deg C). 3. Solids Content: ASTM D 1644, 58 percent by volume and 70 percent by weight. 4. Color: White. 2.4 TAPES A. FSK Tape: Foil0face, vapor0retarder tape matching factory0applied jacket with acrylic adhesive; complying with ASTM C 1136. 1. Width: 3 inches (75 mm). 2. Thickness: 6.5 mils (0.16 mm). BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES CORNELL – NCP DUCT INSULATION STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 23 07 13 –PAGE 3 OF 7 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 3. Adhesion: 90 ounces force/inch (1.0 N/mm) in width. 4. Elongation: 2 percent. 5. Tensile Strength: 40 lbf/inch (7.2 N/mm) in width. 6. FSK Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of FSK tape. 2.5 SECUREMENTS A. Insulation Pins and Hangers: 1. Cupped0Head, Capacitor0Discharge0Weld Pins: Copper0 or zinc0coated steel pin, fully annealed for capacitor0discharge welding, 0.1060inch0 (2.60 mm0) diameter shank, length to suit depth of insulation indicated with integral 101/20inch (380mm) galvanized carbon0steel washer. 2. Metal, Adhesively Attached, Perforated0Base Insulation Hangers: Baseplate welded to projecting spindle that is capable of holding insulation, of thickness indicated, securely in position indicated when self0 locking washer is in place. Comply with the following requirements: a. Baseplate: Perforated, galvanized carbon0steel sheet, 0.030 inch (0.76 mm) thick by 2 inches (50 mm) square. b. Spindle: Copper0 or zinc0coated, low0carbon steel, fully annealed, 0.1060inch0 (2.60mm0) diameter shank, length to suit depth of insulation indicated. c. Adhesive: Recommended by hanger manufacturer. Product with demonstrated capability to bond insulation hanger securely to substrates indicated without damaging insulation, hangers, and substrates. 3. Insulation0Retaining Washers: Self0locking washers formed from 0.0160 inch0 (0.410mm0) thick, galvanized0steel sheet, with beveled edge sized as required to hold insulation securely in place but not less than 101/2 inches (38 mm) in diameter. a. Protect ends with capped self0locking washers incorporating a spring steel insert to ensure permanent retention of cap in exposed locations. B. Staples: Outward0clinching insulation staples, nominal 3/40inch0 (190mm0) wide, stainless steel or Monel. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. Install insulation materials, accessories, and finishes with smooth, straight, and even surfaces; free of voids throughout the length of ducts and fittings. B. Install accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Install accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either wet or dry state. C. Install insulation with longitudinal seams at top and bottom of horizontal runs. BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES CORNELL – NCP DUCT INSULATION STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 23 07 13 –PAGE 4 OF 7 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 D. Install multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered. E. Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing. F. Install insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with adhesive recommended by insulation material manufacturer. G. Install insulation with least number of joints practical. H. Where vapor barrier is indicated, seal joints, seams, and penetrations in insulation at hangers, supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor0 barrier mastic. 1. Install insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments. 2. For insulation application where vapor barriers are indicated, extend insulation on anchor legs from point of attachment to supported item to point of attachment to structure. Taper and seal ends at attachment to structure with vapor0barrier mastic. 3. Install insert materials and install insulation to tightly join the insert. Seal insulation to insulation inserts with adhesive or sealing compound recommended by insulation material manufacturer. I. Apply adhesives, mastics, and sealants at manufacturer's recommended coverage rate and wet and dry film thicknesses. J. Install insulation with factory0applied jackets as follows: 1. Draw jacket tight and smooth. 2. Cover circumferential joints with 30inch0 (750mm0) wide strips, of same material as insulation jacket. Secure strips with adhesive and outward clinching staples along both edges of strip, spaced 4 inches (100 mm) o.c. 3. Overlap jacket longitudinal seams at least 101/2 inches (38 mm). Clean and dry surface to receive self0sealing lap. Staple laps with outward clinching staples along edge at 2 inches (50 mm) o.c. a. For below ambient services, apply vapor0barrier mastic over staples. 4. Cover joints and seams with tape, according to insulation material manufacturer's written instructions, to maintain vapor seal. 5. Where vapor barriers are indicated, apply vapor0barrier mastic on seams and joints and at ends adjacent to duct flanges and fittings. K. Cut insulation in a manner to avoid compressing insulation more than 75 percent of its nominal thickness. L. Finish installation with systems at operating conditions. Repair joint separations and cracking due to thermal movement. M. Repair damaged insulation facings by applying same facing material over damaged areas. Extend patches at least 4 inches (100 mm) beyond damaged areas. Adhere, staple, and seal patches similar to butt joints. BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES CORNELL – NCP DUCT INSULATION STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 23 07 13 –PAGE 5 OF 7 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 3.2 INSTALLATION OF MINERAL0FIBER INSULATION A. Blanket Insulation Installation on Ducts and Plenums: Secure with adhesive and insulation pins. 1. Apply adhesives according to manufacturer's recommended coverage rates per unit area, for 100 percent coverage of duct and plenum surfaces. 2. Apply adhesive to entire circumference of ducts and to all surfaces of fittings and transitions. 3. Install cupped0head, capacitor0discharge0weld pins on sides and bottom of horizontal ducts and sides of vertical ducts as follows: a. On duct sides with dimensions 18 inches (450 mm) and smaller, place pins along longitudinal centerline of duct. Space 3 inches (75 mm) maximum from insulation end joints, and 16 inches (400 mm) o.c. b. On duct sides with dimensions larger than 18 inches (450 mm), place pins 16 inches (400 mm) o.c. each way, and 3 inches (75 mm) maximum from insulation joints. Install additional pins to hold insulation tightly against surface at cross bracing. c. Pins may be omitted from top surface of horizontal, rectangular ducts and plenums. d. Do not overcompress insulation during installation. e. Impale insulation over pins and attach speed washers. f. Cut excess portion of pins extending beyond speed washers or bend parallel with insulation surface. Cover exposed pins and washers with tape matching insulation facing. 4. For ducts and plenums with surface temperatures below ambient, install a continuous unbroken vapor barrier. Create a facing lap for longitudinal seams and end joints with insulation by removing 2 inches (50 mm) from one edge and one end of insulation segment. Secure laps to adjacent insulation section with 1/20inch (130mm) outward0clinching staples, 1 inch (25 mm) o.c. Install vapor barrier consisting of factory0 or field0applied jacket, adhesive, vapor0barrier mastic, and sealant at joints, seams, and protrusions. a. Repair punctures, tears, and penetrations with tape or mastic to maintain vapor0barrier seal. b. Install vapor stops for ductwork and plenums operating below 50 deg F (10 deg C) at 180foot (5.50m) intervals. Vapor stops shall consist of vapor0barrier mastic applied in a Z0shaped pattern over insulation face, along butt end of insulation, and over the surface. Cover insulation face and surface to be insulated a width equal to two times the insulation thickness, but not less than 3 inches (75 mm). 5. Overlap unfaced blankets a minimum of 2 inches (50 mm) on longitudinal seams and end joints. At end joints, secure with steel bands spaced a maximum of 18 inches (450 mm) o.c. 6. Install insulation on rectangular duct elbows and transitions with a full insulation section for each surface. Install insulation on round and flat0 oval duct elbows with individually mitered gores cut to fit the elbow. 7. Insulate duct stiffeners, hangers, and flanges that protrude beyond insulation surface with 60inch0 (1500mm0) wide strips of same material BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES CORNELL – NCP DUCT INSULATION STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 23 07 13 –PAGE 6 OF 7 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 used to insulate duct. Secure on alternating sides of stiffener, hanger, and flange with pins spaced 6 inches (150 mm) o.c. B. Board Insulation Installation on Ducts and Plenums: Secure with adhesive and insulation pins. 1. Apply adhesives according to manufacturer's recommended coverage rates per unit area, for 100 percent coverage of duct and plenum surfaces. 2. Apply adhesive to entire circumference of ducts and to all surfaces of fittings and transitions. 3. Install either capacitor0discharge0weld pins and speed washers or cupped0 head, capacitor0discharge0weld pins on sides and bottom of horizontal ducts and sides of vertical ducts as follows: a. On duct sides with dimensions 18 inches (450 mm) and smaller, place pins along longitudinal centerline of duct. Space 3 inches (75 mm) maximum from insulation end joints, and 16 inches (400 mm) o.c. b. On duct sides with dimensions larger than 18 inches (450 mm), space pins 16 inches (400 mm) o.c. each way, and 3 inches (75 mm) maximum from insulation joints. Install additional pins to hold insulation tightly against surface at cross bracing. c. Pins may be omitted from top surface of horizontal, rectangular ducts and plenums. d. Do not overcompress insulation during installation. e. Cut excess portion of pins extending beyond speed washers or bend parallel with insulation surface. Cover exposed pins and washers with tape matching insulation facing. 4. For ducts and plenums with surface temperatures below ambient, install a continuous unbroken vapor barrier. Create a facing lap for longitudinal seams and end joints with insulation by removing 2 inches (50 mm) from one edge and one end of insulation segment. Secure laps to adjacent insulation section with 1/20inch (130mm) outward0clinching staples, 1 inch (25 mm) o.c. Install vapor barrier consisting of factory0 or field0applied jacket, adhesive, vapor0barrier mastic, and sealant at joints, seams, and protrusions. a. Repair punctures, tears, and penetrations with tape or mastic to maintain vapor0barrier seal. b. Install vapor stops for ductwork and plenums operating below 50 deg F (10 deg C) at 180foot (5.50m) intervals. Vapor stops shall consist of vapor0barrier mastic applied in a Z0shaped pattern over insulation face, along butt end of insulation, and over the surface. Cover insulation face and surface to be insulated a width equal to two times the insulation thickness, but not less than 3 inches (75 mm). 5. Install insulation on rectangular duct elbows and transitions with a full insulation section for each surface. Groove and score insulation to fit as closely as possible to outside and inside radius of elbows. Install insulation on round and flat0oval duct elbows with individually mitered gores cut to fit the elbow. BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES CORNELL – NCP DUCT INSULATION STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 23 07 13 –PAGE 7 OF 7 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 6. Insulate duct stiffeners, hangers, and flanges that protrude beyond insulation surface with 60inch0 (1500mm0) wide strips of same material used to insulate duct. Secure on alternating sides of stiffener, hanger, and flange with pins spaced 6 inches (150 mm) o.c. END OF SECTION 230713 BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES CORNELL – NCP HVAC PIPING INSULATION STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 23 07 19 – PAGE 1 OF 18 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 SECTION 230719 HVAC PIPING INSULATION PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Provide for each type of product indicated. Include thermal conductivity, water3vapor permeance thickness, and jackets (both factory and field applied if any). 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Skilled mechanics who have successfully completed an apprenticeship program or another craft training program certified by the Department of Labor, Bureau of Apprenticeship and Training. B. Surface3Burning Characteristics: For insulation and related materials, as determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 84, by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Factory label insulation and jacket materials and adhesive, mastic, tapes, and cement material containers, with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. 1. Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame3spread index of 25 or less, and smoke3developed index of 50 or less. 2. Insulation Installed Outdoors: Flame3spread index of 75 or less, and smoke3developed index of 150 or less. 1.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Packaging: Insulation material containers shall be marked by manufacturer with appropriate ASTM standard designation, type and grade, and maximum use temperature. 1.4 COORDINATION A. Coordinate sizes and locations of supports, hangers, and insulation shields. B. Coordinate clearance requirements with piping Installer for piping insulation application. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 INSULATION MATERIALS A. Comply with requirements in "Piping Insulation Schedule, General," "Indoor Piping Insulation Schedule," "Outdoor, Aboveground Piping Insulation Schedule," articles for where insulating materials shall be applied. B. Products shall not contain asbestos, lead, mercury, or mercury compounds. BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES CORNELL – NCP HVAC PIPING INSULATION STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 23 07 19 – PAGE 2 OF 18 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 C. Products that come in contact with stainless steel shall have a leachable chloride content of less than 50 ppm when tested according to ASTM C 871. D. Insulation materials for use on austenitic stainless steel shall be qualified as acceptable according to ASTM C 795. E. Foam insulation materials shall not use CFC or HCFC blowing agents in the manufacturing process. F. Cellular Glass: Inorganic, incombustible, foamed or cellulated glass with annealed, rigid, hermetically sealed cells. Factory3applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory3Applied Jackets" Article. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Pittsburgh Corning Corporation; Foamglas. 2. Block Insulation: ASTM C 552, Type I. 3. Special3Shaped Insulation: ASTM C 552, Type III. 4. Board Insulation: ASTM C 552, Type IV. 5. Preformed Pipe Insulation without Jacket: Comply with ASTM C 552, Type II, Class 1. 6. Preformed Pipe Insulation with Factory3Applied ASJ: Comply with ASTM C 552, Type II, Class 2. 7. Factory fabricate shapes according to ASTM C 450 and ASTM C 585. G. Flexible Elastomeric Insulation: Closed3cell, sponge3 or expanded3rubber materials. Comply with ASTM C 534, Type I for tubular materials. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Aeroflex USA, Inc.; Aerocel. b. Armacell LLC; AP Armaflex. c. K3Flex USA; Insul3Lock, Insul3Tube, and K3FLEX LS. H. Mineral3Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation: 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Fibrex Insulations Inc.; Coreplus 1200. b. Johns Manville; Micro3Lok. c. Knauf Insulation; 10003Degree Pipe Insulation. d. Manson Insulation Inc.; Alley3K. e. Owens Corning; Fiberglas Pipe Insulation. 2. Type I, 850 deg F (454 deg C) Materials: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C 547, Type I, Grade A, with factory3applied ASJ. Factory3applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory3Applied Jackets" Article. BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES CORNELL – NCP HVAC PIPING INSULATION STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 23 07 19 – PAGE 3 OF 18 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 2.2 INSULATING CEMENTS A. Mineral3Fiber Insulating Cement: Comply with ASTM C 195. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Ramco Insulation, Inc.; Super3Stik. B. Expanded or Exfoliated Vermiculite Insulating Cement: Comply with ASTM C 196. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Ramco Insulation, Inc.; Thermokote V. C. Mineral3Fiber, Hydraulic3Setting Insulating and Finishing Cement: Comply with ASTM C 449. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Ramco Insulation, Inc.; Ramcote 1200 and Quik3Cote. 2.3 ADHESIVES A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates and for bonding insulation to itself and to surfaces to be insulated unless otherwise indicated. B. Cellular3Glass Adhesive: Two3component, thermosetting urethane adhesive containing no flammable solvents, with a service temperature range of minus 100 to plus 200 deg F (minus 73 to plus 93 deg C). 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Foster Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller Company; 81384. 2. For indoor applications, use adhesive that has a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). 3. Use adhesive that complies with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small3 Scale Environmental Chambers," including 2004 Addenda. C. Flexible Elastomeric Adhesive: Comply with MIL3A324179A, Type II, Class I. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Aeroflex USA, Inc.; Aeroseal. b. Armacell LLC; Armaflex 520 Adhesive. BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES CORNELL – NCP HVAC PIPING INSULATION STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 23 07 19 – PAGE 4 OF 18 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 c. Foster Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller Company; 85375. d. K3Flex USA; R3373 Contact Adhesive. 2. For indoor applications, use adhesive that has a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). 3. Use adhesive that complies with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small3 Scale Environmental Chambers," including 2004 Addenda. D. Mineral3Fiber Adhesive: Comply with MIL3A33316C, Class 2, Grade A. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Childers Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller Company; CP3127. b. Eagle Bridges 3 Marathon Industries; 225. c. Foster Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller Company; 85360/85370. d. Mon3Eco Industries, Inc.; 22325. 2. For indoor applications, use adhesive that has a VOC content of 80 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). 3. Use adhesive that complies with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small3 Scale Environmental Chambers," including 2004 Addenda. E. ASJ Adhesive, and FSK Jacket Adhesive: Comply with MIL3A33316C, Class 2, Grade A for bonding insulation jacket lap seams and joints. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Childers Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller Company; CP382. b. Eagle Bridges 3 Marathon Industries; 225. c. Foster Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller Company; 85350. d. Mon3Eco Industries, Inc.; 22325. 2. For indoor applications, use adhesive that has a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). 3. Use adhesive that complies with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small3 Scale Environmental Chambers," including 2004 Addenda. BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES CORNELL – NCP HVAC PIPING INSULATION STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 23 07 19 – PAGE 5 OF 18 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 2.4 MASTICS A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates; comply with MIL3PRF319565C, Type II. 1. For indoor applications, use mastics that have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). B. Vapor3Barrier Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor use on below3ambient services. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Foster Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller Company; 30380/30390. b. Vimasco Corporation; 749. 2. Water3Vapor Permeance: ASTM E 96/E 96M, Procedure B, 0.013 perm (0.009 metric perm) at 433mil (1.093mm) dry film thickness. 3. Service Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 180 deg F (Minus 29 to plus 82 deg C). 4. Solids Content: ASTM D 1644, 58 percent by volume and 70 percent by weight. 5. Color: White. 2.5 LAGGING ADHESIVES A. Description: Comply with MIL3A33316C, Class I, Grade A and shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates. 1. For indoor applications, use lagging adhesives that have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). 2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Childers Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller Company; CP350 AHV2. b. Foster Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller Company; 30336. c. Vimasco Corporation; 713 and 714. 3. Fire3resistant, water3based lagging adhesive and coating for use indoors to adhere fire3resistant lagging cloths over pipe insulation. 4. Service Temperature Range: 0 to plus 180 deg F (Minus 18 to plus 82 deg C). 5. Color: White. 2.6 SEALANTS A. Joint Sealants: BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES CORNELL – NCP HVAC PIPING INSULATION STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 23 07 19 – PAGE 6 OF 18 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 1. Joint Sealants for Cellular3Glass Products, Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Childers Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller Company; CP376. b. Eagle Bridges 3 Marathon Industries; 405. c. Foster Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller Company; 30345. d. Mon3Eco Industries, Inc.; 44305. e. Pittsburgh Corning Corporation; Pittseal 444. B. FSK and Metal Jacket Flashing Sealants: 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Childers Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller Company; CP376. b. Eagle Bridges 3 Marathon Industries; 405. c. Foster Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller Company; 95344. d. Mon3Eco Industries, Inc.; 44305. 2. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates. 3. Fire3 and water3resistant, flexible, elastomeric sealant. 4. Service Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 250 deg F (Minus 40 to plus 121 deg C). 5. Color: Aluminum. 6. For indoor applications, use sealants that have a VOC content of 420 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). 7. Use sealants that comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small3 Scale Environmental Chambers," including 2004 Addenda. C. ASJ Flashing Sealants, and Vinyl, PVDC, and PVC Jacket Flashing Sealants: 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Childers Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller Company; CP376. 2. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates. 3. Fire3 and water3resistant, flexible, elastomeric sealant. 4. Service Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 250 deg F (Minus 40 to plus 121 deg C). 5. Color: White. BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES CORNELL – NCP HVAC PIPING INSULATION STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 23 07 19 – PAGE 7 OF 18 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 6. For indoor applications, use sealants that have a VOC content of 420 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). 7. Use sealants that comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small3 Scale Environmental Chambers," including 2004 Addenda. 2.7 FACTORY3APPLIED JACKETS A. Insulation system schedules indicate factory3applied jackets on various applications. When factory3applied jackets are indicated, comply with the following: 1. ASJ: White, kraft3paper, fiberglass3reinforced scrim with aluminum3foil backing; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type I. 2. FSK Jacket: Aluminum3foil, fiberglass3reinforced scrim with kraft3paper backing; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type II. 2.8 FIELD3APPLIED JACKETS A. Field3applied jackets shall comply with ASTM C 921, Type I, unless otherwise indicated. B. FSK Jacket: Aluminum3foil3face, fiberglass3reinforced scrim with kraft3paper backing. C. PVC Jacket: High3impact3resistant, UV3resistant PVC complying with ASTM D 1784, Class 163543C; thickness as scheduled; roll stock ready for shop or field cutting and forming. Thickness is indicated in field3applied jacket schedules. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Johns Manville; Zeston. b. P.I.C. Plastics, Inc.; FG Series. c. Proto Corporation; LoSmoke. d. Speedline Corporation; SmokeSafe. 2. Adhesive: As recommended by jacket material manufacturer. 3. Color: White. 4. Factory3fabricated fitting covers to match jacket if available; otherwise, field fabricate. a. Shapes: 453 and 903degree, short3 and long3radius elbows, tees, valves, flanges, unions, reducers, end caps, soil3pipe hubs, traps, mechanical joints, and P3trap and supply covers for lavatories. D. Self3Adhesive Outdoor Jacket: 603mil3 (1.53mm3) thick, laminated vapor barrier and waterproofing membrane for installation over insulation located aboveground outdoors; consisting of a rubberized bituminous resin on a crosslaminated polyethylene film covered with white aluminum3foil facing. BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES CORNELL – NCP HVAC PIPING INSULATION STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 23 07 19 – PAGE 8 OF 18 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Polyguard Products, Inc.; Alumaguard 60. 2.9 TAPES A. ASJ Tape: White vapor3retarder tape matching factory3applied jacket with acrylic adhesive, complying with ASTM C 1136. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. ABI, Ideal Tape Division; 428 AWF ASJ. b. Avery Dennison Corporation, Specialty Tapes Division; Fasson 0836. c. Compac Corporation; 104 and 105. d. Venture Tape; 1540 CW Plus, 1542 CW Plus, and 1542 CW Plus/SQ. 2. Width: 3 inches (75 mm). 3. Thickness: 11.5 mils (0.29 mm). 4. Adhesion: 90 ounces force/inch (1.0 N/mm) in width. 5. Elongation: 2 percent. 6. Tensile Strength: 40 lbf/inch (7.2 N/mm) in width. 7. ASJ Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of ASJ tape. B. FSK Tape: Foil3face, vapor3retarder tape matching factory3applied jacket with acrylic adhesive; complying with ASTM C 1136. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. ABI, Ideal Tape Division; 491 AWF FSK. b. Avery Dennison Corporation, Specialty Tapes Division; Fasson 0827. c. Compac Corporation; 110 and 111. d. Venture Tape; 1525 CW NT, 1528 CW, and 1528 CW/SQ. 2. Width: 3 inches (75 mm). 3. Thickness: 6.5 mils (0.16 mm). 4. Adhesion: 90 ounces force/inch (1.0 N/mm) in width. 5. Elongation: 2 percent. 6. Tensile Strength: 40 lbf/inch (7.2 N/mm) in width. 7. FSK Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of FSK tape. 2.10 SECUREMENTS A. Bands: 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. ITW Insulation Systems; Gerrard Strapping and Seals. b. RPR Products, Inc.; Insul3Mate Strapping, Seals, and Springs. BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES CORNELL – NCP HVAC PIPING INSULATION STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 23 07 19 – PAGE 9 OF 18 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 2. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 167 or ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 304; 0.015 inch (0.38 mm) thick, 1/2 inch (13 mm) wide with wing seal. 3. Aluminum: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105, or 5005; Temper H314, 0.020 inch (0.51 mm) thick, 1/2 inch (13 mm) wide with wing seal. B. Staples: Outward3clinching insulation staples, nominal 3/43inch3 (193mm3) wide, stainless steel or Monel. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of insulation application. 1. Verify that systems to be insulated have been tested and are free of defects. 2. Verify that surfaces to be insulated are clean and dry. 3. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materials that will adversely affect insulation application. B. Surface Preparation: Clean and prepare surfaces to be insulated. Before insulating, apply a corrosion coating to insulated surfaces as follows: 1. Carbon Steel: Coat carbon steel operating at a service temperature between 32 and 300 deg F (0 and 149 deg C) with an epoxy coating. Consult coating manufacturer for appropriate coating materials and application methods for operating temperature range. C. Coordinate insulation installation with the trade installing heat tracing. Comply with requirements for heat tracing that apply to insulation. D. Mix insulating cements with clean potable water; if insulating cements are to be in contact with stainless3steel surfaces, use demineralized water. 3.3 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. Install insulation materials, accessories, and finishes with smooth, straight, and even surfaces; free of voids throughout the length of piping including fittings, valves, and specialties. B. Install insulation materials, forms, vapor barriers or retarders, jackets, and thicknesses required for each item of pipe system as specified in insulation system schedules. BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES CORNELL – NCP HVAC PIPING INSULATION STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 23 07 19 – PAGE 10 OF 18 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 C. Install accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Install accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either wet or dry state. D. Install insulation with longitudinal seams at top and bottom of horizontal runs. E. Install multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered. F. Do not weld brackets, clips, or other attachment devices to piping, fittings, and specialties. G. Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing. H. Install insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with adhesive recommended by insulation material manufacturer. I. Install insulation with least number of joints practical. J. Where vapor barrier is indicated, seal joints, seams, and penetrations in insulation at hangers, supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor3 barrier mastic. 1. Install insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments. 2. For insulation application where vapor barriers are indicated, extend insulation on anchor legs from point of attachment to supported item to point of attachment to structure. Taper and seal ends at attachment to structure with vapor3barrier mastic. 3. Install insert materials and install insulation to tightly join the insert. Seal insulation to insulation inserts with adhesive or sealing compound recommended by insulation material manufacturer. 4. Cover inserts with jacket material matching adjacent pipe insulation. Install shields over jacket, arranged to protect jacket from tear or puncture by hanger, support, and shield. K. Apply adhesives, mastics, and sealants at manufacturer's recommended coverage rate and wet and dry film thicknesses. L. Install insulation with factory3applied jackets as follows: 1. Draw jacket tight and smooth. 2. Cover circumferential joints with 33inch3 (753mm3) wide strips, of same material as insulation jacket. Secure strips with adhesive and outward clinching staples along both edges of strip, spaced 4 inches (100 mm) o.c. 3. Overlap jacket longitudinal seams at least 131/2 inches (38 mm). Install insulation with longitudinal seams at bottom of pipe. Clean and dry surface to receive self3sealing lap. Staple laps with outward clinching staples along edge at 2 inches (50 mm) o.c. a. For below3ambient services, apply vapor3barrier mastic over staples. BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES CORNELL – NCP HVAC PIPING INSULATION STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 23 07 19 – PAGE 11 OF 18 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 4. Cover joints and seams with tape, according to insulation material manufacturer's written instructions, to maintain vapor seal. 5. Where vapor barriers are indicated, apply vapor3barrier mastic on seams and joints and at ends adjacent to pipe flanges and fittings. M. Cut insulation in a manner to avoid compressing insulation more than 75 percent of its nominal thickness. N. Finish installation with systems at operating conditions. Repair joint separations and cracking due to thermal movement. O. Repair damaged insulation facings by applying same facing material over damaged areas. Extend patches at least 4 inches (100 mm) beyond damaged areas. Adhere, staple, and seal patches similar to butt joints. 3.4 PENETRATIONS A. Insulation Installation at Roof Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through roof penetrations. 1. Seal penetrations with flashing sealant. 2. For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation above roof surface and seal with joint sealant. For applications requiring indoor and outdoor insulation, install insulation for outdoor applications tightly joined to indoor insulation ends. Seal joint with joint sealant. 3. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside roof flashing at least 2 inches (50 mm) below top of roof flashing. 4. Seal jacket to roof flashing with flashing sealant. B. Insulation Installation at Aboveground Exterior Wall Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through wall penetrations. 1. Seal penetrations with flashing sealant. 2. For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation inside wall surface and seal with joint sealant. For applications requiring indoor and outdoor insulation, install insulation for outdoor applications tightly joined to indoor insulation ends. Seal joint with joint sealant. 3. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside wall flashing and overlap wall flashing at least 2 inches (50 mm). 4. Seal jacket to wall flashing with flashing sealant. C. Insulation Installation at Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations (That Are Not Fire Rated): Install insulation continuously through walls and partitions. D. Insulation Installation at Fire3Rated Wall and Partition Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through penetrations of fire3rated walls and partitions. E. Insulation Installation at Floor Penetrations: 1. Pipe: Install insulation continuously through floor penetrations. 2. Seal penetrations through fire3rated assemblies. BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES CORNELL – NCP HVAC PIPING INSULATION STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 23 07 19 – PAGE 12 OF 18 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 3.5 GENERAL PIPE INSULATION INSTALLATION A. Requirements in this article generally apply to all insulation materials except where more specific requirements are specified in various pipe insulation material installation articles. B. Insulation Installation on Fittings, Valves, Strainers, Flanges, and Unions: 1. Install insulation over fittings, valves, strainers, flanges, unions, and other specialties with continuous thermal and vapor3retarder integrity unless otherwise indicated. 2. Insulate pipe elbows using preformed fitting insulation or mitered fittings made from same material and density as adjacent pipe insulation. Each piece shall be butted tightly against adjoining piece and bonded with adhesive. Fill joints, seams, voids, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement finished to a smooth, hard, and uniform contour that is uniform with adjoining pipe insulation. 3. Insulate tee fittings with preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Cut sectional pipe insulation to fit. Butt each section closely to the next and hold in place with tie wire. Bond pieces with adhesive. 4. Insulate valves using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material, density, and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker. For valves, insulate up to and including the bonnets, valve stuffing3box studs, bolts, and nuts. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement. 5. Insulate strainers using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material, density, and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement. Insulate strainers so strainer basket flange or plug can be easily removed and replaced without damaging the insulation and jacket. Provide a removable reusable insulation cover. For below3ambient services, provide a design that maintains vapor barrier. 6. Insulate flanges and unions using a section of oversized preformed pipe insulation. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker. 7. Cover segmented insulated surfaces with a layer of finishing cement and coat with a mastic. Install vapor3barrier mastic for below3ambient services and a breather mastic for above3ambient services. Reinforce the mastic with fabric3reinforcing mesh. Trowel the mastic to a smooth and well3 shaped contour. 8. For services not specified to receive a field3applied jacket except for flexible elastomeric and polyolefin, install fitted PVC cover over elbows, tees, strainers, valves, flanges, and unions. Terminate ends with PVC end caps. Tape PVC covers to adjoining insulation facing using PVC tape. 9. Stencil or label the outside insulation jacket of each union with the word "union." Match size and color of pipe labels. BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES CORNELL – NCP HVAC PIPING INSULATION STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 23 07 19 – PAGE 13 OF 18 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 C. Insulate instrument connections for thermometers, pressure gages, pressure temperature taps, test connections, flow meters, sensors, switches, and transmitters on insulated pipes. Shape insulation at these connections by tapering it to and around the connection with insulating cement and finish with finishing cement, mastic, and flashing sealant. D. Install removable insulation covers at locations indicated. Installation shall conform to the following: 1. Make removable flange and union insulation from sectional pipe insulation of same thickness as that on adjoining pipe. Install same insulation jacket as adjoining pipe insulation. 2. When flange and union covers are made from sectional pipe insulation, extend insulation from flanges or union at least two times the insulation thickness over adjacent pipe insulation on each side of flange or union. Secure flange cover in place with stainless3steel or aluminum bands. Select band material compatible with insulation and jacket. 3. Construct removable valve insulation covers in same manner as for flanges, except divide the two3part section on the vertical center line of valve body. 4. When covers are made from block insulation, make two halves, each consisting of mitered blocks wired to stainless3steel fabric. Secure this wire frame, with its attached insulation, to flanges with tie wire. Extend insulation at least 2 inches (50 mm) over adjacent pipe insulation on each side of valve. Fill space between flange or union cover and pipe insulation with insulating cement. Finish cover assembly with insulating cement applied in two coats. After first coat is dry, apply and trowel second coat to a smooth finish. 5. Unless a PVC jacket is indicated in field3applied jacket schedules, finish exposed surfaces with a metal jacket. 3.6 INSTALLATION OF CELLULAR3GLASS INSULATION A. Insulation Installation on Straight Pipes and Tubes: 1. Secure each layer of insulation to pipe with wire or bands and tighten bands without deforming insulation materials. 2. Where vapor barriers are indicated, seal longitudinal seams, end joints, and protrusions with vapor3barrier mastic and joint sealant. 3. For insulation with factory3applied jackets on below3ambient services, do not staple longitudinal tabs. Instead, secure tabs with additional adhesive as recommended by insulation material manufacturer and seal with vapor3 barrier mastic and flashing sealant. B. Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges: 1. Install preformed pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange. 2. Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, plus twice the thickness of pipe insulation. 3. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of adjacent straight pipe segments with cut sections of cellular3glass block insulation of same thickness as pipe insulation. BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES CORNELL – NCP HVAC PIPING INSULATION STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 23 07 19 – PAGE 14 OF 18 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 4. Install jacket material with manufacturer's recommended adhesive, overlap seams at least 1 inch (25 mm), and seal joints with flashing sealant. C. Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows: 1. Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipe insulation when available. Secure according to manufacturer's written instructions. 2. When preformed sections of insulation are not available, install mitered sections of cellular3glass insulation. Secure insulation materials with wire or bands. D. Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties: 1. Install preformed sections of cellular3glass insulation to valve body. 2. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without disturbing insulation. 3. Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application. 3.7 INSTALLATION OF FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC INSULATION A. Seal longitudinal seams and end joints with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated. B. Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges: 1. Install pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange. 2. Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, plus twice the thickness of pipe insulation. 3. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of adjacent straight pipe segments with cut sections of sheet insulation of same thickness as pipe insulation. 4. Secure insulation to flanges and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated. C. Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows: 1. Install mitered sections of pipe insulation. 2. Secure insulation materials and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated. D. Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties: 1. Install preformed valve covers manufactured of same material as pipe insulation when available. 2. When preformed valve covers are not available, install cut sections of pipe and sheet insulation to valve body. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without disturbing insulation. 3. Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application. 4. Secure insulation to valves and specialties and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated. BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES CORNELL – NCP HVAC PIPING INSULATION STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 23 07 19 – PAGE 15 OF 18 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 3.8 INSTALLATION OF MINERAL3FIBER INSULATION A. Insulation Installation on Straight Pipes and Tubes: 1. Secure each layer of preformed pipe insulation to pipe with wire or bands and tighten bands without deforming insulation materials. 2. Where vapor barriers are indicated, seal longitudinal seams, end joints, and protrusions with vapor3barrier mastic and joint sealant. 3. For insulation with factory3applied jackets on below3ambient surfaces, do not staple longitudinal tabs. Instead, secure tabs with additional adhesive as recommended by insulation material manufacturer and seal with vapor3 barrier mastic and flashing sealant. B. Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges: 1. Install preformed pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange. 2. Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, plus twice the thickness of pipe insulation. 3. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of adjacent straight pipe segments with mineral3fiber blanket insulation. 4. Install jacket material with manufacturer's recommended adhesive, overlap seams at least 1 inch (25 mm), and seal joints with flashing sealant. C. Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows: 1. Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipe insulation when available. 2. When preformed insulation elbows and fittings are not available, install mitered sections of pipe insulation, to a thickness equal to adjoining pipe insulation. Secure insulation materials with wire or bands. D. Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties: 1. Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipe insulation when available. 2. When preformed sections are not available, install mitered sections of pipe insulation to valve body. 3. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without disturbing insulation. 4. Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application. 3.9 FIELD3APPLIED JACKET INSTALLATION A. Where glass3cloth jackets are indicated, install directly over bare insulation or insulation with factory3applied jackets. 1. Draw jacket smooth and tight to surface with 23inch (503mm) overlap at seams and joints. 2. Embed glass cloth between two 0.0623inch3 (1.63mm3) thick coats of lagging adhesive. 3. Completely encapsulate insulation with coating, leaving no exposed insulation. B. Where FSK jackets are indicated, install as follows: BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES CORNELL – NCP HVAC PIPING INSULATION STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 23 07 19 – PAGE 16 OF 18 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 1. Draw jacket material smooth and tight. 2. Install lap or joint strips with same material as jacket. 3. Secure jacket to insulation with manufacturer's recommended adhesive. 4. Install jacket with 131/23inch (383mm) laps at longitudinal seams and 33 inch3 (753mm3) wide joint strips at end joints. 5. Seal openings, punctures, and breaks in vapor3retarder jackets and exposed insulation with vapor3barrier mastic. C. Where PVC jackets are indicated, install with 13inch (253mm) overlap at longitudinal seams and end joints; for horizontal applications. Seal with manufacturer's recommended adhesive. 1. Apply two continuous beads of adhesive to seams and joints, one bead under lap and the finish bead along seam and joint edge. D. Where metal jackets are indicated, install with 23inch (503mm) overlap at longitudinal seams and end joints. Overlap longitudinal seams arranged to shed water. Seal end joints with weatherproof sealant recommended by insulation manufacturer. Secure jacket with stainless3steel bands 12 inches (300 mm) o.c. and at end joints. 3.10 FINISHES A. Pipe Insulation with ASJ, Glass3Cloth, or Other Paintable Jacket Material: 1. Flat Acrylic Finish: Two finish coats over a primer that is compatible with jacket material and finish coat paint. Add fungicidal agent to render fabric mildew proof. a. Finish Coat Material: Interior, flat, latex3emulsion size. B. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation: After adhesive has fully cured, apply two coats of insulation manufacturer's recommended protective coating. C. Color: Final color as selected by Architect. Vary first and second coats to allow visual inspection of the completed Work. D. Do not field paint aluminum or stainless3steel jackets. 3.11 PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL A. Acceptable preformed pipe and tubular insulation materials and thicknesses are identified for each piping system and pipe size range. If more than one material is listed for a piping system, selection from materials listed is Contractor's option. B. Items Not Insulated: Unless otherwise indicated, do not install insulation on the following: 1. Drainage piping located in crawl spaces. 2. Underground piping. 3. Chrome3plated pipes and fittings unless there is a potential for personnel injury. BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES CORNELL – NCP HVAC PIPING INSULATION STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 23 07 19 – PAGE 17 OF 18 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 3.12 INDOOR PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE A. Condensate and Equipment Drain Water below 60 Deg F (16 Deg C): 1. All Pipe Sizes: Insulation shall be one of the following: a. Cellular Glass: 131/2 inches (38 mm) thick. b. Flexible Elastomeric: 3/4 inch (19 mm) thick. c. Mineral3Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation, Type I: 1/2 inch (13 mm) thick. B. Chilled Water, 40 Deg F (5 Deg C) and below: 1. NPS 3 (DN 80) and Smaller: Insulation shall be one of the following: a. Cellular Glass: 2 inches (50 mm) thick. 2. NPS 4 (DN 100) to NPS 12 (DN 300): Insulation shall be one of the following: a. Cellular Glass: 2 inches (50 mm) thick. b. Mineral3Fiber, Preformed Pipe, Type I, 2 inches (50 mm) thick. C. Chilled Water above 40 Deg F (5 Deg C): 1. NPS 12 (DN 300) and Smaller: Insulation shall be one of the following: a. Cellular Glass: 131/2 inches (38 mm) thick. b. Flexible Elastomeric: 1 inch (25 mm) thick. c. Mineral3Fiber, Preformed Pipe, Type I: 131/2 inches (38 mm) thick. D. Refrigerant Suction and Liquid Piping: 1. All Pipe Sizes: Insulation shall be one of the following: a. Cellular Glass: 131/2 inches (38 mm) thick. b. Flexible Elastomeric: 1 inch (25 mm) thick. c. Mineral3Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation, Type I: 1 inch (25 mm) thick. E. Refrigerant Suction and Liquid Flexible Tubing: 1. All Pipe Sizes: Insulation shall be the following: a. Flexible Elastomeric: 1 inch (25 mm) thick. 3.13 OUTDOOR, ABOVEGROUND PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE A. Chilled Water: 1. All Pipe Sizes: Insulation shall be one of the following: a. Cellular Glass: 3 inches (75 mm) thick. b. Flexible Elastomeric: 3 inches (75 mm) thick. c. Mineral3Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation, Type I: 3 inches (75 mm) thick. B. Refrigerant Suction and Liquid Piping: 1. All Pipe Sizes: Insulation shall be one of the following: a. Cellular Glass: 2 inches (50 mm) thick. b. Flexible Elastomeric: 2 inches (50 mm) thick. c. Mineral3Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation, Type I: 2 inches (50 mm) thick. BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES CORNELL – NCP HVAC PIPING INSULATION STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 23 07 19 – PAGE 18 OF 18 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 C. Refrigerant Suction and Liquid Flexible Tubing: 1. All Pipe Sizes: Insulation shall be the following: a. Flexible Elastomeric: 2 inches (50 mm) thick. 3.14 INDOOR, FIELD3APPLIED JACKET SCHEDULE A. Install jacket over insulation material. For insulation with factory3applied jacket, install the field3applied jacket over the factory3applied jacket. B. If more than one material is listed, selection from materials listed is Contractor's option. C. Piping, Concealed: 1. PVC: 20 mils (0.5 mm) thick. 2. Aluminum, Smooth: 0.020 inch (0.51 mm) thick. D. Piping, Exposed: 1. PVC: 20 mils (0.5 mm) thick. 3.15 OUTDOOR, FIELD3APPLIED JACKET SCHEDULE A. Install jacket over insulation material. For insulation with factory3applied jacket, install the field3applied jacket over the factory3applied jacket. B. If more than one material is listed, selection from materials listed is Contractor's option. C. Piping, Concealed: 1. PVC: 30 mils (0.8 mm) thick. 2. Aluminum, Smooth: 0.032 inch (0.81 mm) thick. D. Piping, Exposed: 1. PVC: 30 mils (0.8 mm) thick. 2. Painted Aluminum, Smooth with Z3Shaped Locking Seam: 0.032 inch (0.81 mm) thick. END OF SECTION 230719 BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES CORNELL – NCP HYDRONIC PIPING STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 23 21 13 – PAGE 1 OF 7 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 SECTION 232113 HYDRONIC PIPING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 DEFINITIONS A. MSS: Manufacturer’s Standardization Society of the Valve and Fitting Industry. B. DWV: Drain, Waste and Vent C. PTFE: Polytetrafluoroethylene. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Provide for each type of the following: 1. Copper Pipe 2. Steel Pipe 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: 1. Installers of Pressure6Sealed Joints: Installers shall be certified by the pressure6seal joint manufacturer as having been trained and qualified to join piping with pressure6seal pipe couplings and fittings. B. Steel Support Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code 6 Steel." C. Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX. 1. Comply with provisions in ASME B31 Series, "Code for Pressure Piping." 2. Certify that each welder has passed AWS qualification tests for welding processes involved and that certification is current. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS A. Drawn6Temper Copper Tubing: ASTM B 88, Type L B. Wrought6Copper Fittings: ASME B16.22. 1. Grooved6End Copper Fittings: ASTM B 75 (ASTM B 75M), copper tube or ASTM B 584, bronze casting. 2. Grooved6End6Tube Couplings: Rigid pattern, unless otherwise indicated; gasketed fitting. Ductile6iron housing with keys matching pipe and fitting grooves, prelubricated EPDM gasket rated for minimum 230 deg F (110 deg C) for use with housing, and steel bolts and nuts. C. Copper or Bronze Pressure6Seal Fittings: BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES CORNELL – NCP HYDRONIC PIPING STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 23 21 13 – PAGE 2 OF 7 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 1. Housing: Copper. 2. O6Rings and Pipe Stops: EPDM. 3. Tools: Manufacturer's special tools. 4. Minimum 2006psig (13796kPa) working6pressure rating at 250 deg F (121 deg C). D. Wrought6Copper Unions: ASME B16.22. 2.2 STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, black steel with plain ends; type, grade, and wall thickness as indicated in Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article. B. Wrought6Steel Fittings: ASTM A 234/A 234M, wall thickness to match adjoining pipe. C. Wrought Cast6 and Forged6Steel Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.5, including bolts, nuts, and gaskets of the following material group, end connections, and facings: 1. Material Group: 1.1. 2. End Connections: Butt welding. 3. Facings: Raised face. D. Steel Pipe Nipples: ASTM A 733, made of same materials and wall thicknesses as pipe in which they are installed. 2.3 JOINING MATERIALS A. Pipe6Flange Gasket Materials: Suitable for chemical and thermal conditions of piping system contents. 1. ASME B16.21, nonmetallic, flat, asbestos free, 1/86inch (3.26mm) maximum thickness unless thickness or specific material is indicated. a. Full6Face Type: For flat6face, Class 125, cast6iron and cast6bronze flanges. b. Narrow6Face Type: For raised6face, Class 250, cast6iron and steel flanges. B. Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel, unless otherwise indicated. C. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead6free alloys. Include water6flushable flux according to ASTM B 813. D. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, BCuP Series, copper6phosphorus alloys for joining copper with copper; or BAg61, silver alloy for joining copper with bronze or steel. E. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12/D10.12M for welding materials appropriate for wall thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded. BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES CORNELL – NCP HYDRONIC PIPING STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 23 21 13 – PAGE 3 OF 7 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 F. Gasket Material: Thickness, material, and type suitable for fluid to be handled and working temperatures and pressures. 2.4 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS A. General Requirements: Assembly of copper alloy and ferrous materials with separating nonconductive insulating material. Include end connections compatible with pipes to be joined. B. Dielectric Unions: 1. Description: a. Standard: ASSE 1079. b. Pressure Rating: 150 psig (1035 kPa). c. End Connections: Solder6joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous. C. Dielectric Flanges: 1. Description: a. Standard: ASSE 1079. b. Factory6fabricated, bolted, companion6flange assembly. c. Pressure Rating: Minimum at 180 deg F (82 deg C), 150 psig (1035 kPa). d. End Connections: Solder6joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous; threaded solder6joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous. D. Dielectric6Flange Insulating Kits: 1. Description: a. Nonconducting materials for field assembly of companion flanges. b. Pressure Rating: 150 psig (1035 kPa). c. Gasket: Neoprene or phenolic. d. Bolt Sleeves: Phenolic or polyethylene. e. Washers: Phenolic with steel backing washers. E. Dielectric Nipples: 1. Description: a. Standard: IAPMO PS 66 b. Electroplated steel nipple. complying with ASTM F 1545. c. Pressure Rating: 300 psig (2070 kPa) at 225 deg F (107 deg C). d. End Connections: Male threaded or grooved. e. Lining: Inert and noncorrosive, propylene. 2.5 VALVES A. Automatic Flow6Control Valves: 1. Basis6of6Design Product: a. Flow Design Inc. b. Griswold Controls. 2. Body: Brass or ferrous metal. 3. Piston and Spring Assembly: Stainless steel, tamper proof, self cleaning, and removable. 4. Combination Assemblies: Include bonze or brass6alloy ball valve. BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES CORNELL – NCP HYDRONIC PIPING STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 23 21 13 – PAGE 4 OF 7 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 5. Identification Tag: Marked with zone identification, valve number, and flow rate. 6. Size: Same as pipe in which installed. 7. Performance: Maintain constant flow, plus or minus 5 percent over system pressure fluctuations. 8. Minimum CWP Rating: 175 psig (1207 kPa). 9. Maximum Operating Temperature: 200 deg F (93 deg C). PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 PIPING APPLICATIONS A. Chilled6water piping, aboveground, NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller, shall be the following: 1. Type L, drawn6temper copper tubing, wrought6copper fittings, and soldered brazed or pressure6seal joints. B. Chilled6water piping, aboveground, NPS 261/2 (DN 65) and larger, shall be the following: 1. Schedule 40 steel pipe, wrought6steel fittings and wrought6cast or forged6 steel flanges and flange fittings, and welded and flanged joints. 2. RTRP and RTRF with adhesive or flanged joints. C. Glycol cooling6water piping, aboveground, NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller, shall be the following: 1. Type L, drawn6temper copper tubing, wrought6copper fittings, and soldered brazed or pressure6seal joints. D. Glycol cooling6water piping, aboveground, NPS 261/2 (DN 65) and larger, shall be the following: 1. Schedule 40 steel pipe, wrought6steel fittings and wrought6cast or forged6 steel flanges and flange fittings, and welded and flanged joints. E. Condensate6Drain Piping: Type M, drawn6temper copper tubing, wrought6 copper fittings, and soldered joints. 3.2 PIPING INSTALLATIONS A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems. Indicate piping locations and arrangements if such were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings. B. Install piping in concealed locations, unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas. C. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise. BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES CORNELL – NCP HYDRONIC PIPING STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 23 21 13 – PAGE 5 OF 7 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 D. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal. E. Install piping to permit valve servicing. F. Install piping at indicated slopes. G. Install piping free of sags and bends. H. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections. I. Install piping to allow application of insulation. J. Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating pressure. K. Install groups of pipes parallel to each other, spaced to permit applying insulation and servicing of valves. L. Install drains, consisting of a tee fitting, NPS 3/4 (DN 20) ball valve, and short NPS 3/4 (DN 20) threaded nipple with cap, at low points in piping system mains and elsewhere as required for system drainage. M. Install piping at a uniform grade of 0.2 percent upward in direction of flow. N. Reduce pipe sizes using eccentric reducer fitting installed with level side up. O. Install branch connections to mains using mechanically formed tee fittings in main pipe, with the branch connected to the bottom of the main pipe. For up6 feed risers, connect the branch to the top of the main pipe. P. Install unions in piping, NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller, adjacent to valves, at final connections of equipment, and elsewhere as indicated. Q. Install flanges in piping, NPS 261/2 (DN 65) and larger, at final connections of equipment and elsewhere as indicated. 3.3 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Install the following pipe attachments: 1. Adjustable steel clevis hangers for individual horizontal piping less than 20 feet (6 m) long. 2. Adjustable roller hangers and spring hangers for individual horizontal piping 20 feet (6 m) or longer. 3. Pipe Roller: MSS SP658, Type 44 for multiple horizontal piping 20 feet (6 m) or longer, supported on a trapeze. 4. Spring hangers to support vertical runs. 5. Provide copper6clad hangers and supports for hangers and supports in direct contact with copper pipe. B. Install hangers for steel piping with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod sizes: BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES CORNELL – NCP HYDRONIC PIPING STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 23 21 13 – PAGE 6 OF 7 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 HANGERS MAXIMUM SPAN MINIMUM ROD SIZE NPS 261/2 11 feet 3/8 inch NPS 3 12 feet 3/8 inch C. Install hangers for drawn6temper copper piping with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod sizes: HANGERS MAXIMUM SPAN MINIMUM ROD SIZE NPS ¾ 5 feet ¼ inch NPS 1 6 feet ¼ inch NPS 161/2 8 feet 3/8 inch NPS 2 8 feet 3/8 inch 3.4 PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION A. Join pipe and fittings according to the following requirements and Division 23 Sections specifying piping systems. B. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe. C. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before assembly. D. Soldered Joints: Apply ASTM B 813, water6flushable flux, unless otherwise indicated, to tube end. Construct joints according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook," using lead6free solder alloy complying with ASTM B 32. E. Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," "Pipe and Tube" Chapter, using copper6phosphorus brazing filler metal complying with AWS A5.8. F. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows: 1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dry seal threading is specified. 2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds. BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES CORNELL – NCP HYDRONIC PIPING STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 23 21 13 – PAGE 7 OF 7 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 G. Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12/D10.12M, using qualified processes and welding operators according to Part 1 "Quality Assurance" Article. H. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness for service application. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads. I. Pressure6Sealed Joints: Use manufacturer6recommended tool and procedure. Leave insertion marks on pipe after assembly. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Prepare hydronic piping according to ASME B31.9 and as follows: 1. Leave joints, including welds, uninsulated and exposed for examination during test. 2. Flush hydronic piping systems with clean water; then remove and clean or replace strainer screens. 3. Isolate equipment from piping. If a valve is used to isolate equipment, its closure shall be capable of sealing against test pressure without damage to valve. Install blinds in flanged joints to isolate equipment. 4. Install safety valve, set at a pressure no more than one6third higher than test pressure, to protect against damage by expanding liquid or other source of overpressure during test. B. Perform the following tests on hydronic piping: 1. Use ambient temperature water as a testing medium unless there is risk of damage due to freezing. Another liquid that is safe for workers and compatible with piping may be used. 2. While filling system, use vents installed at high points of system to release air. Use drains installed at low points for complete draining of test liquid. 3. Subject piping system to hydrostatic test pressure that is not less than 1.5 times the system's working pressure. Test pressure shall not exceed maximum pressure for any vessel, pump, valve, or other component in system under test. Verify that stress due to pressure at bottom of vertical runs does not exceed 90 percent of specified minimum yield strength or 1.7 times "SE" value in Appendix A in ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping." 4. After hydrostatic test pressure has been applied for at least 10 minutes, examine piping, joints, and connections for leakage. Eliminate leaks by tightening, repairing, or replacing components, and repeat hydrostatic test until there are no leaks. 5. Prepare written report of testing. END OF SECTION 232113 BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES CORNELL – NCP HYDRONIC PUMPS STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 23 21 23 – PAGE 1 OF 4 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 SECTION 232123 HYDRONIC PUMPS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 DEFINITIONS A. Buna!N: Nitrile rubber. B. EPT: Ethylene propylene terpolymer. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of pump. Include certified performance curves and rated capacities, operating characteristics, furnished specialties, final impeller dimensions, and accessories for each type of product indicated. Indicate pump's operating point on curves. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 CLOSE!COUPLED, IN!LINE CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS A. Basis!of!Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following: 1. Armstrong Pumps Inc. 2. Grundfos Pumps Corporation. 3. ITT Corporation; Bell & Gossett. 4. Patterson Pump Co. B. Description: Factory!assembled and !tested, centrifugal, overhung!impeller, close!coupled, in!line pump as defined in HI 1.1!1.2 and HI 1.3; designed for installation with pump and motor shafts mounted horizontally or vertically. C. Pump Construction: 1. Casing: Radially split, cast iron, with threaded gage tappings at inlet and outlet, replaceable bronze wear rings, and threaded companion!flange connections. 2. Impeller: 30% glass filled noryl. 3. Pump Shaft: Steel, with copper!alloy shaft sleeve. 4. Seal: Mechanical seal consisting of carbon rotating ring against a ceramic seat held by a stainless!steel spring. 5. Pump Bearings: Permanently lubricated ball bearings. D. Motor: Single speed and rigidly mounted to pump casing. 1. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES CORNELL – NCP HYDRONIC PUMPS STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 23 21 23 – PAGE 2 OF 4 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 2. Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, and efficiency requirements for motors specified in Division 23 Section "Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment." a. Enclosure: Open, dripproof. 2.2 ELECTRONICALLY COMMUTATED PUMPS A. Basis!of!Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings > or comparable product by one of the following: 1. Armstrong Pumps Inc. 2. ITT Corporation; Bell & Gossett. 3. Patterson Pump Co. B. Description: Factory!assembled and !tested, with a proportional pressure control, which automatically adjusts the pump performance continuously and automatically to the requirements of the system. C. Pump Construction: 1. Body: Cast Iron 2. O!ring: EPRM 3. Impeller: Nylon/PPO 4. Pump Bearings: Carbon/alumina ceramic. D. Motor: Shaft!less spherical electronically commutated, permanent magnet motor (ECM/PMM). 1. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. 2. Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, and efficiency requirements for motors specified in Division 23 Section "Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment." PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine equipment foundations and anchor!bolt locations for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Examine roughing!in for piping systems to verify actual locations of piping connections before pump installation. C. Examine foundations and inertia bases for suitable conditions where pumps are to be installed. BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES CORNELL – NCP HYDRONIC PUMPS STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 23 21 23 – PAGE 3 OF 4 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PUMP INSTALLATION A. Install pumps to provide access for periodic maintenance including removing motors, impellers, couplings, and accessories. B. Independently support pumps and piping so weight of piping is not supported by pumps and weight of pumps is not supported by piping. C. Equipment Mounting: Install in!line pumps with continuous!thread hanger rods and elastomeric hangers of size required to support weight of in!line pumps. 3.3 ALIGNMENT A. Engage a factory!authorized service representative to perform alignment service. B. Comply with requirements in Hydronics Institute standards for alignment of pump and motor shaft. Add shims to the motor feet and bolt motor to base frame. Do not use grout between motor feet and base frame. C. Comply with pump and coupling manufacturers' written instructions. D. After alignment is correct, tighten foundation bolts evenly but not too firmly. Completely fill baseplate with nonshrink, nonmetallic grout while metal blocks and shims or wedges are in place. After grout has cured, fully tighten foundation bolts. 3.4 CONNECTIONS A. Where installing piping adjacent to pump, allow space for service and maintenance. B. Connect piping to pumps. Install valves that are same size as piping connected to pumps. C. Install suction and discharge pipe sizes equal to or greater than diameter of pump nozzles. D. Install pressure gages on pump suction and discharge or at integral pressure! gage tapping, or install single gage with multiple!input selector valve. E. Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section "Low!Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables." BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES CORNELL – NCP HYDRONIC PUMPS STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 23 21 23 – PAGE 4 OF 4 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 3.5 STARTUP SERVICE A. Engage a factory!authorized service representative to perform startup service. 1. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Check piping connections for tightness. 3. Clean strainers on suction piping. 4. Perform the following startup checks for each pump before starting: a. Verify bearing lubrication. b. Verify that pump is free to rotate by hand and that pump for handling hot liquid is free to rotate with pump hot and cold. If pump is bound or drags, do not operate until cause of trouble is determined and corrected. c. Verify that pump is rotating in the correct direction. 5. Start motor. 6. Open discharge valve slowly. END OF SECTION 232123 BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES CORNELL – NCP REFRIGERANT PIPING STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 23 23 00 – PAGE 1 OF 4 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 SECTION 232300 REFRIGERANT PIPING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Provide for each type of valve and refrigerant piping specialty indicated. Include pressure drop, based on manufacturer's test data, for the following: 1. Copper tube. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications." B. Comply with ASHRAE 15, "Safety Code for Refrigeration Systems." C. Comply with ASME B31.5, "Refrigeration Piping and Heat Transfer Components." 1.3 PRODUCT STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Store piping in a clean and protected area with end caps in place to ensure that piping interior and exterior are clean when installed. 1.4 COORDINATION A. Coordinate size and location of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Line Test Pressure for Refrigerant R=410A: 1. Suction Lines for Air=Conditioning Applications: 300 psig (2068 kPa). 2. Suction Lines for Heat=Pump Applications: 535 psig (3689 kPa). 3. Liquid Lines: 535 psig (3689 kPa). 2.2 REFRIGERANTS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Atofina Chemicals, Inc. 2. DuPont Company; Fluorochemicals Div. 3. Honeywell, Inc.; Genetron Refrigerants. 4. INEOS Fluor Americas LLC. BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES CORNELL – NCP REFRIGERANT PIPING STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 23 23 00 – PAGE 2 OF 4 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 B. ASHRAE 34, R=410A: Pentafluoroethane/Difluoromethane. 2.3 COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS A. Copper Tube: ASTM B 280, Type ACR. B. Wrought=Copper Fittings: ASME B16.22. C. Wrought=Copper Unions: ASME B16.22. D. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8. E. Flexible Connectors: 1. Body: Tin=bronze bellows with woven, flexible, tinned=bronze=wire= reinforced protective jacket. 2. End Connections: Socket ends. 3. Offset Performance: Capable of minimum 3/4=inch (20=mm) misalignment in minimum 7=inch= (180=mm=) long assembly. 4. Pressure Rating: Factory test at minimum 500 psig (3450 kPa). 5. Maximum Operating Temperature: 250 deg F (121 deg C). PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 PIPING APPLICATIONS FOR REFRIGERANT R=410A A. Suction Lines NPS 1=1/2 (DN 40) and Smaller Copper, Type ACR, annealed=temper tubing and wrought=copper fittings with brazed joints. B. Liquid Lines Copper, Type ACR, annealed= or drawn=temper tubing and wrought=copper fittings with brazed joints. 3.2 PIPING INSTALLATION A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems; indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Shop Drawings. B. Install refrigerant piping according to ASHRAE 15. C. Install piping in concealed locations unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas. D. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise. E. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal. BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES CORNELL – NCP REFRIGERANT PIPING STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 23 23 00 – PAGE 3 OF 4 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 F. Install piping adjacent to machines to allow service and maintenance. G. Install piping free of sags and bends. H. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections. I. Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating pressure. J. Install piping as short and direct as possible, with a minimum number of joints, elbows, and fittings. K. Arrange piping to allow inspection and service of refrigeration equipment. Install valves and specialties in accessible locations to allow for service and inspection. Install access doors or panels if valves or equipment requiring maintenance is concealed behind finished surfaces. L. Install refrigerant piping in protective conduit where installed belowground. M. Install refrigerant piping in rigid or flexible conduit in locations where exposed to mechanical injury. N. Slope refrigerant piping as follows: 1. Install horizontal suction lines with a uniform slope downward to compressor. 2. Install traps and double risers to entrain oil in vertical runs. 3. Liquid lines may be installed level. O. Install piping with adequate clearance between pipe and adjacent walls and hangers or between pipes for insulation installation. P. Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Q. Install sleeve seals for piping penetrations of concrete walls and slabs. 3.3 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Install the following pipe attachments: 1. Adjustable steel clevis hangers for individual horizontal runs less than 20 feet (6 m) long. 2. Roller hangers and spring hangers for individual horizontal runs 20 feet (6 m) or longer. 3. Pipe Roller: MSS SP=58, Type 44 for multiple horizontal piping 20 feet (6 m) or longer, supported on a trapeze. 4. Spring hangers to support vertical runs. B. Install hangers for copper tubing with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod sizes: 1. NPS 1/2 (DN 15): Maximum span, 60 inches (1500 mm); minimum rod size, 1/4 inch (6.4 mm). BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES CORNELL – NCP REFRIGERANT PIPING STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 23 23 00 – PAGE 4 OF 4 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 2. NPS 5/8 (DN 18): Maximum span, 60 inches (1500 mm); minimum rod size, 1/4 inch (6.4 mm). 3. NPS 1 (DN 25): Maximum span, 72 inches (1800 mm); minimum rod size, 1/4 inch (6.4 mm). C. Support multifloor vertical runs at least at each floor. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports. B. Tests and Inspections: 1. Comply with ASME B31.5, Chapter VI. 2. Test refrigerant piping, specialties, and receivers. Isolate compressor, condenser, evaporator, and safety devices from test pressure if they are not rated above the test pressure. 3. Test high= and low=pressure side piping of each system separately at not less than the pressures indicated in Part 1 "Performance Requirements" Article. a. Fill system with nitrogen to the required test pressure. b. System shall maintain test pressure at the manifold gage throughout duration of test. c. Test joints and fittings with electronic leak detector or by brushing a small amount of soap and glycerin solution over joints. d. Remake leaking joints using new materials, and retest until satisfactory results are achieved. 3.5 SYSTEM CHARGING A. Charge system per manufacturer’s written instructions END OF SECTION 23 23 00 BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES CORNELL – NCP METAL DUCTS STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 23 31 13 – PAGE 1 OF 14 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 SECTION 233113 METAL DUCTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Provide for each type of the following products: 1. Liners and adhesives. 2. Sealants and gaskets. B. Provide Shop Drawings as Follows: 1. Fabrication, assembly, and installation, including plans, elevations, sections, components, and attachments to other work. 2. Factory4 and shop4fabricated ducts and fittings. 3. Duct layout indicating sizes, configuration, liner material, and static4 pressure classes. 4. Elevation of top of ducts. 5. Fittings. 6. Seam and joint construction. 7. Penetrations through fire4rated and other partitions. 8. Equipment installation based on equipment being used on Project. 9. Locations for duct accessories, including dampers, turning vanes, and access doors and panels. 10. Hangers and supports, including methods for duct and building attachment and vibration isolation. C. Field quality4control reports. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to [AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code 4 Steel," for hangers and supports.] [AWS D1.2/D1.2M, "Structural Welding Code 4 Aluminum," for aluminum supports.] [AWS D9.1M/D9.1, "Sheet Metal W elding Code," for duct joint and seam welding.] B. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following: 1. AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code 4 Steel," for hangers and supports. 2. AWS D1.2/D1.2M, "Structural Welding Code 4 Aluminum," for aluminum supports. 3. AWS D9.1M/D9.1, "Sheet Metal Welding Code," for duct joint and seam welding. BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES CORNELL – NCP METAL DUCTS STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 23 31 13 – PAGE 2 OF 14 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 C. ASHRAE Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1, Section 5 4 "Systems and Equipment" and Section 7 4 "Construction and System Start4 Up." D. ASHRAE/IESNA Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1, Section 6.4.4 4 "HVAC System Construction and Insulation." PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Structural Performance: Duct hangers and supports shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and stresses within limits and under conditions described in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards 4 Metal and Flexible". B. Airstream Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with the airstream shall comply with requirements in ASHRAE 62.1. 2.2 SINGLE4WALL RECTANGULAR DUCTS AND FITTINGS A. General Fabrication Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards 4 Metal and Flexible" based on indicated static4 pressure class unless otherwise indicated. B. Transverse Joints: Select joint types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards 4 Metal and Flexible," Figure 241, "Rectangular Duct/Transverse Joints," for static4pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct4support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards 4 Metal and Flexible." C. Longitudinal Seams: Select seam types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards 4 Metal and Flexible," Figure 242, "Rectangular Duct/Longitudinal Seams," for static4pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct4support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards 4 Metal and Flexible." D. Elbows, Transitions, Offsets, Branch Connections, and Other Duct Construction: Select types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards 4 Metal and Flexible," Chapter 4, "Fittings and Other Construction," for static4pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct4support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards 4 Metal and Flexible." E. Longitudinal Seams: Select seam types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards 4 Metal and Flexible," Figure 242, "Rectangular Duct/Longitudinal Seams," for static4pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct4support intervals, BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES CORNELL – NCP METAL DUCTS STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 23 31 13 – PAGE 3 OF 14 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards 4 Metal and Flexible." 2.3 SINGLE4WALL ROUND[ AND FLAT4OVAL] DUCTS AND FITTINGS A. General Fabrication Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards 4 Metal and Flexible," Chapter 3, "Round, Oval, and Flexible Duct," based on indicated static4pressure class unless otherwise indicated. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Lindab Inc. b. McGill AirFlow LLC. c. SEMCO Incorporated. d. Sheet Metal Connectors, Inc. e. Spiral Manufacturing Co., Inc. B. Flat4Oval Ducts: Indicated dimensions are the duct width (major dimension) and diameter of the round sides connecting the flat portions of the duct (minor dimension). C. Transverse Joints: Select joint types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards 4 Metal and Flexible," Figure 341, "Round Duct Transverse Joints," for static4pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct4support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards 4 Metal and Flexible." D. Longitudinal Seams: Select seam types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards 4 Metal and Flexible," Figure 342, "Round Duct Longitudinal Seams," for static4pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct4support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards 4 Metal and Flexible." E. Tees and Laterals: Select types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards 4 Metal and Flexible," Figure 345, "90 Degree Tees and Laterals," and Figure 346, "Conical Tees," for static4 pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct4 support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards 4 Metal and Flexible." 2.4 SHEET METAL MATERIALS A. General Material Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards 4 Metal and Flexible" for acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction methods unless otherwise indicated. Sheet metal materials shall be free of pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations, and other imperfections. BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES CORNELL – NCP METAL DUCTS STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 23 31 13 – PAGE 4 OF 14 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 B. Galvanized Sheet Steel: Comply with ASTM A 653/A 653M. 1. Galvanized Coating Designation: G60. 2. Finishes for Surfaces Exposed to View: Mill phosphatized. C. Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/44inch (64mm) minimum diameter for lengths 36 inches (900 mm) or less; 3/84inch (104mm) minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches (900 mm). 2.5 DUCT LINER A. Fibrous4Glass Duct Liner: Comply with ASTM C 1071, NFPA 90A, or NFPA 90B; and with NAIMA AH124, "Fibrous Glass Duct Liner Standard." 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. CertainTeed Corporation; Insulation Group. b. Johns Manville. c. Knauf Insulation. d. Owens Corning. e. Maximum Thermal Conductivity: 1) Type I, Flexible: 0.27 Btu x in./h x sq. ft. x deg F (0.039 W/m x K) at 75 deg F (24 deg C) mean temperature. 2) Type II, Rigid: 0.23 Btu x in./h x sq. ft. x deg F (0.033 W/m x K) at 75 deg F (24 deg C) mean temperature. 2. Antimicrobial Erosion4Resistant Coating: Apply to the surface of the liner that will form the interior surface of the duct to act as a moisture repellent and erosion4resistant coating. Antimicrobial compound shall be tested for efficacy by an NRTL and registered by the EPA for use in HVAC systems. 3. Water4Based Liner Adhesive: Comply with NFPA 90A or NFPA 90B and with ASTM C 916. a. For indoor applications, use adhesive that has a VOC content of 80 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). b. Adhesive shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small4Scale Environmental Chambers." B. Shop Application of Duct Liner: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards 4 Metal and Flexible," Figure 7411, "Flexible Duct Liner Installation." 1. Adhere a single layer of indicated thickness of duct liner with at least 90 percent adhesive coverage at liner contact surface area. Attaining indicated thickness with multiple layers of duct liner is prohibited. BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES CORNELL – NCP METAL DUCTS STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 23 31 13 – PAGE 5 OF 14 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 2. Apply adhesive to transverse edges of liner facing upstream that do not receive metal nosing. 3. Butt transverse joints without gaps, and coat joint with adhesive. 4. Fold and compress liner in corners of rectangular ducts or cut and fit to ensure butted4edge overlapping. 5. Do not apply liner in rectangular ducts with longitudinal joints, except at corners of ducts, unless duct size and dimensions of standard liner make longitudinal joints necessary. 6. Secure liner with mechanical fasteners 4 inches (100 mm) from corners and at intervals not exceeding 12 inches (300 mm) transversely; at 3 inches (75 mm) from transverse joints and at intervals not exceeding 18 inches (450 mm) longitudinally. 2.6 SEALANT AND GASKETS A. General Sealant and Gasket Requirements: Surface4burning characteristics for sealants and gaskets shall be a maximum flame4spread index of 25 and a maximum smoke4developed index of 50 when tested according to UL 723; certified by an NRTL. B. Water4Based Joint and Seam Sealant: 1. Application Method: Brush on. 2. Solids Content: Minimum 65 percent. 3. Shore A Hardness: Minimum 20. 4. Water resistant. 5. Mold and mildew resistant. 6. VOC: Maximum 75 g/L (less water). 7. Maximum Static4Pressure Class: 104inch wg (2500 Pa), positive and negative. 8. Service: Indoor or outdoor. 9. Substrate: Compatible with galvanized sheet steel (both PVC coated and bare), stainless steel, or aluminum sheets. C. Flange Gaskets: Butyl rubber, neoprene, or EPDM polymer with polyisobutylene plasticizer. D. Round Duct Joint O4Ring Seals: 1. Seal shall provide maximum leakage class of 3 cfm/100 sq. ft. at 14inch wg (0.14 L/s per sq. m at 250 Pa) and shall be rated for 104inch wg (25004 Pa) static4pressure class, positive or negative. 2. EPDM O4ring to seal in concave bead in coupling or fitting spigot. 3. Double4lipped, EPDM O4ring seal, mechanically fastened to factory4 fabricated couplings and fitting spigots. 2.7 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Hanger Rods for Noncorrosive Environments: Cadmium4plated steel rods and nuts. BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES CORNELL – NCP METAL DUCTS STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 23 31 13 – PAGE 6 OF 14 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 B. Strap and Rod Sizes: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards 4 Metal and Flexible," Table 541 (Table 541M), "Rectangular Duct Hangers Minimum Size," and Table 542, "Minimum Hanger Sizes for Round Duct." C. Steel Cables for Galvanized4Steel Ducts: Galvanized steel complying with ASTM A 603. D. Steel Cable End Connections: Cadmium4plated steel assemblies with brackets, swivel, and bolts designed for duct hanger service; with an automatic4locking and clamping device. E. Duct Attachments: Sheet metal screws, blind rivets, or self4tapping metal screws; compatible with duct materials. F. Trapeze and Riser Supports: 1. Supports for Galvanized4Steel Ducts: Galvanized4steel shapes and plates. 2.8 MANUAL VOLUME DAMPERS A. Standard, Steel, Manual Volume Dampers: 1. Suitable for horizontal or vertical applications. 2. Frames: a. Hat4shaped, galvanized4steel channels, 0.0644inch (1.624mm) minimum thickness. b. Mitered and welded corners. c. Flanges for attaching to walls and flangeless frames for installing in ducts. 3. Blades: a. Multiple or single blade. b. Parallel4 or opposed4blade design. c. Stiffen damper blades for stability. d. Galvanized4steel, 0.064 inch (1.62 mm) thick. 4. Blade Axles: Galvanized steel. 5. Bearings: a. Molded synthetic. b. Dampers in ducts with pressure classes of 34inch wg (750 Pa) or less shall have axles full length of damper blades and bearings at both ends of operating shaft. B. Damper Hardware: 1. Zinc4plated, die4cast core with dial and handle made of 3/324inch4 (2.44 mm4) thick zinc4plated steel, and a 3/44inch (194mm) hexagon locking nut. 2. Include center hole to suit damper operating4rod size. BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES CORNELL – NCP METAL DUCTS STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 23 31 13 – PAGE 7 OF 14 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 3. Include elevated platform for insulated duct mounting. 2.9 TURNING VANES A. Manufactured Turning Vanes for Metal Ducts: Curved blades of galvanized sheet steel; support with bars perpendicular to blades set; set into vane runners suitable for duct mounting. 1. Acoustic Turning Vanes: Fabricate airfoil4shaped aluminum extrusions with perforated faces and fibrous4glass fill. B. General Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards 4 Metal and Flexible"; Figures 443, "Vanes and Vane Runners," and 444, "Vane Support in Elbows." C. Vane Construction: Single wall for ducts up to 48 inches (1200 mm) wide and double wall for larger dimensions. 2.10 DUCT4MOUNTED ACCESS DOORS A. Duct4Mounted Access Doors: Fabricate access panels according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards 4 Metal and Flexible"; Figures 742 (742M), "Duct Access Doors and Panels," and 743, "Access Doors 4 Round Duct." 1. Door: a. Double wall, rectangular. b. Galvanized sheet metal with insulation fill and thickness as indicated for duct pressure class. c. Hinges and Latches: 14by414inch (254by4254mm) butt or piano hinge and cam latches. d. Fabricate doors airtight and suitable for duct pressure class. 2. Frame: Galvanized sheet steel, with bend4over tabs and foam gaskets. 3. Number of Hinges and Locks: a. Access Doors Less Than 12 Inches (300 mm) Square: No hinges and two sash locks. b. Access Doors up to 18 Inches (460 mm) Square: Two hinges and two sash locks. c. Access Doors up to 24 by 48 Inches (600 by 1200 mm): Three hinges and two compression latches with outside and inside handles. d. Access Doors Larger Than 24 by 48 Inches (600 by 1200 mm): Four hinges and two compression latches with outside and inside handles. 2.11 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS A. Materials: Flame4retardant or noncombustible fabrics. BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES CORNELL – NCP METAL DUCTS STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 23 31 13 – PAGE 8 OF 14 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 B. Coatings and Adhesives: Comply with UL 181, Class 1. C. Metal4Edged Connectors: Factory fabricated with a fabric strip 341/2 inches (89 mm) wide attached to 2 strips of 243/44inch4 (704mm4) wide, 0.0284inch4 (0.74mm4) thick, galvanized sheet steel or 0.0324inch4 (0.84mm4) thick aluminum sheets. Provide metal compatible with connected ducts. D. Indoor System, Flexible Connector Fabric: Glass fabric double coated with neoprene. 1. Minimum Weight: 26 oz./sq. yd. (880 g/sq. m). 2. Tensile Strength: 480 lbf/inch (84 N/mm) in the warp and 360 lbf/inch (63 N/mm) in the filling. 3. Service Temperature: Minus 40 to plus 200 deg F (Minus 40 to plus 93 deg C). E. Outdoor System, Flexible Connector Fabric: Glass fabric double coated with weatherproof, synthetic rubber resistant to UV rays and ozone. 1. Minimum Weight: 24 oz./sq. yd. (810 g/sq. m). 2. Tensile Strength: 530 lbf/inch (93 N/mm) in the warp and 440 lbf/inch (77 N/mm) in the filling. 3. Service Temperature: Minus 50 to plus 250 deg F (Minus 45 to plus 121 deg C). PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 DUCT INSTALLATION A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of duct system. Indicated duct locations, configurations, and arrangements were used to size ducts and calculate friction loss for air4 handling equipment sizing and for other design considerations. Install duct systems as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Shop Drawings and Coordination Drawings. B. Install ducts according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards 4 Metal and Flexible" unless otherwise indicated. C. Install round [ and flatoval ] ducts in maximum practical lengths. D. Install ducts with fewest possible joints. E. Install factory4 or shop4fabricated fittings for changes in direction, size, and shape and for branch connections. F. Unless otherwise indicated, install ducts vertically and horizontally, and parallel and perpendicular to building lines. BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES CORNELL – NCP METAL DUCTS STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 23 31 13 – PAGE 9 OF 14 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 G. Install ducts close to walls, overhead construction, columns, and other structural and permanent enclosure elements of building. H. Install ducts with a clearance of 1 inch (25 mm), plus allowance for insulation thickness. I. Route ducts to avoid passing through transformer vaults and electrical equipment rooms and enclosures. J. Where ducts pass through non4fire4rated interior partitions and exterior walls and are exposed to view, cover the opening between the partition and duct or duct insulation with sheet metal flanges of same metal thickness as the duct. Overlap openings on four sides by at least 141/2 inches (38 mm). K. Where ducts pass through fire4rated interior partitions and exterior walls, install fire dampers. L. Protect duct interiors from moisture, construction debris and dust, and other foreign materials.[ Comply with SMACNA's "IAQ Guidelines for Occupied Buildings Under Construction," Appendix G, "Duct Cleanliness for New Construction Guidelines."] 3.2 INSTALLATION OF EXPOSED DUCTWORK A. Protect ducts exposed in finished spaces from being dented, scratched, or damaged. B. Trim duct sealants flush with metal. Create a smooth and uniform exposed bead. Do not use two4part tape sealing system. C. Grind welds to provide smooth surface free of burrs, sharp edges, and weld splatter. When welding stainless steel with a No. 3 or 4 finish, grind the welds flush, polish the exposed welds, and treat the welds to remove discoloration caused by welding. D. Maintain consistency, symmetry, and uniformity in the arrangement and fabrication of fittings, hangers and supports, duct accessories, and air outlets. E. Repair or replace damaged sections and finished work that does not comply with these requirements. 3.3 DUCT SEALING A. Seal ducts for leakage classes in table below: DUCT TYPE LEAKAGE CLASS, CFM/100 ft at 1” wg Metal (flexible excluded) Round and Flat Oval [3] BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES CORNELL – NCP METAL DUCTS STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 23 31 13 – PAGE 10 OF 14 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 Rectangular [6] Flexible [6] B. Note: Leakage classes for specific applications may be specified elsewhere in this specification. MINIMUM DUCT SEAL LEVELA DUCT TYPE Duct Location Supply <2 in. w.c.b >2 in. w.c.b. Exhaust Return Outdoor A A C A Unconditioned Spaces B A C B Conditioned Spacesc C B B C a See description of seal levels below. b Duct design static pressure classification. c Includes indirectly conditioned spaces such as return air plenums. C. Longitudinal seams are joints oriented in the direction of airflow. Transverse joints are connections of two duct sections oriented perpendicular to airflow. Duct wall penetrations are openings made by any screw fastener, pipe, rod, or wire. Spiral lock seams in a round or flat oval duct need not be sealed. All other connections are considered transverse joints, including but not limited to spin4ins, taps, and other branch connections, access door frames and jambs, duct connections to equipment, etc. 3.4 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION A. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards 4 Metal and Flexible," Chapter 5, "Hangers and Supports." B. Building Attachments: Concrete inserts, powder4actuated fasteners, or structural4steel fasteners appropriate for construction materials to which hangers are being attached. 1. Where practical, install concrete inserts before placing concrete. 2. Install powder4actuated concrete fasteners after concrete is placed and completely cured. 3. Use powder4actuated concrete fasteners for standard4weight aggregate concretes or for slabs more than 4 inches (100 mm) thick. BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES CORNELL – NCP METAL DUCTS STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 23 31 13 – PAGE 11 OF 14 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 4. Do not use powder4actuated concrete fasteners for lightweight4aggregate concretes or for slabs less than 4 inches (100 mm) thick. 5. Do not use powder4actuated concrete fasteners for seismic restraints. C. Hanger Spacing: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards 4 Metal and Flexible," Table 541 (Table 541M), "Rectangular Duct Hangers Minimum Size," and Table 542, "Minimum Hanger Sizes for Round Duct," for maximum hanger spacing; install hangers and supports within 24 inches (610 mm) of each elbow and within 48 inches (1200 mm) of each branch intersection. D. Hangers Exposed to View: Threaded rod and angle or channel supports. E. Support vertical ducts with steel angles or channel secured to the sides of the duct with welds, bolts, sheet metal screws, or blind rivets; support at each floor and at a maximum intervals of 16 feet (5 m). F. Install upper attachments to structures. Select and size upper attachments with pull4out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used. 3.5 CONNECTIONS A. Make connections to equipment with flexible connectors. B. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards 4 Metal and Flexible" for branch, outlet and inlet, and terminal unit connections. 3.6 PAINTING A. Paint interior of metal ducts that are visible through registers and grilles and that do not have duct liner. Apply one coat of flat, black, latex paint over a compatible galvanized4steel primer. 3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform tests and inspections. B. Leakage Tests: 1. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual." Submit a test report for each test. 2. Test the following systems: a. Supply Ducts with a Pressure Class of 24Inch wg (500 Pa) or Higher: Test representative duct sections totaling no less than 50 percent of total installed duct area for each designated pressure class. b. Return Ducts with a Pressure Class of 24Inch wg (500 Pa) or Higher: Test representative duct sections totaling no less than 50 percent of total installed duct area for each designated pressure class. BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES CORNELL – NCP METAL DUCTS STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 23 31 13 – PAGE 12 OF 14 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 c. Exhaust Ducts with a Pressure Class of 24Inch wg (500 Pa) or Higher: Test representative duct sections totaling no less than 50 percent of total installed duct area for each designated pressure class. 3. Disassemble, reassemble, and seal segments of systems to accommodate leakage testing and for compliance with test requirements. 4. Test for leaks before applying external insulation. 5. Conduct tests at static pressures equal to maximum design pressure of system or section being tested. If static4pressure classes are not indicated, test system at maximum system design pressure. Do not pressurize systems above maximum design operating pressure. 6. Give seven days' advance notice for testing. C. Duct system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. D. Prepare test and inspection reports. 3.8 DUCT CLEANING A. Clean new and existing duct system(s) before testing, adjusting, and balancing. B. Use service openings for entry and inspection. 1. Create new openings and install access panels appropriate for duct static4 pressure class if required for cleaning access. Provide insulated panels for insulated or lined duct. Patch insulation and liner as recommended by duct liner manufacturer. 2. Disconnect and reconnect flexible ducts as needed for cleaning and inspection. 3. Remove and reinstall ceiling to gain access during the cleaning process. C. Clean the following components by removing surface contaminants and deposits: 1. Air outlets and inlets (registers, grilles, and diffusers). 2. Supply, return, and exhaust fans including fan housings, plenums (except ceiling supply and return plenums), scrolls, blades or vanes, shafts, baffles, dampers, and drive assemblies. 3. Coils and related components. 4. Return4air ducts, dampers, actuators, and turning vanes except in ceiling plenums and mechanical equipment rooms. 5. Supply4air ducts, dampers, actuators, and turning vanes. 6. Dedicated exhaust and ventilation components and makeup air systems. 3.9 START UP A. Air Balance: Comply with requirements in Division 23 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC." BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES CORNELL – NCP METAL DUCTS STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 23 31 13 – PAGE 13 OF 14 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 3.10 DUCT SCHEDULE A. Supply Duct Pressure Class: 1. Pressure Class: Positive 24inch wg (500 Pa). B. Return Duct Pressure Class: 1. Pressure Class: Positive or negative 24inch wg (500 Pa). C. Exhaust Duct Pressure Class: 1. Ducts Connected to Fans Exhausting (ASHRAE 62.1, Class 1 and 2) Air: a. Pressure Class: Negative 24inch wg (500 Pa). D. Elbow Configuration: 1. Rectangular Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards 4 Metal and Flexible," Figure 442, "Rectangular Elbows." a. Velocity 1000 fpm (5 m/s) or Lower: 1) Radius Type RE 1 with minimum 0.5 radius4to4diameter ratio. 2) Mitered Type RE 4 without vanes. b. Velocity 1000 to 1500 fpm (5 to 7.6 m/s): 1) Radius Type RE 1 with minimum 1.0 radius4to4diameter ratio. 2) Radius Type RE 3 with minimum 0.5 radius4to4diameter ratio and two vanes. 3) Mitered Type RE 2 with vanes complying with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards 4 Metal and Flexible," Figure 443, "Vanes and Vane Runners," and Figure 444, "Vane Support in Elbows." c. Velocity 1500 fpm (7.6 m/s) or Higher: 1) Radius Type RE 1 with minimum 1.5 radius4to4diameter ratio. 2) Radius Type RE 3 with minimum 1.0 radius4to4diameter ratio and two vanes. 3) Mitered Type RE 2 with vanes complying with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards 4 Metal and Flexible," Figure 443, "Vanes and Vane Runners," and Figure 444, "Vane Support in Elbows." 2. Round Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards 4 Metal and Flexible," Figure 344, "Round Duct Elbows." a. Minimum Radius4to4Diameter Ratio and Elbow Segments: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards 4 Metal and Flexible," Table 341, "Mitered Elbows." Elbows with less than 904 degree change of direction have proportionately fewer segments. BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES CORNELL – NCP METAL DUCTS STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 23 31 13 – PAGE 14 OF 14 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 1) Velocity 1000 fpm (5 m/s) or Lower: 0.5 radius4to4diameter ratio and three segments for 904degree elbow. 2) Velocity 1000 to 1500 fpm (5 to 7.6 m/s): 1.0 radius4to4diameter ratio and four segments for 904degree elbow. 3) Velocity 1500 fpm (7.6 m/s) or Higher: 1.5 radius4to4diameter ratio and five segments for 904degree elbow. 4) Radius4to Diameter Ratio: 1.5. b. Round Elbows, 12 Inches (305 mm) and Smaller in Diameter: Stamped or pleated. c. Round Elbows, 14 Inches (356 mm) and Larger in Diameter: Standing seam. E. Branch Configuration: 1. Rectangular Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards 4 Metal and Flexible," Figure 446, "Branch Connection." a. Rectangular Main to Rectangular Branch: 454degree entry. b. Rectangular Main to Round Branch: Spin in. 2. Round and Flat Oval: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards 4 Metal and Flexible," Figure 345, "90 Degree Tees and Laterals," and Figure 346, "Conical Tees." Saddle taps are permitted in existing duct. a. Velocity 1000 fpm (5 m/s) or Lower: 904degree tap. b. Velocity 1000 to 1500 fpm (5 to 7.6 m/s): Conical tap. c. Velocity 1500 fpm (7.6 m/s) or Higher: 454degree lateral. END OF SECTION 23 31 13 BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES CORNELL – NCP FIRE DAMPERS STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 23 33 16 – PAGE 1 OF 4 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 SECTION 233316 FIRE DAMPERS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. The Contract Drawings and the General Provisions of the Contract, including the General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Supplementary Conditions, Special Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections apply to the work of this Section. B. The Work of the Section 23 01 00 5 Mechanical Basic Materials and Methods applies to the Work of this Section. 1.2 WORK INCLUDED: A. Provide a complete, operating, tested, functioning, documented fire damper and combination fire and smoke damper system including all work shown, specified, or required for proper system operation. 1.3 SUBMITTALS: A. Provide product data for each fire damper, combination fire and smoke damper, relief grill, wall frame and media filter assembly. B. Provide wiring diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 FIRE DAMPER AND SLEEVE ASSEMBLY: A. 15 ½ hour U.L. classified static fire damper. Frame: 20 gauge galvanized steel channel. 24 gauge galvanized curtain type blades outside airstream, except when located behind grille where blades may be inside airstream. B. Provide 212 F fusible link. C. Each fire damper shall include a steel sleeve of length to suit application and retaining angles furnished by the damper manufacturer. D. Provide space fusible links. E. Manufacturer and Model: Ruskin, Air Balance Inc. or equal. BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES CORNELL – NCP FIRE DAMPERS STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 23 33 16 – PAGE 2 OF 4 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 2.2 COMBINATION FIRE AND SMOKE DAMPERS: A. 151/2 hour UL classified static combination fire and smoke damper. 16 gauge galvanized steel frame. 16 gauge galvanized multiple V5groove or airfoil blade type. Class I leakage rating. B. Heat5Responsive Device: 212° F Electric fuse link and switch package, factory installed, rated. C. Smoke Detector: Integral, factory wired for single5point connection. D. Mounting Sleeve: Factory installed, galvanized sheet steel; length to suite wall application. E. Manufacturer: Ruskin Company, Greenheck Fan Corporation, Air Balance Inc. or equal. 2.3 FIRE DAMPER /FIRE SMOKE DAMPER ACCESS DOOR: A. Provide 12” x 12” minimum duct access door at location suitable to reset curtain and replace fusible link or reset actuator. Duct access doors shall be hinged one side. They shall be gasketed and shall include a minimum of two camlock latches. B. Enlarge access doors as required in large ducts or difficult to reach areas so that a fusible link can be readily replaced. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 FIRE DAMPERS AND COMBINATION FIRE AND SMOKE DAMPERS: A. Install in strict accordance with the manufacturer's printed installation instructions and with the locations and details shown on the Plans. 3.2 DUCT ACCESS DOORS: A. Locate in the general locations shown on the Plans or adjacent to and close enough to fire damper or combination fire smoke damper to allow resetting the fire damper curtain and replacement of the fusible link. Mark each access door "Fire Damper Access" in black permanent marker. 3.3 PRE5PUNCH LIST REVIEW: A. The Contractor shall perform a pre5punch list review and shall verify the following for each fire damper and combination fire and smoke damper: 1. Fire/smoke damper installed at each location shown on the Plans. 2. Installed in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3. Sleeve installed and fire/smoke damper anchored to sleeve BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES CORNELL – NCP FIRE DAMPERS STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 23 33 16 – PAGE 3 OF 4 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 properly. 4. Angles anchored to sleeve and free floating in general construction. 5. U.L. clearances between sleeve and general construction to avoid binding damper in a fire due to expansion of the metal against a tight opening. 6. Angles overlap general construction of opening by 1” minimum. 7. Duct access doors are installed and are located properly to allow resetting damper curtain replacing fusible link. 8. Duct access doors are accessible through the general construction. 3.4 ENGINEER'S ACCESSIBILITY TEST: A. The Engineer shall, at his/her option, sever up to 5% of the fusible links on fire dampers but in no case less than two or more than ten so that the Contractor can demonstrate the ease with which the duct access doors allow re5setting of fire dampers and replacement of fusible links. B. The locations for these tests shall be at the sole discretion of the Engineer and Owner. C. The Contractor shall provide spare fusible links and shall demonstrate the replacement of fusible links and re5setting of dampers. D. If in the judgment of the Engineer, acting as the Owner's representative, the access is not adequate to allow proper fire dampers servicing, the Contractor shall install additional access doors as required to allow proper servicing of the fire dampers. 3.5 SPARE FUSIBLE LINKS A. Provide five (5) spare fusible links at each temperature rating. Submit to Engineer and obtain a receipt. END OF SECTION 23 33 16 BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES CORNELL – NCP FIRE DAMPERS STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 23 33 16 – PAGE 4 OF 4 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 [ PAGE LEFT INTENTIONALLY BLANK ] BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES CORNELL – NCP CENTRIFUGAL HVAC FANS STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 23 34 16 – PAGE 1 OF 5 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 SECTION 233416 CENTRIFUGAL HVAC FANS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Provide the following: 1. Include rated capacities, furnished specialties, and accessories for each fan. 2. Certified fan performance curves with system operating conditions indicated. 3. Certified fan sound5power ratings. 4. Motor ratings and electrical characteristics, plus motor and electrical accessories. 5. Material thickness and finishes, including color charts. 6. Dampers, including housings, linkages, and operators. 7. Vibration Isolators 8. Operation and Maintenance Data: For centrifugal fans to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. AMCA Compliance: 1. Comply with AMCA performance requirements and bear the AMCA5 Certified Ratings Seal. 2. Operating Limits: Classify according to AMCA 99. B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. 2.2 INLINE CENTRIFUGAL FANS (BELT DRIVE) A. Basis5of5Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Loren Cook Model SQI or a comparable product by one of the following: 1. Chicago Blower Corporation. 2. Cincinnati Fan. 3. New York Blower Company (The). B. Description: 1. Factory5fabricated, 5assembled, 5tested, and 5finished, belt5driven centrifugal fans consisting of housing, wheel, fan shaft, bearings, motor, drive assembly, and support structure. 2. Deliver fans as factory5assembled units, to the extent allowable by shipping limitations. 3. Factory5installed and 5wired disconnect switch. C. Disconnect Switches: BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES CORNELL – NCP CENTRIFUGAL HVAC FANS STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 23 34 16 – PAGE 2 OF 5 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 1. NEMA rated: 1 2. Positive electrical shut5off. D. Housings: 1. Formed panels to make curved5scroll housings with shaped cutoff. 2. Panel Bracing: Steel angle5 or channel5iron member supports for mounting and supporting fan scroll, wheel, motor, and accessories. 3. Horizontally split, bolted5flange housing. 4. Spun inlet cone with flange. 5. Outlet flange. 6. Constructed of steel and coated with permatector. 7. Housing and bearing supports shall be constructed of welded steel members to prevent vibration and to rigidly support the shaft and bearing assembly balancing up to a minimum of 10 horsepower. E. Housing Supports and Drive Frame: 1. Housing supports are constructed of structural steel with formed flanges. 2. Drive frame is welded steel which supports the shaft and bearings and reinforcement for the housing. 3. Pivoting motor plate with adjusting screws to make belt tensioning operations. 4. Prepunched mounting holes for installation. 5. Drive frame is coated with Permatector. F. Backward5Inclined Wheels: 1. Non5overloading, backward inclined centrifugal wheel. 2. Constructed of aluminum. 3. Single5width5single5inlet construction with curved inlet flange, backplate, and fastened to shaft with set screws. 4. Welded or riveted to flange and backplate; cast5iron or cast5steel hub riveted to backplate. 5. Statically and dynamically balanced. 6. The wheel cone and fan inlet will be matched and shall have precise running tolerances for maximum performance and operating efficiency. G. Grease5Lubricated Shaft Bearings: 1. Self5aligning, pillow5block5type, tapered roller bearings with double5 locking collars and two5piece, cast5iron housing. 2. Ball5Bearing Rating Life: L50 at 200,000 hours. H. Belt Drives: 1. Factory mounted, with adjustable alignment and belt tensioning. 2. Fan Pulleys: Cast iron or cast steel with split, tapered bushing; dynamically balanced at factory. Keyed and securely attached to wheel and motor shafts. 3. Motor Pulleys: Adjustable pitch for use with motors through 5 hp; fixed pitch for use with larger motors. Select pulley so pitch adjustment is at the middle of adjustment range at fan design conditions. 4. Belts: Oil resistant, nonsparking, and nonstatic; matched sets for multiple belt drives. 5. Readily accessible for maintenance. BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES CORNELL – NCP CENTRIFUGAL HVAC FANS STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 23 34 16 – PAGE 3 OF 5 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 6. Belt Guards: Fabricate to comply with OSHA and SMACNA requirements of diamond5mesh wire screen welded to steel angle frame or equivalent, prime coated. Secure to fan or fan supports without short circuiting vibration isolation. Include provisions for adjustment of belt tension, lubrication, and use of tachometer with guard in place. 7. Motor Mount: Adjustable for belt tensioning. I. Motors: 1. Motor enclosures: Open dripoff. 2. Motors are permanently lubricated, sealed, heavy duty ball bearing type furnished at the specific voltage, phase, and enclosure. J. Accessories: 1. Access for Inspection, Cleaning, and Maintenance: Comply with requirements in ASHRAE 62.1. 2. Companion Flanges: Rolled flanges for duct connections of same material as housing. 3. Galvanized frames with prepunched mounting holes. 4. Integral backdraft dampers. 5. Balanced for minimal resistance to flow. 6. Inlet Screens: For non ducted fans; grid screen of same material as housing. 7. Vibration isolators. 2.3 INLINE CENTRIFUGAL FANS (DIRECT DRIVE) A. Basis5of5Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Loren Cook Model SQI or a comparable product by one of the following: 1. Chicago Blower Corporation. 2. Cincinnati Fan. 3. New York Blower Company (The). B. Description: 1. Factory5fabricated, 5assembled, 5tested, and 5finished, direct5driven centrifugal fans consisting of housing, wheel, fan shaft, bearings, motor, drive assembly, and support structure. 2. Deliver fans as factory5assembled units, to the extent allowable by shipping limitations. 3. Factory5installed and 5wired disconnect switch. C. Disconnect Switches: 1. NEMA rated: 1 2. Positive electrical shut5off. D. Housings: 1. Formed panels to make curved5scroll housings with shaped cutoff. 2. Panel Bracing: Steel angle5 or channel5iron member supports for mounting and supporting fan scroll, wheel, motor, and accessories. 3. Horizontally split, bolted5flange housing. 4. Spun inlet cone with flange. BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES CORNELL – NCP CENTRIFUGAL HVAC FANS STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 23 34 16 – PAGE 4 OF 5 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 5. Outlet flange. 6. Constructed of steel and coated with permatector. 7. Housing and bearing supports shall be constructed of welded steel members to prevent vibration and to rigidly support the shaft and bearing assembly balancing up to a minimum of 10 horsepower. E. Housing Supports and Drive Frame: 1. Housing supports are constructed of structural steel with formed flanges. 2. Drive frame is welded steel which supports the shaft and bearings and reinforcement for the housing. 3. Prepunched mounting holes for installation. 4. Drive frame is coated with Permatector. F. Backward5Inclined Wheels: 1. Non5overloading, backward inclined centrifugal wheel. 2. Constructed of aluminum. 3. Single5width5single5inlet construction with curved inlet flange, backplate, and fastened to shaft with set screws. 4. Welded or riveted to flange and backplate; cast5iron or cast5steel hub riveted to backplate. 5. Statically and dynamically balanced. 6. The wheel cone and fan inlet will be matched and shall have precise running tolerances for maximum performance and operating efficiency. G. Motors: 1. Motors are permanently lubricated, sealed, heavy duty ball bearing type furnished at the specific voltage, phase, and enclosure. H. Accessories: 1. Access for Inspection, Cleaning, and Maintenance: Comply with requirements in ASHRAE 62.1. 2. Companion Flanges: Rolled flanges for duct connections of same material as housing. 3. Galvanized frames with prepunched mounting holes. 4. Integral backdraft dampers. 5. Balanced for minimal resistance to flow. 6. Inlet Screens: For non ducted fans; grid screen of same material as housing. 7. Vibration isolators. 8. Provide variable speed controller. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install centrifugal fans level and plumb. B. Disassemble and reassemble units, as required for moving to the final location, according to manufacturer's written instructions. BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES CORNELL – NCP CENTRIFUGAL HVAC FANS STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 23 34 16 – PAGE 5 OF 5 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 C. Lift and support units with manufacturer's designated lifting or supporting points. D. Equipment Mounting: Install continuous5thread hanger rods and spring vibration hangers with vertical5limit stop of size required to support weight of centrifugal fans. E. Install units with clearances for service and maintenance. 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections. B. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory5authorized service representative to test and inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections. C. Perform the following tests and inspections[ with the assistance of a factory5 authorized service representative]: 1. Verify that shipping, blocking, and bracing are removed. 2. Verify that unit is secure on mountings and supporting devices and that connections to ducts and electrical components are complete. Verify that proper thermal5overload protection is installed in motors, starters, and disconnect switches. 3. Verify that cleaning and adjusting are complete. 4. Disconnect fan drive from motor, verify proper motor rotation direction, and verify fan wheel free rotation and smooth bearing operation. Reconnect fan drive system, align and adjust belts, and install belt guards. 5. Adjust belt tension. 6. Adjust damper linkages for proper damper operation. 7. Verify lubrication for bearings and other moving parts. 8. Verify that manual and automatic volume control and fire and smoke dampers in connected ductwork systems are in fully open position. 9. See Division 23 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing For HVAC" for testing, adjusting, and balancing procedures. 10. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above. D. Prepare test and inspection reports. END OF SECTION 23 34 16 BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES CORNELL NCP DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 23 37 13 PAGE 1 OF 2 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 SECTION 233713 DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated, provide the following: 1. Data Sheet: Indicate materials of construction, finish, and mounting details; and performance data including throw and drop, staticpressure drop, and noise ratings. 2. Diffuser, Register, and Grille Schedule: Indicate drawing designation, room location, quantity, model number, size, and accessories furnished. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 REGISTERS AND GRILLES A. Register Grille: 1. Provide product by one of the following: a. Anemostat Products; a Mestek company. b. Price Industries. c. Titus. d. Tuttle & Bailey. 2. Material: Steel. 3. Finish: Baked enamel, white. 4. Face Blade Arrangement: Horizontal spaced 1/2 inch apart. 5. Core Construction: Integral. 6. Frame: 11/4 inches wide. 7. Mounting: Countersunk screw. 8. Accessories a. Steel opposedblade damper with screwdriver slot operator b. Filter B. Fixed Lattice Face Plate : 1. Provide product by one of the following: a. Anemostat Products; a Mestek company. b. Price Industries. c. Titus. d. Tuttle & Bailey. 2. Material: Steel, 12 gauge. 3. Finish: Baked enamel, white. 4. Face Arrangement: 13/16" square holes on 1" centers. BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES CORNELL NCP DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 23 37 13 PAGE 2 OF 2 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 2.2 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Verification of Performance: Rate diffusers, registers, and grilles according to ASHRAE 70, "Method of Testing for Rating the Performance of Air Outlets and Inlets." PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas where diffusers, registers, and grilles are to be installed for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of equipment. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install diffusers, registers, and grilles level and plumb. B. Ceiling/WallMounted Outlets and Inlets: Drawin gs indicate general arrangement of ducts, fittings, and accessories. Air outlet and inlet locations have been indicated to achieve design requirements for air volume, noise criteria, airflow pattern, throw, and pressure drop. Make final locations where indicated, as much as practical. For units installed in layin ceiling panels, locate units in the center of panel. Where architectural features or other items conflict with installation, notify Architect for a determination of final location. C. Install diffusers, registers, and grilles with airtight connections to ducts and to allow service and maintenance of dampers, air extractors, and fire dampers. 3.3 ADJUSTING A. After installation, adjust diffusers, registers, and grilles to air patterns indicated, or as directed, before starting air balancing. END OF SECTION 23 37 13 BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES CORNELL – NCP SPLIT SYSTEM AIRCONDITIONERS STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 23 81 26 – PAGE 1 OF 6 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 SECTION 238126 SPLITSYSTEM AIRCONDITIONERS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Provide for each type of product indicated. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories. Include performance data in terms of capacities, outlet velocities, static pressures, sound power characteristics, motor requirements, and electrical characteristics. B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 1. Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. 2. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring. C. Samples for Initial Selection: For units with factoryapplied color finishes. D. Field qualitycontrol reports. E. Operation and Maintenance Data: For splits ystem airconditioning units to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. F. Warranty: Sample of special warranty. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. B. ASHRAE Compliance: 1. Fabricate and label refrigeration system to comply with ASHRAE 15, "Safety Standard for Refrigeration Systems." 2. ASHRAE Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1, Section 4 "Outdoor Air Quality," Section 5 "Sys tems and Equipment," Section 6 " Procedures," and Section 7 "Constru ction and System StartUp." C. ASHRAE/IESNA Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1. BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES CORNELL – NCP SPLITSYSTEM AIRCONDITIONERS STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 23 81 26 – PAGE 2 OF 6 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 1.3 COORDINATION A. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided. Cast anchorbolt inserts into bases. Concrete, rei nforcement, and formwork are specified in Division 03 Section "CastinPlace Con crete." B. Coordinate sizes and locations of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations with actual equipment provided. 1.4 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of splitsystem airco nditioning units that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: a. For Compressor: Five year(s) from date of Substantial Completion. b. For Parts: Five year(s) from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. BasisofDesign Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following: 1. Daikin 2. Friedrich Air Conditioning Company. 3. Koldwave, Inc.; a Mestek company. 4. Lennox International Inc. 5. Mitsubishi Electric HVAC Advanced Products Division. 6. SANYO HVAC 7. Trane; a business of Ingersol Rand 8. YORK; a Johnson Controls company. 2.2 INDOOR UNITS 5 TONS (18 kW) OR LESS A. Cassette Type EvaporatorFan Components: 1. Chassis: Galvanized steel, 24" x 24" square unit suspended from structure with fourway grille fixed to bottom of cabinet. 2. Refrigerant Coil: Copper tube, with mechanically bonded aluminum fins and thermalexpansion valve. Comply with AHRI 210/240. 3. Fan: Direct drive, centrifugal. 4. Fan Motors: a. Multitapped, multispeed with internal thermal protection and permanent lubrication. BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES CORNELL – NCP SPLITSYSTEM AIRCONDITIONERS STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 23 81 26 – PAGE 3 OF 6 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 b. Enclosure type: Totally enclosed, fan cooled. c. NEMA Premium (TM) efficient motors as defined in NEMA MGI. d. Controllers, electrical devices & wiring: Comply with requirements for electrical devices & connections specified in Division 26 sections. 5. Airstream Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with the airstream shall comply with requirements in ASHRAE 62.1. 6. Filters: Permanent, cleanable. 7. Condensate Drain Pans: a. Fabricated with one percent slope in at least two planes to collect condensate from cooling coils (including coil piping connections, coil headers, and return bends), and to direct water toward drain connection. 1) Depth: A minimum of 1" deep. b. Singlewall, stainlesssteel sheet. c. Drain Connection: Located at lowest point of pan and sized to prevent overflow. Terminate with threaded nipple on one end of pan. 8. Accessories: a. Provide mini condensate pump where specified on drawings. Field installed b. Provide fully insulated full port ball valve with service port installed in each refrigerant line at each indoor unit. c. Provide auxillary condensate detection device that is a field installed accessory in addition to any factory installed condensate detection devices. B. WallMounted, EvaporatorFan Components: 1. Cabinet: Enameled steel with removable panels on front and ends in white color finish, and discharge drain pans with drain connection. 2. Refrigerant Coil: Copper tube, with mechanically bonded aluminum fins and thermalexpansion valve. Comply with AHRI 210/240. 3. Fan: Direct drive, centrifugal. 4. Fan Motors: a. Multitapped, multispeed with internal thermal protection and permanent lubrication. b. Enclosure Type: Totally enclosed, fan cooled. c. NEMA Premium (TM) efficient motors as defined in NEMA MG 1. d. Controllers, Electrical Devices, and Wiring: Comply with requirements for electrical devices and connections specified in Division 26 Sections. 5. Airstream Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with the airstream shall comply with requirements in ASHRAE 62.1. BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES CORNELL – NCP SPLITSYSTEM AIRCONDITIONERS STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 23 81 26 – PAGE 4 OF 6 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 6. Condensate Drain Pans: a. Fabricated with one percent slope in at least two planes to collect condensate from cooling coils (including coil piping connections, coil headers, and return bends) and humidifiers, and to direct water toward drain connection. 1) Depth: A minimum of 1 inch (25 mm) deep. b. Singlewall, stainlesssteel sheet. c. Drain Connection: Located at lowest point of pan and sized to prevent overflow. Terminate with threaded nipple on one end of pan. d. PanTop Surface Coating: Asphaltic waterproofin g compound. 7. Accessories: a. Provide mini condensate pump where specified on drawings. Field installed. b. Provide fully insulated full port ball valve with service port installed in each refrigerant line at each indoor unit. c. Provide auxillary condensate detection device that is a field installed accessory in addition to any factory installed condensate detection devices. 2.3 OUTDOOR UNITS (5 TONS (18 kW) OR LESS) A. AirCooled, CompressorCondenser Components: 1. Casing: Steel, finished with baked enamel in color selected by Architect, with removable panels for access to controls, weep holes for water drainage, and mounting holes in base. Provide brass service valves, fittings, and gage ports on exterior of casing. 2. Compressor: Hermetically sealed with crankcase heater and mounted on vibration isolation device. Compressor motor shall have thermal and currentsensitive overload devices, start capacitor , relay, and contactor. a. Compressor Type: Scroll, inverter driver. b. Variable speed compressor motor with manualrese t highpressure switch and automaticreset lowpressure switch. c. Refrigerant Charge: R410A. d. Refrigerant Coil: Copper tube, with mechanically bonded aluminum fins and liquid subcooler. Comply with AHRI 210/240. 3. HeatPump Components: Reversing valve and lowt emperatureair cutoff thermostat. 4. Fan: Aluminumpropeller type, directly connecte d to motor. 5. Motor: Permanently lubricated, with integral thermaloverload protection. 6. Low Ambient Kit: Permits operation down to 0 deg F (17 deg C). 7. Mounting Base: Polyethylene. BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES CORNELL – NCP SPLITSYSTEM AIRCONDITIONERS STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 23 81 26 – PAGE 5 OF 6 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 2.4 ACCESSORIES A. Thermostat: Wall mounted to control compressor and evaporator fan, with the following features: 1. Liquidcrystal display indicating temperature, s etpoint temperature, time setting, operating mode, and fan speed. 2. Fanspeed selection including auto setting. 3. On/off, cool, heat & auto operation mode. B. Automaticreset timer to prevent rapid cycling o f compressor. C. Refrigerant Line Kits: Softannealed copper suc tion and liquid lines factory cleaned, dried, pressurized, and sealed; factoryin sulated suction & liquid lines with flared fittings at both ends. 1. Drain Hose: For condensate. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install units level and plumb. B. Install evaporatorfan components using manufact urer's standard mounting devices securely fastened to building structure. C. Install groundmounted, compressorcondenser com ponents on 4inch (100 mm) thick, reinforced concrete base that is 4 inch es (100 mm) larger, on each side, than unit. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork are specified in Division 03 Section "CastinPlace Concrete." Coord inate anchor installation with concrete base. D. Anchor units to supports with removable, cadmiumplated fasteners. E. Install compressorcondenser components on restr ained, spring isolators with a minimum static deflection of 1 inch (25 mm). F. Install and connect precharged refrigerant tubing to component's quickconnect fittings. Install tubing to allow access to unit. 3.2 CONNECTIONS A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 23 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES CORNELL – NCP SPLITSYSTEM AIRCONDITIONERS STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 23 81 26 – PAGE 6 OF 6 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 B. Where piping is installed adjacent to unit, allow space for service and maintenance of unit. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory authorized service representative to inspect, test, and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections. B. Perform tests and inspections. 1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory authorized service representative to inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assist in testing. C. Tests and Inspections: 1. Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist. 2. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper motor rotation and unit operation. 3. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. D. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above. E. Prepare test and inspection reports. 3.4 STARTUP SERVICE A. Engage a factoryauthorized service representati ve to perform startup service. 1. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions. 3.5 DEMONSTRATION A. Engage a factoryauthorized service representati ve to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain units. END OF SECTION 23 81 26 BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES CORNELL NCP FAN COIL UNITS STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 23 82 19 – PAGE 1 OF 5 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 SECTION 238219 FAN COIL UNITS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Provide rated capacities, operating characteristics, furnished specialties, and accessories. B. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. 1. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring. C. Operation and Maintenance Data: For fancoil un its to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. Maintenance schedules and repair part lists for motors, coils, integral controls, and filters. D. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. B. ASHRAE Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1, Section 5 "Systems and Equipment" and Section 7 "Constructi on and Startup." C. ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1 Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1, Section 6 "Heating, Ventilatin g, and Air Conditioning." 1.3 COORDINATION A. Coordinate layout and installation of fancoil u nits and suspension system components with other construction that penetrates or is supported by ceilings, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, firesuppressionsystem components, cable trays, and partition assemblies. 1.4 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of condensing units that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Compressor failure. b. Condenser coil leak. 2. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES CORNELL NCP FAN COIL UNITS STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 23 82 19 – PAGE 2 OF 5 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 1.5 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. FanCoilUnit Filters: Furnish two spare filter s for each filter installed. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: B. In the FanCoilUnit Schedule where titles below are column or row headings that introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, manufacturers specified. 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers specified. 3. BasisofDesign Product: The design for each fa ncoil unit is based on the product named. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide either the named product or a comparable product by one of the other manufacturers specified. 2.2 FANCOIL UNITS A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Carrier Corporation. 2. DunhamBush. 3. McQuay International. 4. Trane. 5. USA Coil & Air. 6. YORK International Corporation 7. ENVIROTEC B. Description: Factorypackaged and tested units rated according to ARI 440, ASHRAE 33, and UL 1995. C. Coil Section Insulation: 1inch (25mm) thick, coated glass fiber or foil covered, closedcell foam complying with ASTM C 107 1 and attached with adhesive complying with ASTM C 916. 1. FireHazard Classification: Insulation and adhe sive shall have a combined maximum flamespread index of 25 and smoke developed index of 50 when tested according to ASTM E 84. 2. Airstream Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with the airstream shall comply with requirements in ASHRAE 62.1. BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES CORNELL NCP FAN COIL UNITS STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 23 82 19 – PAGE 3 OF 5 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 D. Main and Auxiliary Drain Pans: Stainless steel. Fabricate pans and drain connections to comply with ASHRAE 62.1. E. Chassis: Galvanized steel where exposed to moisture. F. Cabinet: Steel with bakedenamel finish in manu facturer's standard paint color as selected by Architect. 1. Horizontal Unit Bottom Panels: Fastened to unit with cam fasteners and hinge and attached with safety chain; with integral stamped discharge grilles. G. Filters: Minimum arrestance according to ASHRAE 52.1, and a minimum efficiency reporting value (MERV) according to ASHRAE 52.2. 1. Pleated CottonPolyester Media: 90 percent arre stance and 7 MERV. H. Hydronic Coils: Copper tube, with mechanically bonded aluminum fins spaced no closer than 0.1 inch (2.5 mm), rated for a minimum working pressure of 200 psig (1378 kPa) and a maximum enteringwater temperature of 220 deg F (104 deg C). Include manual air vent and drain valve. I. Fan and Motor Board: Removable. 1. Fan: Forward curved, double width, centrifugal; directly connected to motor. Thermoplastic or paintedsteel wheels, and aluminum, painted steel, or galvanizedsteel fan scrolls. 2. Motor: Permanently lubricated, multispeed; resiliently mounted on motor board. 3. Wiring Termination: Connect motor to chassis wiring with plug connection. J. Factory, Hydronic Piping Package: ASTM B 88, Type L copper tube with wroughtcopper fittings and brazed joints. Label p iping to indicate service, inlet, and outlet. 1. Twoway, modulating control valve for chilledwa ter coil. 2. Hose Kits: Minimum 400psig (2758kPa) working pressure, and operating temperatures from 33 to 211 deg F. Tag hose kits to equipment designations. a. Length: 24 inches (600 mm) maximum. b. Minimum Diameter: Equal to fancoilunit connec tion size. 3. TwoPiece Ball Valves: Bronze body with fullpo rt, chromeplated bronze ball; PTFE or TFE seats; and 600psig (4140kPa) mi nimum CWP rating and blowoutproof stem. 4. CalibratedOrifice Balancing Valves: Bronze bod y, ball type; 125psig (860kPa) working pressure, 250deg F maximum operating temperature; with calibrated orifice or venturi, connections for portable differential pressure meter with integral seals, threaded ends, and equipped with a memory stop to retain set position. 5. Automatic FlowControl Valve: Brass or ferrous metal body; 300psig (2070kPa) working pressure at 250 deg F , with rem ovable, corrosion resistant, tamperproof, selfcleaning piston spring ; factory set to maintain BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES CORNELL NCP FAN COIL UNITS STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 23 82 19 – PAGE 4 OF 5 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 constant indicated flow with plus or minus 10 percent over differential pressure range of 2 to 80 psig (13.8 to 552 kPa). 6. YPattern Hydronic Strainers: Castiron body (A STM A 126, Class B); 125psig (860kPa) working pressure; with threaded connections, bolted cover, perforated stainlesssteel basket, and botto m drain connection. Include minimum NPS 1/2 hoseend, fullport, balltype blowdown valve in drain connection. 7. WroughtCopper Unions: ASME B16.22. 8. Risers: ASTM B 88, Type L copper pipe with hose and ball valve for system flushing. K. Basic Unit Controls: 1. Control voltage transformer. 2. Wallmounting thermostat with the following feat ures: a. Cooloff switch. b. Fan onauto switch. c. Fanspeed switch. d. Degree F indication. 3. Wallmounting temperature sensor. L. Electrical Connection: Factory wire motors and controls for a single electrical connection. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas to receive fancoil units for comp liance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. B. Examine roughingin for piping and electrical co nnections to verify actual locations before fancoilunit installation. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install fancoil units level and plumb. B. Install fancoil units to comply with NFPA 90A. C. Suspend fancoil units from structure with elast omeric hangers. Provide vibration isolator bushing or rubber in shear isolators. D. Verify locations of thermostats, and other exposed control sensors with Drawings and room details before installation. Install devices 60 inches (1525 mm) above finished floor. BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES CORNELL NCP FAN COIL UNITS STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 23 82 19 – PAGE 5 OF 5 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 E. Install new filters in each fancoil unit within two weeks after Substantial Completion. 3.3 CONNECTIONS A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 23 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. Specific connection requirements are as follows: 1. Install piping adjacent to machine to allow service and maintenance. 2. Connect piping to fancoilunit factory hydronic piping package. Install piping package if shipped loose. 3. Connect condensate drain to indirect waste. a. Install condensate trap of adequate depth to seal against the pressure of fan. Install cleanouts in piping at changes of direction. B. Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section "LowVoltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables." 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory authorized service representative to inspect fieldassembled component s and equipment installation, including connections, and to assist in field testing. Report results in writing. B. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports: 1. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper motor rotation and unit operation. 2. Operate electric heating elements through each stage to verify proper operation and electrical connections. 3. Test and adjust controls and safety devices. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. C. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above. 3.5 ADJUSTING A. Adjust initial temperature set points. B. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months of date of Substantial Completion, provide onsite assistance in adjusting system to suit actual occupied conditions. Provide up to two visits to Project during other than normal occupancy hours for this purpose. 3.6 DEMONSTRATION A. Engage a factoryauthorized service representati ve to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain fancoil units. END OF SECTION 238219 BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES CORNELL – NCP ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 26 01 00 PAGE 1 of 3 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 SECTION 260100 ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. The Contract Drawings and the General Provisions of the Contract, including the General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Supplementary Conditions, Special Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections apply to the work of this Division. 1.2 SUMMARY: A. This Section includes general administrative and procedural requirements for Division 26, Electrical work. 1.3 DIVISION 26 4 DESCRIPTION: A. The technical specifications of this Contract are arranged for the convenience of the Owner and Contractor into Divisions of work. The work of Division 26, Electrical, is further described in Specification Sections of the 26000 Series and on contract drawings of the "E" series. B. The organization of this work into Divisions shall not relieve the Prime Contractor from providing all of the work shown on the complete set of drawings or specified in the complete set of Specifications, whether or not the individual subcontractors correctly identify their respective responsibilities. 1.4 OTHER DIVISION SPECIFICATIONS APPLICABLE TO THIS WORK: A. To the extent that the work of this Division or Contract includes the work of other trades, the Contractor for this Division shall adhere to the requirements of other specification sections. All General Construction work shall be performed in accordance with the provisions of the appropriate Division. All mechanical work shall be performed in accordance with appropriate Division 23 Sections. 1.5 WORK INCLUDED: The work of this Division shall include providing all materials, labor, services, permits and related work to furnish a complete, operating, tested, functioning, documented Electrical System including all work shown, specified or required for proper system operation including but not limited to the following: A. Provide Demolition and Removal of Existing Circuits, Devices, and Fixtures, Where Shown, Including Removal of All Debris from Site and Proper Disposal of Same. B. Provide Additions and/or Modifications to Existing Electrical Panelboards. BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES CORNELL – NCP ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 26 01 00 PAGE 2 of 3 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 C. Provide Basic Materials and Methods. D. Provide Electrical Equipment Identification. E. Provide Equipment and Conductor Identification. F. Provide Electrical Coordination Drawings. G. Provide Motor Starters and Disconnects where required. H. Provide Grounding System where shown. I. Provide New Lighting Fixtures Including Appurtenances. J. Provide Conduits, Boxes, Raceways for New Branch Circuits. K. Provide Additions and/or Modifications to the Existing Fire Alarm System L. Provide Testing of Equipment and Conductors. M. Provide Relocations of Equipment and Lighting Fixtures Where Shown. N. Provide Certificate of Compliance and Fees for Permits and Inspections. O. Provide Openings in Existing and New Construction as Required for the Work of this Division. Provide Fire Seal for All Penetrations. P. Provide Sleeves and Inserts Q. Provide Maintenance of System until Final Acceptance. R. Provide Cooperation and Coordination with Owners Telecom. Vendors. S. Provide Owner's Operation Instruction 1.6 SUBMITTALS: A. Provide Shop Drawings for the following: 1. Fire Alarm System Devices 2. Lighting Fixtures 3. Panels and Circuit Breakers 4. Smoke Detectors and Fire/Smoke Dampers 1.7 RELATED WORK NOT INCLUDED: A. The Owner’s telecommunication vendor shall install cabling and faceplates for telephone, computer and television and audio visual. Final terminations shall be performed by Owner's vendors. 1.8 ALTERNATES / ALLOWANCES: A. Refer to Division 01 for a description regarding alternates/allowances, if applicable. BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES CORNELL – NCP ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 26 01 00 PAGE 3 of 3 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 1.9 PERMITS AND INSPECTIONS: Division 26 shall be responsible to apply for, obtain and meet the requirements of all permits and inspections required by jurisdictions for the work of Division 26. Division 26 shall pay all fees associated with these permits and inspections. 1.10 CODE RULES AND ENGINEER INSPECTIONS: A. The electrical installation shall meet the requirements of the National Electrical Code and of the National Fire Protection Association. In addition, all state, municipal or other codes, rules or regulations applicable to the work shall be followed. B. Final inspection of the complete electrical system shall be performed prior to final payments. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 See Applicable Division 26 Section. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 See Applicable Division 26 Sections END OF SECTION 26 01 00 BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES CORNELL – NCP BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 26 01 01 PAGE 1 of 19 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 SECTION 260101 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. The Contract Documents and the General Provisions of the Contract, including the General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Supplementary Conditions, Special Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections apply to the Work of this Section. 1.2 WORK INCLUDED: A. Provide Basic Materials and Methods as follows: 1. Conduit 2. Conduit Fittings 3. Sleeves, Inserts and Openings 4. Support Systems 5. Wireways/Wire Troughs 6. Outlet, Junction and Pull Boxes 7. Conductors 8. Conductor Splicing Materials 9. Wiring Devices 10. Conductor Pulling Lubricant 11. Miscellaneous Painting 12. Waterproofing, Caulking and Sealing 13. Protection and Storage of Materials and the work 14. Lighting 15. Panelboards 16. Grounding 17. Telecommunication ground bar 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Provide submittals for the following: 1. Wiring Devices 2. Panelboards 3. Transformers PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS – GENERAL: BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES CORNELL – NCP BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 26 01 01 PAGE 2 of 19 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 A. Conductors shall be annealed copper; 98% conductivity. B. Minimum size conductors for general wiring shall be #12. 2.2 CONDUCTORS: A. Conductors: 1. Conductors shall be annealed copper, 98 percent conductivity. 2. Grounding conductor shall have green color coded insulation. 3. Signal circuits shall be color coded using solid colors with contrasting tracer color lines. 4. Panel feeders shall be copper conductors unless otherwise shown. 5. Aluminum conductors shall not be acceptable. B. INSULATION: 1. 600 volts rating for building feeders and branch circuits. 2. 300 volts rating for signal systems operating at 50 volts or less. 3. # 12 through # 8 AWG: dry locations, use type THWN. 4. # 6 and larger in normally dry locations type THWN. 5. # 12 AWG and larger: under buildings, slab on grade, steam tunnels, crawlspaces, boiler rooms, pump house, kitchen, mechanical rooms, use type THWN. Make: Anaconda, General Cable, Rome Cable, Circle, General Electric, Essex, Okonite, BrandCRex. 2.3 CONDUCTOR SPLICING MATERIALS: A. Wires #8 and smaller: PreCinsulated solderless connectors. B. Wires #6 through #4/0: Compression or split bolt type connectors as manufactured by Dossert, Burndy, or T & B. C. Wires larger than #4/0: Compression or split bolt type connectors with minimum two pressure points per conductor. D. Wire connectors or splicing means installed on conductors for direct burial shall be UL listed for such. 2.4 CONDUCTOR PULLING LUBRICANT: A. The cable lubricant shall meet the following performance specifications: 1. When subjected to a 100 lbs./ft. Normal force, between (type) cable and (type) conduit, the lubricated cable system shall have a BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES CORNELL – NCP BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 26 01 01 PAGE 3 of 19 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 coefficient of kinetic friction less than .25 (pulling force greater than lbs./ft.) 2. The lubricant shall be U.L. (or CSA) listed. 3. When used on high voltage cable, the lubricant shall not affect the volume resistivity of any semiCconducting jacket or insulation shield present. The volume resistivity of the semiCconducting material shall at no time increase more than 100% when tested via the ICEA TC25C425 method, 90 degrees centigrade exposure, 7 day test, readings made at 23 degrees centigrade daily. 4. The lubricant shall not affect the tensile/elongation properties of the cable jacket more than existing ICEA/NEMA aging specifications allow. 5. The lubricant shall contain no waxes, greases, silicones, or polyalkylene glycol oils or waxes. B. Manufacturer: Polywater J. American Polywater Corporation, P.O. Box 53, Stillwater, Minnesota 55082. 2.5 CONDUIT: A. Flexible Conduit: 1. Steel interlock type, galvanized, with galvanized steel fittings. 2. Complies with NEC Article 350 and U.L. standards for flexible conduit. 3. Flex conduit to only be used for light fixture and motor connection, whips no more than 6’ in length. 4. Make: Galflex or acceptable manufacturer. B. Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT) 1. EMT shall be low carbon steel, with set screw type, concrete tight fittings. 2. Exterior shall be galvanized by electrolytic process and extra coat provided by bright dip in zinc chromate solution. 3. Interior shall be coated with baked plating process. 4. Make: Cerro, Republic, Allied Tube, Youngstown, Wheatland or acceptable manufacturer. C. Rigid Metallic Conduit (RGS) 1. Rigid galvanized steel, hot dipped threaded type. 2. Galvanized threaded malleable iron fittings. 3. Make: Cerro, Republic, Allied Tube, Youngstown, Wheatland acceptable manufacturer. 2.6 CONDUIT FITTINGS: A. EMT: BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES CORNELL – NCP BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 26 01 01 PAGE 4 of 19 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 1. All fittings shall be U.L. listed steel or malleable iron. 2. Branch circuit conduits larger than 1” diameter and conduits containing feeders serving panelboards shall have grounding type bushings. 3. Set screw type fittings, Concrete tight as manufactured by Neer, OZ Gedney, Bridgeport or acceptable manufacturer. 4. Compression connectors, squeeze type Efcor or acceptable manufacturer. B. Flexible: 1. Fittings shall be UL listed steel or mallable iron. 2. Fittings for flexible steel conduits shall be squeeze type as manufactured by Thomas and Betts, Steel City or Appleton. C. Liquidtight: 1. Fittings shall be malleable iron, tapered hub threads, with safeC edge ground cone and double bevel sealing ring. 2. Fittings for liquid tight flexible conduits shall be screwCin type manufactured by Thomas and Betts Company or Pittsburgh Standard Conduit Company. D. Rigid Conduit: 1. Bushings for metal conduit terminations shall be the nylon insulated type throat, with grounding type locknut ahead of bushing. 2. Die cast zincCalloy and pressure cast and indenter type fittings shall not be approved. Provide steel or malleable iron only. 3. Conduit hubs shall be as manufactured by Myers Electric Products, Inc., Raco, T&B, General Electric Company or acceptable manufacturer. E. Die cast, pressure cast, potted metal or similar type fittings shall not be used. 2.7 CONDUIT SUPPORT SYSTEMS: A. Trapeze type hangers: 1. Steel horizontal members and threaded hanger rods. 2. Rods shall not be less than ½" diameter. 3. Make: Kindorf GC953 Series, or acceptable manufacturer in Unistrut or BCline complete with all necessary bolts, screws, angles, anchors, connection plates, straps, etc., as required to perform the necessary functions. B. Conduit Clamps and Supports: 1. Steel hangers and threaded hex nuts. 2. Kindorf CC149 series or acceptable manufacturer in Unistrut or BC BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES CORNELL – NCP BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 26 01 01 PAGE 5 of 19 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 line complete with all necessary bolts, screws, angles, anchors, connection plates, straps, etc as required to perform the necessary functions. 2.8 OUTLET, JUNCTION AND PULLBOXES: A. Types: 1. Galvanized, stamped steel shall be provided when recessed in construction or exposed on walls and ceilings in dry areas. 2. Deep condulet style with hubs, or Myers hubs for exposed work in damp area or wet location or for weatherproof type outlets. 3. Large pullboxes shall require 14 gauge galvanized steel, fold and weld construction; with 14 gauge galvanized and gasketed steel cover secured in place by galvanized sheet metal screws on maximum 10 inches centers. All cut edges to be free of burrs. 4. Provide cast iron, gasketed, watertight boxes where installed in earth, surface mounted outdoors, where threaded connection is needed. B. Size: Provide as required for number and size of conduit and conductors. Coordinate depth to suit wall depth and construction. Use special forms and designs as required for outlet facilities. C. Covers: Provide design and style to suit outlet box and electric facility. Provide for all unused or nonCdesignated boxes. NEMA 1, 12, 3R, rating for area environment and use watertight cover with gasket for exterior boxes. D. Fixture Studs: Use 3/8 inch studs and securely fastened to support fixtures. E. Make: Appleton, CrouseCHinds, O.Z. Gedney, National, Steel City, Raco, PyleCNational. 2.9 SLEEVES, INSERTS AND OPENINGS: A. "LinkCseal" assembly as manufactured by Thunderline (see Execution for locations). B. Schedule 40 steel pipe, packed with fire barrier wool and caulk (see Execution for locations). C. Fire barrier wool and caulk. No sleeve necessary (see Execution for locations). D. Where 3 hour fire rating is required, use split collar fire seal with sleeve. 2.10 WIRE WAYS AND WIRE TROUGH: BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES CORNELL – NCP BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 26 01 01 PAGE 6 of 19 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 A. Use hinged cover type wire way with provisions for full layCin along the entire length of run. B. Wire way shall be steel, enclosed with gray enamel finish. C. Use JK sectional NEMA dust resistant, oil tight type where subjected to moisture, in pump rooms, mechanical, electric and fan rooms, exterior wall, shops, maintenance shop, and similar locations. D. Knockouts along runs. E. Provide all elbows, tees, pullboxes, fittings, hangers, reducers, supports, etc., to meet installation requirements. F. Size as shown on drawings or code size where not noted. G. Make: Square D "Square Duct" or acceptable manufacturer by Hoffman, General Electric, Meco. 2.11 WIRING DEVICES: A. Receptacle, Duplex: 1. Grounding type, parallel blade with standard or grounding caps, high strength nylon construction. 2. For side or back wiring, with break off strip for two circuit wiring. 3. U.L. listed, 20 amp circuit rating, NEMA type 5C20R. 4. Extra hard use specification grade. 5. Make: Pass & Seymour PT5362A or acceptable manufacturer. B. Switches, Local: 1. Toggle operated A.C. type. 2. Specification grade, slow make, slow break. 3. 20 amperes at 120V rating. 4. Make: Sierra, ArrowCHart, circle F, Slater, P&S, Hubbell HBL 1221L single pole, HBL 1223L three way, Hubbell HBL 1224 four way or acceptable manufacturer. 2.12 CEILING PLATES A. Round ceiling plate, white finish, steel, to cover existing castCinCplace ceiling boxes. B. Mulberry Model 40430 or acceptable manufacturer. BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES CORNELL – NCP BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 26 01 01 PAGE 7 of 19 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 2.13 WARRANTY: A. Provide one year manufacturer's warranty on all equipment, materials and products. Where shown or specified, provide manufacturer's extended warranty. 2.14 PANELBOARDS: A. Panelboards shall be type “Lighting and Power Distribution”, with 22,000 AIC interrupting rating unless noted otherwise. Load centers shall not be permitted. Panelboards shall be fully rated and shall include main breakers, and type written circuit directory. 2.15 DRYCTYPE TRANSFORMERS A. Transformers shall be NEMA Type TPC1, dryCtype, copper windings, with 5 secondary taps, suitable for wall or floor mounting; size and voltage as shown on Drawings. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 COLOR CODING AND NUMBERING: A. Color coding for branch circuits and feeders. 1. 120/208 volt, 3 phase, 4 wire Wye system. a. Phase A – Black b. Phase B – Red c. Phase C – Blue d. Neutral – White e. Grounding Conductor – Green 2. 277/480 volt, 3 phase, 4 wire, Wye system a. Phase A – Brown b. Phase B – Orange c. Phase C – Yellow d. Neutral – Gray e. Grounding Conductor – Green 3. 120/240 volt, 3 phase, 4 wire, Delta system a. Phase A – Black b. Phase B – Orange (wild leg) c. Phase C – Blue d. Neutral – White e. Grounding Conductor – Green 4. Identify grounded (neutral) conductors in accordance with NEC BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES CORNELL – NCP BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 26 01 01 PAGE 8 of 19 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 Article 200 when it is shared or common raceways and enclosures B. Number code all control and instrumentation wiring at termination points. 3.2 SPARE RECEPTACLES A. Provide four (4) additional spare TVSS receptacles. 3.3 LAYING OUT WORK A. Conform to Section 013100 – Project Coordination 3.4 MISCELLANEOUS PAINTING: A. Conform to Section 099123 – Interior Painting B. Conform to Section 011000 – Summary of Work C. Conform to Section 011200 – Multiple Contract Summary D. Conform to Section 017329 – Cutting and Patching 3.5 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION: A. Conform to Section 013100 – Project Coordination B. Conform to Section 014000 – Quality Control Service 3.6 NOISE AND VIBRATION: A. Install all equipment to be free of transmission of noise and vibration to occupied spaces. Arrange isolated equipment so that it does not contact members of the building structure, ceiling grids, piping, conduits or ductwork. B. Provide replacement at no cost to the Owner of any pump, motor, motor starter, or lighting fixture, transformer, UPS system, other equipment which in the opinion of the Engineers produces excessive vibration or noise. 3.7 ADJUSTING AND INITIAL LUBRICATION: A. Conform to Section 014000 – Quality Control Services BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES CORNELL – NCP BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 26 01 01 PAGE 9 of 19 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 3.8 EQUIPMENT CHECKOUT AND TESTING: A. Conform to Section 014000 – Quality Control Services 3.9 CONDUITS: A. General: 1. Securely support conduit from building construction, separately from outlets and boxes which are secured to the building. Supports shall be spaced at intervals of eight (8) feet maximum or as required by NEC code. 2. Conduit runs shall be concealed unless otherwise specified. Do not expose in finished room unless specifically permitted. 3. Conduit runs shall be exposed in electrical, mechanical and fan rooms. 4. Conduit runs shall be installed neatly and parallel to ceilings, walls, and floors. 5. All conduits and fittings on exposed work shall be secured by means of metal clips on back plates. 6. Avoid installation adjacent to hot surfaces. Raceways shall be spaced from heat sources as follows: a. Steam: no conduit within 12 inches of outside surface of insulation. b. Hot water piping: 6 inches minimum from outside surface of insulation. 7. Provide one pull box or junction box per three 90 bends in any one conduit run. 8. Plug openings until wire is installed and ream conduit joints and ends before installation. Wires shall not be pulled until conduit system is completed in all details. 9. Conduits feeding panelboards; pull boxes. a. Terminations at each pullbox, panelboard and switch board shall have double locknut (one inside and one outside) b. Provide a minimum of two 1 inch conduit stubs from each flush mounted panelboard to an accessible ceiling space above the panel, in an adjacent area or at the ceiling line. 10. Conduit terminating in gasketed enclosures shall be terminated with conduit hubs or Myers hubs. 11. Avoid installing conduits in water or where excessive moisture exists. For conduits terminating to boxes in wet areas, use Myers hub fittings. BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES CORNELL – NCP BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 26 01 01 PAGE 10 of 19 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 B. EMT: 1. Use in dry locations for concealed or exposed work. C. Liquidtight Conduit: 1. Use for terminating connection for motors, compressors, air conditioners, sound equipment and dry type transformers. 2. Provide proper fittings with insulated throats. Provide green wire ground. 3. Use Liquidtight conduit and fittings in outdoor locations and in pump rooms, garages, elevator pits and other locations subjected to moisture. 4. Use for all motor transformer terminations and other equipment where vibration is present. D. Flexible Conduit: 1. Install as terminating connection for motors, compressors, air conditioners, sound equipment and dry type transformers in dry areas as shown or scheduled. 2. Install green wire ground in all flexible conduit. 3. Flex conduit to be used only for light fixtures and motor connections, whips no more than 6’ in length. E. RGS: 1. Use in dry locations for concealed or exposed work where shown. 2. Use in or under concrete pours. 3. Use where exposed to weather. 4. Where run in earth and below slab on grade, encase conduit in 1C 1/2” concrete envelope unless otherwise noted. 5. Use where noted on drawings. 3.10 CABLE LUBRICATION AND LUBRICANT: 1. The cable jacket and/or conduit walls shall be completely lubricated when cable is pulled into conduit. The lubricant shall be applied immediately before or during the pull. 2. Minimum quantities of lubricant are as follows: a. 1 quart of lubricant per 100 feet of 1 inch conduit. b. 2 quarts of lubricant per 100 feet of 2 inch conduit. c. 3 quarts of lubricant per 100 feet of 3 inch conduit. d. 1 gallon of lubricant per 100 feet of 4 inch conduit. 3. This quantity shall be increased as needed for difficult pulling situations BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES CORNELL – NCP BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 26 01 01 PAGE 11 of 19 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 (high temperatures, multiple bends, poorly placed conduit, etc.) 4. Cable attachments for pulling shall be patent cable grips, or other devices subject to the Owner's approval. In using woven basket type grips on covered cable, care shall be taken to avoid damage to the cable and seal, which shall be marked up and maintained during cable installation. Difficult pulling is not anticipated; if unduly difficult pulling occurs, the Contractor shall check pull required and suspend further pulling until further procedure has been approved by the Owner. Maximum pull tension shall not exceed recommended value for the cable when measured by tension dynamometer. 5. Cable pulling during low temperatures is subject to review by the Owner and shall be discontinued when, in the Owner's and Engineers opinion, the cable may be damaged. 6. The Contractor shall keep records of all cables pulled, meggered and terminated. Exact lengths of cables installed shall be supplied to the Owner. 3.11 CONDUIT FITTINGS: A. EMT: 1. Provide EMT connector and nylon bushing at all EMT plain end terminations for power, CATV, communications and computer. 2. Use set screw type, concrete tight indoors, dry locations. 3. Use compression connectors, squeeze type in wet locations. B. RGS: 1. Provide galvanized steel locknuts at each termination unless hubs are used. 2. Use sealing locknuts for all wet/damp areas. 3. Use grounding type locknuts for rigid terminations not equipped with grounding bushings. 3.12 CONDUIT HANGERS: A. General: 1. Investigate thoroughly, Architectural and Shop Drawings related to work, to determine how equipment, fixtures, piping, ductwork, etc, are to be supported, mounted or suspended. Provide extra steel, bolts, inserts, pipe stand brackets, or any other items required for proper support. Provide supporting accessories where required, whether or not shown on the drawings. Where directed, furnish drawings showing supports, etc., for approval. 2. Conduit hanger rods in areas where hot dipped galvanized conduit is installed shall be galvanized steel, sprayed with one coat of BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES CORNELL – NCP BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 26 01 01 PAGE 12 of 19 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 Rustoleum paint. 3. Size support member within load rating of member section, and without visible deflection. 4. Mount conduit on top of support member unless space considerations prevent installation; use conduit clamps. 5. Provide channels for racking up conduit, trapeze, suspensions, cable racks, panel racks, etc., as shown and as required and provide pouredCinCplace inserts for supporting channels. B. Conduit Clamps: 1. Single conduits shall be supported by means of oneChole pipe clamps in combination with oneCscrew back plates to raise conduits from the surface. C. Trapeze Hangers: 1. Multiple runs of conduits shall be supported by means of trapeze hangers, keeping conduits as high as possible with minimal beads and offsets in height. 3.13 SURFACE RACEWAYS: A. Surface Raceways: 1. Blank cover raceways shall be provided where shown, or as approved in advance by the Engineer. 2. Secure to structure at 5 foot intervals. 3. All surface boxes to be independently secured to structure. 4. Provide separate green grounding wire within each surface raceway and extend back to ground of serving panelboard. 5. Paint all raceways to match adjacent walls. 3.14 CONDUCTOR SPLICING MATERIALS: A. Splices and connections for lighting and receptacles shall be made in accessible outlets, pullboxes or junction boxes. B. Insulate all splices, taps and connections for lighting and receptacles with U.L. labeled gauge plastic tape or molded composition caps. C. Splices shall not be made except where called for by the drawings, or where specifically permitted by the Owner. Where splices are permitted, they shall be made in a neat, workmanlike and approved manner by those specialized in this class of work, close attention being paid to all splices with particular attention to splices on higher voltages. Splices shall be made by the Contractor for each type of wire or cable in accordance with instruction issued by Cable Manufacturers and the Owner. Before splicing, insulated cables shall have conductor insulation stepped and bound or penciled for recommended distances back from BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES CORNELL – NCP BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 26 01 01 PAGE 13 of 19 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 splices to provide a long leakage path. After splicing, insulation equal to that on the spliced conductors shall be applied at each splice. In baring conductors for splices, care shall be taken to avoid nicking strands. 3.15 CONDUCTORS: A. All wire and cable shall be installed in an approved raceway. B. Provide wire and cable in conduit for all feeders, motor circuits, lighting circuits, receptacle circuits, equipment circuits, etc., as shown on drawings. C. Coil slack wire at outlets, inside the outlet boxes and seal the outlet opening with cardboard or fiber plug to prevent entrance of concrete plaster or paint. Provide separate neutrals for all single phase circuits. D. Tag all feeders, subfeeders, special system wiring and control wiring in each pullbox/gutter space, denoting points of origin/termination of wires. E. Install a maximum of 3 phase and one neutral conductor in any one feeder or branch circuit conduit unless otherwise directed by Engineer. F. Provide supports for conductors in vertical raceways in accordance with NEC, Article 300C19. G. Flexible conduit used as connection to any equipment shall contain separate green grounding wire run back to ground bus of serving panelboard. H. Provide #12 AWG minimum size for branch circuit and emergency system wiring, #14 AWG minimum size for signal circuits. I. All wires #12 and larger and wiring to motor or other fixed equipment shall be stranded type. J. Provide #10 minimum size for branch circuit run which exceed 100 feet; unless otherwise directed. K. The neutral wire shall be identified throughout the system. Feeders shall be identified at the source and at all boxes with panel make and phase (A,B,C). L. Included in the work covered under this section is the cutting or drilling of entrance holes into enclosures, equipment terminal boxes and outlet boxes for entrance of cable not in conduit, as well as the work of cutting and drilling of holes in miscellaneous plates located in the path of cable runs. Entrance holes for cable shall be installed around cable, as part of the work of installing cable, sealing bushings, CrouseCHinds type: "CGB" or Owner approved equal, or conduit bushings where these alone are BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES CORNELL – NCP BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 26 01 01 PAGE 14 of 19 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 permissible. The work shall also include the work of packing or sealing at conduit bushings after cables are pulled, using unoiled Oakum and JM DuxCseal or Owner approved equal. M. Cables shall be formed to avoid sharp bends or edges of conduit bushings upon entering or leaving conduit terminations, and insulated wiring to approximately six inch intervals between conduit and terminals. Where outlet box, cabinet, cubicle, switchgear or other terminal points for cable are equipped with cable or wiring trays, troughs or gutters. Contractor shall pull sufficient length of each cable to permit neat arrangement of all entering cables, with leads formed and cabled or clamped as each conductor is brought to its terminal connection. No tangle box work will be accepted. N. Where reasonable practicable , the minimum radius to which an insulated conductor is bent, whether permanently or temporarily during installation, shall be ten times the diameter over the outer covering. O. Making terminal connections shall be included as part of the work, except as specifically noted. At points where the conductor and cable insulation will be terminated, terminations shall be made in a neat, workmanlike and approved manner by men specialized in this class of work, particular attention being given to higher voltage terminations, shielded conductor terminations and coaxial cable terminations. Terminations shall be made by the Contractor for each type of wire or cable in accordance with instructions issued by the Owner. Spare cables shall be trimmed, taped and bundled neatly within the cabinet so their presence will not interfere with connected terminations. They shall be trimmed to a length such that they can be made up and connected to the farthest terminal block within the cabinet. P. Before any cable terminal connections are made, conductors shall be rung out. Connections shall be made according to wiring diagrams. Polarity or phasing shall be checked before final connections are made, and corrections of polarity, phasing or rotation shall be made without additional cost to the Owner. Q. Control cable terminations shall be made in accordance with wiring diagrams, using wire numbers established by the Owner for the various control circuits. It is the intent that the Contractor shall terminate the cables which he installs, except as specifically noted. R. When control cables are to be fanned out and cabled together with cord, Contractor shall make connections to terminal blocks, and test equipment for proper operation before cables are corded together. If there is any question as to proper connection, the Contractor shall make temporary connection with sufficient length of cable so that cable can be switched to another terminal, without splicing cable. S. After pulling and splicing but before making cable terminal connections, the Contractor shall expose ends, clear each conductor, and make the BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES CORNELL – NCP BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 26 01 01 PAGE 15 of 19 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 required Megger test on all circuits except lighting circuits. Contractor shall test cables for motors, power, and control, with a Megger insulation testing instrument (Associated Research, Inc., Megohmmeter) before equipment is energized. In the event insulation is deficient, repeat Megger testing shall be accomplished after corrective measures have been applied. Extreme care shall be exercised in meggering so as not to put excessive voltage on instrumentation and electronic equipment and thereby damage such devices. The Contractor shall megger all power feed cables for 10 to 15 sec., at 4000 volts on apparatus rated 2500 volts, 1000 volts on apparatus rated 550 volts to 2500 volts and 500 volts on apparatus rated less than 500 volts. The cable shall be meggered first on the reel before pulling and then again on a cableCbyCcable basis after being cut and pulled. T. A check shall be made of all external and internal wiring for loose connections, cable sizing and proper terminations per the elementary and connection drawings listed and attached with specification. U. All wiring systems shall be thoroughly checked before placing the system in service, for grounds, short circuits and conformity to wiring diagrams. 3.16 CONDUCTOR CIRCUITING: A. Lighting, receptacles and special circuits: 1. Lighting circuits: provide lighting arrangement as shown or 15 amperes maximum per circuit where not otherwise shown. 2. Receptacle circuits: provide 5 convenience outlets maximum per circuit unless otherwise shown or specified. 3. Special receptacle circuits: provide as indicated on drawings and as specified under special items of equipment and provide separate green conductor for grounding receptacles to panel ground bus. This includes UPS dedicate single receptacle for Telecommunication Rooms. B. Power and Control Circuits: 1. General requirements: a. Provide all power wiring. Install in conduit and make all connections to disconnect switches, motor controllers, motor and other items of electrical equipment shown on drawing details and schedules. b. Provide control wiring only as shown on electric equipment schedule and plan details. Install in conduit and make connections to motors, motor controllers, control devices, etc., including the mounting of all control devices furnished by others. BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES CORNELL – NCP BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 26 01 01 PAGE 16 of 19 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 c. Verify exact location and rating of all motors, controllers, control devices, etc., with other contractors before roughing. d. Power and control wiring may be combined in common conduit by increasing conductor or conduit sizes as required by code. e. Provide minimum working clearances as required by NEC Article 110C16 and as shown on the drawings. 2. Wiring diagrams: a. Any wiring diagrams shown on drawings for hookup of equipment furnished by others, are approximate and are for bidding purposes only b. Obtain wiring diagrams, certified correct for the job, from respective Contractor for all equipment and systems furnished by them. c. Install all work in accordance with certified wiring diagrams. 3. Control devices: a. Do not accept control devices from other Contractors unless they are properly tagged and furnished with circuiting information. 3.17 LIGHTING CIRCUIT CONTROL DEVICES AND RECEPTACLES: A. All devices shall be mounted within a steel box. B. All receptacles shall be mounted with box aligned in a vertical direction with ground slot at bottom of receptacle. In those areas where vertical space is not available such as under fin radiation, cabinets and above backsplash, mount horizontally with ground slot at right. C. Provide circuit identification of lighting junction boxes and wall switches in each Telecommunication room as called for 3.18 WALL PLATES: A. Submit samples as requested by Architect/Engineer. B. Provide special plates fabricated for devices shown ganged together at one location and provide special engraving for switch plates covering special utility switches as shown on drawings. C. Special finish plates will be required where so noted on drawings or included in specifications. Sample of finishes will be furnished to Architect/Engineer for approval when so requested. BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES CORNELL – NCP BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 26 01 01 PAGE 17 of 19 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 D. Provide blank matching coverplates for outlets not used. E. Coverplates for telephone, dimmer controls, etc., shall match device plates in each area. 3.19 OUTLET, JUNCTION AND PULLBOXES: A. Flush recessed wherever possible and securely supported from building construction. B. Where outlet boxes are installed in exposed block walls, locate at corner of block. Locate conduit as required to meet block conditions. Coordinate with other Divisions. C. Identify junction boxes for particular service such as power, lighting, grounding, fire alarm, etc. Label with suitable tags or use stencil lettering. D. Locate where shown or required for outlet facilities and where shown or required for installing wire or cable. Make accessible after completion of construction; Electric Contractor shall be responsible for coordination with other divisions. Junction and pullboxes shall not be located in finished room unless specifically permitted. E. Mounting height of boxes shall be as scheduled. 3.20 PREVENTION OF CORROSION: A. Protect all metallic materials against corrosion. B. Aluminum shall not be used in contact earth nor embedded in concrete. Where connected to dissimilar metal, protect by approved fittings and treatment. C. Hot dip galvanize all ferrous metal materials such as bolts, braces, boxes, bodies, clamps, fittings, guards, nuts, pins, rods, shims, washers, and miscellaneous parts which are not made of corrosionCresistant steel. Use stainless steel fasteners in wet locations and out of doors. D. Galvanized in accordance with ASTM AC123 or AC153. 3.21 PAINTING: A. General Requirements: 1. Painting shall be provided as outlined hereafter. 2. Clean all surfaces of moisture, rust, plaster, dirt, dust, and foreign matter before painting. 3. Apply full even coats as required to provide acceptable finish. BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES CORNELL – NCP BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 26 01 01 PAGE 18 of 19 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 4. Apply finish coat just before final acceptance. 5. Protect all other surfaces with drop cloths. masking tape, etc. 6. Protect equipment and internal parts with making tape. 7. Factory enamelCfinished equipment not to be painted, EXCEPT when rusted or otherwise damaged; then paint as directed or if specifically called for hereinafter. 8. Appearance to be approved; repaint if required. B. Paint all work of this division in the following areas: 1. Boiler Room, Mechanical Equipment Rooms, Electrical Equipment Rooms, Penthouses, Fan Rooms, all work of this contract exposed to the weather, and where specifically called for. a. Bare pipes, conduit, supports, all supports, mounting boards/panels, metal jackets, etc., also paint equipment not supplied with factory finished surface. 1) First Coat: Pratt and Lambert "Effecto" primer unless equipment supplied with factory prime coat. 2) Second Coat: Pratt and Lambert "Effecto" enamel. 3) Color as selected by engineer/architect. 4) Additional coats as required. 3.22 FIRESTOPPING, WATERPROOFING, CAULKING AND SEALING: A. Opening Through Fire/Smoke Walls and Floors: 1. Install work per NFPA. 2. Provide sleeves for ducts and pipe anchor duct sleeves with angle iron. 3. Comply with Division 078413 – Penetrating Firestopping 3.23 TESTS: A. General: 1. Perform all operations required for the complete testing of all systems, equipment and related work as shown on drawings or specified herein and in accordance with all applicable requirements of the specifications. 2. Before final acceptance, all specified tests shall be completed to the satisfaction of the Engineer or his representative, who shall be sole judge of the acceptability of such tests and who may direct the performance of any such additional tests as he deems necessary in order to determine the acceptability of the systems, equipment, material and workmanship. Any additional tests BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES CORNELL – NCP BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 26 01 01 PAGE 19 of 19 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 required by the Engineer will be made at no additional costs to Owner. 3. All protective equipment shall be actuated in a manner that clearly demonstrates their work ability and operation. 4. Demonstrate the ability of each and every piece of equipment to meet the design and operating requirements indicated on the drawings. 5. The inspection and test by the Owner or Engineer of any articles or lots thereof , or failure to inspect and accept or reject any article or lots thereof, shall not relieve the Contractor from any responsibility regarding defects or other failure to meet the Specification requirements which may be discovered prior to final acceptance. Except as otherwise provided in the Specification, final acceptance shall be conclusive except as regards any latent defects, fraud, or such gross mistakes as amount to fraud. 6. Acceptance to the material and/or equipment and the waiving of test thereof, shall in no way relieve the Contractor of the responsibility for furnishing material and/or equipment meeting the requirements of these Specifications. END OF SECTION 26 01 01 BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES CORNELL – NCP GROUNDING STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 26 05 26 – PAGE 1 of 5 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 SECTION 260526 GROUNDING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The Contract Drawings and the General Provisions of the Contract, including the General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Supplementary Conditions, Special Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections apply to the work of this Section. B. The Work of Section 26 01 01 3 Electrical Basic Materials and Methods applies to the Work of this Section. 1.2 WORK INCLUDED: A. Provide a complete, operating, tested, functioning, documented grounding system including all work shown, specified, or required for proper system operation. B. All grounding and grounding circuitry shall equal or exceed the requirements of NEC, latest issue, Article 250. C. The raceway system which includes all metal conduit, wireways, pullboxes, junction boxes, bus ducts, built3up enclosures, enclosures, motor frames, etc., shall be made to form a continuous, conducting permanent ground circuit of the lowest practical impedance to enhance the safe conduction of ground fault currents and to prevent objectionable differences in voltage between metal non3load current carrying parts of the electrical system. D. In addition to the raceway system ground, an additional green wire ground shall be run in each raceway, sized for the largest circuit in the raceway. E. Telecommunications ground system consists of telecommunications ground bar (TGB) in all ITR’s and MTR’s. Refer to drawing for TGB type and location. Minimum #6 grounding riser between each ITR and MTR per riser diagram on drawings. Bonding in each ITR and MTR shall be from the TGB in each room to the following: network equipment racks and cabinets, cable runways, cable trays, metallic cable sheaths and raised floor system (if existing). 1.3 SUBMITTALS: A. Provide product data for each type of ground bar and associated ground lugs, at a minimum. BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES CORNELL – NCP GROUNDING STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 26 05 26 – PAGE 2 of 5 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 1.4 DEFINITIONS: A. Earth: interpreted as absolute ground, a theoretical location of zero electrical potential. B. Ground: interpreted as a made conducting connection to earth by employing such devices as a driven metal rod, a buried metal plate, a metallic water pipe, etc., or any multiple or combination of these devices, and the conductors which may interconnect any of the foregoing. C. System ground: interpreted as a low impedance made conducting ground plane or system, with a conducting connection to ground, established for the benefit of a particular electrical system or related systems. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 CONDUCTORS: A. All exposed grounding conductors such as bars, straps, cables, flexible jumpers, braids, shunts, etc., shall be bare copper unless specifically noted or approved otherwise. B. Cable size shall be as required by NEC Code, Section 250, stranded, soft drawn or soft annealed, unless otherwise shown on plans or specified. C. Cable insulation type and color shall be as shown or as specified. D. Manufacturer to be same as specified in Section 260101 3 Basic Materials and Methods. 2.2 CONNECTORS, CLAMPS, TERMINALS: A. Mechanical connectors and clamps shall be silicon bronze. B. Solderless compression terminals shall be copper, long3barrel, two3bolt. C. Make: Anderson, Burndy, Penn3Union, T&B, approved for use intended. 2.3 SOLDER: A. Solder prohibited for connections, except for high voltage cable metallic tape shields. 2.4 MOLDED FUSION WELDS: A. Process shall be "Cadweld," "Metalweld," "Thermoweld." BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES CORNELL – NCP GROUNDING STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 26 05 26 – PAGE 3 of 5 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 2.5 HARDWARE: A. All hardware shall be silicon bronze alloy. B. Make: "Durium," "Everdur." PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL: A. Bare copper bars, cables, fittings, etc., shall not be installed in cinder fill nor shall be covered with soil containing cinders or other corrosive material. B. Cables shall be installed with enough slack to prevent breaking stresses. C. All grounding conductors subject to mechanical damage shall be protected by rigid steel conduit or other suitable steel guards and in all cases where so protected shall be permanently and effectively grounded to said enclosure at each end of its length. D. Where grounding conductors pass through floor slabs, walls, etc., and are not encased in metal conduit, they shall be sleeved in fiber, or approved non3metallic conduit. E. All equipment ground bus, ground pads, frames, enclosures, etc., shall have surfaces at point of connection thoroughly cleaned and brightened just prior to actually making the connection. Touch3up damaged painted surfaces. F. Splices in wire or cable grounding conductors are prohibited. 3.2 INSTALLATION, RACEWAY SYSTEMS: A. All metal supports, cable trays, messenger cables, frames, brackets, races, etc., for any part of the raceway system, panels, switches, boxes, starters, controls, etc., which are not rigidly secured to and in contact with the raceway system, or which are subject to vibration and loosening, shall be bonded to the raceway system, the size of the bonding conductor in accordance with NEC Table 250394. B. Termination of rigid conduit at all boxes, cabinets, and enclosures shall be made up tightly with a double locknut arrangement and a bushing, bushings being of the insulated type where required by NEC. C. Conduit which runs to or from all boxes, cabinets, or enclosures having BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES CORNELL – NCP GROUNDING STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 26 05 26 – PAGE 4 of 5 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 concentric or eccentric knockouts which partially perforate the metal around the conduit and hence impair the continuity of system ground circuits shall be provided with bonding jumpers sized in accordance with NEC Table 250395 connected between a grounding type bushing/locknut on the conduit and a ground bus or stud inside the box, cabinet, or enclosure and attached thereto. D. Conduit expansion joints and telescoping sections of metal raceways shall be provided with bonding jumpers sized in accordance with NEC Table 250395. E. Where flexible metallic conduit or liquid tight conduit is used, a bonding jumper shall be provided, sized in accordance with NEC Table 250395. F. All non3metallic runs of conduit or raceway shall be provided with a system ground conductor sized according to Table 250395. G. Where conduit enters or leaves any electrical enclosure with removable coverplates, provide conduit grounding bushings and bonding jumpers sized in accordance with NEC Table 250395 between the grounding bushings and the enclosure rigid frame or ground bus. H. The ground conductors contained in the interstices of interlocked armor cable shall be connected to ground at every splice and termination point. 3.3 INSTALLATION, ATTACHMENT TO STRUCTURAL STEEL: A. Location of attachment bonds of ground conductors shall be at points not subject to mechanical damage, but if possible where accessible for inspection. B. Attach preferably by molded fusion welding process. C. Where welding is prohibited, attach by bolting, 7/16 inch hole in steel, 3/8 inch silicon bronze bolt, bolt end peened, steel surface bright and flat prior to bolting, just prior to bolting contact surfaces lightly coated with Vaseline or "NO3OX3ID3A Special." 3.4 INSTALLATION, SECONDARY ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS: A. The neutral conductor of each and every low voltage, single or polyphase, system or distribution system, except special isolated double insulated systems, shall be solidly connected at one point only; at the main secondary switchgear; to system ground and shall be sized for current carrying capacity, not to be less than the following, which are listed in preferential order: a. As shown or specified. b. As required by NEC, latest issue, Table 250395. BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES CORNELL – NCP GROUNDING STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 26 05 26 – PAGE 5 of 5 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 c. Not less than 25 percent of the transformer full load current or main protective device rating, whichever is greater, based on NEMA standard bus size. B. Provide equipment grounding conductor, green colored insulation, with phase conductors, to primary side of all transformers rated 600 volts or less circuited to case and secondary neutral bushing, to motors, to motor control equipment, and to all convenience outlets, insulation shall be same type as phase conductors. C. Transformer secondary neutral bushings shall also to be circuited to nearest metallic water pipe, building steel, or ground rod. END OF SECTION 26 05 26 BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES CORNELL – NCP ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 26 05 53 – PAGE 1 of 4 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 SECTION 260553 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATIO N PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. The Contract Drawings and the General Provisions of the Contract, including the General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Supplementary Conditions, Special Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections apply to the work of this Section. B. The Work of Section 26 01 01 7 Electrical Basic Materials and Methods applies to the Work of this Section. 1.2 WORK INCLUDED: A. Provide a complete, operating, tested, functioning, documented Electrical Equipment Identification System including all work shown, specified, or required for proper system operation. B. Under this Section provide equipment and circuit identification as follows: 1. Typewritten panel directories with duplicates on As7Built Drawings, for all new or existing altered panels. 2. Panelboard nameplates 3. Panelboard breaker identification tags 4. Telecom Ground Bar nameplates and identification tags, for all new or modified bars. 5. Telecom Grounding Riser Conductor nameplates and identification tags, for all new or modified risers. 6. Wiring color code 7. Wiring labeling 8. Junction box marking (Incl. Telecom Branch circuits and Lighting) 9. UPS and convenience power receptacles (Incl. Telecom Branch circuits) 10. Motor starter/disconnect nameplates 11. New Fire Alarm devices 12. New Fire Alarm junction box covers paint to Owner’s color code. 13. Panelboard voltage marking 1.3 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE: A. Factory produced panelboard nameplates included in Section 26 24 16. B. Color code for conductors provided in Section 26 01 01. BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES CORNELL – NCP ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 26 05 53 – PAGE 2 of 4 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 1.4 SUBMITTALS: A. Provide product data for each new Telecom Ground Bar nameplates, per drawing A4. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS: A. Legend Plates: 1. Two ply, 1/16” thick flexible plastic legend plates, front etched with minimum 3/16” Gothic letters. Provide adhesive backing and a minimum of two 5/32” diameter screw holes. Plate size shall be minimum 1” x 3”. Multi7layer, non7conductive material, machine7 engraved with proper designation. 2. C & M Name Shop, Syracuse, or acceptable manufacturer. 3. Stick on computer printed labels shall not be accepted. B. Stencils: 1. Die cut, capital letters. 2. Letters 3/8” minimum height. C. Wire Markers: 1. Adhesive backed mylar or fabric material with printed markings. 2. Brady or equivalent. D. Voltage Markers 1. Voltage markers shall be bright orange with black letters. Brady Style B (171/8” by 471/2”) or acceptable manufacturer. Examples: Three Phase Single Phase Three Phase 208 volts 240 volts 480 volts 120 volts 120 volts 277 volts PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 IDENTIFICATION, GENERAL: A. Equipment name and number as shown on Drawings to be used for equipment identification. BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES CORNELL – NCP ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 26 05 53 – PAGE 3 of 4 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 B. Disconnect switches, starters, control, etc., serving utilized equipment shall be labeled on front cover. C. All duplex receptacles, single UPS receptacles, light switches/circuits, Telecom Ground Bars, Telelcom grounding conductors and lugs, fire initiation devices, etc, serving any equipment in Telecommunication rooms, shall be labeled with machine printed wrap around labels, with panel and C/B information. . D. All Telecom Ground Bars and Telelcom grounding conductors in Telecommunication rooms, shall be labeled with legend plated, as described in this section. E. Step7down transformers shall be labeled with primary/secondary voltages. F. Utilized equipment which does not have service voltage clearly indicated shall also be labeled by the Contractor, as directed by the Engineer. G. Starters or control panels with interlock shall be provided with a warning sign to indicate separate control voltage and may be energized. Warning sign shall be mounted inside enclosure. 3.2 IDENTIFICATION MARKERS: A. Securely fastened to equipment to be identified with adhesive material and plated screws. B. Locate on front of equipment to be identified in neat manner, plumb and true. C. All power supply equipment; i.e., branch circuit breakers, equipment disconnect switches, motor starters, etc. to be labeled to identify function and/or load served. 3.3 STENCILED LABELS: A. To be used only on equipment in unfinished areas. B. Obtain Engineer's approval. C. Locate on front of equipment to be identified in neat manner, plumb and true. 3.4 WIRE MARKERS: A. Install approximately 2” from wire ends. B. All wiring to be identified via labeling at all ends, in junction and pull boxes, in panelboards, at equipment terminations, at terminal boards BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES CORNELL – NCP ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 26 05 53 – PAGE 4 of 4 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 and/or cabinets. Wiring to be identified for continuity. 3.5 DIRECTORIES: A. Typewritten only; handwritten not acceptable. B. Install in a manner to be legible but protected from physical damage under conditions of normal use. C. Room names to be referenced on directory along with load supplied. 3.6 MATERIALS TO BE LABELED: A. Directories: Update existing panelboards to include new load served. END OF SECTION 26 05 53 BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES CORNELL – NCP MOTOR STARTERS AND DISCONNECTS STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 26 29 10 – PAGE 1 of 3 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 SECTION 262910 MOTOR STARTERS & DISCONNECTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. The Contract Drawings and the General Provisions of the Contract, including the General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Supplementary Conditions, Special Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections apply to the work of this Section. B. The Work of Section 26 01 01 5 Electrical Basic Materials and Methods applies to the Work of this Section. 1.2 WORK INCLUDED: A. Provide motor starters and disconnects, including all work shown, specified, or required for proper system operation. 1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS: A. The combination starters and protection devices in this specification shall be designed and manufactured according to latest revision of the following standards (unless otherwise noted). 1. ANSI/NFPA 70 5 National Electrical Code. 5 Latest issue 2. CSA C22.2 No. 14 5 Industrial Control Equipment. 5 Latest issue 3. NEMA ICS 2 5 Industrial Control and Systems: Controllers, Contactors and Overload Relays, Rated Not More than 2000 Volts AC or 750 Volts DC. 5 Latest issue 4. UL 508 5 Industrial Control Equipment. 5 Latest issue 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Provide submittals for the following: 1. Disconnect Switches 2. Starters PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS: A. All products in this section shall be by General Electric Company, Square D or Cutler5Hammer. These Manufacturers are University Standard, no other Manufacturers shall be accepted. 2.2 CLASSIFICATION/ASSEMBLY: BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES CORNELL – NCP MOTOR STARTERS AND DISCONNECTS STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 26 29 10 – PAGE 2 of 3 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 A. All products to be heavy duty grade classification, NEMA type as scheduled on drawings. General duty products not accepted. B. All products shall be factory assembled and wired and shall be UL approved. Assemblies fabricated by Contractor shall not be accepted. C. Units shall be horsepower rated for load served, current rating and poles as shown on plans. 2.3 DISCONNECT SWITCHES (NON5FUSIBLE): A. Visible blade with dual color, red/black position indicator. Unit shall be padlockable in "off" position. B. Unit shall be the heavy5duty version. C. Where shown provide auxiliary interlock kits. D. Rating: 600 Volts for all loads served. E. Make: Square D Class 3110 or acceptable manufacturer in G.E. or Cutler5Hammer. 2.4 DISCONNECT SWITCHES (FUSIBLE): A. Visible blade with dual color, red/black position indicator. Unit shall be padlockable in "off" position. B. Unit shall be the heavy5duty version. C. Provide motor overload elements and fuse clips for Class R fuses. D. Where shown provide auxiliary interlock. E. Rating: 240 Volts for 208 and 240 Volt loads. 600 Volts for loads above 240 volts. F. Make: Square D Class 3110 or acceptable manufacturer in G.E. or Cutler5Hammer. 2.5 MANUAL MOTOR STARTERS: A. Motor control switch and Motor overload element in single enclosure. B. Make Square D class 2510 or acceptable manufacturer in GE or Cutler5 Hammer. 2.6 COMBINATION MAGNETIC MOTOR STARTER/FUSIBLE DISCONNECT SWITCH: BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES CORNELL – NCP MOTOR STARTERS AND DISCONNECTS STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 26 29 10 – PAGE 3 of 3 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 A. Provide motor overload elements and fuse clips for Class R fuses. B. Visible blade with dual color, red/black position indicator. Unit shall be padlockable in "off" position. C. Parts subject to wear or arching shall be removable and replaceable. D. Where shown provide auxiliary interlock kits. E. Provide 24 or 120 volt control transformer as shown and 24 or 120 volt contactor coil, provide fuses for transformer. F. Provide cover mounted HOA switch. G. Make: Square D Class 8538 or acceptable manufacturer in GE or Cutler5 Hammer. 2.7 FUSES: A. Dual Element, time delay. B. Type and size as required. C. Make: Buss Fustron, Shawmut Gould, or Brush Reliance. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION: A. Mount Manual Motor Starters, Magnetic Motor Starters and Disconnects on substantial mount frames provided by the Electrical Contractor, with clearances according to the NEC. B. Circuit according to the NEC. END SECTION 26 29 10 BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES CORNELL – NCP LIGHTING STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 26 51 00 – PAGE 1 of 5 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 SECTION 265100 LIGHTING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. The Contract Drawings and the General Provisions of the Contract, including the General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Supplementary Conditions, Special Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections apply to the work of this Section. B. The Work of Section 26 01 01 5 Electrical Basic Materials and Methods applies to the Work of this Section. 1.2 WORK INCLUDED: A. Provide a complete, operating, tested, functioning, documented lighting system including all Work shown, specified, or required for proper system operation. B. Provide lighting fixtures, lenses, globes, hangers, supports, lamps and appurtenances to provide a complete lighting system. C. Provide emergency light battery units, and accessories where shown. D. Relocate fixtures where shown. E. Refer to Electrical New Work Drawings and E4 Drawing Schedules, typical. 1.3 SUBMITTALS: A. Provide product data for each luminaire assembly to be provided and all light switched, as called or. PART 2 PRODUCTS: 2.1 GENERAL: A. All fixtures of the same type shall be by the same manufacturer. B. All lamps of the same type shall be by the same manufacturer. Lamps shall be appropriate for the actual ballast furnished and shall be tested and certified for operation by the ballast manufacturer. 2.2 FIXTURES: A. Schedule (See E4 Drawings). BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES CORNELL – NCP LIGHTING STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 26 51 00 – PAGE 2 of 5 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 2.3 FLUORESCENT LAMPS: A. All fluorescent lamps shall be energy saving type and color temperature as scheduled. B. Lamps shall be low mercury type. 2.4 BALLASTS: A. All ballasts shall be of the PCB free type. B. All ballasts shall be of the energy saving type, as scheduled, 56 watts input typ. 25lamp T8. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 FIXTURES: A. Securely support all fixtures in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions and U.L. or ETL listing information. B. Location: 1. Evenly proportioned in room, except adjusted to conform with ceiling pattern as described below and except where otherwise shown or dimensioned. 2. Edges of fixtures parallel with walls. C. Plaster frames: 1. Provide for all recessed fixtures in wet type ceilings. 2. Install in cooperation with other trades. D. Mounting: 1. All fixtures must hang true to vertical, free from finger marks, flaws, scratches, dents or other imperfections. 2. Take care when hanging fixtures not to deface in any way, ceilings or walls. 3. Install continuous rows of fixtures in straight line; all fixtures at same level. Fixtures must not be rotated about longitudinal axis with respect to one another. 4. Mount surface fixtures tight to surface without distorting it. 5. Provide proper mounting equipment and trim for recessed fixtures to adapt them to the ceiling or wall construction and to prevent light leaks around trim. 6. Provide special means for supporting fixtures as hereinafter BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES CORNELL – NCP LIGHTING STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 26 51 00 – PAGE 3 of 5 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 specified, as shown on plans, or as required. 7. All stem mounted fixtures shall be hung level from self5aligning hangers in canopies; all stems shall be constructed of formed and stamped sheet metal, no cast or "pot metal" parts shall be accepted. 8. Securely support all ceiling fixtures, hangers, and outlet boxes from structural members, not from ceiling members. In addition the fixtures shall be securely fastened to framing members of the ceiling in order to meet NEC, Article 410516B. Lock clip, wirelashing or leveling supports shall be acceptable means. 9. Plastic inserts not permitted. 10. Outlet boxes shall not be supported by conduit. 11. Supports for each fixture shall be capable of supporting 4 times fixture weight. Use 1/4 inch threaded rod, fender washer, and double nuts. 12. Exterior fixtures shall be installed with non5ferrous metal screws finished to match the fixture. 13. Fixtures shall be supported from building structure and using supports as follows (minimum requirements): a. Ceiling surface mounted: 1) 1’ x 4’ 5 two supports. 2) 1’ x 8’ 5 three supports. 3) 2 ‘x 4’ 5 two supports. 4) 4’ x 4’ 5 four supports. 14. Provide special extra wide toggle bolt support, 10” wide toggle, Paine Company #400, mounted above existing plaster ceilings where approved by Engineer and noted on Plans. E. Mechanical coordination: 1. Coordinate location of all hangers in rooms without ceilings with ductwork, plumbing piping, sprinkler piping, etc. 2. Make all necessary offsets and extensions so that stems and fixtures avoid beams, pipes, ducts, etc. 3. Where fixtures are located below heating, ventilation and air conditioning units, or ductwork and piping, provide trapeze hangers around obstruction and suspend fixture from trapeze hanger. Do not suspend from duct. F. Architectural coordination: 1. Locate all hangers at intersections of joints or at centers of blocks in rooms with acoustical tile or other patterned type of ceiling materials. 2. Space continuous row fixtures to conform to corresponding joint intersections. BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES CORNELL – NCP LIGHTING STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 26 51 00 – PAGE 4 of 5 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 3. Coordinate all ceiling layouts and obtain Engineer's approval before proceeding. 4. Heights of fixtures not scheduled will be furnished on application to Engineer. 5. Contractor is specifically required to verify ceiling construction and report in writing any discrepancies between the ceiling type and the fixture type before releasing fixtures for manufacture. G. Care of fixtures: 1. Remove, and replace with new, all broken glassware, plastic or fixtures damaged before final acceptance at no additional expense to Owner. 2. No allowance made for breakage or theft before final acceptance. 3. Immediately prior to occupancy, damp5clean all diffusers, glassware, fixture trims, reflectors, lamps, and replace burned5out lamps. H. Wiring: 1. Fixture shall not be used as a raceway except as allowed in NEC, Article 410531. 2. Wiring to fixture shall be 90° Centigrade minimum. 3.2 LAMPS: A. All lamps for new fixtures shall be installed new. Provide spare lamps as required to allow replacement of flickering or bad lamps. Provide labor and material to replace any failed lamp during the one (1) year warrantee period. In the event that more than 10% of the lamps in a particular room or lot fail within twelve (12) months of Project completion or earlier, the Contractor shall replace all lamps which were provided for that room or lot. Contractor shall provide all labor and materials for this work at no cost to the Owner, and shall compensate the Owner for his personnel who provide access for the Contractor. B. Clean all fixtures and lamps prior to requesting punch list. 3.3 BALLASTS: A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instruction. Provide labor and material to replace any failed ballast during one (1) year warranty period. In the event that more than 10% of the ballasts in any particular room, lot or type of fixture fail within twelve (12) months of Project completion or earlier, the Contractor shall replace all ballasts which were provided for that room or lot or type of fixture. The Contractor shall provide all labor and materials for this work at no cost to the Owner, and shall compensate the Owner for his personnel who provide access for the Contractor. BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES CORNELL – NCP LIGHTING STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 26 51 00 – PAGE 5 of 5 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 END OF SECTION 26 51 00 BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES CORNELL – NCP FIRE ALARM SYSTEM IMPROVEMENTS STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 26 60 00 – PAGE 1 of 8 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 SECTION 266000 FIRE ALARM IMPROVEMENTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. The Contract Drawings and the General Provisions of the Contract, including the General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Supplementary Conditions, Special Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections apply to the work of this Division. B. The Work of the Sections 26 01 00 4 Electrical Basic Materials and Methods apply to the Work of this Section. 1.2 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM INSTALLER REQUIREMENTS: A. The installation of major fire alarm system renovations and new fire alarm and detection systems shall be performed by a qualified individual certified as either a National Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies (NICET) Fire Alarm Systems Level III (minimum), or as a Licensed Professional Engineer. 1.3 WORK INCLUDED: The work of this Section shall include providing all materials, labor, services, permits and related work to furnish a complete, operating, tested, functioning, documented Fire Alarm improvements and modifications and additions to existing fire alarm System for Cornell University including all work shown, specified or required for proper system operation including but not limited to the following: A. Field verifications of existing conditions and associated demolition and removal of existing circuits, devices, and fixtures, where shown, removal of all debris from site and proper disposal of same. B. Confirmation that the existing system can support new device(s) Provide new hardware and appropriate and compatible system detection devices throughout the building as shown on the AMEP electrical drawings. C. Provide and install new conduit pathways and boxes for new fire alarm circuiting as shown on drawings. Extend existing fire alarm initiating circuit to new smoke detector. D. Provide equipment and conductor identification. All new fire alarm equipment shall match existing fire alarm manufacturer within the building. E. Provide testing of equipment and conductors. BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES CORNELL – NCP FIRE ALARM SYSTEM IMPROVEMENTS STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 26 60 00 – PAGE 2 of 8 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 F. Provide openings in existing and new construction as required for the work of this division. G. Provide maintenance of system in good condition until final acceptance. H. Provide Submittals, Shop Drawings and Coordination Drawings. I. Provide As4Built (Record Drawings) for the following: 1. Fire Alarm System Equipment and Devices J. Provide Reprogramming (with designators approved by Owner), testing, and modification to existing fire alarm panel(s). K. Provide startup, testing and troubleshooting services as required. L. Provide one year warranty from date of final acceptance. M. Provide owner training. N. Provide O&M document submission and “As4Built” Drawings. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. To ensure compliance with the intent of this standard, all new fire alarm and detection system final designs and associated contract submittals shall be reviewed by CU Facilities Engineering (FE) and Environmental Health & Safety (EH&S). B. One (1) copy of each new project fire alarm system submittal shall be sent to both the CU FE Electrical Section and EH&S for review and comment prior to releasing final approved submittals to the contractor. Submittals shall contain the following information: 1. Product information for all installed components; 2. System riser diagram with typical equipment and device connection and labeling; NOTE that a detailed system/device connection diagram is NOT required until the completion of the project (as a complete “As4Built”). 3. Wire color coding table and/or schedule; 4. System battery stand4by calculations; 5. Special system requirements; 6. System labeling materials and methods as described in this section. C. At completion of the project, Contractor shall provide a complete set of fire alarm “As4Built” drawings that includes the following information prior to the closeout of the project: 1. New Initiating device locations; BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES CORNELL – NCP FIRE ALARM SYSTEM IMPROVEMENTS STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 26 60 00 – PAGE 3 of 8 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 2. Special systems interface locations; 3. Complete fire alarm riser diagram that depicts wiring between FACP and all new fire alarm system components. Such detail shall include all major equipment and their locations (approved room number designation), zone/loop wiring connections to initiating devices, SNAC wiring to notification appliances, and interconnections to other special systems as designed per this standard. 4. Circuit breaker locations for all fire alarm panels and accessory panels that receive building power. Locations shall include room number in which the power panel is located, as well as the breaker number that serves the equipment. D. The Owner or his designated representative shall approve all equipment submittals. E. Administrative Requirements a) Provide product data for each type of smoke/heat detector planned for use, at a minimum. F. General Requirements: 1. Manufacturer's original catalog data and descriptive information shall be supplied for all major components of the equipment to be supplied. 2. Suppliers' qualifications shall be supplied indicating years in business, service policies, warranty definitions, and a list of similar installations. 3. Contractor qualifications shall be supplied indicating years in business and prior experience with installations that include the type of equipment that is to be supplied. 4. All pertinent information shall be supplied regarding the reliability and operation of the equipment to be supplied. 5. Delivery dates of the equipment to be supplied shall be furnished. 6. Installation and final test/acceptance dates of the equipment shall be supplied. 7. Sufficient information shall be supplied so that the exact function of each installed device is known. 8. Provide battery stand4by calculations showing total stand4by power needed to meet the system requirements as specified. G. Other than Specified Equipment: Equipment other than specified shall be considered for approval provided the following is submitted in writing by the Electrical Contractor to the Engineer ten (10) days before the bid date: BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES CORNELL – NCP FIRE ALARM SYSTEM IMPROVEMENTS STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 26 60 00 – PAGE 4 of 8 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 1. Complete lists, descriptions and drawings of materials to be used. 2. A complete list of current drain requirements during normal supervisory conditions, trouble conditions and alarm conditions. 3. Battery stand4by calculations showing total stand4by power needed to meet the system requirements as specified. H. Substituted Equipment: If equipment other than that specified is supplied, it shall be the Contractor's obligation to submit the appropriate documentation and all the Engineer sufficient time to consider the equality of the substituted items. I. Satisfying the Entire Intent of these Specifications: 1. It is the Contractor's responsibility to meet the entire intent of these Specifications. Deviations from the specified items shall be at the risk of the Contractor 2. All costs for removal, relocation, or replacement of a substituted item shall be at the risk of the Contractor. 1.5 AGENCY APPROVALS: A. All equipment shall be listed by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. or approved by Factory Mutual or as accepted by the authority having jurisdiction. B. The modified fire alarm system in its entirety shall be in compliance with all applicable fire and electrical codes and comply with the requirements of the local authority having jurisdiction over said systems. C. Accessory components as required shall be catalogued by the manufacturer and U.L. listed to operate with the manufacture’s control pane. 1.6 SPECIFIC U.L. PROVISIONS: A. The system shall comply with the applicable provisions of the following U.L. Standards and Classifications: 1. #864, Control Units for Fire Protective Signaling Systems. 2. UOJZ, Control Units, System. 3. UOXX, Control Unit Accessories, System. 1.7 SPECIFIC NFPA STANDARDS: A. The system shall comply with the applicable provision of the following current National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) standards: BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES CORNELL – NCP FIRE ALARM SYSTEM IMPROVEMENTS STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 26 60 00 – PAGE 5 of 8 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 1. NFPA 71 2. NFPA 72 National Fire Alarm Code 3. NFPA 90 A 4. NFPA 101 Life Safety Code 1.8 CODES AND STANDARDS: A. The Fire Alarm and Detection System shall comply with all local and state codes with no exception. B. The Fire Alarm Contractor shall be a licensed New York State Fire Alarm and Detection System Installer. 1.9 CONTRACTOR REQUIREMENTS: A. The Contractor providing modifications to the fire alarm and detection system shall be licensed per Article 6 D of the New York State General Business Law. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 EQUIPMENT MATERIAL AND GENERAL REQUIREMENTS: A. All equipment furnished for this project shall be new and unused. All components and systems shall be designed for uninterrupted duty. All equipment, materials, accessories, devices and other facilities covered by this specification or noted on contract drawings and installation specifications shall be the best suited for the intended use and shall be provided by a single manufacturer. If any of the equipment provided under this Specification is provided by different manufactures, then that equipment shall be recognized as compatible by both manufacturers, and "Listed" as such by Underwriters’ Laboratories. B. System installation and operations shall be verified by the manufacturer’s representative and a verification certificate presented upon completion. The manufacturer’s representative shall be responsible for an on4site demonstration of the operation of the system and initial staff training as required by the Consulting Engineer. C. The system shall be capable of detecting the electrical location of each intelligent device. 2.2 SMOKE DETECTOR4PHOTOELECTRIC: A. Smoke Detectors – Spot Type BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES CORNELL – NCP FIRE ALARM SYSTEM IMPROVEMENTS STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 26 60 00 – PAGE 6 of 8 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 1. Smoke detectors shall be of the low profile, solid state, photoelectric or ionization type and shall be compatible for use in addressable, zoned, and combination addressable and zoned systems. 2. Smoke detectors shall be compatible for use in Style D (Class A) and Style B (Class B) circuits. (Note: Special power supplies or compensating devices shall not be required for smoke detectors to properly operate in circuits containing other Style D and Style B initiating devices. Also, Style B (Class B) smoke detectors shall not be used in initiating circuits unless provided with a separate 24 VDC control power supply.) 2.3 MOUNTING BASE4STANDARD DETECTOR: A. Standard detector mounting base suitable for mounting on 4" octagon and 4" square box or wiremold surface ceiling box. Base shall contain no electronics, support all detector types and have following minimum requirements: 1. Removal of respective detector shall not affect communications with other detectors. 2. Terminal connections shall be made on room side of the base. Bases which must be removed to gain access to the terminals shall not be accepted. B. Design Make (typical): Simplex Grinnell TrueAlert # 409849xxx Series, 2 or 44wire to match existing system, or as directed (field verify). C. Design Make (typical): EST Model SIGA4SB, or as directed to match existing (field verify). 2.4 SYSTEM IDENTIFICATION / LABELING A. Initiating, notification, signaling, and other fire alarm system wiring, circuits, and conductors shall be color coded and identified by number at termination points (i.e., control panels, remote annunciators, etc.) and splice points (i.e., junction boxes, splice boxes, etc.). Wiring shall be consistent throughout the system with no color changes on individual loops from the FACP. B. Junction and splice boxes containing fire alarm system wiring, circuits, and conductors shall have red covers and marked “FIRE ALARM” in 3/4" (three4quarter inch) white letters. C. Fire alarm equipment supplied with 120 VAC power shall be labeled with the panel source information, including panel name, room number and source breaker number. D. End4of4line resistors in two4wire systems shall be located at the fire alarm control panel, if feasible; otherwise, end4of4line resistors shall be installed in designated junction boxes with red covers and marked in accordance BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES CORNELL – NCP FIRE ALARM SYSTEM IMPROVEMENTS STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 26 60 00 – PAGE 7 of 8 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 with the specifications of this section. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL: A. Any drilling/work that may create a nuisance fire alarm shall be scheduled at least 24 hours in advance with Cornell customer service for a fire protection system shutdown. Shutdown will be performed by Cornell EH&S staff. Contractor shall not disable any fire protection equipment without EH&S approval/assistance. B. Prior to construction within any room containing an existing smoke detector, coordinate with system vendor to temporarily replace the smoke detector with a heat detector, and test/re4program the system as required. Schedule the vendor in advance to avoid project delays. At completion of room construction, coordinate with vendor to replace heat detector with smoke detector, and test/re4program the system as required, in the presence of Cornell EH&S / IFD. C. Conform to Division 26 Specifications for installation and execution of work. 3.2 WIRING: A. For fire alarm use, wire and cable shall be U.L. listed and a minimum of 18 AWG as required by local codes and authority having jurisdiction. Provide twisted/shielded wire for communication circuits. All fire alarm and detection circuits shall be in conduit. B. Raceways containing conductors identified as "Fire Protective Alarm System". Conductors shall not contain any other conductors and no AC current carrying conductors shall be allowed in the same raceway with the D.C. Fire alarm detection and signaling conductors. 3.3 INSTALLER'S RESPONSIBILITIES: A. The installer shall field verify existing conditions/systems and coordinate the installation of the fire alarm equipment with the manufacturer or his authorized distributor. B. All conductors and wiring shall be installed according to the manufacturer's recommendations. C. It shall be the installer's responsibility to coordinate with the supplier, regarding the correct wiring procedures before installing any conduits or conductors. 3.4 INSTALLATION OF SYSTEM COMPONENTS: A. System components shall be installed in accordance with the latest BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES CORNELL – NCP FIRE ALARM SYSTEM IMPROVEMENTS STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 26 60 00 – PAGE 8 of 8 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 revisions of the appropriate NFPA pamphlets, the requirements contained herein, National Electrical Code, local and state regulations, the requirements of the fire department, and other applicable authorities have jurisdiction. B. Low energy U.L. listed fire protective signaling circuit cable with 105° C insulation may be used when allowed by the local authority having jurisdiction, however, all conductors shall be in conduit. C. Installer shall verify that smoke detectors are mounted not less than three (3) feet from air supply diffusers. 3.5 GUARANTEE AND FINAL TEST: A. General: 1. The Contractor shall guarantee all equipment and wiring free from inherent mechanical and electrical defects for one year (365 days) from the date of final acceptance. B. Final Test: Before the installation shall be considered completed and acceptable by the Owner, a test on the system shall be performed as follows: 1. The Contractor's job foreman, in the presence of a representative of the manufacturer, a representative from Cornell EH&S, and the fire department shall operate each new building fire alarm device to ensure proper operation of the device, and correct annunciation at the control panel, the remote annunciator and building alarms. 2. One half of all tests shall be performed on battery stand4by power. 3. When the testing has been completed to the satisfaction of both the Contractor's job foreman and the representatives of the manufacturer and Owner, a notarized letter co4signed by each attesting to the satisfactory completion of said testing shall be forwarded to the Engineer and the fire department. 4. The Contractor shall leave the fire alarm system in proper working order, and without additional expense to the Owner, shall replace any defective materials or equipment provided by him under this Contract, within one year (365 days) from the date of final acceptance by the Owner. 5. Prior to final test the fire department must be notified in accordance with local requirements. END OF SECTION 26 60 00 ARCHI-TECHNOLOGY CORNELL – NCP BASIC COMMUNICATIONS REQUIREMENTS STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 27 05 00 – PAGE 1 OF 24 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 SECTION 27 05 00 BASIC ELECTRICAL/COMMUNICATION REQUIREMENTS PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. All drawings and general provisions of Contract, including all General Conditions, Division 1 Specification Sections, and Instructions to Bidders apply to this section. B. Section 02 41 19 Selective Demolition applies, in its entirety, to this Division. It relates to demolition of abandoned voice and data cable plant, station cabling, backbone copper cables, backbone optical fiber cabling, terminal blocks, terminal enclosures, splice cases, plywood backboards, raceways, boxes etc. It relates to removal of all active cable plant that will be replaced, decommissioned and removed under this contract. It also relates to general disposal, recycling and materials to be salvaged, as called for. C. Section 09 91 23 Paints and Coatings applies to this Division, as it relates to touch up or repainting of any finished equipment, raceway, wall surface, ceiling surfaces, ceiling access panels, etc. that is opened, channeled or damaged during construction as it applies to the item being brought to “as new” condition. 1.2 SCOPE OF WORK A. Include in bid all labor, allowances, materials, tools, plant, transportation, training, equipment, insurance, temporary protection, permits, demolition, disposal, permits and fees, taxes and all necessary and related items required to provide complete and operational systems shown and described. B. The contractor shall provide with their bid a complete breakdown of materials and unit pricing for all products included in their bid. C. Include in bid all labor, allowances, transportation, sorting and separation of recycled materials, disposal, insurance, protection of furniture and furnishings, permits, fees, utility company fees, taxes and all necessary and related items. D. Cornell University requires recycling to the largest extent possible for items being removed, including but not limited to, all backbone and station copper cables, termination blocks, termination patch panels, metallic components such as cable managers, raceways, etc. ARCHI-TECHNOLOGY CORNELL – NCP BASIC COMMUNICATIONS REQUIREMENTS STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 27 05 00 – PAGE 2 OF 24 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 E. Minimum composition requirements and/or installation methods for the following materials and work are included in this section: 1. Miscellaneous Supports 2. Access Doors and Panels 3. Fire Stopping 4. Flashing and Sealing 5. Cutting and Patching 6. Fire Stop 7. General cable requirements 8. Removals of abandoned cable and termination equipment 9. University Services 10. Temporary Facilities 11. Cleaning 12. Existing Systems 13. Continuity of Services 14. Submittals 15. Workmanship and Warranty 16. Operation and Maintenance Manuals 17. Record Documents 1.3 SCOPE AND COORDINATION A. The job foremen for each division of work shall meet and plan the removals and new installations prior to reviewing with the owner’s representative. This shall include all requirements for Divisions 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 23, 26,27 and 28 contract requirements. At project start-up, special attention is required for coordination and sequencing for removal of existing abandoned and in-use cable to create sufficient spare capacity in existing pathways for reuse and the logistics of extending new conduit and pathways to alternate floors to extend existing pathways and relocate Category 6 cable to alternate floors. Maintain existing voice and data ARCHI-TECHNOLOGY CORNELL – NCP BASIC COMMUNICATIONS REQUIREMENTS STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 27 05 00 – PAGE 3 OF 24 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 services at all times as directed. Maintain other systems as called for on the T2-Series drawings. B. Before construction work commences, the Contractor shall coordinate exact conduit and penetration requirements, slotting/patching of walls to install new concealed conduits and backboxes for flush faceplates, conduit and raceway removals methods, pathway routing and installation methods, mounting requirements for UTP faceplates, locations of new access panels, modifications of existing gypsum ceilings for installation of new access panels, dumpster positioning and fire truck and delivery access, etc. with the Owner’s Project Manager. Additionally, the Contractor shall coordinate exact storage, staging, recycling, and disposal requirements with the Project Manager. C. The Contractor shall provide the following 1. Removal of abandoned or decommissioned voice, data, horizontal and backbone cables. 2. Sorting and storage of cabling and metallic components intended for recycling. 3. Removal of patch panels in select existing racks and cabinets. 4. Removal, relocation, reuse of select ARMM backbone cables and splicing per Drawing T1-CL copper logical riser diagrams. 5. Removal of existing CIT owned optical fiber risers within buildings, per Drawing T1-FL fiber logical riser diagrams. 6. Removal of plywood backboards, plywood enclosures, cable straps, anchors, drive rings, termination blocks, surface raceways, conduit, and hardware, distribution rings, etc, typically in the old IDF/BDF closets. 7. Subcontracting of furniture and furnishings movers to allow access work locations for station cable removals, new horizontal cable placement and testing, and cutover activities. 8. Dust, dirt and water protection of furniture, walls, floors, carpets, furnishings from damage, during demolition, new construction and new cutover provisioning. Dust protection of smoke detectors. 9. Fire stopping and sealing of the insides of existing/new conduits, existing/new sleeves, holes, wall cavities and raceways for all cables removed under this contract. ARCHI-TECHNOLOGY CORNELL – NCP BASIC COMMUNICATIONS REQUIREMENTS STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 27 05 00 – PAGE 4 OF 24 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 10. Patching and painting of floors, walls, soffits and ceilings upon removal of all exposed wiring in offices, conference rooms, labs, corridors, chase ways, etc. for cables removed under this contract. 11. Fire stopping and patching of the insides of conduits, sleeves, raceways and wall cavities for all new vertical and horizontal pathways installed for new cabling, including all empty or spare facilities. 12. Modular jacks, machine printed labels, mounting screws, cable wrap-around labels, etc. 13. Final closing of all raceways, pull boxes, ceiling access panels after cable testing and repair work is complete. 14. Coordination of deliveries, dumpster/staging logistics and fire lane access. 15. Coordination of the new grounding riser system by the electrical contractor. Bonding equipment connections for racks, cable runways, cable sheaths, lightning protection, cable trays, primary conduit systems, backbone copper cable sheaths, and all other metallic components in the TR rooms. 16. Temporary service provisioning and shutdown coordination, as may be required for reuse of existing pathways (conduits, pullboxes and recess backboxes, etc) to provide sufficient space to install new Category 6 cabling while maintaining parallel service as directed by Owner. 17. Select removal of inactive cabling and faceplates, shutdown coordination, as may be required for reuse of existing pathways (conduits, pullboxes and recess backboxes, etc) to provide sufficient space to install new Category 6 cabling while maintaining parallel service as directed by Owner. 18. Temporary service provisioning and shutdown coordination, as may be required, for this building and the adjacent buildings affected by this work. 19. Temporary service provisioning and shutdown coordination, as may be required for reuse of existing conduits, cable ladders and IDF conduit/sleeves, affected by this work. 20. Temporary service provisioning and shutdown coordination, as may be required, for reuse of any existing conduit stub-ups and backboxes. ARCHI-TECHNOLOGY CORNELL – NCP BASIC COMMUNICATIONS REQUIREMENTS STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 27 05 00 – PAGE 5 OF 24 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 21. Temporary service provisioning and shutdown coordination, as may be required. This will be required for areas where existing raceway is intended to be reused. 22. Permits, inspections and associated fees. 23. Parking permits, identification badges and all associated fees. 24. Testing, labeling and Documentation of all voice, video, audio and data cables. 25. Relocation of racks, panels, wall mounted blocks, plywood panels and existing optical fiber and backbones copper cables to allow for reconfiguration of the BDF and IDF rooms and provisioning of new backbone pathways and new backbone cabling in existing IDF closets. D. The Contractor shall also provide the following 1. Category 6&6A Cable 2. Category 6&6A modular jacks 3. UTP faceplates 4. UTP faceplates, special waterproof (raintight) and in-use faceplate covers. 5. UTP Category 6 patch panels 6. Category 6 Permanent Link testing of unpatched links. 7. High pair count ARMM, 24 AWG, telephone riser cables with corrugated aluminum shield. High pair count cable splicing as called for in T1-CL riser diagram and section 27 13 00. 8. Innerduct and optical fiber cables and terminations as called for in T1-FL riser diagram and section 27 13 00.Optical fiber rack mount patch panels as indicated on the T3 drawings 9. Field installable optical connectors, bulkhead adapter packs 10. 19” Equipment Racks as indicated on the T3 drawings, for Telecommunication Rooms. 11. Cable Runways for Telecommunication rooms, as indicated on the T3 drawings. ARCHI-TECHNOLOGY CORNELL – NCP BASIC COMMUNICATIONS REQUIREMENTS STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 27 05 00 – PAGE 6 OF 24 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 12. 110 Voice termination blocks for riser cables and rack interconnect cables as indicated on the T3 drawings 13. Distribution rings and 188B brackets as indicated on the T3 drawings 14. Vertical and Horizontal Cable Managers for new Telecommunication rooms, as indicated on the T3 drawings 15. Misc. hardware, screws, anchors, straps, beam clamps, all-thread, nuts, washers, fabrications, etc. 16. Hook and Loop wraps for UTP cables support and dressing in TRs and inside of cable trays and large raceways. 17. Ty-wraps (where permitted, such as backbone copper cable binder groups, splice cases, etc.). 18. Firestop, fire stop pillows and patching compounds 19. Patching and painting as required, by an approved subcontractor. 20. Machine printed labels for faceplates, racks, cabinets, cables, etc. 21. Bonding, strapping, wire, cable, lugs and screws as indicated on the T3 drawings 22. Adapter brackets, radius fittings and mounting hardware for raceways, cable trays, cable runways, power poles, and modular furniture as required. 23. Permits and inspection applications and related fees. 24. Cleaning and polishing consumables for optical fibers. 25. Jet-line, pull-line, pull rope, winch rope, and measuring tape for wall-to-wall backbone conduit measurements. 26. Cable lubricants and cleaners 27. Splicing connectors, shield bond connectors, vinyl/rubber/friction tapes, encapsulant gels, grounding braid, d-Gel cleaners, test equipment and testing adapters, etc. for copper backbone cable splicing and termination, and testing. 28. Shield bond connectors, vinyl/rubber/friction tapes, encapsulant gels, break-out kits, furcation tubing, grounding braid, alcohol wipes, compressed air, polishing paper/pucks, d-Gell cleaners, ARCHI-TECHNOLOGY CORNELL – NCP BASIC COMMUNICATIONS REQUIREMENTS STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 27 05 00 – PAGE 7 OF 24 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 testing patch cords and adapters required for testing, etc for fiber backbone cable preparation and termination and testing. 29. Daily cleaning of TR Rooms and office and labs as called for. 30. Coordination of work and compliance with safety requirements for laboratories, animal facilities, bio-safety spaces, animal hospital operating rooms, and confined space per EH&S and OSHA standards. 1.4 REGULATIONS AND CODE COMPLIANCE A. All work and materials shall conform to and be installed, inspected and tested in accordance with the governing rules and regulations of federal, state and local governmental agencies. B. Reference to regulations, codes and standards means the latest edition, amendment and revisions to the regulations, codes and standards in effect on the date of the Contract Documents. C. The following is a list of codes and standards that will apply to this project. 1. New York State Building Code. 2. New York State Energy Conservation Construction Code. 3. New York State Department of Labor Rules and Regulations. 4. New York State Department of Health. 5. Federal Occupational Safety and Health Administration - OSHA. 6. National Life Safety Code, NFPA 101. 7. National Electrical Code, NFPA 70. 8. Local Codes and Ordinances for the City and or Town of Ithaca. 9. NEMA Standards 10. Underwriters Laboratory (UL) 11. Factory Mutual and/or Owner’s Insurance Carrier 12. International Standards Organization (ISO) 13. New York State Education Department - “Manual of Planning Standards” ARCHI-TECHNOLOGY CORNELL – NCP BASIC COMMUNICATIONS REQUIREMENTS STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 27 05 00 – PAGE 8 OF 24 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 14. ANSI/TIA/EIA - Building Telecommunications Standards 15. BICSI Telecommunications Distribution Methods Manual 16. National Electrical Contractor Association Standards 17. National Electrical Installation Standards (NECA-NEIS) 18. Cable Tray Institute 19. TIA/EIA - Telecommunications Standards 20. Federal Communications Commission 21. IEEE Standards, including C-2 – National Electrical Safety Code 22. Internet Engineering Task Force RFCs 23. Federal Communications Commission 24. Cornell University Design and Construction Standards, Current Edition. 25. Cornell University Environmental Health and Safety Standards. 26. NYS Public Service Commission 27. American with Disabilities Act 1.5 GLOSSARY ADA Americans with Disabilities Act AIA American Institute of Architects ANSI American National Standards Institute ASTM American Society for Testing Materials BDF Building Distribution Frame BICSI Building Industry Consulting Services International CIT Cornell’s Information Technologies Department COAM CIT Owned and Maintained Equipment DOAM Department Owned and Maintained Equipment CU Cornell University EHS Cornell’s Environmental Health and Safety Department EIA Electronic Industries Association ARCHI-TECHNOLOGY CORNELL – NCP BASIC COMMUNICATIONS REQUIREMENTS STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 27 05 00 – PAGE 9 OF 24 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 ELFEXT Equal Level far end cross talk FCC Federal Communications Commission FEXT Far end cross talk FM Factory Mutual Insurance Company FPC Fire Protection Contractor IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers IETF Internet Engineering Task Force IRI Industrial Risk Insurers ISO International Standards Organization MDF Main Distribution Frame NEC National Electrical Code NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers’ Association NECA National Electrical Contractor Association NESC National Electrical Safety Code NFPA National Fire Protection Association NEXT Near end Cross Talk NYBFU New York board of Fire Underwriters NYS/DEC New York State Department of Environmental Conservation NYS/UFBC New York State Uniform Fire Prevention and Building Code OSHA Occupational Safety and Health Administration PBX Private Branch Exchange Telephone Switches PDC Cornell’s Planning Design and Construction Department PSELFEXT Power sum equal level far end cross talk TGB Telecommunications Grounding Bus Bar TIA Telecommunications Industry Association TR Telecommunications Room UFPO Underground Facilities Protective Organization UL Underwriter’s Laboratories, Inc. 1.6 DEFINITIONS Approved / Approval Written permission to use a material or system. ARCHI-TECHNOLOGY CORNELL – NCP BASIC COMMUNICATIONS REQUIREMENTS STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 27 05 00 – PAGE 10 OF 24 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 As Called For Materials, equipment including the execution specified/shown in the contract documents. Code Requirements Minimum requirements. Concealed Work installed in pipe and duct shafts, chases or recesses, inside walls, above ceilings, in slabs or below grade. Design Equipment Refer to Article 1.7, BASIS OF DESIGN. Design Make Refer to Article 1.7, BASIS OF DESIGN. Equal or Equivalent Equally acceptable as determined by Owner’s Representative. Exposed Work not identified as concealed. Final Acceptance Owner acceptance of the project from Contractor upon certified by Owner’s Representative. Furnish Supply and deliver to installation location. Furnished by Others Receive delivery at job site or where called for and install. Inspection Visual observations by Owner’s site Representative. Install Mount and connect equipment and associated materials ready for use. Labeled Refers to classification by a standards agency. Make Refer to Article 1.7, BASIS OF DESIGN. Or Approved Equal Approved equal or equivalent as determined by Owner’s Representative. Owner’s representative Architect or Engineer having a contract directly with the Owner for professional services. Prime Professional Architect or Engineer having a contract directly with the Owner for professional services. Provide Furnish, install and connect ready for use. Relocate Disassemble, disconnect, and transport equipment to new locations, then clean, test, and install ready for use. Replace Remove and provide new item. Review A general contractual conformance check of specified products. Roughing Pipe, duct, conduit, equipment layout and installation. Satisfactory As specified in contract documents. ARCHI-TECHNOLOGY CORNELL – NCP BASIC COMMUNICATIONS REQUIREMENTS STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 27 05 00 – PAGE 11 OF 24 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 Refer to Division 1 sections for further definitions. 1.7 BASIS OF DESIGN A. The contract documents are prepared on basis of one manufacturer as "design make," even though other manufacturers' names are listed as acceptable makes. If Contractor elects to use one of the listed makes other than "design equipment," submit detailed drawings, showing that the proposed equipment from an acceptable manufacturer meets or exceeds the specifications of the design make. Show maintenance clearances, differing dimensions, service removal space required, and other pertinent revisions to the design arrangement. Make required changes in the work of other trades, at no increase in any contract. Assume responsibility for proper location of roughing and connections by other trades. If revised arrangement submittal is rejected, revise and resubmit specified "design equipment" item which conforms to contract documents. 1.8 INTENT OF DRAWINGS A. The drawings are diagrammatic, unless detailed dimensioned drawings are included. Drawings show approximate locations of equipment, racks, patch panels, cable managers, backboards, cabinets, wiring devices, pull boxes, conduits, core bores, cable trays, cable tray radius and floor penetrations, outlet locations, and fixtures. Exact locations are subject to the approval of the Owner's Representative. B. The general run of conduits, raceways, cable trays, ladder racks, backbone and horizontal pathways, underground utilities, and vertical and horizontal sleeves, indicated on the drawings, is not intended to be the exact routing. Conduit, outlet and cable designations and logical drawings, in the form of "Home Runs", indicate the designation of run, the size, general route and the quantity of cables and conductors, and the TR and BDF equipment rooms from which the homerun is served. Coordinate all horizontal and vertical pathway layout work with that of other trades and confirm cabling distance limitations for horizontal and backbone cabling will be adhered to. Coordinate all horizontal and vertical pathway layout work with that of other trades and confirm cabling bend radius and maximum pulling tension limitations will be adhered to, especially at all proposed junction box and pull box locations. 1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturers of equipment shall be firms regularly and currently engaged in the production of equipment and accessories provided. Unless otherwise noted the equipment provided for this project needs to have been in satisfactory and efficient operation on at least three (3) installations for not less than three (1) year. ARCHI-TECHNOLOGY CORNELL – NCP BASIC COMMUNICATIONS REQUIREMENTS STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 27 05 00 – PAGE 12 OF 24 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 B. Suppliers of equipment must have factory trained and authorized personnel for the service of all equipment provided. C. Apply and install materials, equipment, and specialties in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions. Conflicts between the manufacturer’s instructions and the contract documents shall be referred to the Owner’s Representative for resolution. D. The contractors installers shall have been regularly engaged in the installation, termination and testing of the all equipment, cabling and devices called for in this contract for a minimum of (5) five years. E. The contractor shall engage the services of a qualified installer for the installation of access panels and cutting and patching work. F. The prime contractor is responsible for employing qualified sub- contractors to complete work where the quality assurance requirements cannot be met by the prime contractor’s full time employees. All subcontractors must be approved by the Owner. 1.10 SUBMITTALS A. Contractor’s qualifications and references B. Panduit P.S.C. certification C. Corning Cable Systems N.P.I. certification D. Complete breakdown of materials and unit pricing for all products included in their bid E. Signed Warranty. Also see 3.1 of this section F. Also refer to Refer to Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 EQUIPMENT AND MATERIAL MINIMUM REQUIREMENTS A. Provide Materials That Meet the Following Minimum Requirements: 1. Materials shall have a flame spread rating of 25 or less and a smoke developed rating of 50 or less, in accordance with NFPA 255. 2. All equipment and material for which there is a listing service shall bear a UL label. ARCHI-TECHNOLOGY CORNELL – NCP BASIC COMMUNICATIONS REQUIREMENTS STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 27 05 00 – PAGE 13 OF 24 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 3. Electrical equipment and systems shall meet UL Standards and requirements of the N.E.C. This listing requirement applies to the entire assembly. Any modifications to equipment to suit the intent of the specifications shall be performed in accordance with these requirements. 4. Equipment shall meet all applicable FCC Regulations 5. All materials, unless otherwise specified, shall be new and be the standard products of the manufacturer. Used equipment or damaged material will be rejected. 6. The listing of a manufacturer as “acceptable” does not indicate acceptance of a standard or catalogued item of equipment. All equipment and systems must conform to the Specifications and meet the quality of the design make. 7. Materials used in this contract shall meet the N.Y.S. Fire, Gas and Toxicity Requirements and be listed in the directory of approved products filed under Article 15 Part 1120 of the New York State Fire Prevention and Building Code for use in New York State. 2.2 FACTORY-ASSEMBLED PRODUCTS A. Provide maximum standardization of components to reduce spare part requirements, including custom entrance end fittings and custom cable tray components. B. Manufacturers of equipment assemblies which include components made by others shall assume complete responsibility for final assembled unit. 1. All components of an assembled unit need not be products of same manufacturer. 2. Constituent parts which are alike shall be product of a single manufacturer. 3. Components shall be compatible with each other and with the total assembly for intended service. 4. Contractor shall guarantee performance of assemblies of components, and shall repair or replace elements of the assemblies as required to deliver specified performance of the complete assembly. C. Components of equipment shall bear manufacturer's name or trademark, model number and serial number on a name plate securely affixed in a ARCHI-TECHNOLOGY CORNELL – NCP BASIC COMMUNICATIONS REQUIREMENTS STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 27 05 00 – PAGE 14 OF 24 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 conspicuous place, or cast integral with, stamped or otherwise permanently marked upon the components of the equipment. D. Major items of equipment which serve the same function must be the same make and model. Exception will be permitted if performance requirements cannot be met. 2.3 COMPATIBILITY OF RELATED EQUIPMENT A. Equipment and materials installed shall be compatible in all respects with other items being furnished and with existing items so that a complete and fully operational system will result. 2.4 SPECIAL TOOLS A. If any part of equipment requires a special tool for assembly, adjustment or maintenance thereof and such tool is not readily available on commercial tool market, it shall be furnished by the Contractor. At the end of the project, contactor shall turn over two such tools to owner for their use in future operations and maintenance. 2.5 LIFTING ATTACHMENTS A. Provide equipment with suitable lifting attachments to enable equipment to be lifted in its normal position. Lifting attachments shall withstand any handling conditions which might be encountered without bending or distortion of shape, such as rapid lowering and braking of load. 2.6 MISCELLANEOUS SUPPORTS A. NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers’ Association Metal bars, plates, tubing, etc. shall conform ASTM standards: 1. Steel plates, shapes, bars, and grating - ASTM A 36 2. Cold-Formed Steel Tubing - ASTM A 500 3. Hot - Rolled Steel Tubing - ASTM A 501 4. Steel Pipe - ASTM A 53, Schedule 40, welded B. Metal Fasteners shall be Zinc-coated (type, grade and class as required) 2.7 GENERAL CABLE REQUIREMENTS A. Interior Backbone optical fiber cables included in this project, passing through two or more floors shall be suitable, listed and marked for use in a riser application. Optical backbone cable shall minimally be OFNR rated ARCHI-TECHNOLOGY CORNELL – NCP BASIC COMMUNICATIONS REQUIREMENTS STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 27 05 00 – PAGE 15 OF 24 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 per the Current National Electric Code and shall meet all local and state codes. B. All Category 3 voice backbone cables, Category 6 & 6A horizontal cables shall be minimally CMR riser-rated per the Current National Electric Code and shall meet all local and state codes. C. Interior copper backbone cables shall be twisted 24 AWG, contain a corrugated aluminum shield and minimally be CMR rated. 2.8 FIRE STOPPING A. Fire-stopping for Openings through Fire and Smoke Rated Walls and Floor Assemblies shall be listed or classified by an approved independent testing laboratory for "Through-Penetration Fire-Stop Systems." The system shall meet the requirements of "Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Fire-Stops" designated ASTM E814. B. Fire stopping materials used on the inside of communications conduit, sleeve and cable tray penetrations through rated assemblies shall be suitable for future reentry. Reenterable putty and pillows are the preferred type products for all communication cabling installations. Curable foam sealants and caulks are not acceptable for inside sleeves and conduits for any communication cable plant installations. C. Shall be UL approved products. D. Shall conform to Section 07 84 13. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 WORKMANSHIP AND WARRANTY A. Workmanship shall meet or exceed industry standards and be fully guaranteed for one full year from final acceptance. B. A factory registered Panduit (PSC) and Corning Cable Systems (NPI) contractor shall complete the cable installation. The contractor shall have completed standards based product and installation training. A copy of the factory registrations shall be submitted with the proposal. C. The copper systems cabling and connectivity systems warranty shall be a Panduit Certification Plus System Warranty to guarantee total end-to-end high performance that meets application requirements. The guarantee shall include cable and connectivity components and have one point of contact for all cabling system issues. The copper cabling/connectivity system shall be warranted for a period of at least 15 years. ARCHI-TECHNOLOGY CORNELL – NCP BASIC COMMUNICATIONS REQUIREMENTS STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 27 05 00 – PAGE 16 OF 24 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 D. The optical fiber systems cabling and connectivity systems warranty shall be a Corning Cable Systems LANscape Network of Preferred Installers warranty to guarantee total end-to-end high performance that meets application requirements. The guarantee shall include cable and connectivity components and have one point of contact for all cabling system issues. The optical fiber system shall be warranted for a period of at least 15 years. E. The Contractor shall be responsible for and make good, without expense to the Owner, any and all defects arising during the warranty period that are due to imperfect materials, appliances, improper installation or poor workmanship. F. Cable integrity and associated terminations shall be thoroughly inspected , fully tested and guaranteed as free from defects, transpositions, opens- shorts, tight kinks, damaged jacket insulation etc. 3.2 EXISTING SYSTEMS AND CONDITIONS A. Inspect the entire work area for defects in the existing construction such as scratches, holes, damaged wall surfaces, damaged ceiling tiles, damaged furniture, etc. Submit a complete list and photographs of existing damage, to the owner prior to beginning work. If existing damage is not documented the contractor shall repair all damage to like new condition, that is determined to have been caused by the work in this contract. B. The job foremen for each division of work shall meet and plan the removals and new installations prior to reviewing with the owner’s representative. This shall include all requirements for Divisions 0, 1, 23, 26 and 27 contract requirements. At project start-up, special attention is required for coordination and sequencing for removal of existing exposed cable trough in corridors, maintain existing services, coordination of new cable tray installation requirements with regard to existing fire alarm annunciation, eye wash stations, emergency showers, door hold open devices etc. C. Before construction work commences, the Contractor shall coordinate exact conduit and penetration requirements, millwork and cabinetry modifications, conduit and raceway removals methods, pathway routing and installation methods, cable tray mounting routing and installation means and methods requirements for UTP faceplates, locations of new access panels, dumpster positioning and fire truck and delivery access, removal of raceways in advance of active cabling decommissioning, temporary service provisions for any planned reuse of existing conduit stub-ups and recessed backboxes, reuse of existing utility columns/chases in laboratories, etc. with the CIT Project Manager. Additionally, the Contractor shall coordinate exact storage, staging, ARCHI-TECHNOLOGY CORNELL – NCP BASIC COMMUNICATIONS REQUIREMENTS STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 27 05 00 – PAGE 17 OF 24 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 deliveries, use of freight or passenger elevators, recycling, and disposal requirements with the CIT Project Manager. 3.3 ROUGH-IN A. Due to small scale of Drawings, it is not possible to indicate all offsets, fittings, changes in elevation, etc. Verify final locations for rough-ins with field measurements and with the equipment being connected. Verify exact location and elevations at work site prior to any rough in work. DO NOT SCALE PLANS. If field conditions, details, changes in equipment or shop drawing information require a significant change to the original documents, contact the owners representative for approval before proceeding. B. All equipment locations shall be coordinated with other trades and existing conditions to eliminate interference with required clearances for equipment maintenance and inspections. 1. Where more than one trade is involved the construction of a Telecommunication Room (TR), all shall cooperate and install their own work to utilize the space equally between them in proportion to their individual requirements and as prioritized below. Refer to the T3 drawings for planning Telecommunication Room rough-in and plan and coordinate with all other trades accordingly. MOCK-UP RACKS, CABLE RUNWAYS AND MAJOR PATHWAYS ENTRY POINTS AS DIRECTED BY CIT PROJECT MANAGER, BEFORE ROUGH-IN OF ALL OTHER UTILITIES AND REVIEW WITH OWNER FOR APPROVAL TO PROCEED. Where possible, the design intent is to install the cable runways at approximately 8’ A.F.F with 12” of vertical clearance above. In general, 19” rack placement and cable runways shall be given ultimate placement preference, followed by backbone pathways and major raceways entering the TR from the corridor and floors above/below, followed by wiring and communications, followed by luminaries and lastly followed by mechanical equipment, mechanical piping and HVAC ductwork If, after installation of any equipment, piping, ducts, conduit, and boxes, it is determined that ample vertical clearance over the cable runways, maintenance and passage space has not been provided, rearrange work and/or furnish other equipment as required for ample maintenance space. Any changes in the size or location of the material or equipment supplied, which may be necessary in order to meet field conditions or in order to avoid conflicts between trades, shall be brought to the immediate attention of the Owner's Representative and approval received before such alterations are made. Coordinate work with other trades and existing conditions and determine exact routing of all cable tray, hangers, conduit, etc., before fabrication and installation. Coordinate with Architectural Drawings. Verify with Owner's ARCHI-TECHNOLOGY CORNELL – NCP BASIC COMMUNICATIONS REQUIREMENTS STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 27 05 00 – PAGE 18 OF 24 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 Representative exact location and mounting height of all equipment in finished areas, such as equipment racks, communication and electrical devices. Coordinate all work with the architectural reflected ceiling plans and/or existing Architecture. 2. Where horizontal pathways are installed above existing lay in ceilings, remove a section of tiles the complete length of the proposed pathway. Document all offsets, bends, box location, conflicts, obstructions, etc. required for the complete installation. Reinstall the ceiling tiles after requirements are documented and at the end of every shift. If there are existing obstacles that prevent the installation of the raceway in the general location indicated on contract documents, notify the owners representative immediately. 3. For equipment and connections provided in this contract, prepare rough-in drawings as follows: a) Existing equipment being relocated: Measure the existing equipment and prepare drawings for installation in new location. b) New equipment: Obtain equipment roughing drawings and dimensions, and then prepare rough-in drawings. 4. Where more than one trade is involved in an area, space or chase, all shall cooperate and install their own work to utilize the space equally between them in proportion to their individual requirements. In general, ductwork shall be given preference except where grading of piping becomes a problem, followed by piping then electrical wiring and communications. If, after installation of any equipment, piping, ducts, conduit, and boxes, it is determined that ample maintenance and passage space has not been provided, rearrange work and/or furnish other equipment as required for ample maintenance space. Any changes in the size or location of the material or equipment supplied, which may be necessary in order to meet field conditions or in order to avoid conflicts between trades, shall be brought to the immediate attention of the Owner's Representative and approval received before such alterations are made. C. Provide easy, safe, and code mandated clearances at equipment racks and enclosures, and other equipment requiring maintenance and operation. Contractor shall relocate existing work in the way of new construction. VISIT SITE BEFORE BIDDING TO DETERMINE SCOPE OF WORK. ARCHI-TECHNOLOGY CORNELL – NCP BASIC COMMUNICATIONS REQUIREMENTS STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 27 05 00 – PAGE 19 OF 24 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 D. The Contractor shall be responsible for all required locations, cutting, patching, coring and associated work for the complete cabling system at no additional cost to the Owner. 3.4 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. All cutting, patching and installation of sleeves, conduits and raceways for cabling work shall be by the Prime Contractor. The Contractor shall coordinate required penetration, sleeve, conduit raceway and cable tray locations with all other contractors, prior to the beginning the raceway work. Close coordination of relocations and penetrations into new TR rooms is critical to proper build-out and fit-out for desired layout and cable management of the new TR rooms. 3.5 CONCEALMENT A. Conceal all contract work above ceilings and in walls, below slabs, in attics, in chases in soffits, and elsewhere throughout building 3.6 FIRE-STOPPING A. Fire-stopping for Openings Through Fire and Smoke Rated Wall and Floor Assemblies: 1. Provide materials and products listed or classified by an approved independent testing laboratory for "Through-Penetration Fire-Stop Systems." The system shall meet the requirements of "Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Fire-Stops" designated ASTM E814. 2. Provide fire-stop system seals at all locations where cables pass through sleeves in rated partitions and floors. 3. The minimum required fire resistance ratings of the wall or floor assembly shall be maintained by the fire-stop system. The installation shall provide an air and watertight seal. 4. The methods used shall incorporate qualities which permit the easy removal or addition cables without drilling or use of special tools. The product shall adhere to itself to allow repairs to be made with the same material and permit the vibration, expansion and/or contraction of any items passing through the penetration without cracking, crumbling and resulting reduction in fire rating. 5. Provide the following ratings: a) Floors - 3 Hours b) Corridor walls - 1-2 hours ARCHI-TECHNOLOGY CORNELL – NCP BASIC COMMUNICATIONS REQUIREMENTS STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 27 05 00 – PAGE 20 OF 24 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 c) Smoke Partitions - 1 hour 3.7 WATERPROOFING A. The contractor shall seal all foundation penetrating conduits and sleeves to eliminate the intrusion of moisture and gases into the building. B. Conduits with cables shall be permanently sealed by firmly packing the void around the cable with oakum and capping with 2 inches of hydraulic cement or waterproof duct seal. Obtain advance approval by owner for use of hydraulic cement to seal inside of underground conduits and ducts that have been prone to perpetual leakage and flooding. C. Spare underground conduits shall be plugged with expandable plugs, with pull-rope ring, to provide a secure and watertight fit and allow the end of the existing pull lines to be secured at the conduit entrance point. 3.8 SUPPORTS A. Provide required supports, beams, angles, hangers, rods, bases, braces, and other items to properly support contract work. Supports shall meet the approval of the Owner's Representative. Modify studs, add studs, add framing, or otherwise reinforce studs in metal stud walls and partitions as required to suit contract work. If necessary, in stud walls, provide special supports from floor to structure above. For precast Panels/Planks and Metal Decks, support communication work as determined by manufacturer and Owner's Representative. Provide heavy gauge steel mounting plates for mounting contract work. Mounting plates shall span two or more studs. Size, gauge, and strength of mounting plates shall be sufficient for equipment size, weight, and desired rigidity. 3.9 GENERAL INSTALLATIONS REQUIREMENTS A. Coordinate the installation of required supporting devices and sleeves to be set in poured-in-place concrete and other structural components, as they are constructed. B. Coordinate ordering and installation of all equipment with long lead times or having a major impact on work by other trades so as not to delay the job or impact the construction schedule. Pay close attention to equipment that must be installed prior to building enclosure. C. Where mounting heights are not detailed or dimensioned, install systems, materials and equipment to provide the maximum headroom possible. D. Set all equipment to accurate line and grade, level all equipment and align all equipment components. ARCHI-TECHNOLOGY CORNELL – NCP BASIC COMMUNICATIONS REQUIREMENTS STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 27 05 00 – PAGE 21 OF 24 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 E. Provide all scaffolding, rigging, hoisting and services necessary for erection and delivery of equipment and apparatus furnished into the premises. These items shall be removed from premises when no longer required. F. No equipment shall be hidden or covered up prior to inspection by the owners representative. All work that is determined to be unsatisfactory shall be corrected immediately. G. All work shall be installed level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and components. H. Install access panels or doors where units are concealed behind finished surfaces. 3.10 UTILITY COMPANY SERVICES A. Coordination by CIT. B. Provide grounding and bonding of copper media as required by the utility or service provider. 3.11 CORNELL UNIVERSITY SERVICES A. Cornell provides voice and data, Local Area Network, Fire Alarm Monitoring, Wide Area Network, local card access, local security systems etc. connections to all buildings in this project. Maintain all existing systems through the duration of construction. Coordinate all removals, shutdowns, service transfers with the Owner’s Representative. B. Prior to removal or relocation of any Cornell copper backbone cables (25 pair or greater) or any terminal blocks, the contractor shall test all pairs for presence of dial tone, digital telephone signal, battery, data services, special service circuits. Any suspect working circuits or any line that can be identified by telephone number shall be tagged for review by the Owner’s representative. Provide a list of locations of suspect working circuits to Owner. For pairs identified as unused in backbone cables (25 pair or greater), the contractor shall provide a soft kill (temporary partial disconnect) of every pair, whereby either the tip or ring conductor is lifted (create and open) from the terminal and a tag placed on each terminal block indicating the date and technician who performed said soft kill. A list of soft kills shall be maintained at the jobsite for routine inspection by the Owners representative and for immediate access by repair technician dispatched with trouble reports. If required by the Owner, the Contractor’s foreman shall contact the Cornell CIT project representative and the CIT helpdesk 10 minutes prior to performing soft kills so that contact information can be shared for escalation purposes. If required by the Owner, the Contractor’s foreman shall post official utility disruption notices ARCHI-TECHNOLOGY CORNELL – NCP BASIC COMMUNICATIONS REQUIREMENTS STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 27 05 00 – PAGE 22 OF 24 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 about the building in advance of the soft kill or possible service disruption. Soft kills shall remain intact for 7 working days before cutting and removal of each backbone cable. Soft kills shall be performed at least three days prior to any weekend or holiday so that building occupants have time to report troubles during normal working hours. C. Prior to removal or relocation of any Cornell fiber optical cables or connections the contractor shall meet and plan the working at least 5 days in advance with the Owner. Provide a list of locations of suspect working circuits to Owner. Provide a soft kill (temporary partial disconnect) of every fiber pair, whereby either the transmit or receive path is lifted (create and open) and a tag placed on each terminal block indicating the date and technician who performed said soft kill. A list of soft kills shall be maintained at the jobsite for routine inspection by the Owners representative and for immediate access by repair technician dispatched with trouble reports. If required by the Owner, the Contractor’s foreman shall contact the Cornell CIT project representative and the CIT helpdesk 10 minutes prior to performing soft kills so that contact information can be shared for escalation purposes. If required by the Owner, the Contractor’s foreman shall post official utility disruption notices about the building in advance of the soft kill or possible service disruption. Soft kills shall remain intact for 7 working days before cutting and removal of each backbone cable. Soft kills shall be performed at least three days prior to any weekend or holiday so that building occupants have time to report troubles during normal working hours. 3.12 PAINTING A. This Contract includes the following: 1. Painting required for touch-up of surfaces damaged due to the installation of Division 27 work. 2. All finished equipment surfaces damaged during construction shall be brought to “as new” condition by touch or repainting. Any rust shall be removed and primed prior to painting. 3. Patch and paint wall and floor penetrations where cabling has been installed without the use of conduits, sleeves or raceways. 4. Refer to Section 09 91 23-Painting, for additional requirements. 5. Painting as called for on Division 27 Drawings. 3.13 REMOVALS A. Where existing equipment and cable removals are called for, submit complete list to Owner's Representative. All items that Owner wishes to ARCHI-TECHNOLOGY CORNELL – NCP BASIC COMMUNICATIONS REQUIREMENTS STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 27 05 00 – PAGE 23 OF 24 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 shall be delivered to location directed by Owner. Items that Owner does not wish to retain shall be removed from site and legally disposed of or recycled. Removal and disposal of materials shall be in accordance with Federal, State and Local law requirements. Where equipment is called for to be relocated, contractor shall carefully remove, clean and recondition, then reinstall. Remove all abandoned cabling, wiring, equipment, supports, straps, anchors, rings, plywood, terminal block and fixtures, etc. Visit each room, janitor closet, and pipe chase, shaftway, etc. to determine total Scope of Work. B. Unless indicated otherwise on the removal drawings, completely remove all supports, straps, hangers, rings, staples, anchors, rings, tywraps, plywood, terminal blocks, fixtures, conduit raceways, fastenings to building structural systems and other devices associated with the equipment not to be reused in the new work. Seal all openings, after removal of equipment and cabling in an approved manner and in accordance with plans and specifications where specifically covered. Structural integrity of the building system shall be maintained. Reference shall also be made to the architectural, structural, mechanical, site, and electrical drawings and specifications for additional facilities to be demolished or handled. 3.14 START UP AND OWNER INSTRUCTIONS A. Before acceptance of the work, furnish necessary skilled labor to operate all systems. Instruct the Owners designated personnel on the proper operation and maintenance of systems and equipment. Obtain written acknowledgment from person instructed prior to acceptance repeat the instructions if asked to do so. Contractor is fully responsible for systems until acceptance, even though operated by Owner's personnel, unless otherwise agreed in writing. Provide, operating, maintenance and starting precautions and procedures to be followed by the Owner for operating systems and equipment. Mount the instruction in clear plastic holder on or adjacent to the equipment. B. Where supervision by a manufacturer is called for, provide manufacturer’s certified technician or engineer to supervise the startup, testing and adjustment of the equipment or system. Where two or more manufacturer’s are involved both manufacturer’s shall be present at start up. The manufacturer shall provide a written report detailing the testing and start-up including problems that occurred and their method of resolution. 3.15 CUTOVER A. The cabling contractor shall have a minimum of two (2) technicians available for on-site to assist as required with system(s) activation for each phase of construction. Duration to include a minimum of eight hours. ARCHI-TECHNOLOGY CORNELL – NCP BASIC COMMUNICATIONS REQUIREMENTS STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 27 05 00 – PAGE 24 OF 24 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 B. Activities shall include, but will not be limited to: 1. Troubleshooting of installed cable plant 2. Installation of additional cables. 3. Trouble ticket resolution 3.16 RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Prepare and provide record documents in accordance with all requirements of Sections 01 78 39 and this Section. B. In addition to those requirements provide the following: 1. Document the routing of major backbone conduit systems, location of pullboxes and junction boxes, location of backbone copper splices and wall-to-wall measurements of backbone conduit systems. 2. Document the rack and cabinet elevations of all contract installed hardware and also include Owner provided electronics and hardware that has been added to each rack or cabinet in the TR rooms prior to final acceptance. 3. Document the location of new access panels installed into permanent ceilings. END OF SECTION ARCHITECHNOLOGY CORNELL – NCP COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM PATHWAYS STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 27 05 28 – PAGE 1 OF 20 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 SECTION 27 05 28 COMMUNICATIONS PATHWAYS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. SCOPE 1. This section includes minimum requirements for the following: a) Interior Horizontal Cabling Communication Pathways b) Interior Backbone Cabling Communication Pathways 2. Minimum composition requirements and installation methods for the following pathways: a) Conduit b) Innerduct c) Sleeves d) Cable tray e) Cable hangers (JHooks) f) Wireways and wire troughs g) Floor Boxes h) Outlet Boxes 3. Provide all labor, materials, tools and equipment required for the complete installation of work called for in the contract documents. 4. Prior to installation and as part of the contract, relocate any device a distance of 6 feet in any direction at the request of the owner at no additional cost. This shall include all necessary conduit/s, cable, raceways, cutting, painting and patching to accomplish the modification. Also refer to Division 26 specifications. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. All pathways and associated equipment shall be installed in a neat and workmanlike manner. All methods of construction that are not specifically described or indicated in the contract documents shall be subject to the control and approval of the Owner's Representative. Equipment and materials shall be of the quality and manufacture indicated. The equipment specified is based upon the acceptable manufacturers listed. Where "approved equal" is stated, equipment shall be equivalent in every way to that of the equipment specified and subject to approval. ARCHITECHNOLOGY CORNELL – NCP COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM PATHWAYS STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 27 05 28 – PAGE 2 OF 20 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 B. Materials and work specified herein shall comply with the applicable requirements of: 1. National Electric Code (NFPA 70) including the following Articles: a) 318 Cable Trays b) 331 Electrical Nonmetallic tubing c) 348 Electrical metallic tubing d) 349 Flexible metallic tubing e) 350 Flexible metal conduit f) 351 – LiquidTight Flexible metal conduit and LiquidTight flexible nonmetallic conduit. g) 352A Surface Metal Raceways h) 352B Surface Nonmetallic raceways i) 353 – Multioutlet Assembly j) 354 – Underfloor raceways k) 362 Metal Wireways and nonmetallic Wireways l) 370 Outlet, Device, Pull and Junction Boxes , Conduit Bodies and Fittings m) 645 Information Technology Equipment n) 770 Optical Fiber Cables and Raceways o) 800 Communications Circuits 2. The following American National Standards Institute (ANSI) standards: a) ANSIC80.3 Specification for Electrical Metal lic Tubing, Zinc coated b) ANISIC80.2 Specification for rigid steel co nduit, enameled 3. The following Telecommunication Industry Association (TIA) standards. a) ANSI/TIA/EIA – 568C. Commercial Building Tel ecommunications Cabling Standard b) ANSI/TIA/EIA – 569B Commercial Building Stan dard for Telecommunications Pathway and Spaces c) EIA/TIA606A Administration Standard for the Telecommunications Infrastructure of Commercial Buildings ARCHITECHNOLOGY CORNELL – NCP COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM PATHWAYS STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 27 05 28 – PAGE 3 OF 20 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 d) EIA/TIA607 –B Commercial Building Grounding and Bonding requirements for Telecommunications 4. The following BICSI guidelines a) BICSI Telecommunications Distribution Design Manual (9th edition) b) BICSI Customer Owned Outside Plant Design Manual (2nd edition) c) BICSI Telecommunications Cabling Installation Manual (2nd edition) 5. The following UL Standards: a) UL 1, 2000 Flexible Metal Electrical Condui t b) UL 3, 1999 Flexible Nonmetallic Tubing for Electric Wiring c) UL 5, 1996 Surface Metal Electrical Raceway s and Fittings d) UL 360, 1996 LiquidTight Flexible Steel Co nduit, Electrical e) UL 514B, 1996 Fittings for Conduit and Outl et Boxes. f) UL 797, 1997 Electrical Metallic Tubing g) UL 870, 1995 Electrical Wireways, Auxiliary Gutters and Associated Fittings 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Provide product data for the following: 1. Conduit 2. Sleeves 3. Cable tray 4. Cable hangers (JHooks) 5. Wireways and wire Troughs 6. Floor Boxes 7. Outlet Boxes 8. Surface raceways 9. Cable tray accessories and specialty fittings, including panel type connectors for finished ends 10. EACH surface raceway entrance end fitting and each radius elbow / tee per T4 details drawing and this section ARCHITECHNOLOGY CORNELL – NCP COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM PATHWAYS STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 27 05 28 – PAGE 4 OF 20 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 11. Label each submittal with a specification section and a T4 drawing detail reference PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 CONDUIT A. Rigid Galvanized Steel Conduit 1. Shall be hotdipped galvanized steel, includin g threads. B. Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT) 1. Electrical Metallic Tubing shall be electroga lvanized steel 2. Acceptable manufactures a) Triangle b) Wheatland Tube c) Allied Tube d) Steel Duct e) LTV Steel C. Flexible Metal Conduit 1. Flexible Metal Conduit shall only be permitted when used in the inside the wall cavity only. 2. Flexible Metal Conduit shall be constructed of one continuous length of spirally wound, interlocked, zinc coated strip steel. Interior surface shall be free from burrs or sharp edges 3. Acceptable manufacturers a) Anaconda b) American Flexible Conduit Co. c) OZ/Gedney d) Thomas and Betts D. Liquidtight Flexible Metal Conduit 1. Flexible Metal Conduit shall be constructed of one continuous length of spirally wound, interlocking zinc coated strip steel. Interior surfaces shall be free from burrs and sharp edges. Provide with a liquidtight jacket of flexible polyvinyl chloride (PVC). ARCHITECHNOLOGY CORNELL – NCP COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM PATHWAYS STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 27 05 28 – PAGE 5 OF 20 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 2. Acceptable manufacturers: a. Allied b. American Flexible Conduit c. Carlon d. Thomas and Betts E. Fittings 1. Rigid galvanized steel fittings shall be fully threaded and shall be of the same material as the respective raceway system. 2. Fittings for electrical metallic tubing shall be single screw indenter fittings for conduits up to 2" and double screw indenter fittings for conduits 2" and larger. 3. Fittings for flexible metal conduit shall be center stopped, insulated throat, U.L. E11852 listed 4. Fittings for liquidtight flexible metal conduit shall have zinc plated steel ferrule, compression type with sealing ring 5. Fittings for rigid nonmetallic conduit shall be solvent cemented in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions 6. Connectors shall have insulated throat up to and including 1" size. For sizes 1 1/4" and larger, provide plastic insulating bushing. 7. Diecast or pressure cast fittings are not per mitted. 8. Provide conduit bodies types, shapes and sizes as required to suit application and NEC requirements. Provide matching gasketed covers secured with corrosion resistant screws. 9. Conduit bodies are allowed instead of changing directions in boxes (obtain approval from construction manager). 10. Acceptable manufacturers a) O.Z. Gedney b) Steel City c) Thoams and Betts d) Copper CrouseHinds e) Carlon F. Raintight Fittings (Compression EMT) ARCHITECHNOLOGY CORNELL – NCP COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM PATHWAYS STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 27 05 28 – PAGE 6 OF 20 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 1. Acceptable manufacturers: Bridgeport Fittings, OZ Gedney, Steel City/Thomas and Betts. 2. Design makes:. a). Bridgeport Fittings: 26xSRT Series coupler for 1” EMT trade size. b) Bridgeport Fittings: 25XSRT Series connector for 1” EMT trade size. G. Space Saver Connector Fittings 1. Rigid galvanized steel fittings shall be fully threaded and shall be of the same material as the respective raceway system 2. Fittings for electrical metallic tubing shall be single screw indenter fittings for conduits up to 2" and double screw indenter fittings for conduits 2" and larger 3. Diecast or pressure cast fittings are not permitte d 4. Provide space saver EMT conduit connectors, in compression or set screw type as called for in the T4 detailed drawings for: cable tray, raceway entrance end fittings, and backbox connections for communication cabling – to maximize the cable bend radius, crosssectional area and cable f ill ratios 5. Acceptable manufacturers: Cooper CrouseHinds , Space Saver Series 6. Design make a) #SSBC1xx Series (set screw) b) #SSC1xx Series (compression) H. Expansion Fittings 1. Provide expansion fittings with external grounding straps at building expansion joints. 2. Galvanized steel expansion joints for RGS or EMT conduit 3. Provide a minimum of 4” movement in either direction. 4. Weatherproof for outdoor applications. 5. At expansion joints in concrete pours, provide Deflection/Expansion fittings capable of movement of ¾” in all directions from the normal. I. Waterproofing Seals 1. Provide watertight expanding linktype seals f or installation between the conduit and the sleeve or core drilled hole. 2. Design Make: Link Seal, or approved equal ARCHITECHNOLOGY CORNELL – NCP COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM PATHWAYS STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 27 05 28 – PAGE 7 OF 20 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 H. Pull and Junction Boxes 1. Shall be constructed of not less than 14 gauge galvanized steel with trim for flush or surface mounting in accordance with the location to be installed. Provide screwon type covers. Boxes installed in damp or we t locations shall be of rain tight construction with gasketed cover and threaded conduit hubs. In no case shall boxes be sized smaller than as indicated in Article 370 of the National Electrical Code for conduit and conductor sizes installed. Boxes shall be NEMA approved for the environmental condition of the location where they will be installed. I. Flush floor junction boxes 1. Flush floor junction boxes shall be recessed cover boxes designed for flush mounting in masonry. 2. Provide checkered plate gasketed cover suitable for foot traffic. 2.2 SURFACE METALLIC RACEWAY A Refer to pathway schedules on T2series for addi tional surface raceway sizes, cable fill tables, and cable radius requirements. B TYPE SR2 (V2400 series) 1. .875” H x 1.875”W 2. Metallic two piece raceway with single compartment. 3. Color shall be Ivory color and have a durable finish with a scratchresistant surface that can be field painted. 4. Refer to T4Series Drawings for additional informat ion and requirements. 5. Provide the following fittings: a) Entrance end fitting nominal maximum dimension s of 2.62”W x 2.25”H x 3” L. and 1” conduit knockout. b) Back entrance end fitting same as entrance end fitting with internal radius. c) Tee fittings to connect to SR3 (3000 Series) and SR4 (4000 Series) raceway where T section to SR2 (2400 Series) has m aximum width equal to SR2 raceway d) Bridge fitting with radius for spanning existing raceways in varying widths from ½” to 2. e) Flat Internal and external elbows UL verified for a 2" [51mm] bend radius and exceeding the recommendations of EIA/TIA 569A. Internal or ARCHITECHNOLOGY CORNELL – NCP COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM PATHWAYS STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 27 05 28 – PAGE 8 OF 20 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 external radius control must be provided. Derate fill capacities when internal radius control is provided, as recommended by the manufacturer. f) Surface 2” x 4” or 4” x 4” boxes, with 2.25” depth as called for 6. Design Make: Wiremold V2400 series raceway, V2475D series bridge fittings, V2410 series entrance end fittings, V2415 T fittings. 7. CUSTOM FITTINGS Design Make: Wiremold per T4 d etail drawings. 8. Acceptable Manufacturers: Hubbell, MonoSystems or others as submitted by contractor and preapproved by Owner. C TYPE SR3 (V3000 Series) 1. 1.5” H x 2.75”W 2. Metallic two piece raceway with single compartment. 3. Color shall be Ivory color and have a durable finish with a scratchresistant surface that can be field painted. 4. Refer to T4Series Drawings for additional inf ormation and requirements. 5. Provide the following fittings: a) Entrance end fitting nominal maximum dimens ions of 2.75”W x 2”H x 2.125” L. and 1” conduit knockout. b) Back entrance end fitting same as entrance end fitting with internal radius. c) Tee fittings to connect to SR2 (2400 Series) raceway where T section to SR2 has maximum width equal to SR2 raceway d) Flat Internal and external elbows UL verified for a 2" [51mm] bend radius and exceeding the recommendations of EIA/TIA 569A using internal or external radius components. Internal or external radius control must be provided. Derate fill capacities when internal radius control is provided, as recommended by the manufacturer. 6. Design Make: Wiremold V3000 series raceway, with V3011, V3010 and V3018 fittings. 7. CUSTOM FITTINGS a) Design Make: Wiremold per T4 detail drawings. 8. Acceptable Manufacturers: Hubbell, MonoSystem s or others as submitted by contractor and pre approved by Owner. ARCHITECHNOLOGY CORNELL – NCP COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM PATHWAYS STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 27 05 28 – PAGE 9 OF 20 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 D. TYPE SR4 and SR4d (V4000 Series) 1. 1.75” H x 4.75”W 2. Metallic two piece raceway with single or divided compartment as called for on plans. 3. Color shall be Ivory color and have a durable finish with a scratchresistant surface that can be field painted. 4. Provide the following fittings: a) Entrance end fitting nominal maximum dimens ions of 4.75”W x 2.75”H x 6.5”L. and 1.25” conduit knockout. b) Back entrance end fitting same as entrance end fitting with internal radius. c) T fittings to connect to SR2 (2400 Series) r aceway where T section to SR 2 has maximum width equal to SR2 raceway d) Flat Internal and external elbows with fiber optic radius 5. Design Make: Wiremold V4000 Series raceway, with V4010, V4017FO, V4015FO and V4011FO fittings. 6. CUSTOM FITTINGS a) Design Make: Wiremold per T4 detail drawings. 7. Acceptable Manufacturers: Hubbell, MonoSystem s or others as submitted by contractor and preapproved by Owner. E. TYPE SR7 (V700 Series) 1. Onepiece raceway 2. Color shall be Ivory color and have a durable finish with a scratchresistant surface that can be field painted. 3. Utilized for wall mounted phones and miscellaneous branch circuit power only. 4. Provide internal and external 90 degree fittings with radius. 5. Provide miscellaneous boxes, extension rings, fittings and supports designed and manufactured by the raceway manufacturer as required making a complete job. 6. Design Make: Wiremold V700 7. Acceptable Manufacturers: Hubbell, MonoSystem s or others as submitted by contractor and preapproved by Owner... ARCHITECHNOLOGY CORNELL – NCP COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM PATHWAYS STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 27 05 28 – PAGE 10 OF 20 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 2.3 SLEEVES A. See EMT requirements 2.4 GROUNDING BUSHINGS A. Shall be provided for all conduits 2” and larger and longer than 10ft and shall be bonded to the MTGB or TGB in the TR. 1. Shall facilitate a bonding path for all Sleeves and conduits back to Telecommunication Ground bar’s in each TR. 2. Bushing shall provide protection for cables from damage. B. Design Make 1. Arlington 2.5 WIRE MESH CABLE TRAY A Cable Tray Finish: Carbon Steel with Zink plating. B. Cable tray will consist of continuous, rigid, welded steel wire mesh cable management system, to allow continuous ventilation of cables and maximum dissipation of heat, with UL Classified splices where tray acts as Equipment Grounding Conductor (EGC). Wire mesh cable tray will have continuous Safe/T/Edge T/welded top side wire to protect cable insulation and installers. C. Provide splices, supports, and other fittings necessary for a complete, continuously grounded system. 1. Mesh: 2 x 4 inches (50 x 100 mm). 2. Straight Section Lengths: 118 inches (3,000 mm). 3. Wire Diameter: Patented design includes varying wire sizes to meet application oad requirements; to optimize tray strength; and to allow tray to remain lightweight. 4. Safe/T/Edge: Patented Safe/T/Edge technology on side wire to protect cable insulation and installers’ hands. ARCHITECHNOLOGY CORNELL – NCP COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM PATHWAYS STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 27 05 28 – PAGE 11 OF 20 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 5. Fittings: Wire mesh cable tray fittings are field/fabricated from straight tray sections, in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and Item 2.3. 6. CF Series Cable Tray Size: 7. Depth: Cable tray shall be available in the following depths: a) [1 inch (30 mm)] b) [2 inches (54 mm)] c) [4 inches (105 mm)] d) [6 inches (150 mm)] 8. Width: Cable tray width will be available in the following widths: a) [2 inches (50 mm)] b) [4 inches (100 mm)] c) [6 inches (150 mm)] d) [8 inches (200 mm)] e) [12 inches (300 mm)] f) [18 inches (450 mm)] g) [20 inches (500 mm)] h) [24 inches (600 mm)] 9. Length: Cable tray section length will be 118 inches (3000mm) unless otherwise shown on drawings. D. Support cable tray as recommended by manufacture. Provide a safety loading factor of 1.5 for uniformly distributed loads when supported as a simple span in accordance with the NEMA standard listed. E. Refer to pathway schedules for Cable Tray sizing and types additional requirements F. Refer to program standard detail Drawing for additional Cable Tray details and requirements ARCHITECHNOLOGY CORNELL – NCP COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM PATHWAYS STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 27 05 28 – PAGE 12 OF 20 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 G. Design Makes: Legrand Cablofil Wire Mesh H. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Cooper B/line Flextray 2. Approved equal 2.6 ENCLOSED CABLE TRAY A. Solid Bottom Cable Trays shall be one piece construction bottom and sides. Provide all required fittings for a complete system. Refer to drawings T4 Series detailed drawings for additional requirements B. Standard length of 10’/0” per section. C. All cable trays shall be provided with flanged lay/on covers. Covers shall be a maximum of 5’ in length. Provide shorter sections of cover at beam crossings and pull box connections. D. Wrap around type bolted connector to connect tray sections. E. Minimum inside radius of horizontal elbows shall be 12 in. Provide special radius elbows where required for field conditions or as called for. Horizontal and Vertical bends for solid bottom trays shall have solid bottoms Support cable tray as recommended by manufacture. Provide a safety loading factor of 1.5 for uniformly distributed loads when supported as a simple span in accordance with the NEMA standard listed. F. Cable tray, cover, and all supporting devices shall be painted to match existing surroundings when exposed, Cable tray shall not be painted when exposed in mechanical and Telecommunication Rooms (TR’s), as called for on the T2 series drawings. When required, cable tray and cover shall be painted by the manufacture with a baked on finish. Provide color sample with submittal. G. Provide panel connector type end fitting to finish open ends of cable trays at Telecommunication Rooms ARCHITECHNOLOGY CORNELL – NCP COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM PATHWAYS STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 27 05 28 – PAGE 13 OF 20 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 H. Provide screw/on covers for vertical section of cable trays and secure upon cable placement I. Provide cable support mounting means in all vertical section of cable trays J. Refer to T2/Series Drawing pathway schedules for Cable Tray sizing and types additional requirements K. Refer to AT/CU standard installation details for additional Cable Tray details and requirements L. Design Makes: LeGrand Fiber Trough Cable Tray, Wiremold SpecMate Series, or Monno/Systems Steel L series for new cable. M. Acceptable Manufacturers: Approved equal 2.7 CABLE HANGERS ( JHOOK) A. Provide prefabricated, zinc coated, carbon steel hangers designed specifically for UTP and Optical Fiber cable installations. B. Hangers shall have open top, rolled edges and a 3” or 4” minimum diameter loop. C. Provide beam clamps, rod fasteners, flange clips and brackets as job conditions require. D. Design Make CADDY CAT CM E. Refer to AT/CU standard installation details for additional Cable hanger pathway (J/Hook) details and requirements 2.8 SUPPORTING DEVICES A. Supports, support hardware and fasteners shall be protected with zinc coating or treatment of equivalent corrosion resistance using approved alternative treatment, finish or inherent material characteristic. Products used fin outdoor applications shall be hot dipped galvanized. B. Provide clevis hangers, riser clamps, conduit straps, threaded c clamps with retainers, ceiling trapeze hangers, wall brackets and spring steel clamps as applicable. C. 14 gauge UChannel systems with 9/16 inch diame ter holes at a minimum of 1 7/8 inches on center in the top surface. Provide fittings and accessories that match and mate channel. ARCHITECHNOLOGY CORNELL – NCP COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM PATHWAYS STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 27 05 28 – PAGE 14 OF 20 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 D. Provide carbon steel or wedge or sleeve type expansion anchors, steel springhead toggle bolts and heattreated steel power driven th readed stud fastening equipment as required by construction types. E. Provided field fabricated supporting devices such as angles, channels, pipe supports, etc. All fabricated supports shall be of metal construction as called for in 2.1. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 CONDUIT A. Conduit: 1. Electrical Metallic Tubing, Rigid Metal Conduit and Flexible metal conduit is are allowed Conduit types. 2. Install with a minimum of bends and offsets. Bends shall not kink or destroying the interior cross section of the raceway. Factory made bends shall be used for raceway’s 1" trade size and larger. Bends radius shall be 6 times the internal diameter for conduit sizes up to 2 inches. A conduit greater than 2 inch shall have bend radius at least 10 times the diameter of the conduit. 3. Runs exceeding 100 feet or 180 degrees total bends shall be broken with suitable sized pull or splice boxes. (LB or similar conduit fittings are not acceptable for runs of riser cables. Verify applicability before installing such fitting 4. Do not locate riser pull boxes at bends without prior review and approval by owner. Where possible use instead sweeps for the bend and locate in a straight pull nearby. 5. Conduit runs to work areas shall not loop through one communication outlet to feed another outlet. 6. Conduits shall be sized to accept 50% future growth; sizing shall account for fire code capacity restrictions. 7. Plug the ends of each roughedin raceway with an approved cap or disc to prevent the entrance of foreign materials during construction. 8. Secure within three feet of each outlet box, junction box, cabinet or fitting. 9. Provide a poly pull line in all "Spare" or "Empty" conduit runs to facilitate future installation of cables. 10. Install raceways in concrete floor slabs as follows: a) All conduits in concrete floor slabs shall be rigid galvanized steel with concrete tight threaded fittings. b) Provide expansion fittings where conduits cross building expansion joints. c) Install conduit below the reinforcing mesh. d) Locate conduits to provide a minimum of 1” of concrete around conduit. ARCHITECHNOLOGY CORNELL – NCP COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM PATHWAYS STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 27 05 28 – PAGE 15 OF 20 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 e) Obtain approval from the Owner's Representative prior to installing conduit larger than 1" trade size in concrete slabs. f) Wherever a cluster of four(4) or more condui ts rise out of floor exposed, provide neatly formed 4in. high concrete envelope, with chamfered edges, around raceways. 11. Provide conduit supports based on the following table: Conduit Trade Size Type of Run Horizontal Spacing in Feet Vertical Spacing in Feet ½”, ¾” Concealed 7 10 1”, 1 ¼” Concealed 8 10 1 ½”, & LARGER Concealed 10 10 ½”, ¾” Exposed 5 7 1”, 1 ¼” Exposed 7 8 1 ½” & larger Exposed 10 10 12. Where conduits puncture roof, install pitch pockets as required in order that the roof warranty is maintained. 13. Conduit System Installation: a) Cable in exterior, above grade locations: Rigid Galvanized Steel b) Interior locations: Electrical Metallic Tubing c) Cable below grade: PVC Schedule 40 14. Identification: Clearly label conduit at exposed ends indicating closet or outlet where conduit terminates and the length of the conduit. Label pull boxes indicating destination of conduits entering and exiting. 15. Include intra and interbuilding raceways. I ncluding conduits, sleeves and trays for the placement of cables from the communications center to communications closets, from the communications center to the entrance room or space and from communication center to communication center in different building in a campus environment. ARCHITECHNOLOGY CORNELL – NCP COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM PATHWAYS STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 27 05 28 – PAGE 16 OF 20 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 B. Conduit fill shall be as follows: Trade Size Area of Conduit (square inches) 1 Cable 53% Fill (sq. in.) 2 Cables 31% Fill (sq. in.) 3 Cables & Over 40% Fill (sq. in.) ¾” 0.53 0.28 0.16 0.21 1” 0.87 0.46 0.27 0.35 1 ¼” 1.51 0.80 0.47 0.60 1 ½” 2.05 1.09 0.64 0.82 2” 3.39 1.80 1.05 1.36 2 ½” 4.82 2.56 1.49 1.93 3” 7.45 3.95 2.31 2.98 3 ½” 9.96 5.28 3.09 3.98 4” 12.83 6.80 3.98 5.13 5” 20.15 10.68 6.25 8.06 C. Backbone pathways shall be in the form of 4” conduits or sleeves between the main communication equipment rooms and spaces and closets shall be provided as shown on drawings: D. Fire stop all pathways as called for in 27 05 00. E. All backbone conduits shall be marked with 1” reflective tape every 25 feet. Coordinate color with owner. F. Pull boxes shall be marked with 1” wide reflective tape. G. Stub out conduits into closets only enough to attach connector and bushings, vertical conduits shall rise a minimum of 6 inches above the finished floor. ARCHITECHNOLOGY CORNELL – NCP COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM PATHWAYS STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 27 05 28 – PAGE 17 OF 20 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 H. Bush all conduit ends. I. Conduits shall be concealed except in the following areas: 1. Mechanical Rooms 2. Electric Rooms 3. Manufacturing areas 4. Garage or maintenance areas 5. Unfinished basements or crawl spaces 6. Telecommunications rooms 7. Utility chaseways J. Do not install raceways adjacent to hot surfaces or in wet areas. K. Install conduits to edges of access boxes so as to maximize the total number of conduits that can be routed through the pull box. L. Provide expansion fittings with external grounding straps at building expansion joints. M. Do not install conduit horizontally in concrete or block partitions. N. Arrange neatly to permit access to the raceway, outlet, pull, and junction boxes, and work installed by other trades. O. If it is necessary to burn holes through webs of beams or girders, call such points to the attention of the Owner's Representative and receive written approval both as to location and size of hole before proceeding with work. All holes shall be burned no larger than absolutely necessary. If allowed, the contractor shall arrange for and receive a burn permit per University standards, requirements or as directed. P. Core drill, sleeve, and fire stop all penetrations through existing floors. Q. Support all raceways with malleable iron pipe clamps or other approved method. In exterior or wet locations, provide minimum ¼” air space between raceway and wall. Secure raceway within 3 ft. of each outlet box, junction box, cabinet or fitting. R. Install junction and pull boxes in readily accessible locations. Equipment, piping, ducts and the like shall not block access to boxes. Provide all necessary junction or pull boxes required due to field conditions and size as required by the National Electrical Code. S. Conduits shall be installed with a pull string with a minimum test rating of 200lbs. 3.2 SLEEVES A. Support, fire stop and size as per drawing ARCHITECHNOLOGY CORNELL – NCP COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM PATHWAYS STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 27 05 28 – PAGE 18 OF 20 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 3.3 CABLE TRAYS A. Cable Tray routing shown on the plans is diagrammatical only. Contractor shall field verify all routes and potential existing utility/structural conflicts. Contractor to verify all major tiein points, floor penetrations, existing c eiling access panels, ceiling elevations, existing mechanical ductwork and equipment, existing sleeves and corridor wall penetrations that may conflict with the new cable tray installation, etc. prior to the start of construction. Coordinate proposed routing changes and offsets with the owner in advance. All routing changes shall be at no additional cost to the contract. B. Hang Cable tray using threaded, galvanized rod hangers, with rods extended through support steel and double nutted. Size support member within load rating of member section; and without visible deflection. Install cable tray level and straight. C. Provide seismic bracing as required by code. D. Provide stiffeners to prevent lateral movement and stabilize cable tray. Provide minimally one stiffener assembly per vertical support (threaded rod). E. A minimum of 12” headroom shall be provided above all cable trays. F A minimum of 18” side clearance shall be provided for all cable trays. G. Provide aluminum body expansion connectors at building expansion joints. Minimum 4in. movements, greater if expansion movement cond itions warrant. H. Provide external grounding strap at expansion joints, sleeves, crossovers and at other locations where tray continuity is interrupted. I. Provide necessary elbows, tees, crosses, risers, offsets, fittings, reducers, connectors, clamps, rod suspension, trapeze hangers, etc., as required to make a complete job, coordinate with the manufacturer. J. Provide (1) 6” long piece of ½” EMT conduit or snap on covers on each threaded rod hanger to prevent scoring of cable insulation when cable is pulled in. 3.4 CABLE HANGERS (JHOOKS) A. Provide cable hangers a maximum of 3’ on center wherever cable tray or conduit is not present for support low voltage cabling. B. Ceiling ties and rods shall not be used to hang cable or cable supports without the approval of the Owner. C. Load hangers as recommended by the manufacturer. Provide hangers side by side on a common bracket where cable quantities require. D. Do not install cables loose above lockin type, drywall or plaster ceilings. E. Cables shall be installed at least 3 in. above the ceiling tiles and shall not touch the ceiling. ARCHITECHNOLOGY CORNELL – NCP COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM PATHWAYS STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 27 05 28 – PAGE 19 OF 20 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 F. Do not support cable from ceiling system tie wires or grid in fire rated systems. G. Provide a minimum of 2 spare bracket mounted hangers in new construction. 3.5 FLOOR BOXES A. Floor outlet boxes shall be installed flush with finished floor, adjust level and tilt as required. Where finished floor is terrazzo, provide boxes specifically designed for installation in terrazzo. Where floors are to receive carpet, provide floor outlet with carpet flange. B. Furniture layout. Provide coordination drawings for approval. 3.6 BOXES AND CABINETS A. Consider location of outlets shown on drawings as approximate only. Study architectural, electrical, process piping, mechanical, plumbing, structural, roughingin, etc., drawings and note surrounding areas in which each outlet is to be located. Locate outlet so that when fixtures, motors, cabinets, equipment, etc., are placed in position, outlet will serve its desired purpose. Where conflicts are noted between drawings, contact Owner's Representative for decision prior to installation. B. Outlet boxes in separate rooms shall not be installed "backtoback" without the approval of the Owner's Representative. C. Outlet boxes shall be sized to accommodate the wiring device(s) to be installed. D. Outlet boxes installed in plaster, gypsum board or wood paneled walls shall be installed with raised plaster covers or raised tile covers. E. Outlet boxes installed in tile, brick or concrete block walls shall be installed with extra deep type raised tile covers or shall be 31/2" dee p boxes with square corners and dimensions to accommodate conductors installed. F. Surface ceiling mounted outlet boxes shall be minimum 4" square, 11/2" deep, galvanized sheet metal. G. Surface wall mounted metallic outlet boxes shall be cast type boxes having threaded or compression type threadless hubs. Exterior boxes shall be cast type with threaded hubs and gasketed cover plates secured by nonferrous sc rews. H. Where structural or other interference prevent compliance with mounting heights listed, consult Owner's Representative for approval to change location before installation. I. Where communications outlets are shown on, behind, below or above furniture or millwork. Verify the exact location and mounting height with the project coordinator. The electrical contractor shall be responsible for moving all communications outlets that are in conflict with furniture or millwork, including cutting, patching and painting, at no cost to the owner J. Pull boxes shall have a distance between each raceway entry inside the box and the opposite wall of the box of at least 6 times the tradesize diameter of the largest raceway, this distance being increased by the sum of the trade size diameters of the other raceways on the same wall of the box and have a distance between the nearest ARCHITECHNOLOGY CORNELL – NCP COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM PATHWAYS STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 27 05 28 – PAGE 20 OF 20 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 edges of each raceway enclosing the same conductor of at least 6 times the trade size diameter of the raceway or 6 times the trade size diameter of the larger raceway if they are of different sizes. K. Install outlet boxes as per sizes indicated on the drawings and in the specifications. 3.7 SUPPORTING DEVICES A. Hangers and Supports: 1. Provide steel angles, channels and other materials necessary for the proper support of wallmounted cabinets, racks, panels, et c. 2. Cabinets, large pull boxes, and cable support boxes shall be secured to ceiling and floor slab and not supported from conduits. Small equipment boxes, etc., as approved by Owner's Representative, may be supported on walls. Racks for support of conduit and heavy equipment shall be secured to building construction by substantial structural supports. 3.8 FURNITURE RACEWAYS A. Furniture Pathways Shall comply with UL 1286 and NEC Article 605. B. It shall be the contractors responsibility to verify the furniture layout and communication outlet with respect to the furniture. Obtain approved shop drawings from the architect detailing furniture heights, cable openings etc.. Prior to roughing in the outlet box verify height and location for all communication outlets near furniture or cabinetry. Boxes roughed in the wrong location shall be relocated at the contractors expense. C. Provide a concealed transition from outlet box to furniture. 3.9 GENERAL A. Support raceways from building construction. Do not support raceways from ductwork, piping, or equipment hangers. B. Support outlet, pull, and junction boxes independently from building construction. Do not support from raceways. C. Coordinate all raceway runs with other trades. D. All open raceways shall be installed a minimum of 6 in. away from any light fixture or other source of EMI (Electromagnetic interference). E. All horizontal pathways shall be bonded and grounded per the NEC Article 250. F. In all cases horizontal pathways shall be sized for a minimum of 50% future growth. END OF SECTION ARCHITECHNOLOGY CORNELL – NCP TESTING<IDENTIFICATION & ADMINISTRATION STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 27 05 53 – PAGE 1 OF 28 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 SECTION 27 05 53 TESTING, IDENTIFICATION AND ADMINISTRATION PART 1– GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide all labor, materials, tools, and equipment required for the complete installation of work called for in the Contract Documents 1.2 SCOPE A. This section includes the minimum requirements for the testing, certification administration and identification of backbone and horizontal cabling. B. This section includes minimum requirements for the following: 1. Contractor Qualifications 2. Tester Calibrations / Factory Requirements 3. UTP testing and testers 4. Labels and labeling 5. Reports 6. Documentation 7. Record Copy and As9Builts 8. Test and Acceptance 9. Warranty 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. All testing procedures, testers and identification and administration work specified shall comply with applicable requirements of: 1. ANSI/TIA/EIA – 6069A Administration Standards. 2. ANSI/TIA/EIA – 569A Pathway and Spaces 3. ANSI/TIA/EIA – 5689C.0 Generic Telecommunications Cabling For Customer Premises ARCHITECHNOLOGY CORNELL – NCP TESTING<IDENTIFICATION & ADMINISTRATION STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 27 05 53 – PAGE 2 OF 28 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 ` 4. ANSI/TIA/EIA – 5689B.2 Balanced Twisted9Pair Cabling Components and Testing 5. ANSI/TIA/EIA – 5689B.3 Optical Fiber Cabling Component Standard and Testing 6. 7. ANSI/TIA/EIA – 5269x Standard Test Procedures for Fiber Optic Systems 8. ANSI/TIA/EIA – 526914A Power Loss Measurements of Install Multimode Fiber Cable Plant 9. ANSI/TIA/EIA – 52697 Measurement of Optical Loss of Installed Singlemode Fiber Cable Plant 10. ANSI/TIA/EIA – 5989A Optical Fiber Cable Color Coding 11. ANSI/TIA/EIA – 5049x FOCIS x Documents for Fiber Optic Connector Intermateability Standards 12. TIA/EIA9J9STD9037 Commercial Building Grounding (Earthing) and Bonding Requirements for Telecommunications 13. ISO/IEC 11801 Information Technology 9 Generic Cabling for Customer Premises 14. BICSI TDMM Telecommunications Distribution Methods Manual, current edition 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Manufacturers catalog sheets and specifications for each cable testers, test heads and adapter cords and latest version of software applicable for each tester planned for use. B. Provide written factory calibration recommendation letter and factory recommended field calibration intervals with bid. C. Provide signed manufacturer factory calibration certification for each copper and fiber tester owned at time of bid response as a submittal. Certification shall have serial number, date and version of software of each tester. ARCHITECHNOLOGY CORNELL – NCP TESTING<IDENTIFICATION & ADMINISTRATION STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 27 05 53 – PAGE 3 OF 28 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 ` D. For each UTP field tester planned for use on this project, provide a letter from the tester manufacturer and the connectivity/cable manufacturers indicating compatibility and compliance to Category 6 permanent link and the Category 6, channel tests with the products identified for use on this project and the warranty requirements called for by the manufacturers. Contractor shall provide testers and equipment that fully conform to Panduit’s testing requirements for system warranty as specified in the Approved Category 6 Test Lead/Cord Adapters document, at: http://www.panduit.com/products/SpecificationGuides/068804.pdf E. Sample documentation from previous job for administration, test results and as9built drawings. F. At time of testing, provide a factory calibration certificate for each tester used and include these in each test report binder at the completion of the project. G. Test reports (submit prior to substantial completion punch list is performed) H. Two copies on compact disks containing all summary reports, full plot data test results, tester software tools required to view and inspect and print any selection of the test reports, spreadsheets, end to end reports and as built drawings called for at the completion of job.. The database for the completed job shall be stored and delivered on CD9ROM including the software tools required to view, inspect, and print any selection of test reports. I. Technician certificates for successful completion of training for each of the field testers proposed to be used in this project. J. Two copies in binder format and two copies on compact disks containing all digital photographs called for at the completion of the job. K. Refer to Section 01340 – “Shop Drawings, Product Data” and 27 05 00 for additional requirements. PART 2 9 PRODUCTS 2.1 VERIZON CIRCUIT IDENTIFICATION AND TESTING A. Not Included in this project ARCHITECHNOLOGY CORNELL – NCP TESTING<IDENTIFICATION & ADMINISTRATION STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 27 05 53 – PAGE 4 OF 28 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 ` 2.2 OPTICAL FIBER CABLE A. Field test instruments for multimode fiber cabling shall meet the requirements of ANSI/TIA/EIA95269149A. B. Field test instruments for multimode fiber cabling shall meet the requirements of ANSI/TIA/EIA952697. C. Multimode optical fiber light source 1. Provide 850nm and 1300nm +/9 20 nm wavelength LED light sources 2. Spectral width of sources shall be </= 50nm for 850nm wavelengths and </= 140nm for 1300nm wavelengths. 3. The output of the light source shall be 8 MW for 62.5um core optical fiber 4. Output Stability +/9 0.40 dB from 0 to 50 degrees C 5. Long Term output stability +/9 0.10dB at 25 degrees C 6. Power shall be from rechargeable Ni9Cad batteries 7. Connector types shall include: SMA, FC, ST and SC 8. Design make: Siecor Light source 9. Acceptable Manufacturers: a) Fluke b) Wavetek c) Lantek d) AMP NetConnect e) Corning Cable Systems D. Single mode optical fiber light source 1. Provide 1300nm and 1500nm +/9 20 nm wavelength Laser light sources 2. Output Stability +/9 0.40 dB from 0 to 50 degrees C 3. Long Term output stability +/9 0.10dB at 25 degrees C ARCHITECHNOLOGY CORNELL – NCP TESTING<IDENTIFICATION & ADMINISTRATION STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 27 05 53 – PAGE 5 OF 28 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 ` 4. Power shall be from rechargeable Ni9Cad batteries 5. Connector types shall include: SMA, FC, ST and SC 6. Design make: Siecor OS9200D 7. Acceptable Manufacturers: a) Fluke b) Meson c) AMP NetConnect d) Corning Cable Systems E. Optical Power Meter 1. Calibrates against the National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST) standard. 2. Provide 850nm, 1300nm and 1500nm +/9 20 nm wavelength test capability 3. Measurement range shall be from 10 to 960 dBm 4. Accuracy shall be +/9 5% at 0 to 950dBm and +/9 10% 10 to 0dBm and 950 to960 dBm. 5. Resolution shall be 0.1 dB 6. Connector types shall include: SMA, FC, ST and SC 7. Design make: Siecor OM9100F 8. Acceptable Manufacturers: a) Fluke b) Meson c) AMP NetConnect d) Corning Cable Systems F. Optical Time Domain Reflectometer (OTDR) 1. Dual selectable wavelength: 850/1300 nm for multimode 2. Dual selectable wavelength: 1310/1550 nm for singlemode ARCHITECHNOLOGY CORNELL – NCP TESTING<IDENTIFICATION & ADMINISTRATION STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 27 05 53 – PAGE 6 OF 28 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 ` 3. Selectable cable index of refraction. 4. Visual fault locator for continuity checks and dead zone fault protection. 5. Display and printer connection for hard9copy documentation 6. Equipped with launch jumper cable of sufficient length to offset entry” deadzone”. 2.3 100 OHM UTP TEST EQUIPMENT A. GENERAL 1. Field test instruments shall meet the requirements of ANSI/TIA/EIA95689B.2 Annex B and Annex I. 2. Test equipment used under this contract shall be from manufacturers that have a minimum of 5 years experience in producing field test equipment. 3. Manufacturers must be ISO 9001 certified. 4. All test tools of a given type shall be from the same manufacturer, and have compatible electronic results output. 5. Test adapter cables/test heads must be approved by the manufacturer of the test equipment, for the specific cable and connectivity product used on this project. Adapters from other sources are not acceptable. Obtain written confirmation that the test heads and adapter planned fro use are proper and also obtain a written confirmation from the wire and connectivity manufactures that they also agree with the test heads and adapter selection chosen by the tester manufacturer. 6. Baseline accuracy of the test equipment must exceed TIA Level IIIe, as indicated by independent laboratory testing. 7. A level IIIe test unit is required to verify category 6 performance for both Category 6 permanent link and channel performance. 8. Test equipment must be capable of certifying Category 5, 5e, and 6 links. 9. Test equipment must have a dynamic range of at least 100 dB to ARCHITECHNOLOGY CORNELL – NCP TESTING<IDENTIFICATION & ADMINISTRATION STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 27 05 53 – PAGE 7 OF 28 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 ` minimize measurement uncertainty. 10. Test equipment must be capable of storing full frequency sweep data for all tests and printing color graphical reports for all swept measurements. 11. Test equipment must include S9Band time domain diagnostics for NEXT and return loss (TDNXT and TDRL) for accurate and efficient troubleshooting. 12. Test equipment must be capable of running individual NEXT, return loss, etc measurements in addition to autotests. Individual tests increase productivity when diagnosing faults. 13. Test equipment must include a library of cable types by major manufacturer. 14. Test equipment must store at least 1000 Category 6 or 6 autotests in internal memory. 15. Test equipment must be able to internally group autotests and cables in project folders for good records management. 16. Test equipment must include technology for support of advanced measurements. 17. Test equipment must make swept frequency measurements in compliance with TIA standards. 18. The measurement reference plane of the test equipment shall start immediately at the output of the test equipment interface connector. There shall not be a time domain dead zone of any distance that excludes any part of the link from the measurement. 19. The basic tests required are: ARCHITECHNOLOGY CORNELL – NCP TESTING<IDENTIFICATION & ADMINISTRATION STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 27 05 53 – PAGE 8 OF 28 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 ` a) · Wire Map b) · Length c) · Attenuation d) · NEXT (Near end crosstalk) e) · Return Loss f) · ELFEXT Loss g) · Propagation Delay h) · Delay skew i) · PSNEXT (Power sum near9end crosstalk loss) j) · PSELFEXT (Power sum equal level far9end crosstalk loss) 20. Shall be able to test cable for compliance with all of the following standards: a) TIA Category 6: Permanent Link and Channel b) ISO/IEC 11801 and EN 50173 Class C, D and E: Link c) ISO/IEC 11801 and EN 50173 Class C, D and E: Permanent Link or Channel d) Aus/NZ Class C and D: Basic Link or Channel e) STP cabling, (IBM Type 1, 150 ohm) f) ANSI TP9PMD IEEE 802.3 10BASE5, 10BASE2: Ethernet with coaxial cabling g) IEEE 802.3 10BASE9T, 100BASE9TX, 1000BASE9T: Ethernet with twisted pair cabling IEEE 802.5: Token Ring, 4 Mbps or 16 Mbps 21. Shall perform the following tests as a minimum: a) NEXT, NEXT @ Remote b) Wire Map c) Characteristic Impedance d) Length e) DC Loop Resistance f) Propagation Delay Return Loss (RL), RL @ Remote g) Delay Skew h) Attenuation i) Attenuation9to9Crosstalk Ratio (ACR), ACR @ Remote j) Power Sum ACR, PSACR @ Remote k) ELFEXT, ELFEXT @ Remote l) Power Sum ELFEXT, PSELFEXT @ Remote m) Power Sum NEXT, PSNEXT @ Remote 22. Shall use injector for complete wire mapping and TDR for determining cable length. ARCHITECHNOLOGY CORNELL – NCP TESTING<IDENTIFICATION & ADMINISTRATION STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 27 05 53 – PAGE 9 OF 28 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 ` 23. Shall measure NEXT for all six pair combinations and Attenuation on all four pairs from 1.0 to 350 MHz. 24. Design Make: Fluke “DSP 4000 or 4300 series” 25. Acceptable Manufacturers: a) Agilent b) WaveTek c) Lantek d) Wirescope 2.4 LABELS A. Shall meet the legibility, defacement, exposure and adhesion requirements of UL 969. B. Shall be preprinted or laser printed type. Handwritten labels are not acceptable. C. Where used for cable marking provide vinyl substrate with a white printing area and a clear “tail” that self laminates the printed area when wrapped around the cable. If cable jacket is white, provide cable label with printing area that is any other color than white, preferably orange or yellow – so that the labels are easily distinguishable. D. Where insert type labels are used provide clear plastic cover over label. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. WH Brady 2. Panduit 3. Ideal: PART 3 9 EXECUTION 3.1 COPPER CABLE TEST A. A level IIIe test unit is required to verify category 6 performances, shall be updated with the latest version of tester software at time of testing and shall be factory tested/calibrated within one of time of testing. Provide copies of factory certification for each tester owned at time of ARCHITECHNOLOGY CORNELL – NCP TESTING<IDENTIFICATION & ADMINISTRATION STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 27 05 53 – PAGE 10 OF 28 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 ` bid response as a submittal. At time of testing, provide a factory calibration certificate for tester used and include these in each test report binder at the completion of the project. B Visually inspect all cables, cable reels, and shipping cartons to detect possible cable damage incurred during shipping and transport. Visibly damaged goods are to be returned to the supplier and replaced at no additional cost to the Owner. C. If post9manufacture performance data has been supplied by the manufacturer of cables or connecting hardware, copies of such data are to be kept for inclusion in the Documentation for final Record Copy deliverables and made available to the Owner upon request. D. Test 100% of installed backbone copper cabling for 1. Wire Map 2. Length E. Provide documentation in hardcopy and electronic formats, organized the same as outlined in 27 05 53, Sections 3.5.W “Third Party Verification” and Section 3.6 “Test Documentation” of this section. 3.2 OPTICAL FIBER CABLE TESTING A. All fiber testing shall be performed on all fibers in the completed end to end system. B. Comply with Tier9two testing as defined in TSB9140. which included loss and length testing with an optical loss test set (OLTS) and also an OTDR trace of the installed cable plant. By incorporating the proposed two9tier testing method, installers have the most complete picture of the fiber installation and network owners have proof of a quality installation C. Testing shall consist of an end to end power meter test performed per EIA/TIA9455953A. The system loss measurements shall be provided at 850 and/or 1300 nanometers for multimode fibers and 1310 and/or 1550 nanometers for single mode fibers. These tests also include continuity checking of each fiber. D. There shall be no splices unless clearly called for. E. Test all fibers with launch and far end cable of sufficient length for the OTDR to be able to see through all installed connectors. ARCHITECHNOLOGY CORNELL – NCP TESTING<IDENTIFICATION & ADMINISTRATION STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 27 05 53 – PAGE 11 OF 28 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 ` F. Localized attenuation shall not exceed 0.5 dB at any point. G. Backbone multimode fiber shall be tested in one direction at both 850nm and 1300 nm in accordance with ANSI/EIA/TIA9526914A method B. H. Backbone single mode fiber shall be tested in one direction at both 1310nm and 1550. I. For horizontal cabling system using multimode optical fiber, attenuation shall be measured in one direction at either 850 nanometer (nm) or 1300 nm using an LED light source and power meter. J. Backbone multimode fiber cabling shall be tested at both 850 nm and 1300 nm (or 1310 and 1550 nm for singlemode) in one direction. K. Test set9up and performance shall be conducted in accordance with ANSI/EIA/TIA9526914 Standard, Method B. L. Where links are combined to complete a circuit between devices, the Contractor shall test each link from end to end to ensure the performance of the system. ONLY BASIC LINK TEST IS REQUIRED. The contractor can optionally install patch cords to complete the circuit and then test the entire channel. The test method shall be the same used for the test described above. The values for calculating loss shall be those defined in the ANSI/TIA/EIA Standard. M. Attenuation testing shall be performed with a stable launch condition using two9meter jumpers to attach the test equipment to the cable plant. The light source shall be left in place after calibration and the power meter moved to the far end to take measurements. N. Backbone Cable 1. Test the cable on the reel for continuity before installing it, to insure no damage was done in shipment from the manufacturer to the job site. 2. After installation and termination, test each segment of the cable plant individually as it is installed, to insure each connector and cable is good. 3. Link attenuation is the only required field test except for the patched runs in the campus backbone system where an OTDR test will be required. Use launch cables at each end and provide ARCHITECHNOLOGY CORNELL – NCP TESTING<IDENTIFICATION & ADMINISTRATION STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 27 05 53 – PAGE 12 OF 28 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 ` print outs showing all connectors. OTDR will also be required to determine bad connections or damage when the link attenuation test fails. 4. Maximum localized attenuation allowed is 2dB. 5. Backbone multimode fiber shall be tested in one direction at both 850nm and 1300 nm in accordance with ANSI/EIA/TIA9 526914A method B. 6. Backbone single mode fiber shall be tested in one direction at both 1310nm and 1550 nm in accordance with ANSI/EIA/TIA9 526914A method A.1. 7. Multimode fiber shall conform to the following: 850 nm: Length (meters) Attenuation ( dB) 500 3.5 1000 5.5 1500 7.5 2000 9.0 1300 nm: Length (meters) Attenuation ( dB) 500 2.2 1000 3.0 1500 3.8 2000 4.5 8. Single Mode Fiber shall conform to the following (note: taken at 1550nm) Inside: Length (meters) Attenuation ( dB) 500 2.0 1000 2.5 1500 3.0 2000 3.5 2500 4.0 3000 4.5 Outside: ARCHITECHNOLOGY CORNELL – NCP TESTING<IDENTIFICATION & ADMINISTRATION STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 27 05 53 – PAGE 13 OF 28 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 ` Length (meters) Attenuation ( dB) 500 1.8 1000 2.0 1500 2.2 2000 2.5 2500 2.8 3000 3.0 O. Documentation 1. Provide attenuation and cable length test results for all installed cable pairs. 3.3 TEST REPORTS A. Provide documentation in hardcopy and electronic formats, organized the same as outlined in 27 05 53, Sections 3.5.W “Data Reporting and Accuracy” and Section 3.6 “Test Documentation” of this section. 3.4 100 OHM UTP CABLE TESTING GENERAL A. Every cabling link shall be tested in accordance with the field test specifications defined in ANSI/TIA/EIA95689B.291 “Transmission Performance Specifications for 49pair 100P Category 6 Cabling and as defined in the Manufacturer warranty requirements. Refer to item 1.4 submittals for additional information. B. Trained technicians who have successfully attended an appropriate training program and have obtained a certificate as proof thereof shall execute the tests. C. The test equipment shall comply with the accuracy requirements for level IIIe field testers as defined in ANSI/TIA/EIA95689B.291. The tester including the appropriate interface adapter must meet the specified accuracy requirements. The accuracy requirements for the permanent link test configuration (baseline accuracy plus adapter contribution) are specified in Table B.2 of Annex B of the TIA Cat 6 Standard. (Table B.3 in this TIA document specifies the accuracy requirements for the Channel configuration. D. The tester shall be within the calibration period recommended by the vendor in order to achieve the vendor9specified measurement ARCHITECHNOLOGY CORNELL – NCP TESTING<IDENTIFICATION & ADMINISTRATION STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 27 05 53 – PAGE 14 OF 28 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 ` accuracy. E. The tester interface adapters must be of high quality and the cable shall not show any twisting or kinking resulting from coiling and storing of the tester interface adapters. In order to deliver optimum accuracy, preference is given to a permanent link interface adapter for the tester that can be calibrated to extend the reference plane of the Return Loss measurement to the permanent link interface. The contractor shall provide proof that the interface has been calibrated within the period recommended by the vendor. To ensure that normal handling on the job does not cause measurable Return Loss change, the adapter cord cable shall not be of twisted9pair construction. F. A Pass or Fail result for each parameter is determined by comparing the measured values with the specified test limits for that parameter. The test result of a parameter shall be marked with an asterisk (*) when the result is closer to the test limit than the accuracy of the field tester. The field tester manufacturer must provide documentation as an aid to interpret results marked with asterisks. G. All cables and termination hardware shall be 100% tested for defects in installation and to verify cabling system performance under installed conditions according to the requirements of ANSI/TIA/EIA95689B. H. All pairs of each installed cable shall be verified prior to system acceptance. Any defect in the cabling system installation including but not limited to cable, connectors, feed through couplers, patch panels, and connector blocks shall be repaired or replaced in order to ensure 100% useable conductors in all cables installed. The testing parameters called for in this section shall apply for up to 90 meters of horizontal cable, a work area equipment cord, an RJ45 outlet and 2 cross connect connections in the closet. The test parameters shall include Wire Map, Length, Attenuation and NEXT Wire Map 1. The wire map test shall verify pair to pin termination at each end and check for connectivity errors. Wire Map shall report Pass if the wiring of each wire9pair from end to end is determined to be correct. The Wire Map results shall include the continuity of the shield connection if present The wire map shall indicate the following for each of the eight conductors: ARCHITECHNOLOGY CORNELL – NCP TESTING<IDENTIFICATION & ADMINISTRATION STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 27 05 53 – PAGE 15 OF 28 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 ` a) Continuity to the remote end b) Shorts between any two or more conductors c) Crossed pairs d) Reversed Pairs e) Split Pairs f) Any other miswiring Cable Length The field tester shall be capable of measuring length of all pairs of a basic link or channel based on the propagation delay measurement and the average value for NVP. The physical length of the link shall be calculated using the pair with the shortest electrical delay. This length figure shall be reported and shall be used for making the Pass/Fail decision. The Pass/Fail criteria are based on the maximum length allowed for the Permanent Link configuration (90 meters – 295 feet) plus 10% to allow for the variation and uncertainty of NVP. 2. The set9up configuration of the NVP shall be based solely on the NVP value of the cable specified in the approved cable submittal for this project. Insulation characteristics and twist rate of the wire pair influence NVP in minor ways and is dependent on the specific manufacturer. Typically, an ‘average’ value for NVP is published for all four wire9pairs in a data cable. Insertion Loss (Attenuation) Insertion Loss is a measure of signal loss in the permanent link or channel. The term “Attenuation” has been used to designate “Insertion Loss.” Insertion Loss shall be tested from 1 MHz through 250 MHz in maximum step size of 1 MHz. It is preferred to measure insertion loss at the same frequency intervals as NEXT Loss in order to provide a more accurate calculation of the Attenuation9to9Crosstalk ratio (ACR) parameter. Minimum test result documentation (summary report and full plot data, in format and quantities called for): Identify the worst wire pair (1 of 4 possible). The test results for the worst wire pair must show the highest attenuation value measured (worst case), the frequency at which this worst case value occurs, and the test limit value at this frequency. NEXT Loss Pair9to9pair near9end crosstalk loss (abbreviated as NEXT Loss) shall be tested for each wire pair combination from each end of ARCHITECHNOLOGY CORNELL – NCP TESTING<IDENTIFICATION & ADMINISTRATION STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 27 05 53 – PAGE 16 OF 28 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 ` the link (a total of 12 pair combinations). This parameter is to be measured from 1 through 250 MHz. NEXT Loss measures the crosstalk disturbance on a wire pair at the end from which the disturbance signal is transmitted (near9end) on the disturbing pair. The maximum step size for NEXT Loss measurements shall not exceed the maximum step size defined in the standard as shown in Table 1, column 2. 3. Minimum test results documentation (summary report and full plot data, in format and quantities called for): Identify the wire pair combination that exhibits the worst case NEXT margin and the wire pair combination that exhibits the worst value of NEXT (worst case). 4. NEXT is to be measured from each end of the link9under9test. These wire pair combinations must be identified for the tests performed from each end. Each reported case should include the frequency at which it occurs as well as the test limit value at this frequency. Frequency Range (MHz) Maximum Step Sixe (MHz) 1 – 31.25 0.15 31.26 – 100 0.25 100 – 250 0.50 250 9 350 1.00 TABLE 1 PSNEXT Loss Power Sum NEXT Loss shall be evaluated and reported for each wire pair from both ends of the link under9test (a total of eight results). PSNEXT Loss captures the combined near9end crosstalk effect (statistical) on a wire pair when all other pairs actively transmit signals. Like NEXT this test parameter must be evaluated from 1 through 250 MHz and the step size may not exceed the maximum step size defined in the standard as shown in Table 1, column 2. Minimum test results documentation (summary report and full plot data, in format and quantities called for): Identify the wire pair that exhibits the worst9case margin and the wire pair that exhibits the worst value for PSNEXT. These wire pairs must be identified for the tests ARCHITECHNOLOGY CORNELL – NCP TESTING<IDENTIFICATION & ADMINISTRATION STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 27 05 53 – PAGE 17 OF 28 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 ` performed from each end. Each reported case should include the frequency at which it occurs as well as the test limit value at this frequency. ARCHITECHNOLOGY CORNELL – NCP TESTING<IDENTIFICATION & ADMINISTRATION STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 27 05 53 – PAGE 18 OF 28 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 ` ELFEXT Loss, pair to pair Pair9to9pair FEXT Loss shall be measured for each wire9pair combination from both ends of the link under9test. FEXT Loss measures the crosstalk disturbance on a wire pair at the opposite end (far9end) from which the transmitter emits the disturbing signal on the disturbing pair. FEXT is measured to compute ELFEXT Loss that must be evaluated and reported in the test results. ELFEXT measures the relative strength of the far9end crosstalk disturbance relative to the attenuated signal that arrives at the end of the link. This test yields 24 wire pair combinations. ELFEXT is to be measured from 1 through 250 MHz and the maximum step size for FEXT Loss measurements shall not exceed the maximum step size defined in the standard as in Table 1, column 2. Minimum test results documentation (summary report and full plot data, in format and quantities called for): Identify the wire pair combination that exhibits the worst9case margin and the wire pair combination that exhibits the worst value for ELFEXT. These wire pairs must be identified for the tests performed from each end. Each reported case should include the frequency at which it occurs as well as the test limit value at this frequency. PSELFEXT Loss Power Sum ELFEXT is a calculated parameter that combines the effect of the FEXT disturbance from three wire pairs on the fourth one. This test yields eight wire9pair combinations. Each wire9pair is evaluated from 1 through 250 MHz in frequency increments that do not exceed the maximum step size defined in the standard as shown in Table 1, column 2. Minimum test results documentation (summary report and full plot data, in format and quantities called for):): Identify the wire pair that exhibits the worst pair combinations must be identified for the tests performed from each end. Each reported case should include the frequency at which it occurs as well as the test limit value at this frequency. Return Loss Return Loss (RL) measures the total energy reflected on each wire pair. Return Loss is to be measured from both ends of the link9under9 ARCHITECHNOLOGY CORNELL – NCP TESTING<IDENTIFICATION & ADMINISTRATION STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 27 05 53 – PAGE 19 OF 28 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 ` test for each wire pair. This parameter is also to be measured form 1 through 250 MHz in frequency increments that do not exceed the maximum step size defined in the standard as shown in Table 1, column 2. Minimum test results documentation (summary report and full plot data, in format and quantities called for): Identify the wire pair that exhibits the worst9case margin and the wire pair that exhibits the worst value for Return Loss. These wire pairs must be identified for the tests performed from each end. Each reported case should include the frequency at which it occurs as well as the test limit value at this frequency ACR (Attention to crosstalk ratio) This parameter is not demanded by the standard but may be required in order to obtain the premise wiring manufacturer’s warranty]. ACR provides an indication of bandwidth for the two wire9pair network applications. ACR is a computed parameter that is analogous to ELFEXT and expresses the signal to noise ratio for a two wire9pair system. This calculation yields 12 combinations – six from each end of the link. Minimum test results documentation (summary results): Identify the wire pair combination that exhibits the worst9case margin and the wire pair combination that exhibits the worst value for ACR. These wire pair combinations must be identified for the tests performed from each end. Each reported case should include the frequency at which it occurs as well as the test limit value at this frequency PSACR NOTE: This parameter is not required by the standard but may be required in order to obtain the premise wiring vendor’s warranty. Provide as required for Manufacturer Warranty. The Power Sum version of ACR is based on PSNEXT and takes into account the combined NEXT disturbance of all adjacent wire pairs on each individual pair. This calculation yields eight combinations –one for each wire pair from both ends of the link. Minimum test results documentation (summary results): Identify the wire pair that exhibits the worst9case margin and the wire pair that exhibits the worst value for PSACR. These wire pairs must be identified for the tests performed from each end. Each reported case should include the frequency at ARCHITECHNOLOGY CORNELL – NCP TESTING<IDENTIFICATION & ADMINISTRATION STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 27 05 53 – PAGE 20 OF 28 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 ` which it occurs as well as the test limit value at this frequency. Propagation Delay Propagation delay is the time required for the signal to travel from one of the link to the other. This measurement is to be performed for each of the four wire pairs. Minimum test results documentation (summary report and full plot data, in format and quantities called for): Identify the wire pair with the worst9case propagation delay. The report shall include the propagation delay value measured as well as the test limit value Delay Skew (as defined in TIA/EIA95689B.1; Section 11.2.4.11) This parameter shows the difference in propagation delay between the four wire pairs. The pair with the shortest propagation delay is the reference pair with a delay skew value of zero. ARCHITECHNOLOGY CORNELL – NCP TESTING<IDENTIFICATION & ADMINISTRATION STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 27 05 53 – PAGE 21 OF 28 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 ` Minimum test results documentation (summary report and full plot data, in format and quantities called for): Identify the wire pair with the worst9case propagation delay (the longest propagation delay). The report shall include the delay skew value measured as well as the test limit value. DATA REPORTING AND ACCURACY The test results information for each link shall be recorded in the memory of the field tester upon completion of the test. The test results records saved by the tester shall be transferred into a Windows™9based database utility that allows for the maintenance, inspection and archiving of these test records. A guarantee must be made that the measurement results are transferred to the PC unaltered, i.e., “as saved in the tester” at the end of each test and that these results cannot be modified at a later time. The database for the completed job shall be stored and delivered on CD9ROM including the software tools required to view, inspect, organized, manage and print any selection of test reports. The detailed test result data to be provided in the electronic database for each tested link must contain the frequency9dependent test parameters, the value measured at every frequency during the test is stored. The PC9resident database program must be able to process the stored results to display and print a color graph of the measured parameters. The PC9resident software must also provide a summary numeric format in which some critical information is provided numerically as defined by the summary results (minimum numeric test results documentation) as outlined above for each of the test parameters. A paper copy of the test results shall be provided that lists all the links that have been tested with the following SUMMARY REPORT information: a) The identification of the link in accordance with the naming convention defined in the overall system documentation b) The overall Pass/Fail evaluation of the link9under9test including the NEXT Headroom (overall worst case) number c) The date and time the test results were saved in the ARCHITECHNOLOGY CORNELL – NCP TESTING<IDENTIFICATION & ADMINISTRATION STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 27 05 53 – PAGE 22 OF 28 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 ` memory of the tester 5. General Information to be provided in the electronic data base with the test results information for each link: a) The identification of the customer site as specified by the end9user b) The identification of the link in accordance with the naming convention defined in the overall system documentation c) The overall Pass/Fail evaluation of the link9under9test d) The name of the standard selected to execute the stored test results e) The cable type and the value of NVP used for length calculations f) The date and time the test results were saved in the memory of the tester g) The brand name, model and serial number of the tester h) The identification of the tester interface i) The revision of the tester software and the revision of the test standards database in the tester j) The test results information must contain the information on each of the required test parameters listed in this section of the specifications 6. General: a Pass or Fail result for each parameter shall be determined by the allowable limits for each parameter. If the test result of a parameter is closer to the test limit than the accuracy of the tester it shall be marked with an asterisk. Data at all measured points shall be uploaded to a P.C. and printed on a laser printer. 7. Wire Map: Wire map tests shall be marked “Pass” if wiring is determined correct. 8. Length: Test results shall be provided in meters and marked “Pass or Fail” based on the length vs. allowable length. 9. Submit copies in binder format and on compact disks containing all summary reports, full plot data test results, tester software tools required to view and inspect and print any selection of the test reports, spreadsheets, end to end reports and as built drawings called for at the completion of job. ARCHITECHNOLOGY CORNELL – NCP TESTING<IDENTIFICATION & ADMINISTRATION STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 27 05 53 – PAGE 23 OF 28 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 ` 3.5 THIRD PARTY VERIFICATION A. Owner’s representative shall be invited to witness field testing. The representative shall be notified of the start date of the testing phase 5 business days before testing commences. B. Owner’s representative may select a random sample of 1% of the installed links. The representative (or his authorized delegate) shall test these randomly selected links and the results are to be stored as called for in this section. The results obtained shall be compared to the data provided by the installation contractor. If more than 2% of the sample results differ in terms of the pass/fail determination, the installation contractor under supervision of the Owner’s representative shall repeat 100% testing and the cost shall be borne by the installation contractor. 3.6 TEST DOCUMENTATION A. Provide test report documentation in a hard copy summary report, by TR, in a three9ring binder, within 1 week prior to cutover of any phase of the project. Provide full plot data for any failures and any marginal passes and place yellow posted note affixed to each related printed page of the binder for review with Owner. Correct any deficiencies as direct by the Owner. B. The three9ring binder shall be clearly marked on the outside front cover and spine with the words “Test Results”, the project name, building name, Cornell assigned facility code number, the date of completion (month and year) and the Contractors name and address. A tab shall be provided for each TR and the test results organized by TR. The test reports in each TR tabbed section shall be sorted (before printing) by Patch Panel and port for each TR. C. Provide two CD’s with summary report, full plot data, test report within 1 week after the completion of the project. The disks shall placed into CD sleeves and placed into a three9ring binder clearly marked on the outside front cover and spine with the words “Test Results”, the project name, building name, Cornell assigned facility code number the date of completion (month and year) and the Contractors name and address. The electronic test results shall be sorted by TR into proper folders to match the heading of tabs in the tree ring binders. Also include in the binder, the summary information provided in A. above and the full plot data for any previous failures or marginal passes that have been corrected – with an explanation of the corrective action and the signature of the technician and the foreman. ARCHITECHNOLOGY CORNELL – NCP TESTING<IDENTIFICATION & ADMINISTRATION STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 27 05 53 – PAGE 24 OF 28 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 ` D. The binder and electronic folder/files shall divided by major heading tabs (or in the case of electronic files, be placed into a folders structure similar to the hardcopy tests of this section). E. Major heading tabs (folders) shall be divided into Horizontal and Backbone (both fiber and copper backbone). Each shall be further sectioned by test type and by TR and rack as applicable. F. For copper backbone, test all terminated, spliced, relocated or transferred pairs – two weeks before intended cutover. Test all pairs, end9to9end and record hand written results on the test sheet provided on the last page of this section. Coordinate access to the Central Office end of the backbone cable for end9to9end testing, as required, 1 week in advance with the CIT project manager. Correct deficiencies as directed by Owner and provide a minimum of 99% good pairs, for backbone cables.\ G. Provide updated cable schedules with all deviations, including all change order, field authorizations, moves, adds and changes. Include all cable ID changes, panel and port changes in each TR, room number changes, etc. 3.7 IDENTIFICATION & RECORDS A. Confirm specific labeling requirements with customer’s project manager prior cable installation or termination, even if detailed in the T4 drawings. 1. Pathways (a) Coordinate and identify all communication pullboxes per 27 05 28. 2. TR Rooms and Equipment Spaces (a) Coordinate and identify all communication racks and cabinet using a Letter designation (A,B,C etc.) as called on the T3 plans. (b) Coordinate and identify all communication patch panels using a Letter designation (A,B,C etc.) as called on the T3 plans and the cable schedules or as directed by the Owner ARCHITECHNOLOGY CORNELL – NCP TESTING<IDENTIFICATION & ADMINISTRATION STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 27 05 53 – PAGE 25 OF 28 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 ` (c) Coordinate and identify all voice patch panels using descriptor as designated by the Owner. These typically involved designators such as VPP9A, etc. 3. Cables (a) Label cables using the conventions identified in the cable schedules. The contractor shall review all labeling requirements before cable rough9in begins. (b) Provide written records in computer generated, table format for all cables, with the as9built drawings. (c) Update or generate cable schedules for all cable installed. (d) Update T2 drawings to reflect all field modifications and change orders. 4. Optical Fiber (a) Provide laser printed label for each fiber cable at the BDF, as directed by Owner. (b) The label shall be identical at both ends. 5. Station Outlets (a) Provide TIA 6069A compliant insert with clear plastic label cover on faceplates. Orient label and text per horizontal or vertical plate orientation and provide the maximum font size allowable. Align cable ID with specific modular jack and provide maximum fonts sizes and spacing between ID’s on the same label to provide desired alignment. (b) Provide a machine generated, preferably a laser printed, label in the insert. (c) Labels shall match the cable identifier called for on the drawings, cable schedules ARCHITECHNOLOGY CORNELL – NCP TESTING<IDENTIFICATION & ADMINISTRATION STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 27 05 53 – PAGE 26 OF 28 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 ` and as depicted in the detail faceplate and outlet drawings. ARCHITECHNOLOGY CORNELL – NCP TESTING<IDENTIFICATION & ADMINISTRATION STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 27 05 53 – PAGE 27 OF 28 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 ` Project Site: __________________________________ 1.1 BACKBONE COOPER CABLE TEST RECORD Date of test: ________________ Project Manager: _________________________ Cable Number:________Cable Count:_______From:_____________________To:____________________ Tested From:__________________________Tested To:____________________________(end locations) Testing Company:______________________________Technician:___________________ __________ Splicing Company:_____________________________Cable Placement Company:__________________________ BACKBONE CABLING Pair Color Pair # Test Results Pair # Test Results Pair # Test Results Pair # Test Results BL9W ______0 1 26 51 76 O9W 2 27 52 77 GR9W 3 28 53 78 BR9W 4 29 54 79 SL9W 5 30 55 80 BL9R 6 31 56 81 O9R 7 32 57 82 GR9R 8 33 58 83 BR9R 9 34 59 84 SL9R 10 35 60 85 BL9 BK 11 36 61 86 O9BK 12 37 62 87 GR9 BK 13 38 63 88 BR9 BK 14 39 64 89 SL9 BK 15 40 65 90 BL9Y 16 41 66 91 O9Y 17 42 67 92 GR9Y 18 43 68 93 BR9Y 19 44 69 94 ARCHITECHNOLOGY CORNELL – NCP TESTING<IDENTIFICATION & ADMINISTRATION STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 27 05 53 – PAGE 28 OF 28 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 ` SL9Y 20 45 70 95 BL9V 21 46 71 96 O9V 22 47 72 97 GR9V 23 48 73 98 BR9V 24 49 74 99 SL9V 25 50 75 _____ 00 END OF SECTION TEST RESULTS – Abbreviations to use in the columns above: 1) Pair is Good = OK 5) Tip Ground =T.G. 2) Ring Side Open =R.S.O. 6) Shorted Pair =S.P. 3) Tip Side Open =T.S.O. 7) Split Pair=SPL (ex. For tip side of #5 and #17 =T.of#5w/T. of #17 4) Ring Ground =R.G. 8) Reverse Sides =REV ARCHI-TECHNOLOGY CORNELL – NCP TELECOMMUNICATION ROOMS AND SPACES STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 27 11 00 – PAGE 1 OF 19 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 SECTION 27 11 00 TELECOMMUNICATION ROOMS AND SPACES PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide all labor, materials, tools, and equipment required for the complete installation of work called for in the Contract Documents. B. This section includes the minimum requirements for equipment and cable installations in telecommunication rooms (TRs). The following equipment is described in this section: 1. Floor Mounted Racks 2. Equipment Shelves 3. Cable Management 4. Fiber Patch Panels 5. Patch Panels 6. Termination Blocks 7. Cable Runway 8. Cable Supports 9. Grounding and Bonding 10. Hook and Loop Wraps 11. Power Strips 12. Firestop 13. PVC-25 pair rack interconnect cable C. If this document and any of the documents listed above are in conflict, then the more stringent requirement shall apply. All documents listed are believed to be the most current releases of the documents. The Contractor has the responsibility to determine and adhere to the most recent release when developing the proposal for installation. D. This document does not replace any code, either partially or wholly. The contractor must be aware of local codes that may impact this project. ARCHI-TECHNOLOGY CORNELL – NCP TELECOMMUNICATION ROOMS AND SPACES STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 27 11 00 – PAGE 2 OF 19 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. All equipment rooms shall be installed in a neat and workmanlike manner. All methods of construction that are not specifically described or indicated in the Contract Documents shall be subject to the control and approval of the Owners representative. Equipment and materials shall be of the quality and manufacture indicated. The equipment specified is based on the acceptable manufacturers listed. Where "approved equal” is stated, equipment shall be equivalent in every way to that of the equipment specified, and subject to approval. B. Materials and work specified herein shall comply with the applicable requirements of: 1. ANSI/TIA-568-C 2. ANSI/NECA/BICSI 568-2006 3. ANSI/TIA-569-B 4. ANSI/TIA-606-A 5. ANSI/TIA-607-B 6. Underwriters Laboratory 7. Federal Communications Commission 8. NFPA 70 – 2002 9. BICSI “Telecommunications Distribution Method Manual”, current edition. 10. NEMA-250 11. EIA 310-D 12. Section 26 05 26. 1.3 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Provide product data for the following, ONLY if deviating from the exact design make/part number or if a specific part number is not provided in the contract documents. 1. Floor Mounted Racks 2. Cable Management ARCHI-TECHNOLOGY CORNELL – NCP TELECOMMUNICATION ROOMS AND SPACES STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 27 11 00 – PAGE 3 OF 19 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 3. Fiber Patch Panels 4. Patch Panels 5. Termination Blocks 6. Cable Runway 7. Cable Supports 8. Grounding and Bonding 9. Hook and Loop Wraps 10. Power Strips 11. Firestop 12. PVC-25 pair rack interconnect cable B. Provide sample faceplate(s) of every style of faceplate planned for this project, in the colors as called for. C. Provide sample surface mounted outlet box(s) planned for this project, to confirm proper mounting and radius control. Coordinate with Division 26. D. `Provide sample labeling from handheld printers owner by contractor or intended to be used on this project, with labels as detailed on the drawings, specified in the cable schedules for each different type of faceplate to be used. Also provide labels for each style patch panel to be used, as detailed on the drawings, specified in the cable schedules for each different type of patch panel to be used (48 port UTP, 24 port UTP, and fiber patch panels) E. Also refer to Refer to Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 FLOOR MOUNTED RACKS A. Racks shall meet the following physical specifications: 1. 19” rack mounting space. 2. 7 foot high. 3. Aluminum construction, factory paint black in color. 4. 15” deep base with four (4) ¾” bolt down holes. ARCHI-TECHNOLOGY CORNELL – NCP TELECOMMUNICATION ROOMS AND SPACES STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 27 11 00 – PAGE 4 OF 19 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 B. Rack shall have double sided 12/24 tapped holes and 5/8”,5/8”, ½” standard EIA hole pattern. C. Design Make: Chatsworth Products Inc., black D. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Panduit 2. B-Line 3. Others as approved by Owner 2.2 CABLE MANAGEMENT A. Provide rack mounted horizontal and vertical cable management for all horizontal, backbone and patch cables. B. Panels shall have front and back channels with hinged covers. C. Cable management panels shall be plastic and have integral wire retaining fingers, radius fingers for maintaining proper bend radius for Category 6 and optical fiber cables. D. Management panels shall mount to any standard 19” rack and include all required mounting brackets and screws. E. Provide 2RU horizontal cable managers, in both open and closed configurations, as called for on the T3 drawings. F. Provide vertical cable manager as shown on the T3 drawings. Provide end panel cap for vertical cable manager furthest from the wall. G. Design Makes: 1. Vertical - Panduit WMPVHC45E, in black, as called for on the T3 drawings. Size: 7'H X 6"W X 13.8"D FRONT/REAR with covers. 2. Vertical - Panduit PRV8, 10 PATCHRUNNER Series, in black, as called for on the T3 drawings. FRONT/REAR. 3. Vertical - Panduit PRSHD8, 10 PATCHRUNNER single metal door, for each PRV Patchrunner, called for on the T3 drawings. Use *” wide version when 2 horizontal racks are side by side. 4. Horizontal Closed Cable Manager - Panduit WMPH2E Series, supplied with removable covers. Two rack units (2RU) in height typical, as called for on the T3 drawings. ARCHI-TECHNOLOGY CORNELL – NCP TELECOMMUNICATION ROOMS AND SPACES STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 27 11 00 – PAGE 5 OF 19 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 5. Horizontal Open Cable Manager - Panduit CMPHH2 Series, 3”x5” front only D-ring style, 2RU in height typical, as called for on the T3 drawings. 2.3 FIBER PATCH PANEL A. Shall be rack mounted as called for on the T3 Series rack elevations, program standard detail drawings and T1-FL Series fiber logical riser drawings. B. Shall be constructed with 16 gauge steel. C. Provide adapter panels with duplex SC couplers, mounted in housing, for all fiber cables installed. D. Rack mounted housings shall have splice organizer drawers that are removable or held open at 30 degree angle and translucent latching hinged front cover, as called for. E. Wall mounted housings shall have a lockable hinged door enclosing the cable loop and termination section and a latchable hinged door enclosing the connector section of the housing. F. Organizer drawers and wall mount cabinets shall come complete with routing rings for cable management and cable tie-down bars for support of main cable. G. Shall accommodate 48, 72 or 96 fibers as called for on the T3 drawing rack elevations and drawings. 1. Design make: Design makes: a) Corning Cable Systems Closet Connector Housings #CCH- 04U and #CCH-02U and PCH-01U Series as called for on drawings: T1-FL,T3 and program standard detail drawings. b) Corning Cable Systems 12-Fiber SC Duplex Panels for Multi-Mode strands #CCH-CP12-91 and blank filler panels for unused spaces. c) Corning Cable Systems 12-Fiber SC Duplex Panels for Single-Mode strands #CCH-CP12-59 and blank filler panels for unused spaces. 2.4 PATCH PANELS A. Patch Panels, for Category 6/6A connectivity 1. Physical Characteristics ARCHI-TECHNOLOGY CORNELL – NCP TELECOMMUNICATION ROOMS AND SPACES STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 27 11 00 – PAGE 6 OF 19 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 a) Panels shall be made of 16ga cold rolled steel with a black powder coat finish in 24, 48, and 96 port configurations. b) Panels shall accommodate a minimum of 24 ports for each rack mount space (1rms = 44.5 mm [1.75 in.]). c) Panels shall be manufactured with a rolled-edge at the top and bottom for stiffness. d) Panels shall accept Panduit Mini-Com modules for UTP, Optical Fiber, Audio and Video connectivity, which snap in and out for easy moves, adds and changes without re- termination of the cabling. Panels shall allow front access to installed modules. e) Panels shall mount to standard EIA 19” or 23” racks (with optional extender brackets. f) 48 port panels shall be supplied with 8 factory installed CFPLM6BL snap-in faceplates that readily accept TX6 Mini- Com jack modules. g) Panels shall have port identification capability (Machine generated) on both the front and rear of the panel. Front port identification on the 48 port panels shall be located between the rows of jacks. h) Panels shall terminate and arrange for modules in group of four (4). i) Panels shall feature vertical panel ID label holders. j) Labeling options to include laser printable paper and adhesive labels. k) Design Makes: 1) Mini-Com M6 Style Modular Faceplate Patch Panel - Panduit # CPPL48WBLY. 2) Mini-Com M6 Style Modular Angled Faceplate Patch Panel - Panduit # CPPLA48WBLY. 3) Acceptable Manufacturers: Others as approved only by Owner. B. Category 5e Voice Patch Panels 1. Physical Characteristics ARCHI-TECHNOLOGY CORNELL – NCP TELECOMMUNICATION ROOMS AND SPACES STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 27 11 00 – PAGE 7 OF 19 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 a) Shall exceed ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 Category 5e and ISO11801 Class D standards b) Each port shall be 100% tested to ensure NEXT and return loss performance and is individually serialized to support traceability c) Shall utilize 110 termination on back panel d) Each port contains a label that is color coded for Universal T568A/T568B wiring scheme. e) Terminates 4 pair, 22 - 24 AWG, 100 ohm, solid or stranded twisted pair cable f) Mount to standard EIA 19" rack. g) Write-on areas for port and panel identification available h) Can be clearly identified with labels and icons i) Design Makes: 1) Panduit # NK5EEP48P, 48-port 2RU panels, per T3 drawing, used with 1-pair connections, per RJ-45 port. 2) Acceptable Manufacturers: Others as approved only by Owner. 3) Panduit # NK5EPP24P, 24-port 1RU panel, per T3 drawing, used with 4-pair terminations/connections, per RJ-45 port. 4) Acceptable Manufacturers: Others as approved only by Owner. 2.5 TERMINATION BLOCKS A. Provide 110-300 pair wall mounted termination blocks as called for on T3 detail drawings. B. Provide 110-100 pair wall mounted termination blocks as called for on T3 detail drawings for wall terminate fire alarm cables. C. Provide color coded designation strips, and clear covers for all blocks per the Owner’s direction. D. Provide distribution ring backboard between blocks as per detail drawings. E. Design Makes: ARCHI-TECHNOLOGY CORNELL – NCP TELECOMMUNICATION ROOMS AND SPACES STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 27 11 00 – PAGE 8 OF 19 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 1. Systimax #110AW2-100 Wiring block with legs 2. Systimax #110AW2-300 Wiring block with legs 3. Systimax #110C-5, 5-pair clips, for all backbone copper risers 4. Systimax #188B1 metal backboard with distribution rings F. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Others as approved only by Owner. 2.6 CABLE RUNWAY A. Provide horizontal cable runway from wall to rack for horizontal cable support. B. Provide vertical cable runway from all sleeves, conduits and cable trays to the equipment racks for horizontal and backbone cable support inside the Telecommunication Room (TR). C. Cable runways shall have hollow side bars nominally 3/8” thick by 1 ½ “ H with rungs 9” on center to all TR’s. D. Provide connecting hardware to suit installation and provide a first class installation. This shall include, but not be limited to, standard rack-to- runways mounting plate for each 19” rack, wall angle support brackets, junction kits in various vertical and horizontal configurations, reducing fittings, radius fitting and cable drop outs, grounding kits, bonding kits, etc. E. Include all hardware for securing trays to each other, to the rack and to the wall F. Supply optional cable retaining posts per Section 3.4 of this section or called for on the T3 drawings. Chatsworth 11252-7xx series. G. Provide cable radius fittings as shown and called for on the T3 drawings. H. Provide one-tier or two-tier cable runways system, per T3 drawings. I. Provide cable drop out (waterfall) fittings as shown and called for on the T3 drawings, that are the next size smaller in width than the cable runways they are fastened to. (i.e 12” waterfall for 18” cable runway). J. Design make: Chatsworth Telco-Style Cable Runway System – hollow side bar for all TR’s. K. Acceptable manufacturers, only as approved in advance by Owner ARCHI-TECHNOLOGY CORNELL – NCP TELECOMMUNICATION ROOMS AND SPACES STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 27 11 00 – PAGE 9 OF 19 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 1. B-Line 2. Homaco 3. Newton Instrument Company 2.7 BACK BOARDS A. Provided by General Contractor and the installation coordinated by Division 26 and 27 contractors. B. Refer to additional Division 1 requirements, A3-Series drawings and T3- Series drawings. 2.8 CABLE SUPPORTS A. Velcro-type Hooks and Loop Wraps 1. Refer to Section 27 15 00 section 3.1 for additional requirements. B. Metal backboards for 110-Style Blocks 1. Provide systimax “D” ring metal backboards between 110 style blocks as shown on the drawings or as called for. 2. Design Make: systimax 188B backboard. C. Two-Hole straps for high pair count copper cables and innerducts 1. Refer to Section 27 13 00 requirements and design makes and installation requirements. D. Distribution rings for plywood backboard cable routing 1. Provide wall mounted “D” rings for wall mounted vertical and horizontal cable management as shown on the drawings or as called for. 2. Design Make: Senior Industries -SI-4754 - cross connect wiring, SI- 4755 Vertical and Horizontal Category 6 cable. 3. Acceptable manufacturers: a) Allen Tel b) Gardner Bender ARCHI-TECHNOLOGY CORNELL – NCP TELECOMMUNICATION ROOMS AND SPACES STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 27 11 00 – PAGE 10 OF 19 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 2.9 GROUNDING AND BONDING A. Provide standards compliant and code compliant Telecommunications Bonding Backbone (TBB). This backbone shall be used to ground all telecommunications cable shields, equipment, racks, cabinets, raceways, and other associated hardware that has the potential to act as a current carrying conductor. B. Provide standards compliant and code compliant telecommunications main grounding bus bar (TMGB). The main entrance facility/equipment room in each building shall be equipped with a telecommunications main grounding bus bar (TMGB). Each telecommunications room shall be provided with a telecommunications ground bus bar (TGB). The TMGB shall be connected to the building electrical entrance grounding facility. The intent of this system is to provide a grounding system that is equal in potential to the building electrical ground system. Therefore, ground loop current potential is minimized between telecommunications equipment and the electrical system to which it is attached. C. The Contractor shall bond all racks, metallic backboards, cable sheaths, metallic strength members, splice cases, cable trays, ladder runways, metallic conduits, metallic raceways, lightning protectors, etc. entering or residing in the TR room(s) to the respective TGB or TMGB using a minimum #6 AWG stranded copper bonding conductor and two hole compression connectors with ANSI compliant hole pattern. D. All wires used for telecommunications grounding purposes shall be identified with a green insulation. Non-insulated wires shall be identified at each termination point with a wrap of green tape. All cables and busbars shall be identified and labeled in accordance drawing details, ANSI/TIA- 607-B, Section 27 05 00 and the Cornell University Design and Construction Standards. E. Provide one 19” grounding bus Bar for each equipment rack in each TR, even if not specifically called for on the drawings. The T3 drawings typically identify the equipment on the rack elevation drawing (typically Rack 1 and possibly Rack 3). F. Use paint piercing screws and/or washers at racks on all finished surfaces (vertical racks, ladder racking etc) G. Installation and termination of the main bonding conductor to the building service entrance ground shall be performed by a licensed electrical contractor. H. Refer to E4 Grounding Riser Drawing, E4 TGB details, T3-series drawings AT Standard Detail 27 05 26 01-02 and specification section 27 05 00 for additional information. ARCHI-TECHNOLOGY CORNELL – NCP TELECOMMUNICATION ROOMS AND SPACES STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 27 11 00 – PAGE 11 OF 19 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 I. Installation and termination of the main bonding conductor to the building service entrance ground shall be performed by a licensed electrical contractor. J. Contractor shall coordinate the exact positioning of the TGB in each Telecommunication Room with the T3-Series drawings, the Owner and the Division 26 contractor, in the field in advance. 2.10 POWER STRIPS A. Shall meet U.L. 1363 and 1449 requirements. B. Provide two horizontal rack mount powerstrips for each Equipment Rack in each TR, even if not specifically called for on the drawings. The T3 drawings typically identify the equipment on the rack elevation drawing (typically Rack 1 and possibly Rack 3). C. Provide transformer spacing in 1RU height with a minimum of six (6) 20Amp NEMA 5-20R standard 20A, 125VAC receptacles. Each power strip shall be equipped with a minimum 15’ long plug ended cord - 125VAC, 20Amp, single phase, 2-pole, 3-wire grounding, NEMA 5-20P cord and standard plug. D. Each power strip shall be provided with optional surge suppression to block excessive voltage rated at 600V with UL1449 rating. E. Maximum Surge Current: 36,000 Amps (12,000 Amps L-N, 12,000 Amps L-G, 12,000 Amps N-G) F. Integral Protection indication to show the status of the unit. G. Do not provide toggle switch that can accidentally get bumped off, unless it has a switch guard over the switch. 1. Design Make: Wiremold R5BZ20-15, or approved equal. H. Approved Manufacturers: 1. Chatsworth 2. SGL Waber / Tripp Lite 3. Middle Atlantic Products 2.11 FLOOR MOUNT CABINET A. Floor mount cabinets shall meet the following physical specifications: 1. 19” equipment mounting section and hinged locking front door. ARCHI-TECHNOLOGY CORNELL – NCP TELECOMMUNICATION ROOMS AND SPACES STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 27 11 00 – PAGE 12 OF 19 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 2. 2500 lb weight capacity 3. Adjustable 19” mounting rails 4. Vented locking rear door 5. Solid locking front door 6. Overall dimensions - Hx22”Wx25”D 7. Height as shown on T3 drawings 8. Heavy steel construction, factory paint black in color. B. Design Make Middle Atlantic ERK-19-xxxx-AV series 2.12 WALL MOUNT CABINET A. Wall mount cabinets shall meet the following physical specifications: 1. 3 section cabinets include wall mount section with conduit knockouts, 19” equipment mounting section and hinged locking front door. 2. 2500 lb weight capacity 3. Overall dimensions - Hx22”Wx26”D 4. 24” usable depth. 5. Height as shown on T3 drawings 6. Heavy steel construction, factory paint black in color. B. Design Make Middle Atlantic DWR series PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 FLOOR MOUNTED RACKS A. Coordinate rack positioning and mock-up with other trades. Refer to 27 05 00 Part 3 Mock-Up section for additional coordination requirements B. All racks shall be anchored to the floor, with large heavy duty gauge fender washers and four anchor bolts. C. Provide vertical and horizontal cable management in the front and back. ARCHI-TECHNOLOGY CORNELL – NCP TELECOMMUNICATION ROOMS AND SPACES STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 27 11 00 – PAGE 13 OF 19 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 D. Mount rack a minimum of 36” from wall when orientated parallel to wall and tight to wall (after allowing for vertical cable managers) when perpendicular to wall. Coordinate rack placement with existing and proposed conditions. E. Ground the bottom of each rack to the TGB equipment ground bar with a #6 green copper wire. Provide aggressive cutting Type-B internal/external tooth lock washer. Torque properly to provide an acceptable bonded joint, for each nut to cut primed and painted surfaces. Refer to American Standard ASA B27.1-1965. These washers shall be used on all painted equipment racks, cable ladders, cable tray in TR’s. F. Coordinate with other utilities, trades and cable runway provisioning as required. Layout, mock-up all racks and cable runways for Owner review, alteration and approval before proceeding with any fabrication, especially in the basement BDF. G. Coordinate the relocation of existing equipment, power, conduits and cabling as directed by Owner. Provide necessary provisions and alterations to allow proper relocation without disruption of services. Refer to T2 and T3 Series removal plans. H. Alter, modify, or fabricate existing 19” equipment racks, shown for relocation to properly fit into the BDF room as indicated. Coordinate rework of existing service loops of fiber as directed by CIT. Coordinate with other utilities, trades and cable runway provisioning as required. 3.2 CABLE MANAGEMENT A. Provide racked mounted 2RU (3.5”) open and closed horizontal cable managers as shown. B. Install vertical cable managers, at the ends of each rack and between the racks, as shown on the T3 drawings. Provide closed end cap on exposed vertical end panels and provide rear hinged door (both items are accessories). C. Provide at least one 2RU horizontal cable manager for each 24 port or 48 UTP port panel and fiber patch panel installed, even if not specifically detailed on the drawings. 3.3 CABLE SUPPORTS A. Provide “D” rings 2 ft. on center for all exposed vertical cable runs terminated or routed exposed on the plywood backboards. ARCHI-TECHNOLOGY CORNELL – NCP TELECOMMUNICATION ROOMS AND SPACES STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 27 11 00 – PAGE 14 OF 19 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 B. Keep horizontal wall mounted cable runs to a minimum. In general horizontal runs shall be supported by overhead cable runway or overhead ladder runway. C. Provide cable brackets 4’ on center supported to building structure for all cable runs above ceilings where cable tray is not called for. D. Provide Velcro-type Hooks and Loop Wraps. Refer to Section 27 15 00 section 3.1 for additional requirements. E. Provide vertically mount cable runways or channel, affixed to floor and wall as applicable, where called for to support cables in a vertical plane. Provide hook and loop cable wraps for such situations, on 18” centers. 3.4 CABLE RUNWAY A. Install as shown on the drawings B. Secure rack to walls and to the top of the equipment racks. C. Provide elevated riser kits as called for on the T3 drawings. D. Ground and bond all sections of runways. E. Provide waterfalls and radius bends for proper cable routing and support, even if not specifically detailed on the drawings. F. When sleeves, conduits and cable tray enter a TR at a height of more than 2’ above the highest horizontal cable runways in a TR, provide wall mounted vertical cable runways section up to meet each horizontal pathway entering the TR and provide proper radius control and vertical cable support and fastening with hook and loop fasteners as called for elsewhere in this section. G. Provide optional cable retaining posts, 6” in height minimum with rubber end caps, that mount directly to cable runway side stringers, color to match cable runway provided. Provide a minimum of twelve (12) per TR room, even if not called out on the drawings and install per Owner’s direction. Chatsworth 10596 series. H. Ground the bottom of each rack to the TGB equipment ground bar with a #6 green copper wire. Provide aggressive cutting Type-B internal/external tooth lock washer. Torque properly to provide an acceptable bonded joint, for each nut to cut primed and painted surfaces. Refer to American Standard ASA B27.1-1965. These washers shall be used on all painted equipment racks, cable ladders, cable tray in TR’s. ARCHI-TECHNOLOGY CORNELL – NCP TELECOMMUNICATION ROOMS AND SPACES STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 27 11 00 – PAGE 15 OF 19 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 I. Coordinate cable runway positioning and mock-up with other trades. Refer to 27 05 00 Part 3 Mock-Up section for additional coordination requirements. 3.5 MISCELLANEOUS REQUIREMENTS A. Provide cable runway from overhead sleeve locations in closets to equipment racks and punch down block locations, in both the horizontal and vertical orientation so that cables can be supported on at least 2’ centers. B. Provide reusable, hook and loop wrap strips as the primary means for organizing all voice, data and coaxial cables station and patch cables in TR’s. Refer to 27 15 00, section 3.1 for additional requirements. C. All cables shall be neatly “dressed out” in equipment rooms. Cables to be neatly bundled and dressed to their respective panels or blocks. Each panel or block shall be fed by an individual bundle separated and dressed back to the point of cable entrance into the rack or frame. D. Each cable shall be clearly labeled on the cable jacket behind the patch panel at a location that can be viewed without removing the bundle support ties. Cables labeled within a bundle, where the label is obscured from view shall not be acceptable. E. Install factory supplied patch panel labels, in the corresponding T568A configuration, in all Category 6 UTP patch panels, BEFORE beginning to terminate cables. Cables terminated onto a patch panel without said port label strip shall not be acceptable. F. Install factory supplied patch panel labels, in the corresponding T568B configuration for all Category 5e voice interconnect patch panels, BEFORE beginning to terminate cables. Cables terminated onto a patch panel without said port label strip shall not be acceptable G. Fire Stop all sleeves and conduit openings at time or removal of existing abandoned cables and again at time of cable installation, as called for. 3.6 WALL TERMINATION BLOCKS A. Installed on plywood backboard so that top of block is 6’ AFF maximum. B. Pair untwist at the termination shall not exceed 3.18mm (0.125”). C. Also refer to UTP backbone called termination and labeling requirements in this section. ARCHI-TECHNOLOGY CORNELL – NCP TELECOMMUNICATION ROOMS AND SPACES STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 27 11 00 – PAGE 16 OF 19 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 D. The cable jacket shall be maintained as close as possible to the termination point. E. DO NOT MOUNT WALL MOUNTED TERMINATION BLOCKS WITH DRYWALL TYPE SCREWS. F. Mount Blocks with steel, zinc plated 5/16" slotted hex head #10 x 3/4" drill screws. Part #Metallics DS181 or equal. 3.7 GROUNDING AND BONDING A. Provide pre-drilled tin plated copper bus bar, with standard NEMA bolt hole sizing and spacing for connectors being used, in all telecommunication rooms. B. All connectors and clamps shall be mechanical type made of silicon bronze. C. Terminals shall be solderless compression type 2-hole lugs, copper long- barrel NEMA two bolt, and compliant with program standard detail drawings - TGB detail D. Provide #6 AWG conductor from the bus bar to the electrical system equipment ground. E. Bond the ground bar in the main Telecommunication Equipment Room (TR) to dedicated communications equipment electrical panelboard(s). F. Bond metallic equipment racks and cabinets to the ground bar. Bond racks in a bus or parallel configuration. Series connections are not acceptable. G. Bond the shield of shielded cable to the ground bar in communications rooms and spaces. H. Bond all backbone conduits and metallic raceways entering each TR to the ground bar in each communications rooms. I. Use an insulation-removal tool to remove the correct amount of jacket from the wire, as determined by the size of the connector and the gauge of the wire. J. Use a compression tool equipped with a die that matches the compression lug connector body, as recommended by the manufacturer. Leave approximately 6mm (o.25 inches) of copper showing between the end of the insulation on the wire and the end of the connector that the wire in insert into. ARCHI-TECHNOLOGY CORNELL – NCP TELECOMMUNICATION ROOMS AND SPACES STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 27 11 00 – PAGE 17 OF 19 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 K. Ensure that a minimum bend radius of eight times the conductor outside diameter is maintained where the wire changes direction. 3.8 PATCH PANELS. A. Patch Panels – Category 6 1. Panels shall be installed to provide minimal signal impairment by preserving wire pair twists as closely as possible to the point of mechanical termination. The amount of untwisting in a pair as a result of termination to the patch panel shall be no greater than 0.5 inches (13 mm) 2. Panels shall be installed according to manufacturer’s instructions and properly mounted to a rack, cabinet, bracket or other appropriate mounting device. 3. Panels shall be installed such that cables terminated to the panel can maintain minimum bend radius of at least 4 times the cable diameter into the IDC contacts. 4. Cables shall be terminated on the panels such that there is no tension on the conductors in the termination contacts. a) Panels shall be properly labeled on front and back with the cable number and port connections for each port, as per cable schedule drawings. 5. All cables shall be neatly “dressed out” in equipment rooms. Cables to be neatly bundled and dressed to their respective panels or blocks. Each panel or block shall be fed by an individual bundle separated and dressed back to the point of cable entrance into the rack or frame. 6. Each cable shall be clearly labeled on the cable jacket behind the patch panel at a location that can be viewed without removing the bundle support ties. Cables labeled within a bundle, where the label is obscured from view shall not be acceptable. 7. Install factory supplied patch panel labels, in the corresponding T568A configuration, in all Category 6 UTP patch panels, BEFORE beginning to terminate cables. Cables terminated onto a patch panel without said port label strip shall not be acceptable\ 8. Install factory supplied patch panel labels, in the corresponding T568B configuration for all Category 5e VOICE interconnect patch panels, BEFORE beginning to terminate cables. Cables terminated ARCHI-TECHNOLOGY CORNELL – NCP TELECOMMUNICATION ROOMS AND SPACES STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 27 11 00 – PAGE 18 OF 19 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 onto a patch panel without said port label strip shall not be acceptable 9. Pair untwist at the termination shall not exceed 3.18mm (0.125”). 10. The cable jacket shall be maintained as close as possible to the termination point. 11. Terminate all Category 6 patch panels with wiring scheme T568A 12. Terminate all Category 5e voice interconnect patch panels with wiring scheme T568B. Terminate 1 pair per port except for the last 6 ports in a patch panel which should be terminated 4 pairs per port.(Reference CU standard detail 27 13 43 01 for further information). 3.9 CLEANING A. Pre-acceptance cleaning 1. In all TR spaces - a through sweeping, vacuuming, and wet mopping/sponging shall be preformed, on a daily basis or less frequently as directed by Owner. Cleaning shall include floors, rafters, floor joists, exposed structural members, walls, ladder trays, tops of cabinets/racks, existing/new passive and active components, per manufacturer recommendations. 2. All non-metallic cable managers and snap covers shall be wiped clean, both inside and outside of front, including rear channels. All clear covers and doors shall be cleaned, both front and rear per manufacturer recommendations. 3. All non-metallic cable managers and snap covers shall be wiped clean, both inside and outside of front, including rear channels. All clear covers and doors shall be cleaned, both front and rear per manufacturer recommendations. 4. Inside of fiber optic enclosure and patch panels shall be blown clean of settled dust. Said cleaning shall be performed for all new construction projects or where gypsum sanding has been performed. 5. All scraps, boxes, spools, pull-line and trash shall be removed and properly disposed of. 6. All residual cable lubricant shall be cleaned from floors and walls with an appropriate degreaser. ARCHI-TECHNOLOGY CORNELL – NCP TELECOMMUNICATION ROOMS AND SPACES STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 27 11 00 – PAGE 19 OF 19 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 END OF SECTION ARCHI-TECHNOLOGY CORNELL – NCP BACKBONE CABLING STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 27 13 00 – PAGE 1 OF 26 NOVEMBER 2. 2012 SECTION 27 13 00 BACKBONE CABLING PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide all labor, materials, tools, and equipment required for the complete installation of work called for in the Contract Documents. 1.2 SCOPE A. Backbone cabling includes copper and optical fiber cabling between the Main Telecommunications Room (MTR) and subsequent Intermediate Telecommunications rooms (ITR’s). B. This section includes minimum requirements for the following: 1. Inside Plant (ISP) a) Optical Fiber Cable b) Innerducts c) Split Innerducts d) Optical Fiber Connectors e) Optical fiber splices f) Shielded UTP Copper Cable g) Clamps h) Bonding Braid i) Shield Bond Connectors j) Splicing Modules k) Splicing Tapes 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. All cable shall be installed in a neat and workmanlike manner. All methods of construction that are not specifically described or indicated in the contract documents shall be subject to the control and approval of the Owner's Representative. Equipment and materials shall be of the quality and manufacture indicated. The equipment specified is based upon the ARCHI-TECHNOLOGY CORNELL – NCP BACKBONE CABLING STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 27 13 00 – PAGE 2 OF 26 NOVEMBER 2. 2012 acceptable manufacturers listed. Where "approved equal" is stated, equipment shall be equivalent in every way to that of the equipment specified and subject to approval. B. Materials and work specified herein shall comply with the applicable requirements of: 1. ANSI/TIA – 568-C 2. ANSI/TIA – 569-B 3. NFPA 70 - 2002 4. BICSI Telecommunications Distribution Methods Manual, current edition 5. FCC 47 CFR 68 6. NEMA - 250 7. NEC - Articles 725,760, 770 and 800 8. IEEE C2 National Electrical Safety Code (2002) 9. ISO/IEC 11801 10. ANSI/TIA/EIA 607 11. ANSI/TIA/EIA 606-A (2002 or newer) 12. ANSI/NECA/BICSI 568 (2006 edition) C. The optical fiber cable plant shall be used to support Gigabit and 10- Gaigbit Ethernet networks. D. If this document and any of the documents listed above are in conflict, then the more stringent requirement shall apply. All documents listed are believed to be the most current releases of the documents. The Contractor has the responsibility to determine and adhere to the most recent release when developing the proposal for installation. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Manufacturers catalog sheets, specifications and installation instructions for all cable, connecting hardware and patch cables. B. Termination details for all cable types. ARCHI-TECHNOLOGY CORNELL – NCP BACKBONE CABLING STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 27 13 00 – PAGE 3 OF 26 NOVEMBER 2. 2012 C. List of three (3) installations of equivalent or larger systems that have been installed within the past two (2) years and have been operating satisfactorily for a minimum of one year. (Include names and phone numbers of references). D. Cable Test Reports (at substantial completion). E. Cable tension reports for optical fiber pulls backbone pulls over 200’and any optical fiber installed in existing underground/under slab conduits, per drawings T1-PL and T1-FL. F. Also refer to Refer to Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 INTERIOR GRADE OPTICAL FIBER CABLE FOR BUILDING BACKBONES A. Cable shall be riser rated and meet the requirements Flame Test: UL 910 (NFPA 262-1994) B. Fiber Characteristics 1. All fibers in the cable must be usable fibers and meet required specifications. 2. All optical fibers shall be sufficiently free of surface imperfections and inclusions to meet the optical, mechanical, and environmental requirements of this specification. 3. Each optical fiber shall consist of a doped silica core surrounded by a concentric glass cladding. The fiber shall be a matched clad design. 4. All optical fibers shall be proof tested by the fiber manufacturer at a minimum of 100 kpsi. 5. The fiber shall be coated with a dual layer acrylate protective coating. The coating shall be in physical contact with the cladding surface. 6. The coated fiber shall have a layer of Teflon placed between the dual layer acrylate coating of the optical fiber and the thermoplastic buffer. The diameter of the thermoplastic buffer coating shall be 900 ± 50 µm. 7. The fiber coating and buffer shall be removable with commercially available stripping tools in a single pass. ARCHI-TECHNOLOGY CORNELL – NCP BACKBONE CABLING STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 27 13 00 – PAGE 4 OF 26 NOVEMBER 2. 2012 C. The multimode fiber utilized in the cable specified herein shall meet EIA/TIA-492AAAA-1989, "Detail Specification for 62.5 µm Core Diameter/125 µm Cladding Diameter Class Ia Multimode, Graded Index Optical Waveguide Fibers." 1. Core diameter: 62.5 ± 3.0 µm. 2. Cladding diameter: 125.0 ± 2.0 µm. 3. Core-to-Cladding Offset: 3.0 µm. 4. Cladding non-circularity: 2.0 %. 5. Core non-circularity: 6.0 %. 6. Coating Diameter: 245 ± 10 µm 7. Graded index 8. Numerical Aperture: 0.275 ± 0.015. 9. Attenuation Uniformity: There shall be no point discontinuities greater than 0.2 dB at either 850 nm or 1300 nm. D. The non-dispersion shifted single-mode fiber utilized in the cable specified herein shall conform to the following specifications: 1. Typical Core Diameter: 8.3 µm. 2. Cladding Diameter: 125.0 ± 1.0 µm. 3. Core-to-Cladding Offset: 0.6 µm. 4. Cladding Non-Circularity: 1.0%. 5. Coating Diameter: 245 ± 10 µm. 6. Attenuation Uniformity- No point discontinuity greater than 0.1 dB at either 1310 nm or 1550 nm. 7. Attenuation at the Water Peak- The attenuation at 1383 ± 3 nm shall not exceed 2.1 dB/km. 8. Cutoff Wavelength- The cabled fiber cutoff wavelength shall be < 1260 nm. 9. Mode Field Diameter: 9.30 ± 0.50 µm at 1310 nm ARCHI-TECHNOLOGY CORNELL – NCP BACKBONE CABLING STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 27 13 00 – PAGE 5 OF 26 NOVEMBER 2. 2012 10. ± 1.00 µm at 1550 nm 11. Zero Dispersion Wavelength (o)- 1301.5 nm o 1321.5 nm. 12. Zero Dispersion Slope (So)- 0.092 ps/(nm²•km). 13. Fiber Curl: > 4.0 m radius of curvature. E. Fiber Parameters 1. (Multimode only) The minimum normalized bandwidth of multimode optical fibers shall be 200z km at 850 nm and 500 MHz km at 1300 nm. 2. (Single-mode) The maximum dispersion shall be 3.2 ps/(nm km) from 1285 nm to 1330 nm and shall be < 18 ps/(nm km) at 1550 nm. 3. All fibers in the cable shall meet the requirements of this specification. 4. The attenuation specification shall be a maximum attenuation for each fiber at 23 ± 5°C. 5. The attenuation of the cabled fiber shall be uniformly distributed throughout its length such that there are no discontinuities greater than 0.1 dB at 1310 nm/1550 nm (single-mode) or 0.2 dB at 850 nm/1300 nm (multimode) in any one kilometer length of fiber. F. Physical Characteristics 1. Riser and Plenum Cables up to 24 Fibers: a) The fibers may be stranded around a dielectric central member and surrounded by layered aramid yarns. The aramid yarns shall serve as the tensile strength member of the cable. b) A ripcord shall be applied between the aramid yarns and the outer jacket to facilitate jacket removal. c) The outer jacket shall be extruded over the aramid yarns for physical and environmental protection. 2. Riser and Plenum Cables with 24 to 72 Fibers: a) The buffered fibers shall be grouped in six fiber subunits. In each subunit, the individual fibers shall be stranded around a ARCHI-TECHNOLOGY CORNELL – NCP BACKBONE CABLING STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 27 13 00 – PAGE 6 OF 26 NOVEMBER 2. 2012 dielectric central member and surrounded by layered aramid yarns. b) A ripcord shall be incorporated in the subunit design to facilitate access to the individual fibers. c) The subunit jacket shall be extruded over the aramid yarns for additional physical and environmental protection. d) The subunits shall be stranded around a dielectric central member. e) A ripcord shall be inserted beneath the outer jacket to facilitate jacket removal. f) The outer jacket shall be extruded around the units for physical and environmental protection. 3. Strength Members: a) The strength member shall be a high modulus aramid yarn. b) The aramid yarns shall be helically stranded around the buffered fibers. c) Non-toxic, non-irritant talc shall be applied to the yarn to allow the yarns to be easily separated from the fibers and the jacket. 4. Cable Jacket: a) The jacket shall be continuous, free from pinholes, splits, blisters, or other imperfections. b) The jacket shall have a consistent, uniform thickness; jackets extruded under high pressure are not acceptable. c) The jacket shall be smooth, as is consistent with the best commercial practice. 5. The jacket shall provide the cable with a tough, flexible, protective coating, able to withstand the stresses expected in normal installation and service. 6. The cable and subunit jacket color shall be orange for cables containing multimode fibers. The cable and subunit jacket color shall be yellow for cables containing single-mode fibers. ARCHI-TECHNOLOGY CORNELL – NCP BACKBONE CABLING STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 27 13 00 – PAGE 7 OF 26 NOVEMBER 2. 2012 7. For cables with more than two fibers, the cable jacket shall be designed for easy removal without damage to the optical fibers by incorporating a ripcord under each cable jacket. Non-toxic, non- irritant talc shall be applied to the aramid yarns to allow the yarns to be easily separated from the fibers and the jacket. 8. The nominal thickness of the cable outer jacket shall be sufficient to provide adequate cable protection while meeting the mechanical, flammability, and environmental test requirements of this document over the life of the cable. 9. The cable shall be all-dielectric. G. Identification 1. The individual fibers shall be color coded for identification. The optical fiber color coding shall be in accordance with ANSI/TIA-598, "Color Coding of Fiber Optic Cables." The coloring material shall be stable over the temperature range of the cable, shall not be susceptible to migration, and shall not affect the transmission characteristics of the optical fibers. Color coded buffered fibers shall not adhere to one another. When fibers are grouped into individual units, each unit shall be numbered on the unit jacket for identification. The number shall be repeated at regular intervals. 2. The outer cable jacket shall be marked with the manufacturer's name or file number, date of manufacture, fiber type, flame rating, listing mark, and sequential length markings every two feet. The marking shall be in contrasting color to the cable jacket. H. Additional Requirements 1. The storage temperature range for the cable on the original shipping reel shall be -40°C to +70°C. The installation/operating temperature range for plenum cables shall be 0°C to +70°C. Testing shall be in accordance with FOTP-3. 2. Crush Resistance - The cable shall withstand a minimum compressive load of 89 N/cm (50 lbf/in) applied uniformly over the length of the compression plate. The cable shall be tested in accordance with FOTP-41, "Compressive Loading Resistance of Fiber Optic Cables." While under compressive load, the fibers shall not experience an attenuation change greater than 0.4 dB at 1550 nm (single-mode) or greater than 0.6 dB at 1300 nm (multimode). After the compressive load is removed, the fibers shall not experience an attenuation change greater than 0.2 dB at 1550 nm (single-mode) or greater than 0.4 dB at 1300 nm (multimode). ARCHI-TECHNOLOGY CORNELL – NCP BACKBONE CABLING STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 27 13 00 – PAGE 8 OF 26 NOVEMBER 2. 2012 3. Impact Resistance - The cable shall withstand a minimum of 20 impact cycles. The cable shall be tested in accordance with FOTP- 25, "Repeated Impact Testing of Fiber Optic Cables and Cable Assemblies." The fibers shall not experience an attenuation change greater than 0.2 dB at 1550 nm (single-mode) or greater than 0.4 dB at 1300 nm (multimode). 4. Cyclic Flexing - The cable shall withstand 25 mechanical flexing cycles at a rate of 30 ± 1 cycles per minute. The cable shall be tested in accordance with FOTP-104, "Fiber Optic Cable Cyclic Flexing Test." The fibers shall not experience an attenuation change greater than 0.2 dB at 1550 nm (single-mode) or greater than 0.4 dB at 1300 nm (multimode). 5. Flammability - All cables shall comply with the requirements of the National Electrical Code (NEC ), Article 770. Plenum cables (OFNP) shall pass UL-910. 6. Design Make: Corning Cable Systems, MIC Riser Cable Series, OFNR rated (or plenum if required by field conditions), standard or hybrid make-up with 62.5/125 multimode and single mode as called for on the T1-FL logical riser drawings, per below. Contractor shall confirm these part number as correct and fully compliant to meeting the requirements of the contract documents before ordering. 7. Corning MIC DX (non metallic armored) (orange jacket) Fiber with similar characteristics may be used instead of MIC riser rated cable and innerduct. 8. Indoor, OFNR Rated 12SM/6MM – Part # 018X81-331XX-24 9. Indoor, OFNR Rated 6SM - Part # 006E81-31131-24 2.2 INNER DUCT A. Shall be constructed of a PVC Riser rated or plenum rated plastic as required. B. For riser installations, shall meet NEC 770-53 requirements. C. Shall be .75 ”, 1" or 1.25" in diameter as called for on the drawings or as directed by Owner. D. Shall be white or orange in color. E. Shall have a maximum flame rating of UL 910. F. Not required if MIC DX non metallic armored fiber optic cable is used. ARCHI-TECHNOLOGY CORNELL – NCP BACKBONE CABLING STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 27 13 00 – PAGE 9 OF 26 NOVEMBER 2. 2012 G. Design Make: Carlon DF4X1C (with pull rope) H. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Endot 2. Dura-Line 3. Arnco 2.3 OPTICAL FIBER CABLE CONNECTORS A. Backbone optical fiber connectors shall be duplex 568SC type. B. The terminations shall comply with the following standards: 1. TIA/EIA-604-3 Fiber Optic Connector Intermateability Standard, FOCIS-3 (Type SC) 2. EIA/TIA-4750000B Generic Specifications for Fiber Optic Connectors 3. EIA/TIA-455-A Standard Test Procedures for Optical Fibers, Cables, Transducers, Sensors, Connecting and Terminating Devices, and Other Fiber Optic Components (FOTPs) C. Connector Characteristics. 1. Strain relief: The connector shall provide a strain relief mechanism for installation on a single fiber cable that contains strength elements. The fiber within the body of the connector shall be isolated mechanically from cable tension, bending and twisting. 2. The connector shall have an optical axial pull strength of 2.2 N at 0 degree angle and an optical off axial pull strength of 2.2 N at a 90 degree angle, with a maximum 0.5 dB increase in attenuation for both tests when tested in accordance with ANSI/EIA/TIA-455-6B. 3. The maximum optical attenuation per each mated field installed 568SC connector pair shall not exceed 0.5 dB. 4. Shall have a return loss greater than or equal to 20 dB for multimode fiber and greater than or equal to 26 dB for single mode fiber. D. The connectors shall sustain a minimum of 500 mating cycles without degrading this performance. E. Intermateability: The connector shall be designed in compliance with the appropriate TIA FOCIS document. ARCHI-TECHNOLOGY CORNELL – NCP BACKBONE CABLING STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 27 13 00 – PAGE 10 OF 26 NOVEMBER 2. 2012 F. Installation rate: The connector shall be installable on 900 µm buffered fiber in 1 minute or less total time. G. Installation polishing: The connector shall not require polishing of the endface in the field. Connectors shall have a factory-polished fiber stub in the connector ferrule. H. Installation type: The connector installation shall not require the use of epoxies. I. Fiber protection: The connector crimp-on mechanism shall protect the bare fiber from the ingress of air or waterborne contaminants and shall secure the fiber in the ferrule micro-hole. ARCHI-TECHNOLOGY CORNELL – NCP BACKBONE CABLING STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 27 13 00 – PAGE 11 OF 26 NOVEMBER 2. 2012 J. Performance Requirements. Multimode Testing Max delta change Final Measurement FOTP-171 METHOD B1 METHOD B1 REQ.: <.75dB N/A 0.11 dB TYP 0.19 dB MAX FOTP 107 RETURN LOSS REQ.: <-20dB N/A -42.5 dB TYP -36.3 dB MIN FOTP-2 IMPACT 8 DROPS/ 1.5 M N/A 0.14 dB IL -41.3 dB RL FOTP-1 FLEX 0.5 KG N/A 0.18 dB IL -41.3 dB RL FOTP-36 TWIST 15 N AT 0 º N/A 0.20 dB IL -41.2 dB RL FOTP-6 CABLE RETENTION 66 N AT 0 º 0.06 dB 0.20 dB IL -41.2 dB RL FOTP-6 CABLE RETENTION 19.4 N AT 90 º 0.06 dB 0.19 dB IL -41.2 dB RL FOTP-185 COUPLING MECH 33 N AT 0 º N/A 0.13 dB IL -41.5 dB RL FOTP-21 DURABILITY 500 CYCLES N/A dB IL -36.3 dB RL FOTP-4 TEMP LIFE 60ºC/ 14 DAYS 0.01 dB 0.08 dB IL -39.0 dB RL FOTP-5 HUMIDITY 4 DAYS @ 95% 0.15 dB .09 dB IL -38.9 dB RL FOTP-188 LOW TEMP. -10 ºC/4 DAYS 0.22 dB 0.13 dB IL -42.3 dB RL ARCHI-TECHNOLOGY CORNELL – NCP BACKBONE CABLING STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 27 13 00 – PAGE 12 OF 26 NOVEMBER 2. 2012 Single Mode Testing Max delta change Final Measurement FOTP-171 METHOD B1 INSERTION LOSS N/A dB TYP 0.52 dB MAX FOTP 107 RETURN LOSS N/A -44.4 dB TYP -36.2 dB MIN FOTP-2 IMPACT 8 DROPS/ 1.5 M N/A dB IL -40.6 dB RL FOTP-1 FLEX 0.5 KG N/A 0.40 dB IL -40.1 dB RL FOTP-36 TWIST 15 N AT 0 º N/A 0.37 dB IL -40.2 dB RL FOTP-6 CABLE RETENTION 66 N AT 90 º 0.20 dB 0.39 dB IL -42.3 dB RL FOTP-6 CABLE RETENTION 19.4 N AT 90 º 0.11 dB 0.34 dB IL -43.2 dB RL FOTP-185 COUPLING MECH 33 N AT 0 º N/A 0.37 dB IL -45.0 dB RL FOTP-21 DURA- BILITY 500 CYCLES N/A 0.35 dB IL -40.5 dB RL FOTP-4 TEMP LIFE 60ºC/ 14 DAYS 0.24 dB 0.29 dB IL -44.2 dB RL FOTP-5 HUMIDITY 4 DAYS @95% 0.10 dB 0.30 dB IL -43.9 dB RL FOTP-188 LOW TEMP. -10 ºC 0.18 dB 0.29 dB IL -44.1 dB RL K. Design Makes: 1. Multi-Mode, SC, Ceramic Tip, CamLite UniCamSeries Corning Cable Systems - # 95-000-41 2. Single-Mode, SC, Ceramic Tip, CamLite UniCam Series Corning Cable Systems - # 95-200-41 2.4 OPTICAL FIBER SPLICES A. Splices are not allowed, unless called for on the drawings to tie-in to existing backbone splice enclosures. ARCHI-TECHNOLOGY CORNELL – NCP BACKBONE CABLING STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 27 13 00 – PAGE 13 OF 26 NOVEMBER 2. 2012 B. Should fiber be broken during installation the entire run shall be replaced. 2.5 SHIELDED UTP COPPER CABLE (BETWEEN TRS) A. Backbone copper cables shall consist of 24 AWG, groups of 25 pair thermoplastic insulated copper conductors following the ANSI/ICEA S-80- 576 color code. The 25 pair groups shall be bound together and covered by a protective sheath consisting of an overall thermoplastic jacket and one layer of dielectric material applied over the core. B. The cable shall be listed and marked for its use as required by article 800 of the current NEC code. Provide ARMM/CMR rated cable. C. Backbone cables shall be used for telephone systems only and shall be third party verified Category 3. D. Transmission Characteristics: 1. The resistance of any conductor, measured in accordance with ASTM D 4566 shall not exceed 9.38 ohms per 100m at 20 degrees C. 2. The resistance unbalance between the two conductors of any pair shall not exceed 5%. 3. The mutual capacitance of any pair shall not exceed 6.6 nF per 100m. 4. The capacitance unbalance to ground at 1 kHz of any pair shall not exceed 330 pF per 100m. 5. The characteristic impedance shall be 100 ohm +/- 15% from 1 kHz to 16 MHz. 6. The attenuation shall meet the requirements of the horizontal cable specified in section 27 15 00. 7. The insulation between each conductor and the core shield shall be capable of withstanding a minimum dc potential of 5 kV for 3 seconds. 8. The propagation delay of any pair at 10 MHz should not exceed 5.7 ns/m. ARCHI-TECHNOLOGY CORNELL – NCP BACKBONE CABLING STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 27 13 00 – PAGE 14 OF 26 NOVEMBER 2. 2012 9. The Power Sum NEXT loss shall meet the following: Frequency (MHz) NEXT loss (dB) 0.150 53 0.772 43 1.0 41 4.0 32 8.0 27 10.0 26 16.0 23 E. Shall be of size indicated on the drawings. F. Shall consist of a core of 24 AWG solid annealed copper conductors, color coded in accordance with telephone industry standards. G. Transmission Characteristics: 1. The nominal resistance of any conductor shall not exceed 27.3 ohms per 1000 feet at 20 degrees C. 2. The mutual capacitance of any pair shall not exceed 15.7 nF per 1000 feet at 1 kHz. 3. The maximum attenuation at 1.0 MHz shall not exceed 6.8 dB per 1000 feet. 4. The characteristic impedance shall be 100 ohm +/- 15% from 1 kHz to 16 MHz. H. Conductors shall be twisted to form pairs. Cable having more that 25 pairs shall be assembled in units, each individually identified by color coded unit binders. I. The core shall be covered with a plastic tape. J. The core and tape shall be overlaid with a corrugated shield applied longitudinally with overlap using the following materials: 1. .008 inch coated aluminum 2. .005 inch copper 3. Shall be bonded to outer jacket to form an ALVYN sheath. ARCHI-TECHNOLOGY CORNELL – NCP BACKBONE CABLING STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 27 13 00 – PAGE 15 OF 26 NOVEMBER 2. 2012 K. The outer jacket shall consist of a fire retardant sheath that meets NEC low flame requirements. L. Cable shall be suitable, listed and marked for use in a riser application. (CMR) M. Manufacturer’s cable code, pair size, manufacturing plant location, month and year or manufacture shall be marked on cable every two feet. N. Design Make: Essex xxxx024EAA (xxxx=number of pairs) size and quantity indicated on the T1-CL and T3 drawings. O. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. General Cable 2. Norcom / CDT - Belden 3. Superior / Essex 2.6 UNSHIELDED UTP COPPER CABLE (VPP TO WALL) A. Backbone copper interconnect cables shall consist of 24 AWG, 25 pair thermoplastic insulated copper conductors following the ANSI/ICEA S-80- 576 color code. The 25 pair group shall be bound together and covered by a protective sheath consisting of an overall thermoplastic jacket and one layer of dielectric material applied over the core. B. The cable shall be listed and marked for its use as required by article 800 of the 2005 NEC. Provide CM rated cable for interconnect cables routed within a TR, generally between the wall mounted termination field(s) and the Rack mounted voice patch panels. C. Backbone cables shall be used for telephone systems only and shall be third party verified Category 3. D. Transmission Characteristics: 1. The resistance of any conductor, measured in accordance with ASTM D 4566 shall not exceed 9.38 ohms per 100m at 20 degrees C. 2. The resistance unbalance between the two conductors of any pair shall not exceed 5%. 3. The mutual capacitance of any pair shall not exceed 6.6 nF per 100m. ARCHI-TECHNOLOGY CORNELL – NCP BACKBONE CABLING STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 27 13 00 – PAGE 16 OF 26 NOVEMBER 2. 2012 4. The capacitance unbalance to ground at 1 kHz of any pair shall not exceed 330 pF per 100m. 5. The characteristic impedance shall be 100 ohm +/- 15% from 1 kHz to 16 MHz. 6. The attenuation shall meet the requirements of the horizontal cable specified in section 27 15 00. 7. The propagation delay of any pair at 10 MHz should not exceed 5.7 ns/m. 8. The Power Sum NEXT loss shall meet the following: Frequency (MHz) NEXT loss (dB) 0.150 53 0.772 43 1.0 41 4.0 32 8.0 27 10.0 26 16.0 23 E. Shall be of size and quantity indicated on the drawings. F. Shall consist of a core of 24 AWG solid annealed copper conductors, color coded in accordance with telephone industry standards. G. Transmission Characteristics: 1. The nominal resistance of any conductor shall not exceed 27.3 ohms per 1000 feet at 20 degrees C. 2. The mutual capacitance of any pair shall not exceed 15.7 nF per 1000 feet at 1 kHz. 3. The maximum attenuation at 1.0 MHz shall not exceed 6.8 dB per 1000 feet. 4. The characteristic impedance shall be 100 ohm +/- 15% from 1 kHz to 16 MHz. H. Conductors shall be twisted to form pairs. I. Cable shall be suitable, listed and marked for general use (CM) per the NEC code. ARCHI-TECHNOLOGY CORNELL – NCP BACKBONE CABLING STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 27 13 00 – PAGE 17 OF 26 NOVEMBER 2. 2012 J. Manufacturer’s cable code, pair size, manufacturing plant location, month and year or manufacture shall be marked on cable every two feet. K. Design Make: Mohawk -3NP25P24-GY PVC - jacketed 25-pair in size to be used for backboard to voice patch panel interconnect cabling, in quantities indicated on the T3 drawings. L. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. General Cable 2. Norcom / CDT - Belden 3. Superior / Essex 2.7 SPLICING ENCLOSURES A. Backbone copper closures shall consist of a black solid or split PVC sleeve as indicated on the drawings. B. Minimum inside diameter shall be a minimum of 9” diameter (127mm). C. Minimum inside length shall be 26" (660mm). D. Actual sizes shall be indicated on the drawings. Otherwise, closure to be sized to accommodate the maximum number of cable pairs to be spliced and the type of connector to be used for splicing. E. Closure shall be flame retardant. F. Closure shall be re-enterable. G. When assembled with properly sized end caps, bushing, plugs and clamps, the closure shall be air and water tight. H. Design Make: 1. 3M KB Series or approved equal. 2.8 BONDING HARNESSES A. Shall be used to ground the shields of the spliced cables. B. Bonding harness shall be 14 AWG and sized according to closure. C. Adhere to all manufacturer installation guidelines. D. Design Make: ARCHI-TECHNOLOGY CORNELL – NCP BACKBONE CABLING STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 27 13 00 – PAGE 18 OF 26 NOVEMBER 2. 2012 1. 3M or approved equal 2.9 SPLICING MODULES A. Crimping process shall strip the installation from the wire and trim the excess wire. B. The module shall create a gas tight connection. C. All modules shall have test entry ports on the front side of the module. D. Straight splicing modules shall have a yellow cover and body top and the base and body bottom shall be dark gold. E. Pluggable/Bridge splicing modules shall have a transparent cover, the body top and bottom shall be blue and the insulator shall be red. F. Design Make: 1. Straight Splicing Modules - 3M # 4000-C 2. Pluggable/Bridge Splicing Modules – 3M # 4005-CBM/TR 3. 3M UY2 wire connectors may be used for small pair count splices, pending owner approval. 2.10 SPLICING TAPES A. Shall be all weather, Vinyl Plastic material. B. Shall resist: 1. Water 2. Acids 3. Alkalies C. Shall be flame retardant D. Shall not be affected by sunlight. E. Shall release smoothly in zero weather and will not ooze adhesive in hot climates. F. Design Make: 1. 3M Scotch 88T Series ARCHI-TECHNOLOGY CORNELL – NCP BACKBONE CABLING STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 27 13 00 – PAGE 19 OF 26 NOVEMBER 2. 2012 2.11 BONDING CONNECTORS A. Shall consist of a base and upper member, two securing nuts and a plastic shoe to aid connector installation and protect the conductors. B. Base and upper members shall be made of tin plated tempered brass, slightly curved so as to exert a continuous spring form on sheath and shield after clamping. C. Design Make: 1. 3M Part # 4460 – S Shield Bond Connector for cables of greater than 100 pair. 2. 3M Part # 4460 – D Shield Bond Connector for cables of less than 100 pair. 2.12 GROUNDING BRAID A. Shall be a flat tin plated copper braid conductor. B. Shall have eyelets at regular intervals. C. Eyelets shall fit shield connector studs up to 6 mm (1/4") in diameter. 2.13 2.14 EXPANDABLE CONDUIT PLUGS A. Seal all open underground and telecommunications conduits entering and existing the building and the BDF. B. For spare conduits, provide expandable conduit plugs with rope tie rings to seal spare conduits and tie off any existing pull-string or existing pull-lines. This shall include conduits for CIT cables and Verizon conduits. C. Design Make: Osburn Associates, Condux International or approved equal PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. OPTICAL FIBER CABLE 1. General a) Interior cable installed shall be in metallic conduit. Do not install with UTP or coax cables. ARCHI-TECHNOLOGY CORNELL – NCP BACKBONE CABLING STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 27 13 00 – PAGE 20 OF 26 NOVEMBER 2. 2012 b) Interior cable installed in pass-through existing IDF closets, shall be protected with metallic U-Guard. Refer to drawing T1-PL and T1-FL for additional requirements. Temporary float existing backbone cable and termination blocks from plywood walls to allow order and straight installation of backbone cables and U-Guard. c) Maintain polarization for entire system as described in ANSI/EIA/TIA-568-A section 12.7.1. d) Cable shall be continuous. Splices are not allowed. 2. Cable Pulling a) Adhere to all manufacturers’ requirements regarding pulling tension, allowable lubricants and bending radius. b) Provide cable pullers designed to suit field conditions. (i.e. horizontal vault pulls, vertical pulls and 45 degree pulls) c) Use cable guides with aluminum adapters sized for the 1 ¼” cells. Provide extensions, sheaves and adapters as required by the installation conditions. d) Use directional pulling swivels as conditions require. e) Use Line Tension meter during cable pull to provide accurate measurements of the force exerted on a cable as it is installed. The meter shall have a programmable overload set point with an audible and visual indication of an overload condition. The meter shall have controls to disengage the cable puller if an overload occurs. Provide chart recorded documentation of the cable pull for the owner’s records. f) Provide cable racks in manholes to support cable. g) Provide a minimum 20 foot service loop at the BDF, TR and IDF locations. 3.2 INNER DUCTS AND SPIRAL WRAPS A. Innerduct shall be placed with entrance cable for fiber optic installations. B. Innerduct shall be provided for all interior building optical fiber cables, in a minimum of 1” diameter. Place innerduct inside EMT conduits that have been provided. Place a spare pull-line in during installation of the innerduct. ARCHI-TECHNOLOGY CORNELL – NCP BACKBONE CABLING STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 27 13 00 – PAGE 21 OF 26 NOVEMBER 2. 2012 C. Support exposed innerduct in riser closets, TR’s, IDF’s and BDF’s on a minimum 3’ centers with 2-hole straps on plywood backboards, or supports approved by owner. D. Support exposed innerduct in riser closets, TR’s, IDF’s and BDF’s on a minimum 3’ centers with 1.5” wide hook and loop straps on ladder racks, cable runways or on or in racks and cabinets. E. Provide split innerduct or split spiral wrap on exposed cable sheaths at racks, cabinets and fiber splice bays and patch panels. Also refer to 17110 for spriral wraps. F. Provide split innerduct, larger than the outside diameter of solid innerduct used, when fiber cable is exposed in riser closets, TR’s, EF’s, IDF’s, BDF’s, pullboxes and maintenance holes. Fiber shall not be left exposed when solid innerduct is not continuous. G. Provide innerduct or split innerduct to conceal existing fiber that is called for to remain or be relocated within TR’s and BDF’s as directed by Owner. 3.3 RACK INTERCONNECT CABLES A. Review wall mount house cable block to modular patch panel interconnection termination requirement in the field with Owner, for all PVC-25 pair interconnect cables in the TR rooms, before rough-in of cables. Provide ample cable slack for proper dressing of cables at termination points. B. DO NOT mix the Category 6 cables and the PVC-25 cable in the vertical cable managers. C. Terminate ONE pair on pins 4 and 5 of each RJ-45 modular on every 48- port of the voice patch panels, as indicated on the T3 drawing. D. Terminate FOUR pairs per each RJ-45 modular on the one 24-port of the voice patch panel, as indicated on the T3 drawing. E. Review wall mount house cable block to modular patch panel interconnection termination requirement in the field with Owner, for all PVC-25 pair interconnect cables in the TR rooms -- before rough-in of backbone copper cables. Provide ample cable slack for proper dressing of cables at termination points and provide shield bond connectors at all cable sheath opening. F. PVC-25 pair cable shall be routed between the wall 110-300 termination block, onto the cable runways down to the 48-port and 24-port Category 3 RJ45 voice patch panels as called for. ARCHI-TECHNOLOGY CORNELL – NCP BACKBONE CABLING STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 27 13 00 – PAGE 22 OF 26 NOVEMBER 2. 2012 G. Route PVC-25 cable down center void of between the two vertical cable manager installed to create a separate channel for these cables. DO NOT mix the Category 6 cables, patch cords or the PVC-25 cable in a common vertical cable manager. H. Test all terminated conductors at each RJ-45 port of each voice patch panel.. Multi-pair cables shall be replaced if they contain more than 1% bad pairs that can not be repaired via re-terminating. Use test sheet provided in 27 05 53 for backbone copper test results. Provide test results. I. Neatly wrap the unused 25 pair slack around both ends of the PVC-25 jacket and do not cut the pair short. J. Label, dress and bundle each cable with a cable number and the corresponding patch panel number/port range at both ends, in a fashion that the cable number is facing forward and readily seen and allow for the 25 pair slack wrap. K. Neatly bundle and securely fasten PVC-25 pair cable along plywood backboards on maximum 1’ centers. L. Neatly bundle and securely fasten PVC-25 pair cable along cable runways and vertical cable managers with hook-and-loop Velcro-type straps on maximum 1’ centers. 3.4 SHIELDED UTP CABLE A. UTP backbone cables shall be installed in conduit. B. Placement of underground cables shall conform to REA 644 Cable Standards. C. Cables above drywall ceilings shall be installed in conduit. Cables in exposed areas other than communications equipment rooms shall be installed in conduit or surface raceway. D. Do not install with optical fiber cable or any other cable type, unless approved in advance by Owner. E. Provide cable management as called for in section 27 11 00. F. Label termination blocks and lightning protector bases with the pair counts indicated on the T1-Series Copper Logical riser drawings. G. For 66-styleblocks, label or stencil every fifth pair of each termination block with the appropriate cable count and provide 5th pair identification lines on block or designation strips. ARCHI-TECHNOLOGY CORNELL – NCP BACKBONE CABLING STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 27 13 00 – PAGE 23 OF 26 NOVEMBER 2. 2012 H. For 110-styleblocks, provide color code plastic designation strips/covers with the appropriate cable count indicated on every row of the block. Provide 5th pair identification lines on block or designation strips. I. The contractor shall replace the cable if damaged during installation. J. Test all riser cable pairs. Multi-pair cables shall be replaced if they contain more than 1% bad pairs that can not be repaired via re-terminating. Use test sheet provided in 27 05 53 for backbone copper test results. Provides test results K. 110-Cross connect label designation strips shall be color-coded as directed by the Owner as follows: Description Color C.O. Circuits PBX Circuits Auxiliary Circuits Yellow Wiring to Work Station White Back Bone Riser Cable Blue Tie Lines Yellow L. Review splicing and termination requirements with Owner before rough-in of backbone copper cables greater than 100 pairs. Provide ample cable slack for proper dressing of cables at termination and splicing locations. Do not cut backbone cable greater than 300 pairs before onsite approval of means and methods with Owner. M. Secure all ARMM cables to wall within 12" of all splice enclosures N. Test, label and document as per section 27 05 53. O. Backbone cables shall be installed separately from horizontal distribution cables P. A pull cord (nylon; 1/8" minimum) shall be co-installed with all backbone cables installed in a conduit. Q. All backbone cables shall be securely fastened to the sidewall of the TR on each floor. R. Backbone cables spanning more than three floors shall be securely attached at the top of the cable run with a wire mesh grip and on alternating floors or as required by local codes. ARCHI-TECHNOLOGY CORNELL – NCP BACKBONE CABLING STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 27 13 00 – PAGE 24 OF 26 NOVEMBER 2. 2012 3.5 RISER CLOSURES A. In vault environment or other horizontally installations support splice closure or cable at both end racks or steps - Condux cable racks series #83801-00 (14 hole or longer) and Condux cable steps series #83806 (4" or longer). B. In other horizontally installations support spliced cable at both ends of splice enclosures with snug fitting 2-hole straps. C. Provide mounting kindorf type channels to secure splice enclosures to walls. D. Secure all Riser closures to wall kindorf channels with heavy duty black ty- wraps. 3.6 SPLICING A. Fold back method of splicing is required for all new splices. B. Ends of unused binder groups shall be staggered, cleared and encapsulated in HYSOL Series CK capping kits. C. Terminal counts shall be installed as per the drawings and may not be split or multiplied. D. Binder group and color code integrity shall be maintained. E. Provide striped nylon cable ties and identify binder groups on both sides of sheath opening and at all other sheath openings and at termination points. F. The quantity of bad pairs per sheath of 100 pairs or more shall not exceed 1% of the total pair count. G. Use 3M 4053 Cover Removal Tool to remove bases and covers. H. Use 3M 4053-PM Separation Tool to separate 4005-DPM modules from any other module. I. All cable pairs shall be free of electrical opens, shorts (within and between pairs), polarity reversals, transpositions, and the presence of AC voltage, from the Telecommunication Rooms to the termination hardware at the main crossconnect frame. All defects must be corrected. 3.7 SPLICING TAPES A. Tape all entries to vault and riser closures to prevent water, insects or rodents from entering splice enclosure. ARCHI-TECHNOLOGY CORNELL – NCP BACKBONE CABLING STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 27 13 00 – PAGE 25 OF 26 NOVEMBER 2. 2012 3.8 BONDING CONNECTORS A. Install Bonding Connectors so as not to damage the conductors in the cable. 3.9 GROUNDING BRAID A. Adhere to all manufacturer installation guidelines. 3.10 GROUNDING AND BONDING A. The contractor shall provide a Telecommunications Bonding Backbone (TBB). This backbone shall be used to ground all telecommunications cable shields, equipment, racks, cabinets, raceways, and other associated hardware that has the potential to act as a current carrying conductor. The TBB shall be installed independent of the building's electrical and building ground and shall be designed in accordance with the recommendations contained in the ANSI/TIA/EIA-607-B Telecommunications Bonding and Grounding Standard. B. The main entrance facility/equipment room in each building shall be equipped with a telecommunications main grounding bus bar (TMGB). Each telecommunications room shall be provided with a telecommunications ground bus bar (TGB). The TMGB shall be connected to the building electrical entrance grounding facility. The intent of this system is to provide a grounding system that is equal in potential to the building electrical ground system. Therefore, ground loop current potential is minimized between telecommunications equipment and the electrical system to which it is attached. C. All racks, metallic backboards, cable sheaths, metallic strength members, splice cases, backbone conduits, cable trays, cable runways, etc. entering or residing in the TR or ER shall be grounded by the Division 27 contractor to the respective TGB or TMGB using a minimum #6 AWG stranded copper bonding conductor and compression connectors. D. All wires used for telecommunications grounding purposes shall be identified with a green insulation. Non-insulated wires shall be identified at each termination point with a wrap of green tape. All cables and busbars shall be identified and labeled in accordance E-Series drawing details, TIA 606A and Sections 16450 and 27 05 53. E. Refer to 26 05 26, and E-Series drawings for additional requirements. F. Coordinate work with the Division 26 Electrical contractor. ARCHI-TECHNOLOGY CORNELL – NCP BACKBONE CABLING STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 27 13 00 – PAGE 26 OF 26 NOVEMBER 2. 2012 3.11 GROUNDING SYSTEM A. The TBB shall be designed and/or approved by a qualified PE, licensed in the state that the work is to be performed. The TBB shall adhere to the recommendations of the TIA/EIA-607-B standard, and shall be installed in accordance with best industry practice. B. Installation and termination of the main bonding conductor to the building service entrance ground shall be performed by a licensed electrical contractor. C. The Division 27 contractor shall bond all cable sheaths, racks, cabinets, cable runways, backbone conduits, cable trays, etc. to the TGB provided in each TR, IDF, BDF and MDF as called for. D. Refer to 26 05 26, and E-Series drawings for additional requirements. E. Coordinate work with the Division 26 Electrical contractor. END OF SECTION ARCHI-TECHNOLOGY CORNELL – NCP HORIZONTAL REQUIREMENTS STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 27 15 00 – PAGE 1 OF 20 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 SECTION 27 15 00 HORIZONTAL CABLING PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide all labor, materials, tools, and equipment required for the complete installation of work called for in the Contract Documents. Unless noted otherwise all work included in this section is included in the data cable contract. B. Prior to installation and as part of the contract, relocate any device a distance of 6 feet in any direction at the request of the owner, at no additional cost. This shall include all necessary conduit, cable, raceways, painting and patching to accomplish the modification. Also refer to Division 26. C. Refer to Appendix A of the specifications for the Proposed Cable Schedule. D. Refer to section 27 05 00 section 1.2 for additional requirements as it relates to removal of existing cables to free up space in existing pathways intended for reuse for new Category 6 installations. 1.2 SCOPE A. Horizontal cabling includes Category 6 UTP from the Telecommunications Rooms (TR) to the outlets as shown on the plans and called for in the cable schedules (refer to Appendix). The horizontal cabling includes all horizontal cables, mechanically terminated jacks/inserts and faceplates in the work area and the mechanical termination in the TR. B. This section includes minimum requirements for the following: 1. Unshielded Twisted Pair Cable 2. Connecting Hardware 3. Cable Terminations 4. Faceplates 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. All cable shall be installed in a neat and workmanlike manner. All methods of construction that are not specifically described or indicated ARCHI-TECHNOLOGY CORNELL – NCP HORIZONTAL REQUIREMENTS STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 27 15 00 – PAGE 2 OF 20 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 in the contract documents shall be subject to the control and approval of the Owner's Representative. Equipment and materials shall be of the quality and manufacture indicated. The equipment specified is based upon the acceptable manufacturers listed. Where "approved equal" is stated, equipment shall be equivalent in every way to that of the equipment specified and subject to approval B. Strictly adhere to all Category 6 (BICSI and TIA) and manufacturer recommended installation practices when installing high performance cabling. C. All methods of construction that are not specifically described or indicated in the Contract Documents shall be subject to the control and approval of Cornell University. D. Equipment and materials shall be of the quality and Manufacturer indicated. E. Provide with the submittals, documentation from an independent testing agency indicating that the complete assembly including cable and termination hardware has been tested and meets the performance criteria called for. F. Materials and work specified herein shall comply with the applicable requirements of: 1. ANSI/TIA – 568-C 2. ANSI/TIA – 569-B 3. ANSI/TIA – 606-A 4. ISO/IEC 11801– 2002 (or newer edition) 5. NFPA 70 – 2002 (or newer edition) 6. BICSI Telecommunications Distribution Methods Manual, current edition 7. Cornell University Design and Construction Standards, current Edition 8. National Electrical Installation Standards (ANSI/NECA/BICSI- 568, 2006) 9. FCC 47 CFR 68 10. NEMA - 250 ARCHI-TECHNOLOGY CORNELL – NCP HORIZONTAL REQUIREMENTS STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 27 15 00 – PAGE 3 OF 20 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 11. NEC - Articles 770, 800,810. 12. ADA, Americans with Disabilities Act. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Manufacturers catalog sheets, specifications and installation instructions for all cable, connecting hardware and patch cords B. Evidence of manufacturer’s certification to install and warrant Panduit UTP, copper backbone and Corning optical fiber cables and housings. C. Termination details for all cable types. D. List of three (3) installations of equivalent or larger systems that have been installed within the past two (2) years and have been operating satisfactorily for a minimum of one year. (Include names and phone numbers of references at the site of installation) E. Cable Test Reports (prior to hardware/software installation). F. Also refer to Section 27 05 00 Basic Communication Requirements G. Also refer to Refer to Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 100 OHM UNSHIELDED TWISTED PAIR CABLE A. Shall be Category 6A type cabling, compliant with the requirements of the most current ANSI/TIA 568-C standard, for all wireless locations . B. Shall be Category 6 type cable, compliant with the requirements of the most current ANSI/TIA 568-C standard, for all other locations. C. Shall be independently verified to comply with ANSI/TIA 568-C.2-1. D. An ISO 9002 Certified Manufacturer shall make the cable. E. Cable shall be UL LISTED. F. Physical Characteristics: 1. Shall meet applicable requirements of ANSI/ICEA-S-80-576 and NEC. 2. Conductor shall be 23 AWG solid bare annealed copper. ARCHI-TECHNOLOGY CORNELL – NCP HORIZONTAL REQUIREMENTS STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 27 15 00 – PAGE 4 OF 20 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 3. Category 6A: Outer jacket color shall be green or as directed by Owner. 4. Category 6: Outer jacket color shall be blue or as directed by Owner. 5. Category marking shall be printed every one foot. Footage indicators shall also be providing on jacket. 6. The diameter of the insulated conductor shall be .023 in. maximum. 7. Shall consist of (4) 22-26 AWG twisted pairs. 8. Shall be suitable for the environment in which they are to be installed. 9. The color coding of pairs shall be: Pair 1 W-BL; BL Pair 2 W-O; 0 Pair 3 W-G; G Pair 4 W-BR; BR 10. The overall diameter of the cable shall be less than 0.250 inches. 11. The ultimate breaking strength measured in accordance with ASTM D 4565 shall be 400 N minimum. 12. Cable shall withstand a bend radius of 1 inch at -20 degrees Celsius without jacket or insulation cracking. 13. Cable shall be third party verified to meet ANSI/TIA 568-C.2-1, Category 6 requirements. G. Transmission Characteristics: 1. Cable shall be ANSI/TIA-568-C.2-1 and ISO/IEC 11801 category 6 compliant. 2. Attenuation shall be measured in accordance with TIA/EIA 568B.2-1 and shall be maximum of 19.8dB @ 100 MHz. 3. Cable shall exhibit positive PSACR above 250 MHz. 4. Cable shall be tested & characterized to 500 MHz. ARCHI-TECHNOLOGY CORNELL – NCP HORIZONTAL REQUIREMENTS STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 27 15 00 – PAGE 5 OF 20 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 5. Cable shall be UL LISTED. Cable shall exhibit a NEXT loss of at least the following: Frequency MHz NEXT dB 1.0 78 4.0 69 10.0 63 16.0 60 20.0 58 31.25 55 62.5 51 100.0 48 200 44 250 42 a) Cable shall exhibit ELFEXT loss of at least the following: Frequency MHz ELFEXT dB 1.0 75 4.0 63 10.0 55 16.0 51 20.0 49 31.25 45 62.5 39 100.0 35 200 29 250 27 ARCHI-TECHNOLOGY CORNELL – NCP HORIZONTAL REQUIREMENTS STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 27 15 00 – PAGE 6 OF 20 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 b) Cable shall exhibit Attenuation loss of less than the following: Frequency MHz Attenuation dB 1.0 2.0 4.0 3.8 10.0 6.0 16.0 7.6 20.0 8.5 31.25 10.7 62.5 15.4 100.0 19.8 200 29.0 250 32.58 c) Cable shall exhibit a return loss according to the following: Frequency MHz Return Loss (dB) 1 20.0 4 23.0 10 25.0 16 25.0 20 25.0 31.25 23.6 32.5 21.5 100 20.1 200 18.0 250 17.3 ARCHI-TECHNOLOGY CORNELL – NCP HORIZONTAL REQUIREMENTS STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 27 15 00 – PAGE 7 OF 20 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 H. Design Make: 1. CAT6 Riser Rated - CommScope/SYSTIMAX 1071E, 4-pair, CMR Riser rated with blue jacket. 2. CAT6 Plenum - CommScope/SYSTIMAX 2071E, 4-pair, CMP Plenum rated with blue jacket. 3. CAT6A Riser - CommScope/SYSTIMAX 1091B, 4-pair, CMR Riser rated with green jacket. 4. CAT6A Plenum - CommScope/SYSTIMAX 2091B, 4-pair, CMP Plenum rated with green jacket. I. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Berk Tek Lanmark 1000 2. Panduit GenSPEED 6000 2.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR CONNECTING HARDWARE - 100 OHM UTP A. Physical Characteristics 1. Each UTP cable will be terminated at the outlet with a Mini-Com Executive Series 8 position 8 wire Category 6 or 6A RJ45 modular jack. 2. Jacks shall be 8 position un-keyed 3. The manufacturer shall have conducted performance testing at the component level by a UL certified testing laboratory, and include Active Live Channel Testing to insure manufacture and performance quality. 4. Jack housings shall be high impact 94 V-0 rated thermoplastic 5. Jack modules shall have a temperature rating of -10 °C (14°F) to 60°C (140 °F) in conformance with ANSI/TIA568-C 6. Jack modules shall be used in all work areas and shall exceed the connector requirements of the ANSI/TIA Category 6 or 6A standard. 7. Jack modules shall be 100% tested to ensure NEXT performance. ARCHI-TECHNOLOGY CORNELL – NCP HORIZONTAL REQUIREMENTS STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 27 15 00 – PAGE 8 OF 20 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 8. Jack modules shall be universal in design, including complying with the intermateability standard IEC 60603-7 for backward compatibility. 9. Category 6 modules shall have UL and CSA approval. 10. The modules shall be able to be re-terminated a minimum of 10 times. 11. The modules shall have ETL verified Category 6 performance and ISO Class E performance (as defined in ISO/IEC 11801) in both the basic and channel links. They shall be universal in design, accepting six or eight-pair modular plugs without damage to the outer module contacts. 12. Jack modules shall have a designation indicating Category 6 or 6A compliance. Jack module shall also have a date code and a complete catalog number and abbreviated series numbers indicated on each module. 13. Jacks shall utilize a paired punch down sequence. Cable pair twists shall be maintained up to the IDC, terminating all conductors adjacent to its pair mate to better maintain pair characteristics designed by the cable manufacturer. 14. The module shall snap into all Mini-Com outlets and patch panels. 15. Jacks shall terminate 22-26 AWG unshielded twisted pair cable, stranded or solid conductors. 16. Jacks shall terminate insulated conductors with outside diameters up to .050” 17. Jacks shall be compatible with single conductor 110 impact termination tools. 18. Jacks shall include translucent wire termination/retention stuffer cap, that holds terminated wires in place, provides positive locking latch to proper conductor strain relief on the cable jacket, and allow the conductors to be visually inspected in the assembled housing can ensure cable twists can be maintained to within 1/8” (3.18mm). 19. Jack modules shall be compatible with ANSI/TIA 606-A color code labeling and each module shall include a label marked with both T-568A and T-568B wiring schemes. ARCHI-TECHNOLOGY CORNELL – NCP HORIZONTAL REQUIREMENTS STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 27 15 00 – PAGE 9 OF 20 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 20. The jack module shall include an identification to signify Category 6, 330 MHz performance. 21. Meets FCC Part 68 Subpart F; contacts plated with 50 microinches of gold. 22. Jack modules shall be manufactured in the USA B. Jack modules shall be UL LISTED 1863 and CSA certified. C. Jack modules shall be made by an ISO 9002 Certified Manufacturer. D. Jack modules installed in a 4-connector channel with a category 6 patch panel and category 6 patch cords, all from the same manufacturer and designed to be installed together, along with a qualified category 6 cable shall meet or exceed the channel requirements of the ANSI/TIA-568-C ARCHI-TECHNOLOGY CORNELL – NCP HORIZONTAL REQUIREMENTS STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 27 15 00 – PAGE 10 OF 20 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 E. Jack modules installed in a 4-connector channel configured as described in section d above, shall exhibit a worst pair channel NEXT loss of at least the following, and be fully compliant with the manufacturer performance requirements for the warranty specified and meets or exceed the permanent link and channel requirements of the ANSI/TIA-568-C.1 Standard. Frequency NEXT MHz dB 1.0 65.0 4.0 63.0 8.0 58.2 10.0 56.6 16.0 53.2 20.0 51.6 25.0 50.0 31.25 48.4 62.5 43.4 100.0 39.9 200.0 34.8 250.0 33.1 ARCHI-TECHNOLOGY CORNELL – NCP HORIZONTAL REQUIREMENTS STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 27 15 00 – PAGE 11 OF 20 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 F. Jack modules installed in a 4-connector channel configured as described in section d above, shall exhibit a worst pair channel PSNEXT loss of at least the following, and be fully compliant with the manufacturer performance requirements for the warranty specified and meets or exceed the permanent link and channel requirements of the ANSI/TIA-568-C.1 Standard. Frequency PSNEXT MHz DB 1.0 62.0 4.0 60.5 8.0 55.6 10.0 54.0 16.0 50.6 20.0 49.0 25.0 47.3 31.25 45.7 62.5 40.6 100.0 37.1 200.0 31.9 250.0 30.2 ARCHI-TECHNOLOGY CORNELL – NCP HORIZONTAL REQUIREMENTS STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 27 15 00 – PAGE 12 OF 20 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 G. Jack modules installed in a 4-connector channel configured as described in section d above, shall exhibit a worst pair channel Insertion Loss of not more than the following, and be fully compliant with the manufacturer performance requirements for the warranty specified and meets or exceed the permanent link and channel requirements of the ANSI/TIA-568-C.1 Standard. Frequency Insertion LOSS MHz DB 1.0 2.1 4.0 4.0 8.0 5.7 10.0 6.3 16.0 8.0 20.0 9.0 25.0 10.1 31.25 11.4 62.5 16.5 100.0 21.3 200.0 31.5 250.0 35.9 ARCHI-TECHNOLOGY CORNELL – NCP HORIZONTAL REQUIREMENTS STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 27 15 00 – PAGE 13 OF 20 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 H. Jack modules installed in a 4-connector channel configured as described in section d above, shall exhibit a worst pair channel ELFEXT loss of at least the following, and be fully compliant with the manufacturer performance requirements for the warranty specified and meets or exceed the permanent link and channel requirements of the ANSI/TIA-568-C.1 Standard. Frequency ELFEXT MHz DB 1.0 63.3 4.0 51.2 8.0 45.2 10.0 43.3 16.0 39.2 20.0 37.2 25.0 35.3 31.25 33.4 62.5 27.3 100.0 23.3 200.0 17.2 250.0 15.3 ARCHI-TECHNOLOGY CORNELL – NCP HORIZONTAL REQUIREMENTS STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 27 15 00 – PAGE 14 OF 20 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 I. Jack modules installed in a 4-connector channel configured as described in section d above, shall exhibit a worst pair channel PSELFEXT loss of at least the following, and be fully compliant with the manufacturer performance requirements for the warranty specified and meets or exceed the permanent link and channel requirements of the ANSI/TIA-568-C.1 Standard. Frequency PSELFEXT MHz DB 1.0 60.3 4.0 48.2 8.0 42.2 10.0 40.3 16.0 36.2 20.0 34.2 25.0 32.3 31.25 30.4 62.5 24.3 100.0 20.3 200.0 14.2 250.0 12.3 ARCHI-TECHNOLOGY CORNELL – NCP HORIZONTAL REQUIREMENTS STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 27 15 00 – PAGE 15 OF 20 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 J. Jack modules installed in a 4-connector channel configured as described in section d above, shall exhibit a channel return loss of at least the following, and be fully compliant with the manufacturer performance requirements for the warranty specified and meets or exceed the permanent link and channel requirements of the ANSI/TIA- 568-C.1 Standard. Frequency Return Loss MHz DB 1.0 19.0 4.0 19.0 8.0 19.0 10.0 19.0 16.0 18.0 20.0 17.5 25.0 17.0 31.25 16.5 62.5 14.0 100.0 12.0 200.0 9.0 250.0 8.0 K. Jack modules installed in a 4-connector channel shall exhibit a delay skew of not more than 50 ns/100 m between 1 and 250 MHz. L. Modular Jack Design Make: 1. CAT6 - Panduit Mini-Com TX6 Plus Jack Module TP Series, Electric Ivory (or color to match existing conditions or as called for -- Panduit # CJ688TPEI Series. Confirm wiring scheme with Owner for all Category 6 terminations. 2. CAT6A - Panduit Mini-Com TX6A Plus Jack Module TP Series, Electric Ivory (or color to match existing conditions or as called ARCHI-TECHNOLOGY CORNELL – NCP HORIZONTAL REQUIREMENTS STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 27 15 00 – PAGE 16 OF 20 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 for -- Panduit # CJ688TGEI Series. Confirm wiring scheme with Owner for all Category 6 terminations. 2.3 FACEPLATE DESIGN MAKES AND OPTIONS A. Double Gang – Panduit CBEEI-2G Minicom executive series, 8 module, Ivory B. Single Gang Vertical – series. Panduit # CBEE1 C. Box/Surface Mount, 2 module Panduit # CBXJ2EI-A D. Bezel Insert Sloped 2 Module Space Ivory Panduit # CHS2EI-X (10pk) E. Bezel Insert Flat Blank 2 Module Wide Ivory Panduit # CHB2EI-X F. Single Gang Horizontal four port – Panduit #CFPHSL4EI series 12 Port MUTOA – Panduit #CBXF12EI-AYRefer to requirements on program standard detail drawings for recessed, surface boxes and surface raceway outlet configurations and sloped bezel versus flat bezel arrangements. G. Blank plates matching existing plastic ivory communication faceplates – to be provide by Telecommunication Contractor for all existing unused flush backboxes and all surface raceway openings where cable are removed under this contract. 2.4 WALL PHONE JACK ASSEMBLY A. Shall be constructed of stainless steel B. Shall have permanently affixed steel mounting studs designed to mate with corresponding telephone base plate or adapter. C. Shall mount to single gang outlet box, surface box or to wall directly. D. Shall be wired to wiring scheme as directed by Owner. E. Rated for CAT 6 including testing. F. Shall be 8-position and 8-conductor. G. Design Make: Panduit KWP6PYas approved by Owner. H. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Suttle Appartus/CSI 2. Lucent/Avaya ARCHI-TECHNOLOGY CORNELL – NCP HORIZONTAL REQUIREMENTS STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 27 15 00 – PAGE 17 OF 20 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 3. CommScope/Systimax 2.5 PATCH CORDS, CATEGORY 6 – TO BE PROVIDED BY THE OWNER (CIT/NCS FIELD SERVICES GROUP). 2.6 TELEPHONE LINE CORDS – TO BE PROVIDED BY THE OW NER (CIT/NCS FIELD SERVICES GROUP). 2.7 VOICE CROSS CONNECT AND FRAME WIRE – TO BE PROVIDED BY THE OWNER (CIT/NCS FIELD SERVICES GROUP). PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. UTP Cable: 1. All exposed wiring shall be installed in surface metal raceway, conduit, and enclosed cable tray, except within TR’s. 2. All wiring above ceilings shall be installed in cable tray, conduit, raceway or limited use of j-Hooks as called for. 3. Shall be installed to provide minimal signal impairment by preserving wire pair twists as closely as possible to the point of mechanical termination. The amount of untwisting in a pair as a result of termination shall be no greater than 0.5 inches (13 mm). 4. Shall be installed according to manufacturer’s instructions. 5. Shall be installed such that cables can maintain minimum bend radius of at least 4 times the cable diameter. Cables shall be terminated in such a way that there is no tension on the conductors in the termination contacts 6. Shall be installed in one continuous length unless specified in the contract document. 7. The Contractor shall be responsible for replacing all cables that do not pass required bandwidth and throughput tests. 8. Maximum length shall be 90 meters, TR termination to WAO termination. 9. Cable shall have no physical defects such as cuts, tears or bulges in the outer jacket. Cables with defects shall be replaced. ARCHI-TECHNOLOGY CORNELL – NCP HORIZONTAL REQUIREMENTS STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 27 15 00 – PAGE 18 OF 20 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 10. Install cable in neat and workmanlike manner. Neatly bundle, support and tie all cable in closets, in both the vertical and horizontal plane. Leave sufficient cable for 90o sweeps at all vertical drops. 11. Provide reusable velcro-type hook and loop straps in each rear vertical channel. Reusable straps shall be of varying sizes (each allowing 50% spare future expansion) and of adequate quantity to secure cable bundles at least every 4 rack units 12. Provide reusable velcro-type hook and loop straps in each horizontal of overhead ladder rack/cable runway. Reusable straps shall be of varying sizes (each allowing 50% spare future expansion) and of adequate quantity to secure cable bundles at least every 3’ in straight runs and at least every 12” in radius turns and waterfalls. 13. Provide reusable velcro-type hook and loop straps in each vertical run of ladder rack/cable runway. Reusable straps shall be of varying sizes (each allowing 50% spare future expansion) and of adequate quantity to secure cable bundles at least every 12”. 14. Maintain the following clearances from EMI sources. a) Power cable - 6 in. b) Fluorescent Lights - 12 in. c) Transformers - 36 in. 15. Adhere to TIA standard requirements regarding pulling tension and allowable lubricants. 16. Do not install Category 6 or 6A cable with more than 110N (25 lbs) pull force, as specified in ANSI/TIA and BICSI TDDM practices. Utilize appropriate cable lubricant in sufficient quantity to reduce pulling friction to acceptable levels on: long pulls inside conduit, pulls of multiple cables into a single small bore conduit, on conduit runs greater than 100 lineal feet with bends of opposing directions, and in conduit runs that exceed 180 degrees of accumulated bends. Use of tensile rated cords (i.e. fishing line) should be used for difficult or questionable pulls - to judge to go/no-go condition of the conduit and pulling setup. 17. Care must be taken so that the cable does not bend at any location to a radius less than ten times the diameter of the cable. A cable feeder guide or rollers of suitable dimensions ARCHI-TECHNOLOGY CORNELL – NCP HORIZONTAL REQUIREMENTS STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 27 15 00 – PAGE 19 OF 20 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 should be used between the cable reel and the face of the duct to protect the cable and guide it into the duct as it is pulled off the reel. 18. As the cable is pulled off the reel, it should be carefully watched and inspected for sheath defects. If defects are noticed, the pulling operation should be stopped immediately and the Engineer promptly notified of the defect. Kinks and/or other irregularities in the cable sheath should be removed or corrected as directed by the engineer. 19. Cable jackets that are chaffed or burned exposing internal conductor insulation or have bare conductors shall be replaced, not spliced 20. Test, label and document as called for. 21. Firestop the interior of fire rated assembly openings where sleeves, conduits, raceways, cable trays or cables are installed through a fire barrier. B. UTP MODULAR JACKS 1. All cables shall be terminated with modular jacks that snap into a faceplate mounted on a wall outlet box, surface raceways or power pole. 2. Outlet boxes shall be secured to building with mechanical fasteners. Adhesive fasteners are not allowed. 3. Jacks shall be installed to provide minimal signal impairment by preserving wire pair twists as close as possible to the point of mechanical termination. The amount of untwisted in a pair as a result of termination to the jack shall be no greater than 0.5 inches (13mm). 4. Jacks shall be installed according to manufacturer’s instructions and properly mounted in plates, frames, housings or other appropriate mounting device. 5. Jacks shall be installed such that cables terminated to the jacks maintain minimum bend radius of at least 4 times the cable diameter into the IDC contacts. Cables shall be terminated on jacks such that there is no tension on the conductors in the termination contacts. 6. All extra openings to be filled with blank inserts. ARCHI-TECHNOLOGY CORNELL – NCP HORIZONTAL REQUIREMENTS STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 27 15 00 – PAGE 20 OF 20 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 7. Terminate cable per EIA/TIA T-568B standard pin assignments. C. FIRESTOPPING 1. Firestop all sleeves and conduit openings after each cable installation are roughed-in and complete. 2. Never leave breaches in two and three hour rated assemblies open for more than a 24 hour period. 3. Provide firestopping as called for in Section 07840 and Section 27 05 00 END OF SECTION ARCHI-TECHNOLOGY CORNELL – NCP SECURITY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 28 07 10 – PAGE 1 OF 6 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 SECTION 28 07 10 SECURITY MANAGEMENT SYSTEMS PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This document includes a general description, functional requirements, operational characteristics, and criteria for the Security Management System (SMS). 1.2 REFERENCES A. The Codes and Regulations listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. Work shall be performed in accordance with the applicable international, federal, state, and local codes or standards current at the commencement of installation. The following list summarizes applicable standards: 1. UL 294, UL 1076, ULC 2. CE 3. FCC – Part 15, Part 68 4. NFPA 70, NEC 5. IEEE, RS 170 variable standard 6. IEEE, NTSC (color camera broadcast) 7. PAL (color camera broadcast, Europe) 8. CCIR (monochrome standard, Europe) 9. Microsoft® Open Database Connectivity (ODBC) interface) 10. ISO Software Coding Standards for C++ and C## 11. RoHS B. Where more than one code or regulation is applicable, the more stringent shall apply. C. Cable installation, identification and termination shall be performed in .addition to the applicable codes above. ARCHI-TECHNOLOGY CORNELL – NCP SECURITY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 28 07 10 – PAGE 2 OF 6 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 1.3 SECURITY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. The Security Management System (SMS) outlined in this section and detailed in Part 2 of this document is the key central component for managing physical security and the bridge between physical and logical security for this project. The system shall provide a variety of integral functions including the ability to regulate access and egress; provide identification credentials; monitor, track and interface alarms; and view, record and store digital surveillance video linked to SMS events. B. The SMS shall utilize a single seamlessly integrated relational database for all functions utilizing a fully multi-tasking multi-threading Microsoft Windows 2000/2003 or Windows XP Operating System. The SMS shall be written so that all modules (Access Control, Alarm Monitoring, ID / Credential Management, Visitor Management, Asset Management and Digital Video Management) are developed and built from a unified single 32-bit source code set. C. Upgrades or expansion of the SMS to a larger size system in scale shall not require installation of a different and or new SMS application or require the administrator/operator to learn a different and or new interface from the previous version. D. The SMS software shall be written to Microsoft's published standards for User Interface Design, Secure Coding Practices and Database Implementation Guidelines (Microsoft® Open Database Connectivity (ODBC) interface). E. The SMS software shall be written to ISO Standards on Software Development for C++ and C##. F. The SMS shall be able to seamlessly interface with and monitor intelligent system controllers, reader interface modules, I/O panels, burglar alarm panels, burglar alarm panel receivers, biometric devices, personal protection devices, intercom systems, and digital video recorders approved for use by the SMS manufacturer. G. The SMS shall be able to communicate with intelligent system controllers via RS-485, RS-232, TCP-IP/Ethernet and Dial-up via Modem. H. All tasks shall be accessible from any compatible client workstation on the network utilizing one or all of the following: 1. Traditional client server architecture 2. N-tier architecture where the SMS shall support the expansion of the system architecture and allow for end-user deployment based upon their system architectural needs. The SMS shall allow but not ARCHI-TECHNOLOGY CORNELL – NCP SECURITY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 28 07 10 – PAGE 3 OF 6 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 require the separation of the database, application server, web server and client interface. The system shall require that all connections to the database are performed through a trusted link from the client or internet browser interface. 3. Centralized distribution (publishing) of applications using Windows Terminal Server and Citrix on Windows, Unix, Linux or Apple Macintosh based systems through any compatible internet browser application and/or by means of a mobile computing platform using a wearable computer, Tablet PC or PDA device. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications 1. Manufacturer of the SMS shall be an established organization with referenced and documented experience delivering and maintaining Security Management Systems of equal or higher sophistication and complexity as compared to the system detailed in this specification. 2. SMS Manufacturer’s manufacturing facilities shall be certified ISO- 9000:2000 operations, utilize ISO-9000:2000 manufacturing procedures and maintain their ISO certifications. 3. SMS Manufacturer shall employ at a minimum the following methods for QA of component and assembly devices. a) Visual inspection of devices shall be performed to verify assembly according to defined procedures. End of line operational tests shall be performed to ensure product functionality has been correctly configured. A system burn-in period shall be utilized to screen for early life failures of electronic components. 4. Individual functionality and system level regression testing shall be performed to ensure compliance with product specifications. Single and multiple unit system tests shall be performed to mimic end-user installation configurations. Automated hardware and software testing shall be utilized to evaluate system performance under published operational loads and shall be compared to published system capabilities. B. Bidder Qualifications 1. At the time of the bid, the bidder shall have satisfactorily completed projects similar size, scope and complexity as the system detailed in this specification. The bidder shall furnish written proof of ARCHI-TECHNOLOGY CORNELL – NCP SECURITY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 28 07 10 – PAGE 4 OF 6 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 experience from three (3) references and proof of current accreditation/certification by the manufacturer for required training for sales/installation/service of the SMS and associated devices. 2. The bidder shall also be a factory authorized local service organization that shall carry a complete stock of parts and provide maintenance for the SMS and related systems under this contract. Local shall be defined as an area in a 50 mile radius of installed location.) PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. SMS Hardware and Software 1. Design Make: Best Access (now Stanley) BASIS 2.2 SECURITY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM SERVER (EXISTING) A. All card access components shall be compatible with the Universities existing Head-End Database server. The existing server supports Best Access systems’ BASIS software. 2.3 SECURITY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM CLIENT WORKSTATION (EXISTING) A. All card access components shall be compatible with the Universities existing Client workstations. The existing workstations support Best Access systems’ BASIS software. 2.4 SMS SOFTWARE CAPABILITIES A. The SMS Software shall support an unlimited number of card readers, input points, video cameras, door monitoring points, and relay outputs. The SMS database server shall support an unlimited number of cardholders, visitors, and assets limited only by the available memory on the ISC. The database server shall also support an unlimited number of system events and System Operator transactions in the history file limited only by available hard disk space. Client Workstations shall be limited only by the limitations of the operating system server software. 2.5 SMS SOFTWARE FUNCTIONALITY A. Existing CIT SMS Client workstation to allow the following: 1. Local history review of CIT Card History. 2. Receipt of alarms located in the CIT area. ARCHI-TECHNOLOGY CORNELL – NCP SECURITY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 28 07 10 – PAGE 5 OF 6 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 SECURITY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM A. Installation: 1. Install all equipment and materials in accordance with the recommendations of the manufacturer. B. Programming of the system shall include the following tasks: 1. Coordinate all system programming and configuration with the facility’s security maintenance staff. 2. Programming system configuration parameters (hardware and software, reader/circuit numbers, communication parameters). 3. Programming operational parameters such as the card holder database, time zones, access levels and reader definitions. 4. Programming passcodes according to the authorities and functions defined by the Owner. 5. Other system programming tasks required by the Owner. These additional programming requirements shall be coordinated between the Owner, security maintenance staff and the contractor. C. Testing: 1. Operational Testing: The contractor shall perform thorough operational testing and verify that all system components are fully operational. 2. Hard-copy System Printout: The contractor shall submit a hard- copy system printout of all components tested and certify 100 percent operation indicating all devices/panels/units have passed the test criteria set forth by the manufacturer. 3.2 COMMISSIONING A. The contractor shall certify completion in writing and schedule the commissioning walk-through. The contractor shall provide all the tools and personnel needed to conduct an efficient commissioning process. 3.3 WARRANTY A. Provide a one year parts and labor warranty on all equipment and software in this section. ARCHI-TECHNOLOGY CORNELL – NCP SECURITY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 28 07 10 – PAGE 6 OF 6 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 END OF SECTION ARCHI-TECHNOLOGY CORNELL – NCP ACCESS CONTROL STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 28 13 00 – PAGE 1 OF 10 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 SECTION 28 13 00 ACCESS CONTROL PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This document includes a general description, functional requirements, operational characteristics, and criteria for Card Access Equipment (CAE). 1.2 REFERENCES A. The Codes and Regulations listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. Work shall be performed in accordance with the applicable international, federal, state, and local codes or standards current at the commencement of installation. The following list summarizes applicable standards: 1. UL 294, UL 1076, ULC 2. CE 3. FCC – Part 15, Part 68 4. NFPA 70, NEC 5. Microsoft® Open Database Connectivity (ODBC) interface) 6. ISO Software Coding Standards for C++ and C## 7. RoHS B. Where more than one code or regulation is applicable, the more stringent shall apply. 1.3 SECURITY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. The Security Management System (SMS) is outlined in section 28 07 10. This section lists the equipment needed to obtain the card access functionality of the SMS system. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications 1. Manufacturer of the Card Access Equipment shall be an established organization with referenced and documented experience delivering and maintaining Security Management ARCHI-TECHNOLOGY CORNELL – NCP ACCESS CONTROL STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 28 13 00 – PAGE 2 OF 10 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 Systems of equal or higher sophistication and complexity as compared to the system detailed in this specification. 2. CAE Manufacturer’s manufacturing facilities shall be certified ISO- 9000:2000 operations, utilize ISO-9000:2000 manufacturing procedures and maintain their ISO certifications. 3. CAE Manufacturer shall employ at a minimum the following methods for QA of component and assembly devices. a) Visual inspection of devices shall be performed to verify assembly according to defined procedures. End of line operational tests shall be performed to ensure product functionality has been correctly configured. A system burn-in period shall be utilized to screen for early life failures of electronic components. 4. Individual functionality and system level regression testing shall be performed to ensure compliance with product specifications. Single and multiple unit system tests shall be performed to mimic end-user installation configurations. Automated hardware and software testing shall be utilized to evaluate system performance under published operational loads and shall be compared to published system capabilities. B. Bidder Qualifications (Stanley Security Systems currently maintains the existing card access systems for CIT) 1. At the time of the bid, the bidder shall have satisfactorily completed projects similar size, scope and complexity as the system detailed in this specification. The bidder shall furnish written proof of experience from three (3) references and proof of current accreditation/certification by the manufacturer for required training for sales/installation/service of the SMS and associated devices. 2. The bidder shall also be a factory authorized local service organization that shall carry a complete stock of parts and provide maintenance for the SMS and related systems under this contract. Local shall be defined as an area in a (**X) mile radius of installed location.) PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. SMS Field Hardware: ARCHI-TECHNOLOGY CORNELL – NCP ACCESS CONTROL STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 28 13 00 – PAGE 3 OF 10 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 1. Best Access B. Card Readers 1. HID 2.2 INTELLIGENT SYSTEM CONTROLLER (ISC) A. The Intelligent System Controller (ISC) shall link the SMS Software to all “down-stream” field hardware components (Reader Interface Modules, Input Control Modules and Output Control Modules). The ISC shall provide full distributed processing of access control / Alarm Monitoring rules and operations. A fully loaded and configured ISC with shall respond in less than one-half (0.5) second to grant or deny access to cardholder. B. The ISC shall continue to function normally (stand-alone) in the event that it loses communication with the SMS software. While in this off-line state, the ISC shall make access granted/denied decisions and maintain a log of the events that have occurred. Events shall be stored in local memory, and then uploaded automatically to the SMS database after communication has been restored. C. In addition, the ISC shall incorporate the following features: 1. UL 294, ULC, and CE Certified 2. Support for Host Communications Speed of 38,400 bps 3. Support for Direct Connect, Remote Dial Up, or Local Area Network (LAN) Connection 4. Support for up to .5 MB of On-Board Memory 5. LAN Support shall utilize RJ45 (10/100baseT) Ethernet Interface or Token Ring 4 MB connectivity 6. Flash Memory for real time program updates and overall host communications 7. Support for four 2 wire downstream ports, two 4 wire downstream ports, or combination one 4 wire downstream port and two 2 wire downstream ports. Downstream ports shall be for connecting card readers and data gathering and output control panels via RS-485 multi-drop wiring configuration 8. Memory storage of up to 12,500 cardholders with 4 MB memory expansion. ARCHI-TECHNOLOGY CORNELL – NCP ACCESS CONTROL STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 28 13 00 – PAGE 4 OF 10 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 9. Initial base memory download between ISC with standard memory from the SMS shall require no more than ten (10) seconds 10. Support for up to 16 devices consisting of RIMs, ICMs, and OCMs in any combination desired with a maximum of 8 I/OCM devices per ISC 11. Support of multiple card technologies 12. Supervised Communications between ISC and SMS Software 13. AES 128 bit Symmetrical Block Encryption conforming to the FIPS- 197 standard between ISC and SMS Software communications driver. 14. Multi – drop support for up to eight ISCs per SMS communications port 15. Support of up to eight card formats and facility codes 16. Support for SEIWG card formats 17. RS-485 Full Duplex, UL 1076 Grade AA communication channel to the SMS head-end 18. Integration to other manufacturer’s card readers 19. Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS) with battery backup for 2 hours 20. 32-bit Microprocessor 21. Biometric Interface Support 22. An ISC downstream serial port shall multi-drop 16 access control field hardware devices using an RS-485 UL 1076 Grade A communication format allowing a distance of 4,000 feet using Belden 9842 cable or equivalent 23. 12 VAC or 12 VDC input power 24. Issue Code Support for both Magnetic and Wiegand Card Formats 25. Individual Shunt Times (ADA Requirement) 26. Up to Nine Digit PIN Codes 27. Downstream serial RS-232 device support 28. Status LEDs for normal component and communication status ARCHI-TECHNOLOGY CORNELL – NCP ACCESS CONTROL STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 28 13 00 – PAGE 5 OF 10 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 29. RoHS Compliance 30. Support for RS-485 over CAT 5, 6e cable 2.3 INPUT CONTROL MODULE (ICM) A. The Input Control Module shall provide 16 UL 1076 Grade B, A or AA alarm input zones and monitor / report line fault conditions, alarm conditions, power faults and tampers. Status LEDs shall provide information about the sixteen alarm zone inputs, cabinet tamper, and power fault. B. In addition, the ICM shall incorporate the following features: 1. UL 294, ULC, and CE Certified 2. Alarm contact status scanning at up to 180 times per second for each zone 3. Eight configuration DIP switches to assign unit addresses and communications speed 4. Elevator control support for 128 floors 5. Variable resistor values for line supervision 6. A low power CMOS microprocessor 7. Filtered data for noise rejection to prevent false alarms 8. Up to 16 Grade B, A, or AA Supervised Inputs in any Combination 9. 12 or 24 VDC Input Power 10. 2 Form C 5A, 30 VDC Contacts for load switching 11. 2 dedicated inputs for tamper and power status 12. RoHS Compliance 13. Support for RS-485 over CAT 5, 6e cable 2.4 OUTPUT CONTROL MODULE (OCM) A. The Output Control Modules shall provide 16 Form-C 5A 30 VDC relay contacts for load switching. The relays shall be configurable for fail-safe or fail-secure operation. Each relay shall support “On” “Off” and “Pulse” 1. 12 or 24 VDC input power ARCHI-TECHNOLOGY CORNELL – NCP ACCESS CONTROL STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 28 13 00 – PAGE 6 OF 10 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 2. Two dedicated digital inputs for tamper and power failure status 3. RS-485 communications, multi-dropped (2-wire or 4-wire RS-485) 4. Up to 16 OCMs per Intelligent System Controller 5. Onboard termination jumpers 6. DIP switch selectable addressing 7. Status LEDs for communication to the host, heartbeat and relay status 8. Elevator control, support for 64 floors 9. RoHS Compliance 10. Support for RS-485 over CAT 5, 6e cable 2.5 SINGLE READER INTERFACE MODULE (SRI) A. The SRI shall provide an interface between the ISC and authentication devices. The SRI must operate with any authentication device that produces a standard Wiegand, Data 1 / Data 0) or Clock and Data communication output. B. In addition the SRI shall incorporate the following features: 1. 12 or 24 VDC power supply 2. Reader communications (Clock/Data or Wiegand Data1/Data0) - more than 150 different readers approved for use 3. Two Form-C relay outputs (5 A Door Strike and 1 A Aux relays) 4. Up to 16 different card formats (8 card and 8 asset) 5. Issue code support for Magnetic and Wiegand formats 6. Door contact Open or Closed, Supervised or Non-supervised 7. REX push-button monitor - Supervised or Non-supervised 8. Strike Control output 9. Dedicated tamper and power failure circuits 10. Bicolor or two wire status LED support ARCHI-TECHNOLOGY CORNELL – NCP ACCESS CONTROL STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 28 13 00 – PAGE 7 OF 10 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 11. Beeper control 12. Support for offline reader access mode 13. Elevator control, support for 64 floors 14. UL 294 listed and CE approved 15. RoHS Compliance 16. Support for RS-485 over CAT 5, 6e cable 2.6 DUAL READER INTERFACE MODULE (DRI) A. The DRI shall provide a dual interface between the ISC and authentication devices. The DRI must operate with any authentication device that produces a standard Wiegand (Data 1 / Data 0 or Clock and Data) communication output. B. In addition the DRI shall incorporate the following features: 1. 12 or 24 VDC power supply 2. Reader communications (Clock/Data or Wiegand Data1/Data0) - more than 150 different readers approved for use 3. Six Form-C 5 A at 30 VDC relay outputs 4. Up to 16 different formats (8 card and 8 asset) 5. Issue code support for Magnetic and Wiegand formats 6. Door contact supervision (Open/Closed) 7. REX push-button monitor 8. Strike Control output 9. Bi-color status LED support and 2-wire LED support 10. Beeper control 11. Dedicated tamper and power failure circuits 12. Support for offline reader access mode 13. Onboard jumpers for termination 14. Onboard jumpers for 5 VDC or 12 VDC reader support ARCHI-TECHNOLOGY CORNELL – NCP ACCESS CONTROL STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 28 13 00 – PAGE 8 OF 10 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 15. Elevator control, native support for 6 floors 16. DIP switch selectable addressing 17. UL 294 listed and CE approved 18. RoHS Compliance 19. Support for RS-485 over CAT 5, 6e cable 2.7 CARDS A. The system will be operated with the University’s’ existing HID compatible proximity cards. 2.8 CARD READER LOCK (CRL) A. HID compatible 125Khz proximity reader B. Compatible with cards, reader interface module and SMS software C. Green/red – Multi-colored LED D. Mortise lock E. New Locks shall be Seargent Lever (LL) F. Locks shall be storeroom locks (04) G. Shall accommodate Best small format 7 pin interchangeable core prefix 70 for Best. H. Locks shall be fail secure I. Tamper resistant mounting J. Integral request to exit door position switch and solenoid controlled lock K. Read range 6” L. Shall be installed by a Harmony certified installer M. Sargent Harmony series 2.9 DOOR CONTACTS (DC) A. Integral to CRL on new doors B. Flush mount ARCHI-TECHNOLOGY CORNELL – NCP ACCESS CONTROL STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 28 13 00 – PAGE 9 OF 10 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 C. Form c contact D. Magnetic strength suitable for metal doors and frames. E. Door Contacts shall be Sentrol 1078 2.10 MORTISE MOUNT ELECTRONIC EPT (NEW DOORS) A. Used for flush mount wired connections to the Card Reader Lock on new doors. B. 12 conducter #22 awg with Electrolinx connectors. C. Magnetic strength suitable for metal doors and frames. D. Design Make: Securitron EL-CEPT Power Transfer 2.11 SURFACE MOUNT ELECTRONIC EPT (EXISTING DOORS) A. Used for surface mount wired connections to the Card Reader Lock on existing doors. B. Use pre-terminated quick connect (McKinney ElectroLynx) plug-and-play kit with 15’ of cable Specify Keedex part #: K-DL38A24 door to frame power transfer flex conduit with box at each end. Cut connectors off one end of ElectroLynx cable, fish raw cable end from the lock to the ceiling space and leave coil for Stanley Technician to connect to power. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 SECURITY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM A. Installation: 1. Install all equipment and materials in accordance with the recommendations of the manufacturer. 2. Provide all wiring as required by the manufacturer. Provide plenum rated cable as required. B. Programming of the system shall include the following tasks: 1. Coordinate all system programming and configuration with the facility’s security maintenance staff. 2. Programming system configuration parameters (hardware and software, reader/circuit numbers, communication parameters). ARCHI-TECHNOLOGY CORNELL – NCP ACCESS CONTROL STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 28 13 00 – PAGE 10 OF 10 NOVEMBER 2, 2012 3. Programming operational parameters such as the card holder database, time zones, access levels and reader definitions. 4. Programming passcodes according to the authorities and functions defined by the Owner. 5. Other system programming tasks required by the Owner. These additional programming requirements shall be coordinated between the Owner, security maintenance staff and the contractor. C. Testing: 1. Operational Testing: The contractor shall perform thorough operational testing and verify that all system components re fully operational. 2. Hard-copy System Printout: The contractor shall submit a hard- copy system printout of all components tested and certify 100 percent operation indicating all devices/panels/units have passed the test criteria set forth by the manufacturer. 3.2 CARD READER A. Install card readers in locations shown on plans. Install readers past the swing of the door. B. Provide surface mount back boxes only where needed. Where possible provide flush mount back boxes that can be covered by the card reader. When needed the door jam or a hallow wall can be used as the junction point for the card reader connections. 3.3 COMMISSIONING A. The contractor shall certify completion in writing and schedule the commissioning walk-through. The contractor shall provide all the tools and personnel needed to conduct an efficient commissioning process. 3.4 WARRANTY A. Provide a 1 year parts and labor warranty for all equipment and software provided in this section. END OF SECTION